INSTALLATION && OPERATING

INSTALLATION OPERATING MANUAL

MANUAL
(lOM)
(IOM)

50MMBTU

ONOE THROUGH STEAM GENERATOR

FAHUD STEAM INJEOTION PROJEOT - PI-lASE I

Prepared for:

p
II 11(~~) ~;tllw~UdI-jiJ"d.,JJj
, III ~
CONTRACT
WorleYParsons -Arabian Industries (JV)
NO. : C31l0606
CONTRACTNO PROJ NO PAIP00060
C3110606 PROJ.NO.: PAIP00060

Book 5

Customer Reference Number: PAIP-00060

Customer P.O. Number: WPAII2007.00060.05.5003

EN-FAS, Inc. Work Order Number : 207009

UNIT TAG NO: F-6101 A-D

Rev No. Prepared By "ssue Date Revision Description Checked By 'Approved By

0 RS ORIGINALISSUE
ORIGINAL ISSUE MM

. .
. .
 TABLE OF CONTENT
W.O. # 207009
BOOK 5
MCC I VFD PANEL

* CUTLER-HAMMER SERIES 2100 MOTOR

CONTROL CENTER
* ABB ACS550 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
0 ABB ACS800 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
 Freedom 2100 Motor Control Center
Installation and Maintenance Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART DESCRIPTION PAGE

General Information
Receiving. Handling. & Storage
Installing Control Center Sections
Installing Conduit & Wiring
Incoming Line Connections
Overcurrent Protection Devices
Overload Relay Heater Selection
Inspection Prior to Energizing
Unit Installation & Adjustment
Maintenance
Plan Views
Related Instruction Leaflets

This electrical control equipment is designed to be

installed, operated, and maintained by adequately
trained workmen. These instructions do not cover all
details, variations, or combinations of the equipment, its
storage, delivery, installation, check-out, safe operation.
or maintenance. Care must be exercised to comply with
local, state, and national regulations, as well as safety
practices, for this class of equipment. The maximum
short circuit capability of the equipment should not be
exceeded by connection to a source with higher
capacity.

If maintenance or troubleshooting assistance is required.

contact your nearest Cutler-Hammer Sales Office.
 Part I
GENERAL INFORMATION
THE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
The Cutler-Hammer Freedom 2100 Motor Control
Center may be joined to existing Five Star. Series
2100, and Advantage installations using the splice
bar kits common to both. Units designed for the
Freedom 2100 can be mounted in Five Star Series
and Series 2100 sections, but the opposite is not
recommended, because Five Star and Series 2100
units may lack terminal blocks and sufficient
interrupting capacity. The Freedom 2100 MCC
may be joined to existing Cutler-Hammer Freedom
Unitrol and F10 Unitrol MCC's with a special splice
bar kit, but units are not interchangable.
CONTROL CENTER NOMENCLATURE
The numbers shown in parentheses in the
following text refer to the balloon legends in Figure
L.
The Cutler-Hammer Freedom 2100 Motor Control
Center consists of one or more totally enclosed,
dead front, free standing structural assemblies (17)
90 inches high which are compartmentalized to
house individual control units. (2) With control units
mounted in the front side only, the structure may
be 16 or 21 inches deep. For mounting units back-
to-back, the structure is 21 inches deep. Steel
covers (7) enclose the structure at the top, sides
and at the rear of front-mounted-only structures.
A vertical bus system (13) installed in each vertical
section is connected to the horizontal bus to feed
the individual control units. (14) The vertical bus is
isolated by a full height barrier. (6) An optional
labyrinth barrier provides both isolation and
insulation. An automatic shutter is included with the
labyrinth barrier system to cover the stab openings
for each control unit.
At the top of each section, a door provides ready
access to the top horizontal wireway (11) and
ground bus (8). The horizontal wireway is isolated
from the bus systems by steel barriers (10) which
can be removed for installation and maintenance
operations. Adequate space is provided for control
wiring and top cable entry.
At the bottom of each section, a door (18) provides
ready access to the bottom horizontal wireway.
(19) and neutral bus (if provided). The bottom of
each section is completely open to provide
unrestricted bottom entry of cable and conduit.
Channel sills may be installed across the bottom of
the control center if specified, and an optional
bottom plate may also be specified.
A vertical wireway 8 inches deep, (16) extending
the full 90 inch height of the control center is
located to the right of each unit compartment. This
wireway is covered by two hinged doors (15) and
contains cable supports to secure wire bundles
and cables. The vertical wireway joins the
horizontal wireway at the top and bottom to provide
unobstructed space for interwiring.
Each vertical section provides space to mount up
to six controller units (2) with a minimum height of
12 inches, in increments of six inches, for a total of
72 inches of usable space. Controllers through
NEMA Size 5 are drawout type (except reduced-
voltage starters). These drawout unit assemblies
are a completely self-contained package consisting
of a steel enclosure, operating handle and
electrical components. The drawout assembly
slides into this compartment on guide rails (1 1) to
provide easy withdrawal and reinsertion and to
ensure precise alignment of the unit stabs with the
vertical bus. Each drawout unit is held in place by a
single quarter-turn latch (4) which can only be
engaged when the unit stabs are fully mated with
the vertical bus. Each unit has a separate door. (1)
held closed by a minimum of two quarter-turn
fasteners.
The operating handle on the controller unit (3)
moves vertically. In the ON or TIPPED positions,
the handle interlocks with the unit door to prevent
its opening. In this position, authorized personnel
can open the door by turning the defeater
mechanism screw. (21) With the unit door open
Fig. 1 Nameplate
 Fig 2 Motor Control Center Nomenclature
and the operating handle in the ON position,
another interlock to the divider pan prevents
removal of the unit. This same interlock prevents
insertion of the unit unless the handle mechanism
is in the OFF position. To ensure that units are not
energized accidentally or by unauthorized
personnel, the handle mechanism can b e
padlocked in the 0FF.position. Space for a
minimum of three padlocks is provided on each
handle.The device panel (5) is mounted on the
drawout unit. It will accommodate up to six pilot
devices. The overload reset button (20) is mounted
on the unit door.
i
RATINGS
Each Freedom 2100 Motor Control Center has a
rating nameplate attached to the door of the top
horizontal wireway of the primary section. See
Figures 1 and 2. This nameplate shows the general
order number under which the motor control center
was built and its continuous electrical ratings, in
terms of incoming line voltage, phases, and
frequency, and ampere ratings of the horizontal bus
and the vertical bus for each section. In addition, this
nameplate shows the passive short-circuit
(withstand) rating of the horizontal and vertical bus
system.
The active short-circuit (interrupting) ratings of the
main and unit short-circuit protective devices are
shown on labels attached to the inside of each unit.
Before installing a motor control center, calculate
and record the fault current available at the incoming
line terminals. Verify that the short-circuit withstand
and short-circuit interrupting ratings of the units in
Part 2
RECEIVING, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
RECEIVING
Before and after unloading the motor control center,
inspect each section and unit exterior for evidence of
damage that may have been incurred during
shipment. If there is any indication that the control
center has been mishandled or shipped on its back
or side, remove the drawout units and make a
complete inspection of the internal structure, bus
bars, insulators and unit components for possible
hidden damage. Report any damage found to the
carrier at once.
HANDLING
The following guidelines are provided to help avoid
personal injury and equipment damage during
handling, and to facilitate moving the motor control
center at the job site.
GENERAL HINTS
1. Handle the motor control center with care, to
avoid damage to components and to the
enclosure or its paint finish.
2. Keep the motor control center in an upright
position.
3. Insure that the moving means has the capacity
i
I
to handle the weight of the motor control center.
the motor control center are appropriate for the f3ult
current available.
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
Individuals who install, operate or maintain motor
control centers must be trained and authorized to
operate the equipment associated with the
installation and maintenance of a motor control
center, as well as the operation of the equipment
that receives its power from controller units in the
motor control center.
Such individuals must be trained in the proper
procedures with respect to disconnecting and
locking OFF power to the motor control center,
wearing protective clothing and equipment, and
following established safety procedures as outlined
in the National Electrical Safety Code(ANS1 C2)
and Electrical Equipment Maintenance(NFPA
708).
4. The control center should remain secured to the
shipping skid until the motor control center is in
its final location.
5. Exercise care during any movement and
placement operations to prevent falling or
unintentional rolling or tipping.
6. Lifting angles for handling by overhead crane
are bolted to the top of each shipping section.
Handling by overhead crane is preferable but
when crane facilities are not available, the motor
control center can be positioned with a fork-lift
truck or by using rollers under the shipping skid.
OVERHEADCRANE
1. See Figure 3 for recommended lifting
configuration.
2. Select or adjust the rigging lengths to
compensate for any unequal weight distribution,
and to maintain the motor control center in an
upright position.
3. To reduce tension on the rigging and the
compressive load on the lifting angles, do not
allow the angle between the lifting cables and
vertical to exceed 45 degrees.
4. Use slings with safety hooks or shackles. Do
not pass ropes or cables through lifting
angle holes.

I 1
Figure 3 Correct Use O f Lifting Angle
5. Afler removing the lifting angles, replace the
mounting hardware to prevent the entrance of dirt.
etc.
FORK-LIFTTRUCK
Motor control centers are normally top and front
heavy Balance the load carefully and steady, as
necessary, while movlng Always use a safety
strap when handling with a fork-lift.
I
Part 3
INSTALLING CONTROL CENTER SECTIONS
GENERAL
Freedom Series 2100 Motor Control Centers
(MCC's) are designed for installation in accordance
with both the National Electrical code (NEC), NFPA
70, and the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC),
ANSI C2.
Caution - If work i s involved i n connecting the
control center with existing equipment, ensure
that incoming power is disconnected before
work i s begun. Disconnecting means should be
locked out andlor tagged out of service. Where i t
Is not feasible to de-energize the system, the
following precautions should be taken:
A) Persons working near exposed parts that are or
may be energized should be instructed and should
use practices (including appropriate apparel.
equipment, and tools) in accordance with the NESC.
B) Persons working on exposed parts that are or
may be energized should, in addition, be qualified
I persons who have been trained to work on
,I
. ~. energized circuits~
I.B. 8926-1A
ROLLERS
Rod or pipe rollers, with the aid of pinch bars.
provide a simple method of moving the motor control
center on one floor level, if there is no significant
incline. Roll the motor control center slowly, and
steady the load to prevent tipping.
STORAGE
When a motor control center cannot be installed and
placed into operation immediately upon receipt, take
steps to prevent damage by condensation or harsh
environmental conditions. If the motor control center
cannot be installed in its final location, store it in a
clean, dry, ventilated building, heated to prevent
condensation, and protected from dirt, dust, water,
and mechanical damage. When storage conditions
are less than ideal, install temporary electrical
heating, typically in the form of light bulbs, totaling
150 watts per section, hung in the vertical wireway,
or by applying power to self-contained space
heaters that the motor control center may be
equipped with. Remove all loose packing and
flammable materials before energizing any of the
heating elements.
INSTALLATION
1. Before any installation work is begun, consult all
drawings furnished by Cutler-Hammer as well as
all applicable contract drawings for the
installation. Give particular attention to the
physical location of units in the control center
and their relation to existing or planned conduit.
busways, etc. Provide for future conduit
entrance prior to control center installation.
2. Locate the control center in the area shown on
the building floor plans. If in a wet location or
outside of the building, protect the control center
from water entering or accumulation within the
enclosure. Recommended clearances or
working spaces are as follows:
a) Clearance from walls (where not rear
accessible) - a minimum of '/z inch for
indoor and 6 inches for outdoor or wet
locations.
b) Clearance from front of MCC (working
space) - minimum of 3 feet for control
centers without exposed live parts. See NEC
110-16d. NOTE: This working space should

not be used for storage and should have
adequate lighting.
Since control centers are assembled at the
factory on smooth and level surfaces to assure
correct alignment of all parts, control centers
should be securely mounted on a level surface.
The foundation furnished by the purchaser must
be true and level, or the bottom frames must be
shimmed to support the entire base in a true
plane. It is recommended that leveled channel
sills under both the front and rear of the control
center be used to provide this level base. Drill an
tap the channel sills for mounting bolts in
accordance with the applicable floor plan
drawing and then either install the MCC level
with, or on top of, the finished floor. If sills are
grouted in concrete, the mounting bolts should
be screwed in place and remain until the
concrete has hardened.
For bottom entry, position the motor control
center so that the conduit stubs or floor
openings are located in the shaded areas shown
on the MCC floor plan drawings (refer to pages
31 to 32 for floor plan dimensions). The shaded
areas represent the open space available for
conduit entry through the bottom of each
section. A shaded area may be restricted if large
controllers or autotransformers are mounted in
the bottom of the sections. If optional bottom
plates are supplied, the plates may be removed
and drilled for conduit entry.
Install the MCC in its final position, progressively
leveling each section and bolting the frames
together if they are separated. If necessary,
secure the MCC to walls or other supporting
surfaces. Do not depend on wooden plugs
driven into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster.
or similar materials. See NEC 110-13.
If two or more shipping sections are to be joined
into an integral assembly or a shipping section is
to be joined to an existing section, refer to
paragraphs below before proceeding with the
installation.
Ground and bond the motor control center as
follows:
a) Motor control centers used as service
equipment for a grounded system or as an
incoming line section for a separately-
derived previously grounded system:
i) Run a grounding electrode conductor
(ground wire) having a size in
accordance with NEC 250-94 from the
grounding electrode to the MCC ground
bus or ground terminal provided. See
also NEC 250-91(a) and 92(b).
ii) If the system is grounded at any point
ahead of the MCC, the grounded
LB. 8926-IA
conductor must be run to the MCC in
accordance with NEC 250-23(b), and
connected to the ground bus terminal.
iii) Do not make any connections to ground
on the load side of any neutral
disconnecting line or any sensor used for
ground-fault protection. Do not connect
outgoing grounding conductors to the
neutral.
b) Motor control centers used as service
equipment for an ungrounded system or as
an incoming line section for a separately-
derived previously ungrounded system:
i) Run a grounding electrode conductor
(ground wire) having a size in
accordance with NEC 250-94 from the
grounding electrode to the MCC ground
bus terminal. See NEC 250-91(a) and
92(b).
c) Motor control centers not used as service
equipment nor as an incoming line section
for a separately-derived system, and used
on either a grounded or ungrounded system:
i) Ground the MCC ground bus by means
of equipment grounding conductors
having a size in accordance with NEC
250-95 or by bonding to the raceway
enclosing the main supply conductors in
accordance with NEC 250-91(b).
8. When all wiring and adjustments are complete.
close all unit and wireway doors.
9. In damp indoor locations, shield the MCC to
prevent moisture and water from entering and
accumulating.
10. Unless the motor control center has been
designed for unusual service conditions, it
should not be located where it will be exposed to
ambient temperatures above 40°C (104"F),
corrosive or explosive fumes, dust, vapors,
dripping or standing water, abnormal vibration,
shock or tilting.
JOINING COMPATIBLE SECTIONS
If two more shipping blocks are to be joined into an
integral assembly, or a section added to an existing
installation, splicing or horizontal bus, ground bus,
neutral bus and joining of the adjacent vertical
sections must be planned with the installation.
1. Remove the side sheets from adjacent vertical
sections to be joined. (These sheets will have
been removed from factory-assembled
sections.)
2. The horizontal bus splice plates and connection
hardware will be shipped with the MCC attached
to one end of shipping section. Refer to Figure
4 This method provides the most convenient
, access to the bolts, and eliminates the need to
remove the horizontal bus barriers in that
structure. Should the existing bus be oxidized.
sand lightly with a fine aluminum oxide paper.
CAUTION - Do not use emery cloth or any
abrasive containing metal.
3. Remove the upper horizontal wireway door from
the structure on the right side of the left-
hand(LH) section and remove the two-piece
wireway barrier to provide access to the ends of
the bus in that section.
4. Move the section in place, aligning the upright
structural channels and bottom channels.
Alignment of the section with floor sills and
foundation provisions will be facilitated by
removing the bottom horizontal wireway doors.
Using the "U" type frame clamps provided.
clamp adjacent front upright channels together
at the top, bottom and approximate center of the
vertical structure. This operation will be
facilitated by removing the vertical wireway
doors from the left-hand structure and one or
more drawout units from the right-hand
structure. See Part 9.
5. If rear access is available. "U" clamps should
also be used to clamp the rear upright channels
together. In front-mounted-only structures this
will require removal of the adjacent back sheets.
In a back-to-back mounted structure, remove the
vertical wireway doors and one or more drawout
units as above.
6. Secure the sections to the floor sills or mounting
bolts as provided for the installation.
7. Bolt the horizontal bus splice plates to the bus in
the left-hand structure, torquing all bus splice
bolts to 360 pound-inches (30 pound-feet). See
Figure 5.
8. Replace all unit, bus barriers, and doors.

JOINING INCOMPATABLE SECTIONS

Joining a Freedom 2100 Motor Control Center to

other equipment such as Type W and 11-300
Control Centers will usually involve a transition
section, installed between the two varieties of
equipment. This transition section will be detailed on
drawings provided by Cutler-Hammer and the
applicable contact drawings. If provided separately.
it should be installed first. Review the overall
installation task to determine whether the transition
section should be attached to the existing equipment
or to the Freedom 2100 section, before it is moved VMSHEP. 'IIPSHEH
into place, and select the sequence which will
provide best access to bus splicing and joining of the Figure 6 Single Bar Splice Kit
structures.
!
SPLICE PLATES
Each splice plate kit consists of short pieces of bus
bar the same width as the main horizontal bus of the
MCC the kit is shipped with, four bolts per phase.
and appropriate quantities of related hardware. For a
single bus bar per phase the hardware is used as
shown in Figure 6 for either 16" or 2 0 deep
enclosures. Each splice plate is punched with
rectangular holes to accept a square shank carriage
bolt that will not rotate as the nut is tightened.
1 Fig. 7 Double Bar Splice Kit
1 I
Fig. 8 Triple Bar Splice Kit
Where the MCC is built with two horizontal bus bars
per phase, the splice plates are installed as shown
in Figure 7. The top edge of Figures 7 through 10
represents the backside of the MCC. The top portion
of each of these figures applies to 2 0 deep
enclosures and the lower portion to 16" deep
enclosures. Note that for all but the single-bar per
phase (Figure 6) installation, thel6" deep enclosures
require the use of a nut plate that is mounted with
the same carriage bolt used to attach the horizontal
bus bars to the channel-shaped insulators. Install
these nut plates before mounting the splice plates.
Tighten the splice plate bolts with a driving torque of
360 pound-inches (30 pound-feet).
TYPE 3R ENCLOSURES
Where the MCC is supplied in a Type 3R enclosure
for an outdoor application, apply roof splice caps at
each shipping block junction to maintain the
enclosure integrity.
I
Fig. 9 Quadruple Bar Splice Kits
 I I
SIX %RS PER PH4SE - 20' DEEP
I
E1M1 ahRS PER P i l W - 20- DEEP
Fig. 10 Six and Eight Bar Splice Kits

JOINING FREEDOM 2100 TO FREEDOM UNITROL OR F10 UNITROL

Consult the assembly instruction supplied with every Freedom 2100 Motor Control Center set up for splice to
Freedom Unitrol or F10 Unitrol.

- L&, Freedom 2100 on Right.

~ b r i z o n t aBus
l and Ground Bus at Top.
 Ground Bus at Bottom
Part 4
INSTALLING CONDUIT AND WIRING
CONDUIT
Install conduit in such a manner as to prevent water
from entering and accumulating in the conduit or the
enclosure. Eliminate sags in conduit. Have the
conduit enter the motor control center (MCC) in the
areas designated for conduit entry on the plan
views. See pages 31 and 32 of this booklet and
outline drawings shipped with the MCC. Keeping
conduit within the shaded areas shown in the plan
views will avoid cable interference with structural
members and live bus. See Part 12.
WIRING
Install the line and load conductors sized in
accordance with the NEC. Use copper wire only
for control terminations. Use copper wire only
for power terminations unless they are marked
"CUIAL". Use conductors with a temperature rating
of 75°C or higher, but regardless of the insulation
temperature rating select the wire size on the basis
of 75°C wire ampacity. Using a higher temperature
a
wire ampacity table often res;lts in smallercross-
section of copper available for carrying heat away
from terminals.
Install insulated wire and cable at a temperature
sufficiently warm to prevent the insulation from
cracking or splitting.
When more than one condurt 8s run from a common
source or to a common load, be sure to have each
I condu~tcarry conductors from each phase and the
same number of conductors per phase If the phase
Neutral Bus.
conductors are not distributed uniformly, eddy
currents will be generated in the steel between the
conduits.
Locate conductors within the MCC to avoid physical
damage and to avoid overheating. Secure incoming
power lines in a manner adequate to withstand the
forces which will act to separate the conductors
under short-circuit conditions. Use the cable ties
furnished in both horizontal and vertical wireways to
support the load and interconnection wire. Use a
shielded communications cable inside of flexible
metal conduit to protect very low voltage signals
transmitted to or from a computer or programmable
controller.
Lugs furnished with the MCC and its components
are for Class B and Class C stranding. Verify the
compatibility of wire size, type. and stranding with
the lugs furnished. Where they are not compatible,
change the wire or lugs accordingly. If crimp lugs are
used, crimp with the tools recommended by the
manufacturer.
Use care in stripping insulation to avoid nicking or
ringing the metal.
All field wiring to control units should be made in
accordance with the wiring drawings that are
furnished with the control center. Load and control
wiring can be brought in through the upper andlor
lower horizontal wireways. Determine the type of
wiring installed in the control center (NEMA Type B
or C) and proceed per the following appropriate
paragraph.
The phase sequence of the power circuit load
terminals (left-to-right: T I , T2, T3) i n units
i mounted on the rear side of the MCC is opposite
to that of the load terminals i n units mounted on
the front side of a back-to-back MCC. To obtain
the same direction of rotation for a motor
connected to a rear-mounted unit as for one
connected to a front-mounted unit re-label the
terminals i n the rear-mounted unit: 13, . T2.. T I ..
and wire accordingly. Refer t o the warning
sticker supplied with rear-side units.
When making connections to the load terminals,
be sure to leave sufficient slack i n the wires s o
that the unit can be withdrawn t o the detent
position for maintenance. See page 20.
NEMA TYPE B WIRING
Each control unit is factory assembled with devices
inter-wired within the unit. In addition, all control
wiring is carried to unit terminal blocks mounted on
the right-hand side of the unit. See Figure 15. Bring
the field wiring of control wires from a horizontal
wireway into the vertical wireway on the right-hand
side of the applicable control unit and terminate
them at the unit terminal blocks. Bring load wiring
from the vertical wireway, under the bottom right-
... hand side of the unit, to terminations within the unit.
1
ENGAGING PULL-APART TERMINAL
BLOCKS
The male portion of the pull-apart terminal block is
located in a plastic bag tied to the pivot rod inside
the unit. This terminal block can be wired outside of
the vertical wireway. To engage the terminal block,
align the fingers of the male connector with the slot
at the back of the female portion of the terminal
block. Then rotate the male portion forward and to
the left into the female portion of the terminal block.
Each male portion of the pull-apart terminal block
has two cavities adjacent to the center terminal
screw to accept the blade of an electrician's
screwdriver used to cam the block into and out of
engagement. Each male portion also has a rear slot
that can engage the edge of the unit frame where it
can be mounted for ease in trouble-shooting.
NEMA TYPE C WIRING
Each control unit is factory assembled with devices
inter-wired within the unit. In addition, all control
wiring is carried to unit terminal blocks on the side of
the unit and from these unit blocks, along with load
wiring through Size 3, to master terminal blocks
located at the top or bottom of the structure. See
Figure 16. Master terminal blocks can be either fixed
or drawout mounted. In the drawout design the
terminal blocks are rack mounted to permit
withdrawal of the entire assembly for ease of wiring
during installation and maintenance. Bring field
wiring from the horizontal wireway to the master
terminal blocks except for load wiring larger than
Size 3. These latter load wires should be carried into
the vertical wireway and under the bottom right-hand
side of the unit to terminations within the unit.
Fig. 16 Master Terminal Blocks
 12

i
Part 5
INCOMING LINE CONNECTIONS
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

All ungrounded conductors in a motor control center

(MCC) installation require some form of overcurrent
protection in order to comply with Section 240-20 of
the NEC. Such overcurrent protection for the
incoming lines to the MCC is in the form of fuses or -I ,I.* .u
li ti
a circuit breaker located at the transformer k h ra=
r l l EIcn
secondary that supplies the MCC. The conductors pixdrhrn
from the transformer secondary constitute the feeder ,he drrvia
brrakr is
to the MCC, and the "10-foot rule" and the "25-foot *",".(t "'I!
rule" of NEC. 240-21 apply. These latter exceptions
to the general rule allow the disconnect means and

-- .--.
,?a:!",

Fig. 18 Main Circuit Breaker with Reverse Feed

Fig 17 Main Disconnect with Stab Load

Connections
overcurrent protection to be located in the MCC.
provided the feeder taps from the transformer are
sufficiently short and other requirements are met.
Z<%O*t.
MAIN DISCONNECTS
Fig. 19 Main Circuit Breaker
A circuit breaker or a circuit interrupter combined
with fuses controlling the power to the entire MCC
may provide the over-current protection required as
described above or may be a supplementary
disconnect (isolation) means. See Figures 17, 18.
and 19.
 When the MCC has a main disconnect, bring the
incoming lines (the feeders) to the line terminals of
the circuit breaker or circuit interrupter. The load side
of the circuit breaker or the load side of the fuses
associated with the circuit interrupter has already
been connected to the MCC bus bar distribution
system. In the case of main disconnects rated 400
amperes or less, this load connection is made by
stab connections to vertical bus bars which connect
to the horizontal bus distribution system. See Figure
17.

INCOMING LINE LUGS

Where the overcurrent protection for the MCC is at a

remote location, the MCC feeder lines are
connected to incoming line lugs attached to the bus
bar distribution system. See Figure 20. For high-
ampere rated horizontal bus bar systems, the
incoming line lugs are mounted on vertical risers.
which connect to the horizontal bus bars. See Figure
21.

SHORT-CIRCUIT BRACING

All incoming lines to either incoming line lugs or to

main disconnects must be braced to withstand the
mechanical forces created by a high fault current.
) With the remainder of a Freedom 2100 MCC braed
for not less than 65.000 amperes (rms symmetrical),
the installing electrician needs to anchor the cables
at the incoming line connections sufficiently and
tighten the lugs correctly. Each incoming line
compartment is equipped with a two-piece spreader
bar located about nine inches from the conduit entry.
Use this spreader bar an appropriate lacing material
to tie cables together where they can be bundled
and to hold them apart where they are separated. In
other words, position the incoming line cables and
then anchor them in place. See Figure 22 and the
instruction sheet inside of the MCC.
MAKING CONNECTION
CAUTION: All incoming line compartments
present an obvious hazard when the door i s
opened or covers are removed with power on.
When working i n this area, the incoming feeder
should be de-energized.
Before beginning work on incoming line connections.
refer to all drawings furnished by Cutler Hammer as
well as all applicable contract drawings for the
particular installation.
Depending on the location, size and type of the
incoming arrangement, remove one or more
horizontal and vertical wireway doors, and selected
units to provide complete access. See Part 9 for unit
removal instructions.

For top entry, the top cover plates are easily

removed for drilling or punching operations.

i #*&xu,:

Fig. 22 Spreader Bar For Top Entry

I .?,V,.,?

'I Fig.20 Incoming Line Ltiy Connections

 14 1.0. 8926-1A
'I

Part 6
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES
DEVICE SELECTION

Articles 240 and 430 of the NEC contain the rules for
selecting fuses, circuit breakers and overload relays
by type and by voltage and ampere rating. Follow
these rules for feeder circuits, and the instructions
attached to the inside of the left-most vertical
wireway door, for motor branch circuits. Select and 75 mprre
o " ~ ~ ~ s n~mevreovc,8m*
CXW.C%LCma
install overload relay current elements (heaters) CnRo.C30IONls

based on the motor service factor and full-load

current. Ambient compensated overload relays are
used in motor control centers (vlCC's) to offset the
temperature gradient which occurs from top to
bottom in a loaded vertical section.
"$PITPl* ,N**<r?,tl
HEATERS MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE "21@~8."11118 "2~,*."?~*4

STARTER OVERLOAD RELAY ASSEMBLIES

BEFORE THE STARTER IS ENERGIZED.
Fig. 24 C306 Thermal Overload Relay and Heater
C306 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS (FIG.24) Pack.

C306 Overload Relays are provided on Freedom C306 OVERLOAD RELAY SETTING
Starters. Four sizes are available for overload

..
'\ protection up to 114 amperes. Features include:
'1
Selectable Manual or Automatic Reset operation.
Interchangeable Heater Packs adjustable S 4 %
to match motor FLA and calibrated for use with
1.0 and 1.15 service factor motors.
Heater packs for 32 ampere overload relay will
mount in 75 ampere overload relay - useful in de-
rating applications such as jogging.
Class 10 or 20 heater packs. (Fig. 24) Use Class
10 heaters with fusible or thermal magnetic
breaker disconnects only.
Bimetallic, ambient compensated operated. Trip
free mechanism.
Electrically isolated NO - NC contacts (pull
RESET button to test).
Overload trip indication.
FLA DIAL ADJUSTMENT - For motors having a
1.15 service factor. rotate the FLA adjustment dial to
correspond to the motor's FLA rating. Estimate the
dial position when the motor FLA falls between two
letter values as shown in Fig. 23.
For motors having a 1.0 service factor, rotate the
FLA dial one-half position counterclockwise (CCW).
MANUALIAUTOMATIC RESET -The overload relay
is factory set "M" for manual reset operation as
shown in Fig. 23. For automatic reset operation, turn
the reset adjustment dial to the "A" position.
Automatic reset is not intended to two-wire devices.

- Single phase protection.

UL listed, CSA certified and NEMA compliance.
TEST FOR TRIP INDICATION - To test overload
relay for trip indication when in manual reset, pull out
the blue reset button. An orange flag will appear
indicating that the device has tripped. Push reset
button to reset.

WARNING - To provide continued protection

against fire or shock hazard, the complete overload
relay must be replaced if burnout of the heater
element occurs

I_I

Fly 23 Overload Relay Settlnys

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
When current transformers are used with overload
relays, the current through the overload relay heater
is related to the motor full-load by the inverse of the
current transformer ratio.
WARNING: Do not ever remove heaters from Size 5
and larger starters to check unit operation. These
starters use current transformers to drop the current
to the range of the size 1 overload relay. Operation
with heaters removed will not interrupt voltage to the
motor and will generate dangerous voltages in the
open secondary of the current transformer.
MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (HMCP)
AFTER INSTALLATION OF THE CONTROL
CENTER, EACH MCP MUST BE ADJUSTED TO
ACTUAL MOTOR FULL-LOAD AMPERES (FLA) SO
THAT IT WILL TRIP AT ANY CURRENT WHICH
EXCEEDS STARTING INRUSH. This setting
provides low-level fault protection. The first hali-
cycle inrush will vary with the motor characteristics.
Motors with locked-rotor currents of six times motor
full-load amperes will usually require an
instantaneous magnetic setting of 7 to 11 times
motor full-load amperes to prevent tripping when
starting.
A cam to accept a small narrow-blade electrician's
screwdriver is near the lower left corner and around
which are eight lettered adjustment points, calibrated
in trip amperes. See Figure 25. Adjustment should
never exceed 13 times FLA which is in accordance
with NEC requirements for magnetic-trip-only
breakers. Adjustment should be made as follows:
1. Obtain FLA from motor nameplate.
2. Multiply FLA by 13.
3. Set the cam to the highest trip setting which does
not exceed the calculated figure of Item 2. This is
the maximum setting that should be used.
4. Depress and turn the screwdriver adjustment
counter-clockwise one setting at a time, until the
breaker trips in starting and then adjust upward
one setting position. This will insure that the
circuit will open instantly on any current above
the motor inrush, usually 7 to 11 time FLA.
The PUSH-TO-TRIP button checks the tripping
function and is used to periodically exercise the
operating mechanism. The button is designed to be
operated by using a small screwdriver.
Freedom 2100 MCC's are supplied with Type HMCP
motor circuit protectors having an interrupting rating
to match the short-circuit withstand rating of the bus
bar system. For HMCP's in 225, 400. and 600
ampere frame sizes, the magnetic-trip adjustment is
set for each pole. A three-pole HMCP has three trip
settings to adjust. Place all three poles at the same
setting.
CURRENT LIMITERS FOR USE WITH TYPE
HMCP AND FD BREAKERS
The addition of the current limiter provides
interrupting capacity above the range handled by the
HMCP in motor starters or by FD thermal-magnetic
feeder breakers.
Each HMCP or FD breaker rated up to 150 amps
has its own current limiter to provide coordinated
protection against faults up to 100,000 amperes, rms
symmetrical.
Built-in trip indicators in each phase immediately
show when a fault has blown the current limiter and
tripped the circuit breaker. This provides protection
against single phasing. After interrupting a fault,
the current limiter will require replacement. After
the fault has been cleared, the current limiter is
replaced by the removal of three screws. The
breaker can then be reset to provide for subsequent
high overcurrent protection.
 i
TYPE HMCP AND FD CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WITH TERMINAL END COVERS
Circuit breakers installed in units connected to 600
volt distribution systems require a terminal end cap
to be installed on the line side. Replace the terminal
end cap when replacing circuit breakers in such
units.

Part 7
OVERLOAD RELAY HEATER SELECTION
HEATER SELECTION AND INSTALLATION To install:

Heaters should be selected on the basis of the

actual full load current and service factor as shown
on the motor nameplate or in the motor
manufacturer's published literature. Heater Pack
Mounting Screw
When motor and overload relay are in the same
ambient and the service factor of the motor is 1.15 to
1.25, select heaters and set FLA adjustment dial
from the heater application table. If the service
factor of the motor i s 1.0, or there is no service
factor shown, rotate the FLA adjustment dial
counter-clockwise one half (112) position.

The conductors attached to the terminals of an

overload relay act as a heat sink and are a A. Insert three (3) identically numbered heater packs
consideration in establishing the current rating of into the overload relay with an FLA rating that
')i each heater element. To prevent nuisance tripping, includes the motor nameplate F L A (full load
which will occur if undersized conductors are used. amps).
select the wire size as if the conductors had an
insulation temperature rating of 75'C, even if the 8. Tighten the heater pack mounting screws
conductors actually used have a temperature rating securely per recommended torque values listed
higher than 75°C. below.
I Heater Pack Numbers I Recommended Torque I
Protect heater and starter against short circuits by
providing branch circuit protection in accordance
with the National Electric Code.
H2001B thru H2017B
ti2018 thru HZ024
. .
9 lb-in [ I N m]
24-30 lb-in [2.7-3.4 N m]

Note: Before installing heater packs, refer to the C. Adjust the FLA adjustment dial to
motor nameplate for F L A (full load amps) and the motor nameplate F L A (full
service factor (1.5 or 1.0). Select the heater pack load amps).
from the proper table on this page.
THE OVERLOAD IS NOW SET FOR 3.11 ~ m i s .
FIC!~
1.15 SERVICE FACTOR.

D. If the motor nameplate is 1.0

service factor, rotate the FLA
Adjustment dial counter-clockwise
on half (112) position. I?r
-
~z.

E. The overload is factory set for M

(MANUAL) reset operation. If
automatic reset is required, turn
the reset adjustment dial to A
(AUTO). Automatic reset is not
M 4
1-
L-)
intended for two-wire control
devices
 TO REMOVE HEATER PACKS Automatic reset is not intended for two-wire control
devices.
Loosen two (2) heater packs mounting screws and
remove heater pack from overload relay.

OVERLOAD RELAY SETTING

This bimetalic ambient compensated overload relay
is adjustable within the FLA range of the heater RESET Examples of
pack. Each heater pack is marked with its FLA ADJUSTMENT setting for
ratings. With proper heater section, the overload DIAL manual reset.
relay will ultimately trip at 125% FLA for a 1.15 TEST FOR TRIP INDICATION
service factor motor and at 115% FLA for a 1.0 To test overload relay for trip indication when in
service factor motor. manual reset, pull out the blue reset button. An
orange flag will appear indicating that the device has
HEATER SELECTION IINSTALLATION
Select the appropriate heater pack number, which
corresponds to the motor FLA rating for your
application. Insert each heater into the overload
relay and tighten heater mounting screws securely
per table below.
NOTE: A total of three individual heaters must be
installed in order for the overload relay to work
properly.

HEATER PACK NOS. TORQUE

HZ018 thru HZ024 4-30 lb-in.

FLA DlAL ADJUSTMENT

For motors having a 1.15 service factor. rotate the
FLA adjustment dial to correspond to the motor's
FLA rating. Estimate the dial position when the
motor FLA falls between two letter values as shown
in the example.
MAXIMUM RATINGS
For motors having 1.0 service factor, rotate the FLA
dial one-half position counter-clockwise (CCW).
s
FLA 1.O 1 27 F 32
ADJUSTMENT SERVICE . , * Use 75°C copper conductors only
DIAL FACTOR Max. Wire Size - 8 AWG
.NOTE: After the above referenced settings have
Example of a 12.0 FLA setting for a been made, rotate the FLA dial one position
heater pack number HZ011 6 clockwise for these heaters (see table). If less than
5
showing position for 1.O or 1.I one position is available, rotate dial maximum. This
service factor motor. note does n o t apply when these heaters are used
with adapter base. Catalog No. C306TB1.
MANUAL IAUTOMATIC RESET Exception: does not apply to ANIGDNO.
The overload relay is factory set at "M" for manual
reset operation as shown in the illustration. For WARNING - To provide continued protection against
automatic reset operation, turn the reset adjustment fire or shock hazard, the complete overload relay
dial to the 'A" position must be replaced if burnout of the heater element
i occurs.
 FATFR P A W ARl F I

TTT
MAXIMUM RATINGS

73
Use 75°C copper conductors only
Max. Wire Size - 3 AWG
0 NOTE: After the above reference settings have
been made, rotate the FLA dial one position
258 312 355 419 H2007B
clockwise for these heaters (see table). If less than
one position is available, rotate dial to maximum. 388 468 547 H2WB
This note does not apply when these heaters are MAXIMUM RATINGS
NEMA Size 6 = 540 Amperes
A FLA rating marked on heater pack multiplied
by a transformation ratio. For motor FLA values
not listed, turn the dial clockwise for higher or
counterclockwise for lower ratings.

3 90 14
4* I 135 I I
Minimum Wire Size - 6 AWG
0 NOTES:
Part Windina Starters - Select heater oacks for
50% of the motor FLA
Wye Delta Starters - Select heater packs for 58%
motor FLA
4 For motor FLA values not listed, turn the dial
clockwise for higher or counterclockwise for
lower ratings.
 . ...... ....- ..\ .

LB. 8926-1A

Part 8
INSPECTION PRIOR TO ENERGIZING
Before energizing the motor control center attempt to defeat the rejection feature on the
(MCC), conduct a thorough inspection to make fuse clip, when provided.
certain that all foreign materials such as tools, 14. Do not operate a current transformer with its
scraps of wire and other debris are removed secondary circuit open. Insure current
from all units and the structure. Remove any transformer is connected to a load, or a
accumulation of dust and dirt with a vacuum secondary shorting bar is installed.
cleaner. 15. To prevent possible damage to equipment or
All circuit connections are tightened at time of injury to personnel, check to insure that all parts
assembly by power-driven tools with controlled and barriers that may have been removed
torque. However, the vibrations experienced in during wiring and installation have been properly
transit may loosen some of these connections. reinstalled.
Check at least 10% of the total connections for a TABLE 8-1 DRIVING TORQUE
tight connection. Should this spot-check Control Wiring:
reveal some loose connections, it will be
necessary to check all connection points.
The connections to be checked include bus
hardware, circuit breaker and switch terminals.
Auxiliary Contact
contactor and relay terminals and terminal
blocks. Always check the incoming line
connections. Tighten to the torque values shown
in Tables 8-1.
Remove all blocks or other temporary holding
means used for shipment from all component
devices in the MCC interior.
Check the enclosure to see that it has not been

I
14-10 35 Degrees C
damaged so as to reduce electrical spacings. C306GN3 and
Compare all circuits for agreement with the sire 2 Contactor
. .
wiring diagrams which accompany the MCC. Be I 3-2 so I
sure that each motor is connected to its intended
starter.
Make certain that field wiring is clear of live 8 40
busses and physically secured to withstand the 6 .4 45
1-7 50 Use 75
effects of fault current.
Size 3 Sock C~PW
Degrees C
Check to determine that all grounding 'Opper Or
Socket flb-in.!
connections are made properly. 3116
aluminum
Check all devices for damage. Make all I IA lZO
90"
conductors
necessary repairs or replacements, prior to
energizing.
Size N and Size 4 275 Ib-in.
9. Manually exercise all switches, circuit breakers.
and other operating mechanisms to make Fused Switches:
certain that they are properly aligned and 3o~mp Fuse ~ s s .............................................
y 25 lb.-in.
operate freely. 6o~mp Fuse ~ s s .............................................
y 50 1b:n
i.
10. Test anv wound-fault ~rotectionsvstems that 100 Amo Fuse Assv ............................................ 50 1b.-in.
were furnisLed. 200 Amp Fuse Assy ........................................ 300 1b:n
i.
11. Set any adjustable current and voltage trip 400 Amp Fuse Assy ........................................ 300 Ib-in.
mechanisms to the proper values. 600 Amp Fuse Assy ...................................... 300 Ib-in.
12. Ensure that overload relay heater elements are BREAKERS- Refer to Torque Values on Breaker Case
installed and selected to the full-load current
shown on the nameplate of each motor.
13, Install power circuit fuses in the fusible switches
in accordance with NEC application
req~~irements.Make sure that fuses are
,i
... completely inserted in the clips provided. Do not
I
16. Conduct an electrical insulation resistance test to
make sure that the MCC and field wiring are free
from short circuits and grounds. Do this test
phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, and phase-to-
neutral, with the switches or circuit breakers
opened.
17. If the MCC contains a labyrinth vertical bus
barrier system, verify the operation of the
automatic shutters. See Part 9 for adjustments
of this mechanism.
18. Install covers. close doors, and make certain that
no wires are pinched and that all enclosure parts
are properly aligned and tightened.
19. Turn all circuit breakers and fusible switches to
the OFF position before energizing the bus.

Part 9
UNlT INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
DOOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

All doors on the control center are mounted on pin

hinges to facilitate removal for installation and
maintenance operations. With the operating handle
on the OFF position, rotate the quarter-turn latches,
open the door, remove the hinge pins as shown in
Figure 26, partially close the door and lift it from the
structure. Reverse this procedure for installation.

UNlT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Afler opening andlor removing the unit door, the

control unit is exposed. With a screwdriver, push in
on the latch at the top center of the unit and rotate %
turn counterclockwise. CAUTION: Units 18" or more
high have a retaining brace at the lower edge of
each side of the unit frame to add stability in
shipping. The shipping braces may be retained or
removed after installation; unscrew prior to unit
withdrawal. Pull-apart terminal blocks in the vertical
wireway must be disengaged (see Figure 27 and
page 10) and wiring from the unit to other units, to
master terminal blocks or to load devices must be
disconnected before the unit is removed. Grasp the
unit as shown in Figure 28 and pull it outward. The
first inch of travel pulls the stabs free from the
vertical bus, and the grounding clip on the side of Fig. 27 Disengaging Pull-Apart Terminal Blocks
the unit frame is also disengaged.

To replace a control unit, position the mounting

points on the unit frame with the mating guide rails.
Slide the unit inward until all four mounting points
are engaged, then move it inward with a quick push.
This movement easily overcomes the compression
of the stabs as they engage the vertical bus. With
the unit in its correct position, the quarter-turn latch
is easily engaged by pushing inward and rotating %
turn clockwise.
 DETENT POSITION
For maintenance and test purposes, the unit can be
partially withdrawn (approximately 1 % inches) until
the stabs are free of the bus. In this position, the
quarter-turn latch can be rotated clockwise to
engage the detent position slot; this will secure the
unit to ensure the stabs remain disengaged during
maintenance. See Figure 29. The latch can be
padlocked in this position.
lights, selector switches and miniature meters. If
unused space is available and the addition of other
devices is desired, observe the following procedure.
After opening the unit door, loosen the two screws at
the top of the device panel. Slide the panel '/r inch
left to permit it to swing down for access. See Figure
32. With' the peen end of a ball-peen hammer or with
a drift or chisel, remove the desired knockout.

OPERATING HANDLE LINKAGE

ADJUSTMENT

Movement of the operating handle in the vertical

plane should not be restricted by the handle cavity at
either the top or bottom to its travel. Should
restriction occur, eliminate it adjusting the length of
the operating linkage as shown in Figure 30.
Depending on the type of primary disconnect device
contained in the control unit, it may be necessary to
lengthen or shorten the linkage.

AUTOMATIC SHUTTER TRAVEL

ADJUSTMENT

When the optional labyrinth vertical bus barrier is

installed in the control center, a shutter is provided
to automatically cover the stab openings when a
control unit is withdrawn. The shutter is opened by
engagement of the left-hand side of the control unit
with the shutter arm linkage attached to the left-hand
vertical structural members. When the unit is
withdrawn free of the linkage, a spring automatically
moves the shutter to its closed position. See Figure
31 and Figure 4.

With the control unit removed, the shutter should

completely cover the stab openings. If it does not
cover the openings, use an adjustable wrench to
bend the link arm to the right until the shutter covers
the stab openings.

If, on re-insertion of the control unit, interference is

felt between the stab assembly at the rear of the unit
and the shutter, the engagement of the control unit
with the shutter arm linkage is insufficient to fully
open the shutter. Use an adjustable wrench to bend
the linkage arm inward toward the unit to increase its
engagement with the unit. An inward bend of
approximately % inch will provide sufticient
additional shutter travel.

INSTALLING PILOT DEVICES

Fig. 31 Shutter Arm Linkage
i The device panel can accommodate up to six pilot
i
devices such as oil-tight pushbuttons, indicating
I
CAUTION: Brace the panel solidly to avoid breaking INSTALLING A NEW UNIT
the hinge points. Use a knife or $mall file to remove
remaining plastic burrs. Install and wire the new It is recommended that a new unit be installed in a
device and re-attach the top of the device panel to unit space at the top of a vertical compartment or
the unit. directly below an existing unit. Material provided with
the new unit bv the factow includes: A divider Dan
with integral g ~ i d erails, a unit door, hinges, catches
and hardware. Observe tne following sequence of
operations for installalion.
1. Remove the existinq blank door.
2. Position the new unit door over the open space
to ensure the hinges and latches are aligned. If
the spaces differ, the hinges and latches on the
structure must be re-located to match the unit
door hinges and latches. Mount the door, using
the hinge pins provided.
3. Install the new divider pan in the notches
provided in the rear barrier so that it is aligned
with the bottom of the new door. Attach the pan
to the vertical structure channels with one
thread-forming screw on each side.
, ,..
, :, . . : ., , 4. Remove from the vertical bus barrier the flat
plate which covers the stab holes that will align
Fig. 32 Unit Device Panel
with the stabs on the new unit. If an optional
labyrinth vertical bus barrier is in place, install an
automatic shutter over the stab cutouts. Follow
the instruction sheet provided with the shutter
kit.
 ,.-. . ,

I.B. 8926-1A

Part 10
MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Good conduction requires clean, tight joints, free of
contaminants such as dirt and oxides.
Preventive maintenance should be a program, a
scheduled periodic action that begins with the Good insulation requires the absence of carbon
installation of the equipment. At that time, specific tracking and the absence of contaminants such as
manufacturer's instruction literature should be salt and dust that become hydroscopic and provide
consulted, then stored for future reference. Follow-up an unintended circuit between points of opposite
maintenance should be at regular intervals, as polarity.
frequently as the severity of duty justifies. Time
intervals of one week, or one month, or one year
may be appropriate, depending on the duty. It is also
desirable to establish specific check lists for each
control, as well as a logbook to record the history of
incidents. A supply of renewal parts should be
obtained and stored.

This control equipment is designed to be installed,

operated, and maintained by adequately trained
workmen. These instructions do not cover all details.
variations, or combinations of the equipment, its
storage, delivery, installation, check-out, safe
operation, or maintenance. Care must be exercised
to comply with local, state, and national regulations,
\ as well as safety practices, for t h ~ s class of
equipment CAUTION: Maintenance of control components
requires that all power t o these components be
Authorized personnel may open a unit door of a turned OFF by opening the branch circuit disconnect
motor control center (MCC) while the starter unit is means and withdrawing the unit to the detent
energized. This is accomplished by defeating the position (see Figure 29) or removing the unit entirely
mechanical interlock between the operating from the MCC. When units are fully inserted into
mechanism and the unit door. A clockwise quarter- the MCC, the line side of each disconnect is
turn of the slotted head screw located above energized. Do not work on fixed units unless the
operating handle will allow the door to open. See main disconnect for the MCC i s OFF.
Figure 33.
When working on portions of a branch circuit remote
When servicing and adjusting the electrical from the MCC, lock the disconnect means for that
equipment, refer to the applicable drawings covering circuit in the OFF position. To positively lock the
the specific motor control center (MCC) and any operating mechanism in the OFF position, a metal
other related interconnection drawings. Follow any
instructions, which may be given for each device. A
list of instruction leaflets covering standard
components is shown on the back page of this
manual. Any of these leaflets may be obtained by
contacting your nearest Cutler-Hammer
Representative.

General Guidelines - The whole purpose of

maintaining electrical equipment can be summarized
in two rules:
a. Keep those portions conducting that are intended
to be conduction.
% b Keep those portions inscilaied :hai are iniended
1 to be insulated.
 24
j
locking bar recessed in the handle may be extended
and padlocked with from one to three padlocks. See
Figure 34.
With the door open and the disconnect device OFF,
the operating handle is mechanically interlocked to
prevent inadvertently being pushed ON. To defeat
this interlock, the bar on the top of the mechanism
should be pushed in slightly, allowing the handle to
move upward to the ON position. WARNING: IF
FULLY INSERTED, THE POWER AND CONTROL
ClTCUlTS WILL BE ENERGIZED. Padlocking to
prevent this handle movement may .be accomplished
by the same method as described above.
Separate control sources of power must also be
disconnected. If control power i s used during
maintenance, take steps to prevent feedback of a
hazardous voltage through a control
transformer. Be alert t o power factor correction
capacitors that may be charged. Discharge them
before working on any part o f the associated
power circuit.
Cleaning. Soot, smoke, or stained areas (other than
inside arc chutes), or other unusual deposits, should
be investigated and the source determined before
cleaning is undertaken. Vacuum or wipe clean all
1 exposed surfaces of the control component and the
inside of its enclosure. Equipment may be blown
clean with compressed air that is dry and free from
oil. (Be alert to built-in oilers in factory compressed
air lines!) If air blowing techniques are used, remove
arc covers from contactors and seal openings to
control circuit contacts that are present. It is
essential that the foreign debris be removed from
the control center, not merely rearranged. Control
equipment should be clean and dry. Remove dust
and dirt inside and outside the cabinet without using
liquid cleaner. Remove foreign material from the
outside top and inside bottom of the enclosure.
including hardware and debris, so that future
examination will reveal any parts that have fallen off
or dropped onto the equipment. If there are liquids
spread inside, determine the source and correct by
sealing conduit, adding space heaters, or other
action as applicable.
Mechanical checks. Tighten all electrical
connections. Look for signs of overheated joints,
charred insulation, discolored terminals, etc.
Mechanically clean to a bright finish (don't use
emery paper) or replace those terminations that
have become discolored. Determine the cause of
the ioose joint and correct. Be particularly careful
v~ithaluminum wire connections. Alr~mlnuniw~reis
'
j best terminated with a crimp type lug that is attached
to the control component. When screw type lugs
(marked CUIAL) are used with aluminum wire, joint
should be checked for tightness every 200
operations of the device.
Wires and cables should be examined to eliminate
any chafing against metal edges caused by
vibration, that could progress to an insulation failure.
Any temporary wiring should be removed, or
permanently secured and diagrams marked
accordingly.
The intended movement of mechanical parts, such
as the armature and contacts of electromechanical
contactors, and mechanical interlocks should be
checked for freedom of motion and functional
operation.
Wrap-up. Check all indicating lamps, mechanical
flags, doors, latches, and similar auxiliaries and
repair, if required.
Log changes and observations into record book
before returning equipment into service. Do not
remove any labels or nameplates. Restore any that
are damaged.
SLIDER OPERATOR MECHANISM -
(6 Inch Units) (See Figure 35)
The following features are found on 6-inch units with
circuit breaker operators.
A. Door Interlock
The operator mechanism is factory adjusted and
normally does not need field adjustment. The
door interlock mechanism engages a hook that
is mounted to the welded bracket. This allows
the unit door to open when the operator handle
is in the "off (right) position. With the handle in
the "on" (left) position, the door is interlocked
and should not open. If the door hook and the
mechanism do not engage properly, the
positioning of the door hook on the bracket may
need adjustment. The door hook can be
adjusted left or right by loosening the screw (see
photograph). After adjustment, tighten screw to
20 1b.-in. 12.2 N-m]. See Figure 38 insert.
0. Defeater Screw
Turning the defeater screw clockwise allows you
to open the unit door (access to the panel
mounted components) with the operator handle
(padlocked or not) in the "on" (left) position.
C. Padlocking (See Figures 36, & 37)
The operator handle can be padlocked in the
"off' position with u p to three 318" [ I 9 5 mn)
(Max.) shank padlocks.
 To provide for padlocking the circuit breaker
operator in the "on" position, drill the appropriate
size hole through the drill point located on the
operator mechanism.
D. Unit Interlock
The unit interlock is provided to assure that the
unit circuit breaker is:
- Open before the stab clips can contact the
Fia. 36
j (G Rectangular slot for scissors.
(0)One 114 in. or 5116 in. diameter padlock hasp.
- Open before the stab clips can be disengaged
from the vertical bus.
The unit interlock and bracket does not need field
adjustment. The interlock bracket will be adjusted to
almost touch the side of the unit interlock rod when
the operator is in the "on" position.
( C ) Rotate lock plate for one to three 318 in.
diameter padlock hasp locks.
 I.B. 8926-IA

CONTACT WEAR AND REPLACEMENT CONTACTOR TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

DEFECT CAUSE REMEDY
Contactors are subject to both mechanical and Overheating Load current Reduce load. Use larger
electrical wear during their operation. In most cases too high contactor.
mechanical wear is insignificant. The erosion of the
Loose Clean discolored or dirty
contacts is due to electrical wear. During arcing. connections Connections and retighten.
mateAal from each contact is vaporized and blown Replace poorly crimped lugs
away from the useful contacting surface.
Over-travel Adjust over-travel, replace
A critical examination of the appearance of the
andlor contact contacts. and replace contact
contact surfaces and a measurement o f the force too low springs as required to correct
remaining contact over-travel will give the user the defect.
information required to get the maximum contact life.
Ambient Reduce load. Provide better
temperature ventilation. Relocate starter.
OVER-TRAVEL MEASUREMENT is too high u8e larger contactor.
Contact life has ended when the over-travel of the
contacts has been reduced to ,020 inch. Line andlor Install terminal block and
load cables run larger conductors
Over-travel of the contact assembly is that part of are too small between contactor and
the stroke which the moving contacts would travel termiaal hlnrk
after touching the fixed contacts if they were not
blocked from movement by the fixed contacts. Welding of Overtravel Adjust overtravel, replace
contacts andlor contact contacts, and replace contact
A method of measuring over-travel is as follows: force is too low springs as required to correct
A. Place a .020 inch feeler gauge between the contact force.
armature and magnet, with the armature held
tightly against the magnet. Magnet Correct low voltage at coil
B.Check continually i n each phase, i.e., armature stalls terminals as mil draws inrush
determine if circuit from terminal-to-terminal for or hesitates at current.
each pole is open under these conditions. contact touch
C. If there is continuity through all phases, the point
remaining over-travel is sufficient. If there is not
continuity through all phases, replace all Contactor Maintain voltage at coil
stationary and moving contacts plus moving drops open to terminals. Install low voltage
contact over-travel springs. After replacing contact-touch protective device, sometimes
parts, manually operate contactor to be sure position called "Brownout Protectof.
binding does not occur. because of
CTQR T-QTING CHART voltage dip
DEFECT CAUSE REMEDY
Short contact Low canlact Adjust overtravel, replace Excessive Correct coil overvoltage
life force contacts, and replace contact contact bounce condition.
springs as required to correct on closing
contact force.
Contact bounce Correct improper voltage
on opening or applied to coil. Correct any
closing mechanical defects or MAINTENANCE OF MOTOR CONTROLLERS
misalignment. AFTER A FAULTt
Abrasive dust Do not use emery cloth to In a motor branch circuit which has been properly
on contacts dress contacts. installed, coordinated and in service prior to the
Load current is Reduce load. Use larger fault, opening of the branch-circuit short-circuit
loo high contactor. protective device (fuse, circuit breaker, motor short-
Jogging cycle Reduce jogging cycle. Check circuit protector, etc.) indicates a fault condition in
is too severe factory for more durable excess of operating overload. This fault condition
cantacl material Use larger must be corrected and the necessary repair or
contactor
 i
'Reproduced by permission of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association from NEMA Standards Publication No.lCS 2-
1978 (R1983), Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies, copyright 1978 by NEMA.
replacements made before re-energizing the branch
circuit. If there is no visual indication of damage that would
require replacement of the overload relay, the relay
It is recommended that the following general must be electrically or mechanically tripped to verify
procedures be observed by qualified personnel in the proper functioning of the overload relay
the inspection and repair of the motor controller contact(s).
involved in the fault.
Return t o service. Before returning the controller to
Procedure - Caution: All inspections and tests service, checks must be made for the tightness of
are t o be made o n controllers and equipment electrical connections and for the absence of short
which are de-energized, disconnected and circuits, grounds an leakage.
isolated s o that accidental contact cannot b e
made with live parts and s o that all plant safety All equipment enclosures must be closed and
procedures w i l l b e observed. secured before the branch circuit is energized.

Enclosure. Substantial damage to the unit door or

frame such as deformation, displacement of parts or
burning, requires replacement of the entire unit.

Circuit breaker. Examine the unit interior and the

circuit breaker for evidence of possible damage. If
evidence of damage is not apparent, the breaker
may be reset and turned ON. If it is suspected that
the circuit breaker has opened several short-circuit
faults or if signs of circuit breaker deterioration
'., appear within the enclosure, the circuit breaker
should be replaced.
. I
Disconnect switch. The external operating handle Fig. 39 Normal Service Wear
of the disconnect switch must be capable of opening
the switch. If the handle fails to open the switch or i f
visual inspection afler opening indicates
deterioration beyond normal wear and tear, such as
overheating, contact blade or jaw pitting, insulation
breakage or charring, the switch must be replaced.

Fuse holders. Deterioration of fuse holders or their

insulating mounts requires their replacement.

Terminals and internal conductors. Indications of

arcing damage andlor overheating such as
discoloration and melting of insulation require the
replacement of damaged parts. I
Fig. 40 End of Service Life
REPLACE
I
Contactor. Contacts showing heat damage,
displacement of metal, or loss of adequate wear
allowance require replacement of the contacts and
the contact springs. If deterioration extends beyond
the contacts, such as binding in the guides or
evidence of insulation damage, the damaged parts
or the entire contactor must be replaced.

Overload relays. If burnout of the current element

of an overload relay has occiirred. the complete
j overload relay must be replaced. Any indication that
an arc has struck and/or any indication of burning of
the insulation of the overload relay also requires
replacement of the overload relay.
1
CONTACT EVALUATION

Time of Service Contact Appearance

New The new contact has a uniform silver color.

Start of Sewice The contact surface will have a blue coloring. The geometric form of the contact is
unchanged. The sharp outer corners will be rounded with small silver beads. (See
Figure 39).

Intermediate Service The coloring changes to brown or black with distributed small silvery white areas. The
to End of Service Life surface has a finely chiselled appearance. Material transfer causes small peaks and
valleys in the contact button surface. (See Figure 40).

ABNORMAL WEAR CONDITIONS

Contact Appearance Cause

Curling and Separation Curling is usually a result of service that produces very high heat, as under jogging or
of Corner of Contact inching duty.

Irregular Contour or One corner of a contact may wear more quickly than the other three corners. This wear
Slantwise Wear is normally due to misalignment of the moving and stationary contacts. Contacts
should be replaced if it is apparent that one contact is nearly making direct contact with
the contact carrier.
) Large Beads of S~lver Breaking an excessive current
On Edges of Contacts

Welded Spot (Core of Making an excessive current. High frequency of operation, i.e., jogging
Smooth. Shining Silver
Surrounded by a

RENEWAL PARTS
When ordering renewal control center parts, give the
complete nameplate reading. Always give the name
of the part wanted, the part, catalog or style number
of the individual apparatus on which it is to be used,
and the order number of the complete motor control
center.
Control Center renewal parts identified by part or
style number are detailed in cutler-~ammer
Renewal Parts Data. The nomenclature to identify
these parts is shown in Figures 2 and 41. The most
common renewal parts for components are shown in
TablelO-I.
 MAGNET COILS

120V60HzorllOV50Hz

......... ... ........

......... ... ........

380V 50 HZ...... ...... ........ L 9-2756-12 9-1891-14 9-1891-14

415V 50 HZ... ... ... ........... M 9-2756-8 9-1891-21 9-1891-21
550V 50 Hz ... ... ... ........... N 9-2756-14 9-1891-8 9-1891-8
, OVERLOAD RELAYS
For replacement on existing
starters 3 Pole -Ambient C306GN3B C306GN3B C306KN3 C306NN3 C306DN3B
Compensated Bimetallic......

STARTER TYPE Unit Catalog Number Designation (Class)

Disconnect Fusible Circuit Circuit Breaker
Means: Breaker With Current
~ ~ ~ ~ ~

Full Voltage, Nan-Reversing F204 F206 F207

Full Voltage. Reversing F214 F216 F217
Reduced Voltage. Autotransformer Type F604 F606 F607
Reduced Voltage. Parl Winding Type F704 F706 F707
Reduced Voltage. Closed Transition Star-Delta F894 F896 F897
Full Voltage, Non-Reversing, 2 Speed, 2 Windings F954 F956 F957
. . F944 F946 F947
Full V o l t a s Non-Re& 7 Soeed. 1 Wlndlna
 Part 11
PLAN VIEWS
 20 Inches Wide, 16 lnehcs Deep
20 Inches Wide, 21 Incl~esDeep
Front hlountcd Only (4710A30)
Front Mounted Only (4710A31)

TOP VIEW - -m"

=YT TOP VIEW

34,
mmvl Wlnr..

CROSS SCCTION
CROSS SCCTION

mC4. Y*sma
Bonou ylcw
mmuir ma
(U
"Dr. 1 YO *
-
In

S I I rillc Vieis, A i x r " ~ h , lo, rcniu, dimm,ion, SEC lid^ "~LI. A. T.i"~l,lforv~nirri,,i",e"iio"r

-
24 Inches Wide, 16 Inches Deep
Front Mougete~yJ,y ( 4 7 1 0 ~ 3 3 )

TOP VlCW
24 Inches Wide. 21 Inches Deen

TOP VlCW

W -A,
mm

n
CROSS SECTION
CROSS SNXION

"= -I +------
i-
rnC."UY rn

OTTOM VlEW
S W K .
>It

5.-
--++--='~04k-

6
--
mmc -
Mrc xYlDm s
.
asl
c

BOTTOM VlCW
.

mnm set 3.4, wiim -I IPrn

KC HOTTI 1 19 1.

8. F.!uirmb, rnoun,nit,,,nin 4 c o n r r bull, pirmdan,ii

1. R.II"lrni"d.d rbave nm. iinz is 1.50 inihl..
","\in,"", i ~ i > d " i11~i3lil
,
1 hllriinvm ~o"dui,rp.~c >Vi,h r h m c i si,,r ir li 50 X P I , inihcr
4 Formulliplc nr"cl"w m%mbIiiiiiihhhhhh h h bbbh hfthhhh h h h b r ,emo"cd i o piovidr
mrrin,"nl "ne.iriclcd r0,iduilrprr n <,,e bollom o,,i,r hlCC. iia~irnunullmiltiilrd ronduii rprir s UIC bvilonl o l l h c MCC
I This eonduil rwre ir no, aiommmd.d >~h." 3 "."lill bur is mquirrd olhenviu .~.illb,.. i mi. rand.!, ip.rr ir no, r<romm.ndcd rhm r nr.u,ni b"5 is nqiiilud Oihrnrnin- r*li,rblc
 SlDE VIEWS
20 Inches Wide, 21 Inches Deep k1212-p- 4 m z m d . WP LOU-
Front and Rear Mounted (1710A32)

I Minimum icnglhofm~orbolLili.00".I . 1 8 - 1 6 ~ ~ 5 c o q l x d d 3 I I b i l l
A For"."seismic. mo"n,~viU,2mntcrbolir aercn.10,ui.

SlDE VIEW A
Conenlon Notes

mrrim"," hlCC.
"nmruiiird i o " d " i l l p x e >,,hi bominaflll~
5 This mnduil rjucr ir nor rriommendrd \\ibcn r neuinl bur ir ialuind. U l h i m i r rvrilablr

10 Inches Wide, 16 or 21 lncbes Deep

Transition Structure (4710A3516)
 RELATED INSTRUCTlON LEAFLETS

Starters:
Size 5, Non-Reversing and Reversing, vacuum.. ............................. .I.L. 17087
Size 6, Non-Reversing and Reversing, vacuum ............................... I.L. 17089

Contactors:
Size 5, Non-Reversing and Reversing, vacuum ................................ I.L. 16999
Size 5. Non-Reversing and Reversing, vacuum. ............................... I.L. 17088

Circuit Breakers:
Series C, F-frame .................................................................... I.L. 29ClOl
Series C, J-frame .................................................................... I.L. 29C103
Series C, K-frame ................................................................... I.L. 29CI 04
Series C, L-frame ..............
Series C, N-fram
Series C, R-fram
Transfer Switche

Cutler-Hammer, Inc. Printed in USA

Fayetteville. N.C. U.S.A 28306
User's Manual
ACS550-01 Drives (0.75 ... 132 kW)
ACS550-U1 Drives (1 ...200 hp)
ACS550 Drive Manuals
GENERAL MANUALS OPTION MANUALS
(delivered with optional equipment)
...
ACS550-011U1 Uset's Manual (0.75 132 kW) I
(1...200 hp) MFDT-01 FlashDrop User's Manual
3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418) (English) 3AFE68591074 (English)
ACS550-021U2 User's Manual (160...355 kW) I OHDI-01 1151230 V Digital Input Module User's Manual
(200 ...550 hp) 3AUA0000003101 (English)
3AFE64804626 (English) OREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module User's
Safety Manual
Installation
Start-up, control with I10 and ID Run OTAC-01 User's Manual Pulse Encoder Interface
Module User's Manual
Control panels 3AUA0000001938 (English).
Application macros RCAN-01 CANopen Adapter User's Manual
Parameters 3AFE64504231 (Endish)
Embedded fieldbus RCNA-01 ControlNet Adapter User's Manual
3AFE64506005 (English)
Fieldbus adapter
RDNA-01 DeviceNet Adapter User's Manual
Diagnostics 3AFE64504223 (English)
Maintenance RETA-01 Ethernet Adapter User's Manual
Technical data 3AFE64539736 (Enslish)
ACS550 Technical Reference Manual RLON-01 LonWorks Adapter Module User's Manual
(available in electronic format only) 3AFE64798693 (English)
Detailed Product Description RPBA-01 PROFIBUS-DP Adapter User's Manual
3AFE64504215 (English)
- Technical product description including dimensional
Typical contents
drawings
- Cabinet mounting information including power - Safety
Installation
losses
- Software and control including complete parameter
--ProgrammingIStart-up
Diagnostics
descriptions
- User interfaces and control connections
.Technical data

- Complete options descriptions MAINTENANCE MANUALS

- Spare parts
- Etc. Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS501150/350/550
Practical Engineering Guides 3AFE68735190 (EN)
- PID 8 PFC engineering guides
- Dimensioning and sizing guidelines
The industrial" wordmark and Product names in the form
- Diagnostics and maintenance information w rive'^ are registered or pending trademarks of ABB.
- EtC. CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation
e.V.
ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet
International.
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association
DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User
Organization.
lnterbus is a registered trademark of lnterbus Club.
LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp.
Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc.
M o a o ~ saria Modous Plus are registered traaemarks of
Schne~derAutomarlon Inc
PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org.
PROFIBUS-DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
 ACS550-01/U 1 Drives
0.75.. . I 3 2 kW
I...200 hp

User's Manual

3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418) Rev F

EN
EFFECTIVE: 16.04.2007
SUPERSEDES: 3AFE64804588 Rev D 24.06.2004
SUPERSEDES: 3AUA0000001418 Rev E 06.12.2004

O 2007 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved

 ACS550 User's Manual

I Safety

Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual:
Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject.
Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death
andlor damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger. The
warning symbols are used as follows:

A Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury
andlor damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by electricity,
which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.

WARNING! The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a

qualified electrician.

A WARNING! Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the
power circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2 and, depending on the frame
size, UDC+ and UDC-, or BRK+ and BRK-.

A WARNING! Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected. After

disconnecting the supply, wait at least 5 minutes (to let the intermediate circuit
capacitors discharge) before removing the cover.

WARNING! Even when power is switched off from the input terminals of the
ACS550, there may be dangerous voltage (from external sources) on the terminals
of the relay outputs R 0 1...R03.

A WARNING! When the control terminals of two or more drives are connected in
parallel, the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a
single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply.
 6 ACS550 User's Manual

WARNING! If a drive whose internal EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an

IT system [an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over
30 ohm) power system], the system will be connected to earth potential through the
EMC filter capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger or damage the drive.
If a drive whose internal EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner
grounded TN system, the drive will be damaged.
Disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing EM1 and EM3 screws (frame size
R1... R4, see the diagram in section Power connection diagrams on page 20) or F1
and F2 screws (frame size R5 or R6, see the diagram on page 21). Also see
sections I T systems on page 268 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 267.

WARNING! Do not attempt to install or remove EMI, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while

power is applied to the drive's input terminals.

A WARNING! Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device (disconnecting
means); instead, use the control panel start and stop keys a m,
and or
commands via the 110 board of the drive. The maximum allowed number of charging
cycles of the DC capacitors (i.e. power-ups by applying power) is six in ten minutes.

.)
A WARNING! The ACS550-011U1 is not field repairable. Never attempt to repair a
malfunctioning drive; contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Center for
replacement.

WARNING! The ACS550 will start up automatically afler an input voltage interruption
if the external run command is on.

A WARNING! The heat sink may reach a high temperature. See chapter Technical
data on page 259.

Note: For more technical information, contact the factory or your local ABB
representative.

Safety
ACS550 User's Manual

Table of contents

Safety
Use of warnings and notes

Table of contents

lnstallation
Installation flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Preparing for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installing the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Start.up. control with I/O and ID Run

How to start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
How to control the drive through the 110 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
HowtoperformtheIDRun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Control panels
About control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
...
Compat~b~l~ty ................................................... 41
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
BasicControlPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Application macros
ABB Standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3-wiremacro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Motor Potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Hand-Automacro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
PID Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
PFCmacro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Torque Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Connection example of a two-wire sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
User parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Macro default values for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Parameters
Complete parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Complete parameter descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Embedded fieldbus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Mechanical and electrical installation . EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Communication set-up . EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Activate drive control functions . EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Table of contents
 ACS550 User's Manual

Feedback from the drive . EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Diagnostics .EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Modbus protocol technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
ABB control profiles technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Fieldbus adapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical and electrical installation . FBA
Communication set-up . FBA . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activate drive control functions . FBA . . . . .
Feedback from the drive . FBA . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABB Drives profile technical data . . . . . . . . .
Generic profile technical data . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostics
Diagnosticdisplays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Correcting faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Correcting alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Maintenance
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Main fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Internal enclosure fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Controlpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Technical data
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Input power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Motorconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Brakecomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Controlconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Ambientconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Applicablestandards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
CEmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
ULICSAmarkings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
IECIEN 61800-3 (2004) Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Compliance with the IECIEN 61800-3 (2004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Liability limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Product protection in the USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Table of contents
ACS550 User's Manual

Index

Contact A 6 6
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Producttraining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Table of contents
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Table of contents
ACS550 Useis Manual

Installation

Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding. Failure t o observe

the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard.

A WARNING! Before you begin read chapter Safety on page 5.

Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws andlor other regulations. Furthermore, if
the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience
problems that the warranty does not cover.

Installation flow chart

The installation of the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below.
The steps must be carried out in the order shown. At the right of each step are
references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the drive.
Task See
PREPARE for installation Preparing for installation on page 12

+I

I PREPARE the mounting location I Prepare the mounting location on page 16

Remove the front cover on page 16

MOUNT the drive Mount the drive on page 17

I

Wiring overview on page I8 and

Install the wiring on page 24

t
I CHECK installation Check installation on page 29

REINSTALL the cover Reinstall the cover on page 30

+I

START-UP How to Start up the drive on page 31

 ACS550 Usei's Manual

; Preparing for installation

Lifting the drive
!
'
Lift the drive only by the metal
chassis.

Unpacking the drive

1. Unpack the drive.
2. Check for any damage and
notify the shipper immediately
if damaged components are
found. 1
Check the contents against
the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received

Drive identification
Drive labels
To determine the type of drive you are installing, refer to either:
serial number label attached on upper part of the chokeplate between the
mounting holes, or
ACssswr.OaAG-4 rt Type code

- Serial number
type code label attached on the heat sink- on the right side of the drive cover.
Two examples of the type code label are given below.
P

~nw 03 3- 580 ..4wV 1Pz1. UL b p 1. NEUA 1

ABB Qy
c€ @
.Ma-"
I> LLB A WSlr<t,nUVN)
II 4s-.a M
O*u( ul 3- O...Ui v
uwzhd 8.8/6.9 A

WW PWPM
0.. sw M
4.0J3.0 kW
1111111l
!l111861MlIliUllill~l
-*I065006704*t-- Serial number
ACS550-01-08A8-4 c--Type code

1 IIIII~IIIIII~
ll~liAUII~III~IIIIII
CS550-U1-031 - 2 -4.- Type code
ACS550 User's Manual 13

Type code
Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on both the type code and
the serial number label.
ACS550-01-08A8-4+J404+ ...

AC, Standard Drive - 550 product series

Construction (region specific)

2T-TT
01 = Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance
I
T
U1 = Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance

Output current rating

e.g. OBA8 = 8.8 A, see section Ratings on page 259 for details

Voltage rating I
2 = 208 ...240 VAC
4 = 380 ...480 VAC
6 = 500 ...600 VAC
Options I
Examples of options:
6055 = IP54 I UL type 12 (no specification = IP21 I UL type 1)
OJ400 = No control oanel
J404 = ACS-CP-C'B~SIC Control Panel
L511 = OREL-01 Relay output extension
K451 = RDNA-01 DevlceNet
K452 = RLON-01 LonWorks
K454 = RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP

Ratings and frame size

The chart in section Ratings on page 259 lists technical specifications and identifies
the drive's frame size - significant, since some instructions in this document vary,
depending on the drive's frame size. To read the ratings table, you need the "Output
current rating" entry from the type code. Also, when using the ratings table, note that
the table is broken into sections based on the drive's "Voltage rating".
Serial number
The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below.
Serial number is of format C Y Y W X X X X , where
C: Country of manufacture
YY: Year of manufacture
W Week of manufacture; 01, 02, 03, ... for week 1, week 2, week 3,
XXXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001

Installation
 ACS550 User's Manual

Motor compatibility
The motor, drive and supply power must be compatible:
Motor
Verify Reference
specification
Motor type 3-phase induction motor -
Nominal current Motor value is within this . Type code label on drive, entry for Output Izhd,
range: 0.2 ...2.0. 12hd or
('2hd = drive
current)
- Type code on drive and rating table in chapter
Technical data on page 259.
Nominal frequency 10...500 Hz -
Voltage range Motor is compatible with 208...240 V (for ACS550-XI-XXXX-2) or
the ACS550 voltage range. 380...480 V (for ACS550-XI-XXXX-4) or
500...600 V (for ACS550-U1-XXXX-6)
insulation 500 ...600 V drives: Either For ACS550-U1-XXXXS
the motor complies with
NEMA M G I Part 31. or a
duldt filter is used between
the motor and drive.

Tools required
To install the ACS550 you need the following:
screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used)
wire stripper
tape measure
drill
for installations involving ACS550-U1, frame sizes R5 or R6 and IP54 1 UL type
12 enclosures: punch for creating conduit mounting holes
for installations involving ACS550-U1, frame size R6: appropriate crimping tool
for power cable lugs. See section Power terminal considerations - R6 frame size
on page 269.
mounting hardware: screws or nuts and bolts, four each. The type of hardware
depends on the mounting surface and the frame size:

Suitable environment and enclosure

Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements. To prevent damage
prior to installation, store and transport the drive according to the environmental
requirements specified for storage and transportation. See section Ambient
conditions on page 289.

Installation
ACS550 Useis Manual 15

Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate, based on the site contamination level:
IP21 IUL type 1 enclosure: The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive
gases or liquids, and conductive contaminants such as dripping water,
condensation, carbon dust and metallic particles.
IP54 1 UL type 12 enclosure: This enclosure provides protection from airborne
dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions.
If, for some reason, an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or
cover, or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or hood, see the note in chapter
Technical data, page 292.

Suitable mounting location

Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints:
The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth, solid surface, and in a suitable
environment as defined above.
The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions (see
section Outside dimensions on page 287), plus air flow space around the drive
(see section Cooling on page 283).
The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor
cable length. See section Motor connection specifications on page 271.
The mounting site must support the drive's modest weight. See section Weighton
page 288.

Installation
16 ACS550 User's Manual

Installing the drive

WARNING! Before installing the ACS550, ensure the input power supply to the drive
is OR.

Prepare the mounting location

h
The ACS550 should only be mounted where all of the
requirements defined in section Preparing forinstallation
on page 12 are met.
1. Mark the position of the mounting holes with the help of
the mounting template provided with the drive. xom2
2. Drill the holes.

Note: Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top. Use only two. If
possible, use the two outside holes (to allow room to remove the fan for
maintenance).

Note: ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes. For R1 and
R2 frame sizes, the mounting holes are identical. For R3 and R4 frame sizes, the
inside mounting holes on the top of ACS550 drives match ACS400 mounts.

Remove the front cover

IP2 I / UL type I
1. Remove the control panel, if attached
2. Loosen the captive screw at the top.
3. Pull near the top to remove the cover.

Installation
ACS550 User's Manual

3 .

1. If hood is present: Remove screws

(2) holding hood in place.
.
I' -
2. If hood is present: Slide hood up and
off of the cover.
3. Loosen the captive screws around
the edge of the cover.
4. Remove the cover.

Mount the drive

IP21/ UL type I
1. Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or
bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.

Note: Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis (frame

size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top).

2. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning

sticker in the appropriate language over the existing
warning on the top of the module. IPZWZ

IP54 / UL type 12
For the IP54 1 UL type 12 enclosures, rubber plugs are required in the holes
provided for access to the drive mounting slots.
1. As required for access, remove the rubber plugs.
Push plugs out from the back of the drive.
2. R5 & R6: Align the sheet metal hood (not shown) in
front of the drive's top mounting holes. (Attach as
part of next step.)
3. Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or
bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.

Note: Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis (frame

size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top)

4. Reinstall the rubber plugs

5. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language
over the existing warning on the top of the module.

Installation
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Wiring overview
ConduiVGland l i t
Wiring drives with the IP21 IUL type 1 enclosure requires a conduitlgland kit with the
following items:
conduitlgland box
five (5) cable clamps (ACS550-01 only)
- screws
cover.
The kit is included with IP21 IUL type 1 enclosures
Wiring requirements

WARNING! Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS550. The drive must
be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in
section Preparing forinstallation on page 12. If in doubt, contact your local ABB
sales or service office.

As you install the wiring, observe the following:

There are four sets of wiring instructions - one set for each combination of drive
enclosure type (IP21 IUL type and IP54 IUL type 12) and wiring type (conduit or
cable). Be sure to select the appropriate procedure.
Determine electro-magnetic compliance (EMC) requirements per local codes.
See section Motor cable requirements for CE & C-Tick compliance on page 274.
In general:
- Follow local codes for cable size
- Keep these four classes of wiring separated: input power wiring, motor wiring,
controllcommunications wiring and braking unit wiring.
When installing input power and motor wiring, refer to the following, as
appropriate:
1 Terminal 1I Description II Specifications and notes I
U1, V1. WI' I 3-phase power supply input I lnputpowerconnections on page 263
PE I Protective Ground I Ground connecfions on page 266
U2, V2, W2 Power output to motor Motorconnections on page 271
' The ACS550 -XI-xxxx-2 (208...240 V series) can be used with a single phase supply. if output
current is derated by 50%. For single phase supply voltage, connect power at U1 and W1

To locate input power and motor connection terminals, see section Power
connection diagrams on page 20. For specifications on power terminals, see
section Drive's power connection terminals on page 268.
For corner grounded TN systems, see section Cornergrounded TN systems on
page 267.
For IT systems, see section I T systems on page 268.
ACS550 User's Manual 19

For frame size R6, see section Power terminal considerations - R6 frame size on
page 269 to install the appropriate cable lugs.
For drives using braking (optional), refer to the following, as appropriate:
Frame size Terminal Description Braking accessory
R1, R2 BRK+. BRK- Braking resistor Braking resistor. See section Brake
components on page 277.
R3, R4, R5. R6 UDC+. UDC- DC bus Contact your ABB representative to
order either:
braking unit or
- chopper and resistor

When installing control wiring, refer to the following chapters or sections, as

appropriate:
- Control terminals table on page 22
- Control connections on page 281
- Application macros on page 71
- Complete parameter descriptions on page 98
- Embedded fieldbus on page 189
- Fieldbus adapter on page 221.

Installation
 ACS550 User's Manual

Power connection diagrams

The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3, which, in
general, applies to frame sizes R1...R6, except for the R5/R6 power and ground
terminals.

Diagram shows the R3 frame.

Other frames have similar layouts.

Panel connector

X1 -Analog inputs and outputs

(and 10 V ref, voltage output)

FlashDrop option
X I -Digital inputs
(and 24 V aux. voltage output) Power LED (green)

X I -Relay outputs

for RS485 termination Optional module 1

Optional module 2

R51R6 differ.

Frame Terminal
Brake options
size labels
R1. R2 BRK+, BRK- Brake resistor
R3. R4 UDC+, UDC- Braking unit
I I 1.Chopper and resistor II

A. WARNING! For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems, disconnect the

~nternalEMC filter by removing:
- On ACS550-01: screws EM1 and EM3
- On ACS550-U1: screw EM1 (drive is shipped with EM3 already removed).
See ITsystems on page 268 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 267.

Installation
ACS550 User's Manual 21

The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes
R5 and R6
R5 R6

Power input Power output to motor

(UI. v1. W1) (U2, V2, W2)

WARNING! For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems, disconnect the

internal EMC filter by removing screws F1 and F2.
See I T systems on page 268 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 267.

Installation
 ACS550 User's Manual

Control terminals table

The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X I on the drive
XI Hardware description
I1 ( SCR I Terminal for signal cable screen. (Connected internally to chassis ground.)
2 All Analog input channel 1, programmable. ~efault'= frequency reference. Resolution
0.1%. accuracv +I%.

1 1 / Two different DIP switch types can be used.

J1:All OFF: 0...10V(Ri=312 kohm) jg br: -In lg
J1: A l l ON: 0...20 mA (Ri= 100 ohm) - m l g
3 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).
!? 4 +I0 V Potentiometer reference source: 10 V +2%, max. 10 mA (1 kohm c R c 10 kohm).
0)
5 A12 Analog input channel 2, programmable. ~efault'= not used. Resolution 0.1%.
25 accuracy +I%.
141 I Two different DIP switch types can be used.
J l : A12 OFF: 0...10 V (Ri = 312 kohm) m2--./ng
J l : A12 ON: 0...20mA(Ri= 100 ohm) g - . m g
6 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).
7 A01 Analog output, programmable. ~efault'= frequency. 0...20 mA (load c 500 ohm).
Accuracv +3%.
I I
8 A02 Analog output, programmable. ~ e f a u l ?= current. 0...20 mA (load < 500 ohm).
Accuracy +3%.
9 AGND Analog output circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).
10 +24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 1250 mA (reference to GND), short circuit
protected
11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common (connected internally as floating).
12 DCOM Digital input common. To activate a digital input, there must be 2 + I 0 V
(or < -10 V) between that input and DCOM. The 24 V may be provided by the
ACS550 (XI-10) or by an external 12... 24 V source of either polarity.
13 Dl1 programmable. ~efault' = start/stop.
Digital input I.
1
14 Dl2 I Digital input 2, programmable.
. . ~efault'= fwdirev.
I Digital input 3, programmable. Default2=constant speed sel (code).
I

15 1 Dl3
1
16 Dl4 I Digital input 4, programmable. ~efault' =constant speed sel (code).
1
17 Dl5 1Digital input 5, programmable. ~efault'= ramp pair selection (code).
18 1 Dl6 I Digital input 6, programmable. ~efault'= not used.
ACS550 User3 Manual 23

XI Hardware description
1 19 1 ROlC I --, I Relay output 1, programmable. ~ e f a u l=t ~Ready
z0 ROIA Maximum: 250 VAC 130 V DC, 2 A
Minimum: 500 m W (12 V, 10 mA)
21 R O l B ,
- n Relay output 2, programmable. ~efault'= Running

3
.25
23 R02A
24 R02B
R03C
- Maximum: 250 VAC 130 V DC. 2 A
Minimum: 500 m W (12 V. 10 mA)

Relay output 3, programmable. L)efault2 = Fault (-1)

26 R03A Maximum: 250 VAC 1 30 V DC, 2 A
Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
I 1
27 R03B
I
- I I
' Digital input impedance 1.5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V.
Default values depend on the macro used. Values specified are for the default macro. See chapter
Application macros on page 71.

Note: Terminals 3, 6 and 9 are at the same potential.

Note: For safety reasons the fault relay signals a "fault" when the ACS550 is
powered down.

WARNING! All ELV (Extra Low Voltage) circuits connected to the drive must be used
within a zone of equipotential bonding, i.e. within a zone where all simultaneously
accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages
appearing between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding.

The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to
the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in
EN 50178, provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil
the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft)
You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)

Installation
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Install the wiring

Checking motor and motor cable insulation

WARNING! Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive
to input power. For this test, make sure that motor cables are NOT connected to the
drive.

1. Complete motor cable connections to the motor, but NOT to the drive output
terminals (U2, V2, W2).
2. At the drive end of the motor cable, measure the insulation
resistance between each motor cable phase and Protective
Earth (PE): Apply a voltage of 1 kV DC and verify that
resistance is greater than 1 Mohm.

Installation
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Wiring IP21/ UL type I enclosure with cables

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduitlgland
box. (See section ConduiVGland kit on page 18.)
2. Install the cable clamps for the powerlmotor cables.

3. On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back

far enough to route individual wires.
4. On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far
enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the
screen can be twisted into a pig-tail. Keep the pig-
tail short to minimize noise radiation.
360" grounding under the clamp is recommended 8
for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation. In
this case, remove the sheathing at the cable clamp.
5. Route both cables through the clamps.
6. Strip and connect the powerlmotor wires and the 8
power ground wire to the drive terminals.

Note: For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable

size is 25 mm2 (4 AWG).
For R6 frame size, refer to section Power terminal
considerations - R6 frame size on page 269.

7. Connect the pig-tail created from the motor cable screen to the GND terminal.
8. Install conduitlgland box and tighten the cable clamps.
9. Install the cable clamp(s) for the control cable(s).
(Powerlrnotor cables and clamps not shown in the
figure.)
10. Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper
screen into a pig-tail.
11. Route control cable(s) through clamp(s) and tighten
clamp(s).
12. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for digital and
analog 110 cables at X I - I . (Ground only at drive
end.)
13. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485 cables
at XI-28 or XI-32. (Ground only at drive end.)
14. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the
drive terminals. See section Control terminals table
on page 22.
15. Install the conduit/gland box cover (1 screw).

Installation
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Wiring IP21/ UL type I enclosure with conduit

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduitlgland
box. (See section Conduit/Gland kit on page 18.)
2. Install thin-wall conduit clamps (not supplied).

3. Install conduitlgland box.

4. Connect conduit runs to box

5. Route input power and motor wiring through conduits

(must be separate conduit runs).
6. Strip wires.
7
7. Connect power, motor and ground wires to the drive
terminals.
4 IP2W4
Note: For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable
size is 25 mm2 (4 AWG).
For R6 frame size, refer to section Power terminal considerations - R6 frame size on
page 269.

8. Route the control cable through the conduit (must be

separate from input power and motor conduit runs).
9. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper
screen into a pig-tail.
10. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for digital and
analog I10 cables at XI-I. (Ground only at drive end.)
11. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485 cables
at XI-28 or XI-32. (Ground only at drive end.)
12. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the
drive terminals. See section Control terminals table
on page 22.
13. Install the conduiffgland box cover (I screw).

Installation
ACS550 Useis Manual

Wiring IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure with cables

1. Cut the cable seals as needed for the power,
motor and control cables. (The cable seals are
cone-shaped, rubber seals on the bottom of the
drive.)

2. On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back

far enough to route individual wires.
5
3. On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far
enough to expose the copper wire screen so that
3
the screen can be twisted into a pig-tail. Keep the 4 4
pig-tail short to minimize noise radiation.
360" grounding under the clamp is recommended
for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation. In
this case, remove the sheathing at the cable IPS004
clamp.
4. Route both cables through the clamps and tighten the clamps.
5. Strip and connect the powerlrnotor wires and the power ground wire to the drive
terminals.

Note: For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable size is 25 rnm2 (4 AWG).
For R6 frame size, refer to section Power terminal considerations - R6 frame size on
page 269.

6. Connect the pig-tail created from the motor cable

screen to the GND terminal.
7. Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper
screen into a pig-tail.
8. Route control cable(s) through clamp(s) and
tighten clamp(s). 9...11'

9. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for digital and

analog 110 cables at X I - I . (Ground only at drive
end.)
10. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485
cables at XI-28 or XI-32. (Ground only at drive
end.)
11. Strip and connect the individual control wires to
the drive terminals. See section Control terminals
table on page 22.

Installation
 ACS550 Usefs Manual

Wiring I P 5 4 / U L type 12 enclosure with conduit

1. Depends on frame size: RI ...R4 n
- R1... R4: Remove and discard the cable seals
where conduit will be installed. (The cable seals are
cone-shaped, rubber seals on the bottom of the
drive.)

R5 and R6: Use punch to create holes for conduit

R5,
connections as needed.

2. For each conduit run, install water tight conduit

connectors (not supplied).

3. Route the power wiring through the conduit.

4. Route the motor wiring through the conduit.
5. Strip the wires.
6. Connect the power, motor and ground wires to the
drive terminals.

Note: For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable

size is 25 mm2 (4 AWG).
For R6 frame size, refer to section Power terminal considerations - R6 frame size on
page 269.

7. Route the control cable through the conduit

8. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig-tail.
9. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for digital and analog 110 cables at X I - I . (Ground
only at drive end.)
10. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485 cables at XI-28 or XI-32. (Ground
only at drive end.)
11. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals. See section
Control terminals table on page 22.

lnslallation
ACS550 User's Manual

Check installation
Before applying power, perform the following checks.
V' Check
Installation environment conforms to the drive's specifications for ambient conditions.
The drive is mounted securelv.
I
I Space around the drive meets the drive's specifications for cooling.
The motor and driven equipment are ready for start.
For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems: The internal EMC filter is disconnected
(screws EM1 8 EM3 or F1 & F2 removed).
The drive is properly grounded.
The input power (mains) voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The input power (mains) connections at U1, V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as
specified.
The i n.~ u.Dower
t (mains) fuses are installed.
1
I The motor connections at U2. V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified.
The motor cable is routed away from other cables.
II NO Dower factor ComDensation ca~acitorsare in the motor cable.
The control connections are connected and tightened as specified.
I NO tools or foreign objects (such as drill shavings) are inside the drive.
NO alternate power source for the motor (such as a bypass connection) is connected - no
voltage is applied to the output of the drive.

lnstallation
 ACS550 User's Manual

Reinstall the cover

IP2 1 / UL type I
1. Align the cover and slide it on.
2. Tighten the captive screw.
3. Reinstall the control panel.
4. Continue with start-up. See chapter Start-up,
control with I/O and ID Run on page 31.

IP54 / UL type 12
1. Align the cover and slide it on.
2. Tighten the captive screws around
the edge of the cover.
3. Slide the hood down over the top
of the cover. (Only needed for UL
type 12 installations.)
4. Install the two screws that attach
the hood. (Only needed for UL
type 12 installations.)
5. Install the control panel.

Note: The control panel window

must be closed to comply with
IP54 IUL type 12.

6. Optional: Add a lock (not supplied) to secure the control panel window.
7. Continue with start-up. See chapter Start-up, control with 110 and ID Run on page
31.

Installation
ACS550 User's Manual

Start-up, control with 110 and ID Run

The chapter instructs how to:

perform the start-up
start, stop, change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor
through the 110 interface
perform an Identification Run for the drive.
Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter. For
details on how to use the control panel, refer to chapter Control panels starting on
page 41.

How to start up the drive

How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have
If you have an Assistant Control Panel, you can either run the Start-up
Assistant (see section How to perform the guided start-up on page 36) or perform
a limited start-up (see section How to perform the limited start-up on page 31).
The Start-up Assistant, which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only,
guides you through all essential settings to be done. In the limited start-up, the
drive gives no guidance; you go through the very basic settings by following the
instructions given in the manual.
- If you have a Basic Control Panel, follow the instructions given in section How
to perform the limited start-up on page 31.

How to perform the limited start-up

For the limited start-up, you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control
Panel. The instructions below are valid for both control panels, but the displays
shown are the Basic Control Panel displays, unless the instruction applies to the
Assistant Control Panel only.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand,

1 The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician. I

/Y\ The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start-up
procedure.
The drive will start up automatically at power up, if the external run command is on.
I.
1 Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation, page 29.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

32 ACS550 User's Manual

lo I Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. ID Run is essential only in
applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.

pp y lnpu power.
The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode.

The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to run the Start-
p Assistant. If you press @,the Start-up Assistant is not
un, and you can continue with manual start-up in a similar
anner as described below for the Basic Control Panel.

( t i e Basic Control Panel does not support languages). See

- - 9901 LANGUAGE
parameter 9901 for the values of'the available language ENGLISH
alternatives. You find parameter descriptions in section
Complete parameter descriptions starting on page 98. CANCEL 00:oo rn
The general parameter setting procedure is described below for the Basic
Control Panel. You find more detailed instructions for the Basic Control Panel
on page 67. Instructions for the Assistant Control Panel are on page 49.

IRE.
The general parameter setting procedure:
1. To go to the Main menu, press if the bottom line shows OUTPUT;
othelwise press repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom. :M
e FWO

2. Press keys 1
- until you see "PA? and press

3. Find the appropriate parameter group with keys a/-

m.
1-
w.
and press
2001
keys a/-.
4. Find the appropriate parameter in the group with
2002
5. Press and hold for about two seconds until the parameter value is
shown with a+l under the value.
PAR rn FWD
6. Change the value with keys -/-. The value changes faster while
you keep the key pressed down
PAR rn FWD
7 Save the parameter value by presslng
I"'" 2002 I111
PAR FWD

Stad-up, control with 110 and ID Run

ACS550 User's Manual 33

Select the application macro (parameter 9902). The general

parameter setting procedure is given above.
The default value 1 (ABB STANDARD) is suitable in most cases.
PAR
FWD 'I
Select the motor control mode (parameter 9904).
1 (VECTOR:SPEED) is suitable in most cases. 2 (VECTOR:T~RQ) is suitable for
torque control applications. 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) is recommended
. for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the
drive is variable
. when the nominal current of the motor is less than 20% of the nominal
current of the drive
when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected.

Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate: Note: Set the motor data to
exactly the same value as on
G ABB Motors CE @ the motor nameplate. For
3 - motor M2AA 200 MLA 4
IEC 200 MiL 55 - example, if the motor nominal
speed is 1470 rpm on the
nameplate, setting the value of
parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM
SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the
wrong operation of the drive.
380 V
supply
voltage

motor nominal voltage (parameter 9905)

/
PAR FWD

motor nominal current (parameter 9906)

Allowed range: 0.2...2.0. IZhd
A
11 PAR FWD

motor nominal frequency (parameter 9907)

PAR FWD

motor nominal speed (parameter 9908)

II PAR FWD

motor nominal power (parameter 9909)

PAR FWD

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

34 ACS550 Usefs Manual

Select the motor identification method (parameter 9910).

The default value 0 (OFF/~DMAGN) using the identification magnetization is suitable for most
applications. It is applied in this basic start-up procedure. Note however that this requires
that:
parameter 9904 is set to 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ),
or
parameter 9904 is set to 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 is set to 3 (SCALAR FLYST)
or 5 (FLY+ BOOST).
If your selection is 0 (OFF~IDMAGN), move to the next step.
Value 1 (ON), which performs a separate ID Run, should be selected if:
vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ)],
andlor
the operation point is near zero speed, andlor
operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and
without any measured speed feedback is required.
If you decide to do the ID Run [value 1 (ON)],continue by following the separate instructions
given on page 39 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION
OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 34.
---../.--,-~..-.-.- .-----m..-. vp-l.-l_-..
~ ~ ~ T I ~ ~ N G C . ...,,
-. 1_L1_.._._1_~_1_.11__-1._1_11__1__._2_

I I
" ~ . ~ WITH10
I I A RUN
.---.
. T SELECTION
I O N
L .
.
As stated above, the identification magnetization is performed only if:
. .
-----.--
0 (OFFIIDMAGN) :
L
.. II
.
parameter 9904 is set to 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ),
or
parameter 9904 is set to 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 is set to 3 (SCALAR
FLYST)
or 5 (FLY+ BOOST).
Press key @ to switch to local control (LOC shown on the left).
Press @ t o start the drive. The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor
for 10 to 15 s at zero speed (motor not rotating).

Check the direction of the motor rotation.

If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the left),
switch to local control by pressing @.
To go to the Main menu, press rn if the bottom line shows
OUTPUT; otherwise press repeatedly until you see
MENU at the bottom.
Press keys rn.
until you see " r E F and press
Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value
with key m.
Press a to start the motor.
Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as
indicated on the display (FWD means forward and REV
reverse)
Press a to stop the motor.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550 User's Manual 35

To change the direction of the motor rotation:

Disconnect input power from the drive, and wait 5 minutes iorward
direction
for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure
the voltage between each input terminal (UI, V1 and W1)
and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is
discharged. reverse
direction
Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors
at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box.
Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the
check as described above.

I I PAR FWD

lo I Set the maximum speed (parameter 2002)

PAR FWD

Set the acceleration time 1 (parameter 2202).

Note: Check also acceleration time 2 (parameter 2205) if two 2202
acceleration times will be used in the application.
Set the deceleration time 1 (parameter 2203).
Note: Set also deceleration time 2 (parameter 2206) if two 2203
deceleration times will be used in the application.
;-,,..
"..-,L ,-.-.---.- .- ..- ..-.,---- L------...---... .______
SAVING A USER PARAMETER SETAND FINALCHECK
_" L -..-. . . . . .
L
'

01 The starl-uo is now comoleled. However. ~tmiaht " be u s e f ~ar, 1,-oc A n n ?---
I I this stage tb set the required'by your application
and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in I
11 YYuL
II I/ section Userparameter sets on page 81.

Check that the drive state is OK. 1

PAR FWD

Basic Control Panel: Check that there are no faults or alarms

shown on the display. If you want to check the LEDs on the
front of the drive, switch first to remote control (otherwise a
fault is generated) before removing the panel and verifying that
the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking.
Assistant Control Panel: Check that there are no faults or
alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green
and does not blink.
--.-.-
-*
?he
. ,.
-
---..- -.. - -------.--
driYe i9,nbiy
. ..
"".---.-
. ready
. for
. ," r e ; , .
J .---.---

. .:':-.
.-...-..--
,
.-.. ., ., , '---I
/

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

 36 ACS550 User's Manual

How t o perform the guided start-up

To be able to perform the guided start-up, you need the Assistant Control Panel
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.

The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.

The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start-up
procedure.
The drive will start up automatically at power up, if the external run command is on.

1 Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Instaliation, page 29.

1 Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. ID Run is essential only in
applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.

..j
Press @ if you do not want to run the Start-up Assistant.

EXIT 0o:oo rm--

9901 LANGUAGE

If you press @,the Start-up Assistant is stopped.

I I The Start-up Assistant now guides you through the set-up tasks, 1 ~ R E M C P A R EDIT II
starting with the motor set-up. Set the motor data to exactly the
same value as on the motor nameplate.
Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys 1-- and
press to accept and continue with the Start-up Assistant.
Note: At any time, if you press , the Start-up Assistant is
stopped and the display goes

Start-up, control with I/O and iD Run

ACS550 User's Manual 37

After completing a set-up task, the Start-up Assistant suggests the REM P I C H O I C E
DO y ~ u wan% t o
next one. contlnue w i t h
ap l i c a t i o n s e t u p ?
Press (when -is highlighted) to continue with the
suggested task.
Press key to highlight and then press to move to
the following task without doing the suggested task.
Press @ to stop the Start-up Assistant.

The start-up is now completed. However, it might be useful at this

stage to set the parameters required by your application and save
the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User
parameter sets on page 81.
Afler the whole set-up is completed, check there are no faults or
alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does
not blink.

Start-up, control with 110 and ID Run

 38 ACS550 User's Manual

I How to control the drive through the 110 interface

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog
inputs when:
the motor start-up is performed, and
the default (standard) parameter settings are valid.
Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example.

If you need to change the direction of rotation, check that parameter

1003 is set to 3 (REQUEST).

Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the See section ABB Standard
connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro. macro on page 72.

Ensure that the drive is in remote control. Press key @ to switch In remote control, the panel
between remote and local control. display shows text REM.

Start by switching digital input Dl1 on.

Assistant Control Panel: The arrow starts rotating. It is dotted until the
setpoint is reached. OUTPUT
Basic Control Panel: Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the
setpoint is reached
Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by adjusting the
voltage of analog input A l l .

Forward direction: Switch digital input Dl2 off.

I Basic Control Panel: Text FWD starts flashing slowly. OUTPUT '1

Starf-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550 Usefs Manual

How to perform the ID Run

The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically using identification
magnetization when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor
parameter (Group 99: START-UP DATA) is changed. This is valid when parameter
9910 ID RUN has value 0 (OFFIIDMAGN), and
or 2 (VECI~OK:I~ORQ), or
parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED)
parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ)
and parameter 2101 = 3 (SCALAR FLYST) or
5 (FLY + BOOST).
In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run [9910 ID RUN =
1 (ON)]. The ID Run should be selected if:
vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED)
or
2 (VECTOR:TORQ)], andlor
the operation point is near zero speed, and101
+ operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed
range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
Note: If motor parameters (Group 99: START-UP DATA) are changed after the ID
Run, it must be repeated.

ID Run procedure
The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here. For Assistant Control
Panel see page 49 and for Basic Control Panel page 67 in chapter Controlpanels.

A WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 ... 80% of the nominal speed
during the ID Run. The motor will rotate in the forward direction. Ensure that it is
safe t o run the motor before performing the ID Run!
/ /
q Decouple the motor from the driven equipment.
I
Check that the values of the motor data parameters 9905 ... 9909 are equivalent to those on
the motor nameplate, as shown in the steps on page 33.

lo 1
0
If parameter values (Group 01: OPERATING DATA to Group 98: OPTIONS) are changed
before the ID Run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions:
2001 MINIMUM SPEED 5 0 rpm
I
q 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of the motor rated speed

0 2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT >

0 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 > 50% or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 > 50%, depending on which limit is in
use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL.
I / Check that the Run Enable signal is on (parameter 1601).
I
1°1 Ensure that the panel is in local control (LOC shown on the left Iat the top). Press key @ to
switch between local and remote control.

Start-up, control with 110 and ID Run

40 ACS550 Useis Manual

T;T--'--7- --.- .-,..

-.---....---
8 '
-
L ID
- L L
RUNGTH
L.---L
THE ASSISTAN~'CONTRO~.PANEL....., ,: . .. . ..
'--..L -- ..---
-.->-.-A-~rF~:--.-.--~.L.,.-
!.. .
parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save the new seuing LOC PAR EDT 1,-----=I I
by pressing 9. 9910 I D RUN

m
CANCEL 0o:oo m
If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run, go to
the Output mode by pressing @ repeatedly until you get 0.0 Hz
there.
0.0 %
DIR 00:oo m

Press a to start the ID Run. The panel keeps switching

between the display that was shown when you started the ID ALARM 2019
Run and the alarm display presented on the right. D
I run
In general, it is recommended not to press any control panel
keys during the ID Run. However, you can stop the ID Run at
any time by pressing a.
After the ID Run is completed, the alarm display is not shown
any more. FAULT 11
If the ID Run fails, the fault display presented on the right is I 0 RUN F A I L
shown.
1 0 0 : O O 1

I PAR FWD

PAR an FWD
If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run, go to
the Output mode by pressing repeatedly until you get
there. OUTPUT

Press a to start the ID Run. The panel keeps switching

between the display that was shown when you started the ID
Run and the alarm display presented on the right.
In general, it is recommended not to press any control panel
keys during the ID Run. However, you can stop the ID Run at
any time by pressing a.
After the ID Run is completed, the alarm display is not shown
anv more.
If the ID Run fails, the fault display presented on the right is
I Fool1 FWD

shown.

Start-up, control with 110 and ID Run

 ACS550 User's Manual

I Control panels

About control panels

Use a control panel to control the drive, read status data and adjust parameters. The
drive works with either of two different control panel types:
Basic Control Panel -This panel (described in section Basic Control Panel on
page 62) provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values.
Assistant Control Panel -This panel (described below) includes pre-programmed
assistants to automate the most common parameter setups. The panel provides
language support. It is available with different language sets.

Compatibility
The manual is compatible with the following panel versions:
Basic Control Panel: ACS-CP-C Rev. K
Assistant Control Panel (Area 1): ACS-CP-A Rev. Y
Assistant Control Panel (Area 2): ACS-CP-L Rev. E
Assistant Control Panel (Asia): ACS-CP-D Rev. M
See page 45 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel. See
parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to see the languages supported by the different Assistant
Control Panels.

Control panels
 ACS550 User's Manual

Assistant Control Panel

Features
The Assistant Control Panel features:
alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display
language selection for the display
Start-up Assistant to ease drive commissioning
copy function - parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.
context sensitive help
real time clock

Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant
Control Panel.
No. Use
1 Status LED -Green for normal operation. If LED is flashing, or red, see
section Diagnostfc displays on page 243.
2 LCD display - Divided into three main areas:
a. Status line - variable, depending on the mode of operation, see section
Status line on page 43.
b. Center- variable; in general, shows signal and parameter values, menus 01
lists. Shows also faults and alarms.
c. Bottom line - shows current functions of the two soft keys and, if enabled,
the clock display.
3 1Soft kev 1 -Function deoends on the context. The text in the lower left corner
of the LCDdisplay indicates the function.
4 Soft key 2 - Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right
corner of the LCD display indicates the function.
5
.uScrolls
p-
up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
Increments a value if a parameter is selected.
.Increments
I ~ o l d i the
the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
n ~ key down changes the value fastei
. .

6 I~own-
Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD
display.
Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.
. - -
Decrements the reference value if the upper riqht corner is hiqhliqhted.
l ~ o l d i the
n ~ key down changes the value faster.-
7 ILOCIREM - Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
1 8 IHelw - Disolavs context sensitive infomlation when the kev is Dressed. The I
info'rmatio" dLplayed describes the item currently highlighted'in the center of
the display.
9 STOP - Stops the drive in local control.
10 START- Starts the drive in local control.

Control panels
ACS550 User's Manual

Status line
The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.
LOC & M A I N MENU---- 1

00 @ 00 0 @
No. l ~ i e l d l~lternatives Significance
1 Icontrol location ILOC IDrive control is local, that is, from the control
panel.
REM IDrive control is remote, such as the drive I10 or

-
Rotating arrow [Drive is running at setpoint.

I .,
Dotted stationary arrow Istart command is present, but the motor is not
running, e.g. because start enable is missing.
3 Panel operation Name of the current mode
mode Name of the list or menu shown
Name of the operation state, e.g. PAR EDIT.
4 l~eferencevalue I 1. Reference value in the Outout mode
or number of the Number of the highlighted item, e.g mode,
selected item parameter group or fault.

Operation
You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two context-
sensitive soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the
display above each key.
You select an option, e.g. operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and a
arrow keys until the option is highlighted (in reverse video) and then pressing
the relevant soft key. With the right soft key you usually enter a mode, accept an
option or save the changes. The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes
and return to the previous operation level.
The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes: Output, Parameters, Assistants,
Changed Parameters, Fault Logger, Clock Set, Parameter Backup, I10 Settings and
Fault. The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter. When a fault
or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or
alarm. You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter Diagnostics).

Control panels
 ACS550 User's Manual

Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you can

start, stop, change the direction, switch between local and
remote control, modify the reference value and monitor up
to three actual values. To do other tasks, go first to the
Main menu and select the appropriate. ~~
mode on the menu.
The status line (see section Statusline on page 43) shows
the name of the current menu, mode, item or state.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
How to do common tasks EXIT 0o:Oo I T i E i T -
The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and
the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to get help Any 45
How to find out the panel version At power up 45
How to adjust the display contrast Output 48
How to switch between local and remote control Any 46
How to start and stor, the drive Anv 46
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 47
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference Output 48
How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 49
How to select the monitored signals Parameters 50
How to do guided tasks (specification of related parameter sets) Assistants 51
with assistants
-- ..- ..- ----.--.. ...........
and ed,! cnangcd parameters
... .............. ............
Hon to b ebi fa-11s
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 249
How to showlhide the clock, change date and time formats, set the Clock Set 56
clock and enableldisable automatic clock transitions according to
the daylight saving changes
--.-
how lo copy parameters from the d r i e i o the control panel Parameter Dacn-p
.....
I.IO.V to restore ~arametersfrom the coXir&~oanel lo tho dr.be Parameter B a c n ,~
~ ~ ~o
How to view backup information I Parameter Backup 1I 60
w i n g e pndraararneter ngs GI

Controlpanels
 ACS550 Useis Manual 45

How to get help

I Step / Action I Dis~lav I

How to find out the panel version

Step Action Display

If the power is switched on, switch it off.

Keep key @pressed down while you switch on the power and read the PANEL V E R S I O N I N F O
information. The display shows the following panel information: Panel FW:
ROM CRC: XXXXXXXXXX
Panel FW: panel firmware version F l a s h Rev:
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ROM CRC: panel ROM check sum
Flash Rev: flash content version
Flash content comment.
When you release the a key, the panel goes to the Output mode.

Control panels
46 ACS550 User's Manual

How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action I Display I
.TO switch between remote control (REM shown on the status line) and local
control (LOC shown on the status line), press @.

Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL
LOCK.

The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM) and
controlled through the drive I10 terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and
control the drive using the control panel, press @.The result depends on
how long you press the key:
If you release the key immediately (the display flashes "Switching to the local
control mode"). the drive stoos. Set the local control reference as instructed
on page 48
- The
If you press the key for about two seconds, the drive continues as before.
drive coDies the current remote values for the runistoo status and the
reference, and uses them as the initial local control settings

T o stop the drive in local control, press a. The arrow (C or 4 ) on the

status line stops rotating.

T o start the drive in local control, press a. The arrow ( bor 4 ) on the
Status line starts rotating. It
is dotted until the drive
reaches the setpoint.

Control panels
ACS550 User's Manual

Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
monitor actual values of up to three signals in Group 01: OPERATING DATA
change the direction of the motor rotation
set the speed, frequency or torque reference
adjust the display contrast
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control
You get to the Output mode by pressing @ repeatedly.
The top right corner of the
display shows the reference
value. The center can be
configured to show up to three
signal values or bar graphs; see
page 50 for instructions on
selecting and modifying the monitored signals.
How to change the direction o f the motor rotation

Control panels
 ACS550 Useis Manual

How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference

Action 1 Display 1
If you are not in the Output mode, press @ repeatedly until you get there.
4 9 . 1 HZ
10.7 %
DIR 00:oo rimu-
If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status line), switch to local
control by pressing @.The display briefly shows a message about changing 4 9 . 1 HZ
the mode and then returns to the Output mode.
Note: With Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT, you can allow the reference 10.7 %
modification in remote control. DIR 0o:oo r-mizr

display, pressa. The value changes immediately. It is stored in the drive 50.0 HZ
permanent memoly and restored automatically after power switch-off.
To decrease the value, press w. 10.7 %
DIR 00:oo 1MENU
How to adjust the display contrast
Action Display

If you are not in the Output mode, press @ repeatedly until you get there.
4 9 . 1 HZ
10.7 %
To increase the contrast, press keys 9 and simultaneously.
To decrease the contrast, press keys and simultaneously. 4 9 . 1 HZ
10.7 %

Control oanels
ACS550 User's Manual

Parameters mode
In the Parameters mode, you can:
view and change parameter values
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
How to select a parameter and change its value

press ~ [ L O C E P A R EDIT-
9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
LIJ
CANCEL 00:oo rn
Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and w.
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key 9902 A P P L I C MACRO
down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 3-WIRE
displayed value with the default value.
TEiKEr 00:00 m
T o save the new value, press e.
T o cancel the new value and keep the original, press v.
C~~NCEL
9901 LANGUAGE

9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
EXIT 00:oo m

Control panels
50 ACS550 User's Manual

How to select the monitored signals

Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they
are displayed with Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page 4 9 for
detailed instructions on changing parameter values. OUTPUT FREQ
By default, the display shows three signals. The particular default signals
depend on the value of parameter 9 9 0 2 ~ MACRO:~ ~ ~For 1 macros
~ whose
default value of parameter 9 9 0 4 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 (VECTOR:SPEED), the
default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED, othetwise 0103 OUTPUT FREO. The defaults
for signals 2 and 3 are always 0 1 0 4 CURRENT and O I O ~ T O R O U E ,respectively.
To change the default signals, select up to three signals from Group 01:
OPERATING DATA to be shown.
CURRENT
L o C b PAR E D I T

3408

m1
i
C1041
IICANCEL
SIGNAL^ PARAM

0O:OO
LOC b P A R E D I T
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL^ PARAM to the index of
the signal parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA (= number of the 3 4 1 5 S I G N A L 3 PARAM
parameter without the leading zero). e.g. 105 means parameter O I O ~ T O R O U E . TORQUE
Value 100 means that no signal is displayed.
Repeat for signals 2 ( 3 4 0 8 SIGNAL^ PARAM) and 3 ( 3 4 1 5 SIGNAL^ PARAM).
I
2. Select how you want the signals to be displayed: as a decimal number or a bar LOC b PAR E D I T
graph. For decimal numbers, you can specify the decimal point location, or use 3404 OUTPUTl DSP FORM
the decimal point location and unit of the source signal [setting ( 9 (DIRECT)]. For DIRECT
details, see parameter 3404.
Signal 1: parameter 3 4 0 4 OUTPUT^ DSP FORM CANCEL 00:00 n X F
Signal 2: parameter 3 4 1 1 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM
Signal 3: parameter 3 4 1 8 OUTPUT^ DSP FORM.

3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has no effect if parameter LOC P, PAR E D I T
34041341113418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). For details. see parameter 3 4 0 5 . 3 4 0 5 OUTPUT1 U N I T
Signal 1: parameter 3 4 0 5 OUTPUT^ UNIT
Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT^ UNIT
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT^ UNIT. CANCEL 00: 00 r3xE-
4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum
display values. This has no effect if parameter 34041341113418 is set to 9 3 4 0 6 OUTPUT1 M I N
(DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3 4 0 6 and 3407. 0 . 0 Hz
Signal 1: parameters 3 4 0 6 OUTPUT^ MIN and 3 4 0 7 0 ~ MAX ~ ~ ~ ~ 1
Signal 2: parameters 3 4 1 3 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3 4 1 4 OUTPUT^ MAX CANCEL 00:00 E Z V r
Signal 3: parameters 3 4 2 0 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3 4 2 1 o u ~ p u r 3MAX. LOC P, PAR E D I T

I/
3 4 0 7 O U T P U T 1 MAX
500.0 HZ 1

Control panels
ACS550 Useis Manual 51

Assistants mode
When the drive is first powered up, the Start-up Assistant guides you through the
setup of the basic parameters. The Start-up Assistant is divided into assistants, each
of which guides you through the task of specifying a related parameter set, for
example Motor Set-up or PID Control. You can activate the assistants one after the
other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently. The tasks of the
assistants are listed in the table on page 52.
In the Assistants mode, you can:
use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control
How to use an assistant
The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through
assistants. The Motor Set-up Assistant is used as an example.
Step Action Display

1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode, otherwise
by pressing @ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR

Select the assistant with keys and v,

and press +. LOC & P A R EDIT
If you select any other assistant than the Start-up Assistant, it guides you 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. and 5.
below. Afterthat you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit
the Assistants mode. The Motor Set-up Assistant is used here as an example.

If you select the Stahup Assistant, it activates the first assistant, which guides
you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4.
and 5. below. The Stahup Assistant then asks if you want to continue with the
next assistant or skip it - seiect the appropriate answer with keys a and
w, and press +. i f you choose to skip, the Start-up Assistant asks the
same question about the next assistant, and so on.

4. To specify a new value, press keys aand LOC & P A R EDIT

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT

.To ask for information on the requested parameter, press key a.

help text with keys aand v.
Close the help by pressing e.
Scroll the

Control panels
52 ACS550 User's Manual

Step Action Display

5. .Topressaccept
q.
SAVE
the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter, LOC L P A R EDIT

9906 MOTOR NOM CURR

To stop the assistant, press @.

The table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters.
Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO), the Start-up Assistant decides, which consequent tasks it suggests.
1 Name 1 Description I Set ~arameters I
Language select I Selecting the language 9901
Motor set-up Setting the motor data 9904...9909
Performing the motor identification. (If the speed limits are not in 9910
I the allowed range: Setting the limits:)
Application I Selecting the application macro 1 9902, parameters associated to
the macro
Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEA S
Group 52: PANEL COMM
9802
Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1103
EXTl (If A l l is used: Setting analog input A l l limits, scale, inversion) (1301... 1303, 3001)
Setting the reference limits 1104, 1105
Setting the speed (frequency) limits 2001, 2002, (2007, 2008)
Setting the acceleration and deceleration times 2202, 2203
Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1106
EXT2 (If A l l is used: Setting analog input A l l limits, scale. inversion) (1301... 1303, 3001)
Setting the reference limits 1107. 1108
Torque control Selecting the source for the torque reference 1106
(If A l l is used: Setting analog input A l l limits, scale, inversion) (1301... 1303, 3001)
Setting the reference limits 1107, 1108

PID control I
Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times
Selecting the source for the process reference
(If A l l is used: Setting analog input A l l limits. scale, inversion)
/
2401, 2402
1106
(1301... 1303, 3001)
1
Setting the reference limits 1107, 1108
Setting the speed (reference) limits 2001, 2002, (2007, 2008)
Setting
.the source and limits for the process actual value I
4016. 4018. 4019
Startistop control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 1001, 1002
control locations. EXTI and EXT2
Selecting between EXTl and EXTZ 1102
Defining the direction control 1003
Defining the start and stop modes 2101...2103
Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601
Timed functions Setting the timed functions Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS
Selecting the timed startlstop control for external control locations 1001, 1002
EXTI and EXT2
Selecting timed EXTIIEXTZ control
Activation of timed constant speed 1

Control oanels
ACS550 User's Manual 53

Name Description Set parameters

Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1401
Selecting timed PlDl parameter set 112 control 4027
Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003, 201 7
Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS
Selecting the signals indicated through analog output A 0 Group 15: ANALOG OUTPUTS
I I Setting the minimum, maximum, scaling and inversion I I

Control panels
 ACS550 User's Manual

Changed Parameters mode

In the Changed Parameters mode, you can:
view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default
values
change these parameters
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control
How to view and edit changed parameters
-
Step Action Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode, otherwise
by pressing @ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR

9902 APPLIC-MACRO-
EXIT 00:oo m
Select the changed parameter on the list with keysa w. and The
value of the selected parameter is shown below it. Press to modify the
value. 10.0 H z

down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the
displayed value with the default value.

T o cancel the new value and keep the original, press m.

CANCEL

Control panels
ACS550 User's Manual

Fault Logger mode

In the Fault Logger mode, you can:
- view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults (after a power off, only the three
latest faults are kept in the memory)
see the details of the three latest faults (after a power off, the details of only the
most recent fault is kept in the memory)
read the help text for the fault
- start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
How to view faults
Step Action Display

1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode, otherwise
by pressing @ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
2.
keys and and pressing
starting with the latest fault.
w.
Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with
w, The display shows the fault log

The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and
corrective actions are listed in chapter Diagnostics.

3. To see the details of a fault, select it with keys rn and w,and press
"9. FAULT TIME 1
13:04:57
FAULT TIME 2

4. To show the help text, press

w.
e. Scroll the help text with keys rn and Check: comm l i n e s
and c o n n e c t i o n s ,
After reading the help, press to return to the previous display. parameter 3002,
arameters i n groups
EXIT 00:oo r

Control panels
 ACS550 User's Manual

Clock Set mode

In the Clock Set mode, you can:
show or hide the clock
change date and time display formats
- set the date and time
enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving
changes
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock
when the panel is not powered by the drive.
How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time and enable
or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes
I Step I Action I Dis~iav I
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing 9 if you are in the Output mode, othelwise I~LOC G M A I N MENU- 1
1
by pressing @ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
2.
rn and w, and pressing w.
Go to the Clock Set mode by selecting CLOCK SET on the menu with keys

and select a suitable format. Press

changes.
e
T o specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on the menu, press
to save or p
CAUCEL
to cancel your

ICANCEL00:oo 1 1
and select a suitable format. Press
changes.
e to save or Ce +
T o specify the time format, select TlME FORMAT on the menu, press
to cancel your

ICANCEL~00:oo 1
1
T o set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and press +. Specify the
hours with keys and w, and press e . ~ h e specify
n the minutes.
Press
OK
to save orpCANCEL
to cancel your changes.

Control panels
ACS550 User's Manual 57

Step Action Display

--
a
Lo= bSET DATE
To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and press e. Specify the
first part ofthe date (day or month depending on the selected date format) with
keys and iI/,
specifying the year, press e.+.
and press Repeat for the second part. After
To cancel your changes, press m.
CANCEL
El.03.05
CANCEL 00:oo r"-m-

saving changes, select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press e.

T o enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight

Pressing @ opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the
period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area
whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed.
To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving
changes, select Off and press +. On: Mar l a s t sunday
Off: o c t l a s t Sunday

daylight saving changes are followed and press e.

To enable automatic clock transitions, select the country or area whose

To return to the previous display without making changes, press @.

EXIT 0O:OO 1

Control panels
 ACS550 User's Manual

Parameter Backup mode

The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another
or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading to the panel stores all drive
parameters, including up to two user sets, to the Assistant Control Panel. The full
set, partial parameter set (application) and user sets can then be downloaded from
the control panel to another drive or the same drive.
The control panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend on the panel battery.
In the Parameter Backup mode, you can:
copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (UPLOAD TO PANEL).
This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by
the user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run.
- view the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD
TO PANEL (BACKUP INFO). This includes e.g. the type and rating of the drive
where the backup was made. It is useful to check this information when you are
going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to
ensure that the drives match.
restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
FULL SET). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable
motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer
parameters to systems that are identical to the original system.
copy a partial parameter set (part of the full set) from the control panel to a drive
(DOWNLOAD APPLICATION). The partial set does not include user sets, internal
motor parameters, parameters 9905 ... 9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any Group
51: EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SETI). A user set includes Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters and
the internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User parameter sets on page
81) and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL.
copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SET2). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above.
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

Controlpanels
ACS550 User's Manual

How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above
I Step I Action I Display I
Go to the Main menu by pressing 9 if you are in the Output mode, otherwise
by pressing @ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

want to stop the operation.

After the upload is completed, the display shows a message about the
completion. Press to return to the Copy menu.

m00 :00 -1
1
.To perform downloads, select the appropriate operation (here DOWNLOAD
a .. - . .
w.and press e.
FULL SET is used as an example) on the Copy menu with keys and .-

I I
The display shows the transier status as a
percentage of completion. Press @ if you want stop the operation.

After the download is completed, the display shows a message about the LOC GMESSAGE
Parameter download
completion. press% to return to the Copy menu. successful ly
completed.

Control ~ a n e l s
60 ACS550 User's Manual

How to view information about the backup

and w,and pressing B.

press m. The display shows the following information about the drive where
the backup was made:
type of the drive
DRIVE RATING: rating o i the drive in format XXXYZ, where
XXX: nominal current rating. If present, a n " A indicates
a decimal point, e.g. 4A6 means 4.6 A.
Y: 2 = 200 v
4 = 400V
6 = 600V
Z: i = European loading package
n = US loading package
firmware version of the drive.

Control panels
ACS550 User's Manual

110 Settings mode

In the 110 Settings mode, you can:
check the parameter settings related to any 110 terminal
- edit the parameter setting. For example, if "1103: REFI" is listed under Ainl
(Analog input I ) , that is, parameter 1103 REFISELECT has value AII, you can
change its value to e.g. ~ 1 2You
. cannot, however, set the value of parameter 1106
REF2 SELECT to A l l .
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals

-DI3-

4.
and press e.
Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with keys
1 0 0 1 E X T l COMMANDS

5. Specify a new value for the setting with keys and w. LOC &PAR EDIT
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key

I I down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the
displayed value with the default value.

To cancel the new value and keep the original, press w.

Control panels
 ACS550 User's Manual

Basic Control Panel

Features
The Basic Control Panel features:
numeric control panel with an LCD display
copy function - parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.

Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control
Panel.
No. Use
1 LCD display - Divided into five areas:
a. Upper left- Control location:
LOC: drive control is local, that is, from the control panel
REM: drive control is remote, such as the drive I10 or fieldbus.
b. Upper right - Unit of the displayed value.
c. Center-Variable: in general, shows parameter and signal values, menus or
lists. Shows also fault and alarm codes.
d. Lower left and center - Panel operation state:
OUTPUT. Outout mode
PAR: ~arameiermode
MENU: Main menu
mm:Fault mode.
e. Lower right - Indicators:
FWD (forward) / REV (reverse): direction of the motor rotation
Flashing slowly: stopped
Flashing rapidly: running, not at setpoint
Steady: running, at setpoint
HiW DisDlaved
. . value can be modified (in the Parameter and Reference
modes).
RESETIEXIT- Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed
values. Resets faults in the Outout and Fault modes.
3 MENUIENTER - Enters deeper into menu level. In the Parameter mode,
saves the displayed value as the new setting.
4 Up-
Scrolls up through a menu or list.
Increases a value if a parameter is selected.
Increases the reference value in the Reference mode.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
5 Down-
Scrolls down through a menu or list.
Decreases a value if a parameter is selected.
Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 LOCIREM - Changes between local and remote control of the drive.

, ~- .
1
~~ ~~

I ~~~

9 ISTART - Statis the drive in local control.

Control panels
ACS550 Useis Manual

Operation
You operate the control panel with menus and keys. You select an option, e.g.
operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the a
and i ~ arrow
/ keys until the
option is visible in the display and then pressing the key.
With the key, you return to the previous operation level without saving the made
changes.
The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes: Output, Reference, Parameter, Copy
and Fault. The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter. When a
fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the
fault or alarm code. You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode (see
chapter Diagnostics).
After the power is switched on, the panel is in the
Output mode, where you can start, stop, change the
direction, switch between local and remote control and OUTPUT

EFq
monitor up to three actual values (one at a time). To do
other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
appropriate mode.
How to do common tasks
The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and
the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to switch between local and remote control l~nv 1, 64
How to start and stop the drive IA~Y
I '
1 64
How to change the direction of the motor rotation IA~Y 64
-
IHow to browse the monitored sipnals lout~ut 1I 65 1
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference 1 Reference
I '

1 66
How to change the value of a parameter 1 Parameter 67
-
[How to select the monitored siqnals II Parameter 14 68 1
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 1 249
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel COPY 70
IHow to restore parameters from the control ane el to the drive ~CODV 1 70 1

Control aanels
 64 ACS550 User's Manual

t How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action Display

T o switch between remote control (REM shown on the left) and local
control (LOC shown on the lefl), press @.
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 OUTPUT
LOCAL LOCK.
Afler pressing the key, the display briefly shows message ' L o C or YE",
as appropriate, before returning to the previous display.

The vety first time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM)
and controlled through the drive I10 terminals. To switch to local control
(LOC) and control the drive using the control panel, press @.The result
depends on how long you press the key:
If you release the key immediately (the display flashes 'LoC), the drive
stops. Set the local control reference as instructed on page 66.
If you press the key for about two seconds (release when the display
changes from "LoC to "LoC r"), the drive continues as before. The drive
copies the current remote values for the runistop status and the
reference, and uses them as the initial local control settings.

j
II II T o stop the dr~vein local control, press @
(

To start the drive in local control, press a

Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing slowly.
Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing rapidly. It
stops flashing when the drive
reaches the setpoint.

How to change the direction of the motor rotation

You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode.
Step Action Display
1. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the lefi), switch to local
control by pressing @.The display briefly shows message " L o r before
returning to the previous display. OUTPUT

4 9.1 1
2. To change the direction from forward (FWD shown at the bottom) to LOC
reverse (REV shown at the bottom), or vice versa, press B. HZ
OUTPUT REV
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 (REQUEST).

Control panels
 ACS550 Usefs Manual

Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
- monitor actual values of up to three Group 01: OPERATING DATA signals, one
signal at a time
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control
You get to the Output mode by pressing puntil the display shows text OUTPUT at
the bottom.
The display shows the value of one Group 01:
OPERATING DATA signal. The unit is shown on the
right. Page 68 tells how to select up to three signals to
be monitored in the Output mode. The table below
shows how to view them one at a time.
How to browse the monitored signals

1.
I
If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored (see page
68),you can browse them in the Output mode.
To browse the s~gnalsforward, press keyarepeatedly To browse
I

REM
lou~~"'
. .
4 9.1
FWD
Hz I]
them backward, press key repeatedly

OUTPUT

1
OUTPUT
-

Control panels
 ACS550 User's Manual

Reference mode
In the Reference mode, you can:
set the speed, frequency or torque reference
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference
Action Display
Go to the Main menu by pressing rn if you are in the Output mode,
otherwise by pressing repeatedly until you see MEN" at the bottom. /'EM PA r
I

m
MENU FWD

If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the left), switch to local
control by pressing @.The display briefly shows 'LoC before switching
to local control.
Note: With Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT, you can allow the reference
modification in remote control (REM).

If the panel is not in the Reference mode ('rEF not visible), press key
a or until you see "rEF and then press W.Now the display
shows the current reference value with !Zi3 under the value.

5i FWD

.To increase the reference value, press a.

To decrease the reference value, press W.
-
LOC
5 0.0 Hz
The value changes immediately when you press the key. It is stored in the
drive permanent memorv and restored automaticaliv after oower switch-off.
I 5i FWD
1

Control panels
ACS5.50 Usefs Manual

Parameter mode
In the Parameter mode, you can:
view and change parameter values
select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control
How to select a parameter and change its value
Step Action Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode.

otherwise by pressing repeatedly until you see MENU at the boltom.

If the panel is not in the Parameter mode ("PA< not visible), press key
/r7 or until you see "PA? and then press m. The display
shows the number of one of the parameter groups.

01
Use keys aand w to find the desired parameter group.

Press
group.
v. The display shows one of the parameters in the selected

aand
Use keys to find the desired parameter.
1103
Press and hold for about two seconds until the display shows the
value of the parameterwith rn underneath indicating that changing of the
LOC
1
I I 1
value is now possible. PAR nril FWD
Note: When is visible, pressing keys a and
simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the
parameter.

7. Use keys and to select the parameter value. When you have
changed the parameter value. B3i starts flashing.
LOC

PAR
2FWD

m.
T o save the displayed parameter value, press
T o cancel the new value and keep the original, press v. 1103

Control panels
68 ACS550 User's Manual

How to select the monitored signals

Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how
they are displayed with Group 34: P A N E L D I S P L A Y parameters. See page
4 9 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values.
LOC
10
rn
PAR
3 - -
FWD I
By default, you can monitor three signals by browsing (see page 65). The
particular default sianals
- depend on the value of ~arameter 9 9
MACRO: For macros whose default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL
0 2 ~ ~ ~
LOC
~ 1 ~ 104
--
rn
PAR
-
FWD
MODE is 1 (VECTOR:SPEED), the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED. otheiwise
0103 OUTPUT FREQ. The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0 1 0 4
CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE, respectively.
PAR rn FWD
To change the default signals, select from Group 01: OPERATING DATA
I up to three signals to be browsed
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index
of the signal parameter in Group 01: O P E R A T I N G DATA (= number of the
parameter without the leading zero), e.g. 105 means parameter 0105
TORQUE. Value 100 means that no signal is displayed.

Repeat for signals 2 ( 3 4 0 8 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3 (3415 SIGNAL^ PARAM).

For example, if 3 4 0 1 = 0 and 3 4 1 5 = 0, browsing is disabled and only the
signal specified by 3 4 0 8 appears in the display. If all three parameters are
set to 0, i.e. no signals are selected for monitoring, the panel displays text
%.A.

2. Specib the decimal point location, or use the decimal point location and
unit of the source signal [setting (9 (DIRECT)]. Bar graphs are not available
for Basic Operation Panel. For details, see parameter 3 4 0 4 . PAR an FWD
Signal 1: parameter 3 4 0 4 OUTPUT^ DSP FORM
Signal 2: parameter 3 4 1 1 OUTPUT:! DSP FORM
Signal 3: parameter 3 4 1 8 OUTPUT^ OSP FORM.

3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has no effect if
parameter 3404/341113418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). For details. see
parameter 3 4 0 5 .
Signal 1: parameter 3 4 0 5 OUTPUT^ UNIT
I"'/ PAR FWD

Signal 2: parameter 3 4 1 2 OUTPUT^ UNIT

Signal 3: parameter 3 4 1 9 OUTPUT^ UNIT.

4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and
maximum display values. This has no effect if parameter 3404/341113418is
set to 9 (DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407.
Signal 1: parameters 3 4 0 6 OUTPUTI MIN and 3 4 0 7 OUTPUT^ MAX
1- PAR W FWD

Signal 2: parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3 4 1 4 OUTPUT:! MAX

Signal 3: parameters 3 4 2 0 o u r p u r 3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT^ MAX. PAR W FWD

Control panels
ACS550 User's Manual 69

Copy mode
The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user
sets of drive parameters to the control panel. The control panel memory is non-
volatile.
In the Copy mode, you can:
copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (uL - Upload). This
includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by the
user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run.
restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (dL A - Download
All). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable motor
parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to
systems that are identical to the original system.
copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive (dL P - Download
Partial). The partial set does not include user sets, internal motor parameters,
parameters 9905 ...9909, 1605, 1607,5201,nor any Group 51: EXT COMM
MODULE and Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
- copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u l -Download
User Set 1). A user set includes Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters and the
internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section Userparameter sets on page
81) and then uploaded to panel.
copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u2 - Download
User Set 2). As dL u l - Download User Set 1 above.
start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

Confrol panels
 ACS550 User's Manual

How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above.
Step Action Display

rn
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing
otherwise by pressing
if you are in the Output mode.
repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom. ILoC PAT 1
I I
2. If the panel is not in the Copy mode ('COPY" not visible), press key
or until you see "COPY.

MENU FWD

3. - panel,
To upload all parameters (including user sets) from the drive to the control LOC
.

step to 'uL" with keys /r7 and w. uL

MENU FWD

Press m. During the transfer, the display shows the transfer status as a LoC
percentage of completion.
FWD
-
T o perform downloads, step to the appropriate operation (here "dL A ,
Download All, is used as an example) with keys and v. 'OC dL A
MENU FWD

m.
Press During the transfer, the display shows the transfer status as a
dL 50
LOC
percentage of completion. %
I FWD

Basic Control Panel alarm codes

In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive (see chapter Diagnostics),
the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx.
See section Alarm codes (Basic Control Panel) on page 253 for a list of the alarm
codes and descriptions.

Controlpanels
ACS550 User's Manual

Application macros

Macros change a group of parameters to new, predefined values. Use macros to

minimize the need for manual editing of parameters. Selecting a macro sets all other
parameters to their default values, except:
Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters (except parameter 9904)
1602 PARAMETER LOCK
1607 PARAM SAVE
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME

9802 COMM PROT SEL

Group 50: ENCODER ... Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters
Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG parameters.
After selecting a macro, you can make additional parameter changes manually with
the control panel.
You enable application macros by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO. By default, 1. ABB STANDARD, is the enabled macro.

The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a
connection example for each macro.
The last section in this chapter, Macro default values for parameters, lists the
parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each
macro.

Application macros
72 ACS550 User's Manual

ABB Standard macro

This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose, 2-wire I10 configuration,
with three (3) constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values defined in
section Complete parameter list on page 85.
Connection example:
XI
Signal cable shield (screen)
External frequency reference 1: O... 10 V'
Analog input circuit common
Reference voltage 10 V DC

Analog input circuit common

Output frequency: 0...20 mA
Output current: 0...20 mA
Analog output circuit common
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC
Auxilialy voltage output common
Digital input common for all
Startistop: Activate to start
FwdlRev: Activate to reverse rotation direction
Constant speed selection2
Constant speed selection2
Ramp pair selection: Activate to select 2nd accldec ramp pair

Relay output 1, programmable

Default operation:
Ready =>19 connected to21
Relay output 2, programmable
Default operation:
Running =>22 connected to 24
Relay output 3, programmable
Default operation:
Fault (-1)=>25 connected to 27
(Fault =7 25 connected to 26)

Input signals Output signals Jumper setting

- Analog reference (All)
. Start, stop and direction (D11.2)
. Constant speed selection (013.4)
Ramp pair ( I of 2) selection (D15)
Analog output AOl: Frequency
Analog output A02: Current
Relay output 1: Ready
@ A l l : O...IOV
A12: 0(4) ...20 mA
L
Relay output 2: Running or
Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
All: O...IOV

Application macros
ACS550 Useis Manual 73

3-wire macro
This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It
provides three (3) constant speeds. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to
2 (3-WIRE).
Note: When the stop input ( ~ 1 2 is
) deactivated (no input), the control panel staNstop
buttons are disabled.
Connection example:
XI
Signal cable shield (screen)
External speed reference 1: 0...10 V
Analog input circuit common
Reference voltage 10 V DC
Not used
Analog input circuit common
Motor output speed: 0...20 mA
Output current: 0...20 mA
Analog output circuit common
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC
Auxiliary voltage output common
Digital input common for all
Start: Momentary activation with Dl2 activated starts the drive
Stop: Momentary deactivation stops the drive
FwdlRev: Activation reverses rotation direction
Constant speed selection'
Constant speed selection'
Not used

Relay output 1, programmable

Default operation:
Ready =>I9 connected to 21
, -connected
Relay output 2, programmable
Default operation:
Running =>22 connected to 24
Relay output 3, programmable
Default operation:
Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

-
Input signals
Analog reference (All)
Start, stop and direction (DI1.2,3)
Constant speed selection (D14,5)
.
-
Output signals
Analog output A01: Speed
Analog output A02: Current
Relay output 1: Ready
Relay
. output 2: Running
~

Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

a
".
nr
Jumper setting

~ A I I : O...lOV
A12: O(4). ..20 mA

A l l : O...lOV

Application macros
74 ACS550 Usefs Manual

Alternate macro
This macro provides an 110 configuration adopted to a sequence of Dl control
signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor. To enable, set the
value of parameter 9902 to 3 (ALTERNATE).
Connection example:
XI
Signal cable shield (screen)
External speed reference 1: 0...10 V
Analog input circuit common
Reference voltage 10 V DC
Not used
Analog input circuit common
Motor output speed: 0...20 mA
Output current: 0...20 mA
Analog output circuit common

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

Auxiliaty voltage output common
Digital input common for all
Start fwd: If Dl1 state is the same as D12, the drive stops
Start reverse
Constant speed selection'
Constant speed selection'
Ramp pair selection: Activation selects 2nd accldec ramp pair
Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive

Relay output 1, programmable

Default operation:
Ready =>I9 connected to 21 0 = open, 1 = connected
Relay output 2, programmable
Default operation: 1
Running =222 connected to 24 D O
1 0 CONST SPEED 1 (1202)
Relay output 3, programmable
Default operation: 0 1 CONST SPEED 2 (1203)
Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27 1 I CONST SPEED 3 (1m4)
(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

-
Input signals
Analog reference (All)
Start, stop and direction (D11,2)
Constant speed selection (D13,4)
Ramp . .pair 112 selection (D15)
. .
-
Output signals
Analog output AOl: Speed
Analog output A02: Current
Relay output 1: Ready
Relav
. output
. 2: Runninq -
6
,,
",
nr
g
Jumper setting

' A I I : ~ ... 1OV

A12: O(4) ... 20 mA

Run enable (D16) Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

Application macros
ACS550 User's Manual 75

Motor Potentiometer macro

This macro provides a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the
motor using only digital signals. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to
4 (MOTOR POT).
Connection example:
XI
Signal cable shield (screen)
Not used
Analog input circuit common
Reference voltage 10 V DC
Not used
Analog input circuit common
Motor output speed: 0...20 mA
Output current: 0...20 mA
Analog output circuit common

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

Auxiliary voltage output common
Digital input common for all
Startlstop: Activation starts the drive.
Forwardlreverse: Activation reverses rotation direction
Reference up: Activation increases the reference'
Reference down: Activation decreases the reference'
Constant speed I:1202
Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive.

Relay output 1, programmable

Default operation:
Ready =>I9 connected to 21
Relay output 2, programmable
Default operation:
Running =>22 connected to 24
Relay output 3, programmable
Default operation:
Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
(Fault => 25 connected to 26)
I
Note 1. For Dl3 and D14:
If both are active or inactive the
speed reference is unchanged.
The existing speed reference is
stored during stop or power down.
Note 2.
-
Set1 ngs of lne ramp Imes A m
acce erallon and oece8eral on llrne
2 (parameters 2205 an0 2206)

input signals Output signals Jumper setting

- . Analog output A01: Speed
- Start, stop and direction (D11,2)
Reference upldown (D13.4)
Constant speed selection (D15)
. Analog output A02: Current
. Relay output 1: Ready
Run enable (D16) Relay output 2: Running or
. Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

Application macros
 76 ACS550 User's Manual

I Hand-Auto macro
This macro provides an 110 configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications.
To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 (HANDIAUTO).

Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting, 0 (OFF).

Connection example:
XI
Signal cable shield (screen)
External reference I: 0...10 V(Hand Control)
Analog input circuit common
Reference voltage 10 V DC
External reference 2: 0...20 mA (Auto Control)
Analog input circuit common
Motor output speed: 0...20 mA
Output current: 0...20 mA
Analog output circuit common

i
10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC
11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 Dl1 StartlStop (Hand): Activation starts the drive
14 Dl2 ForwardlReverse (Hand): Activation reverses rotation direction
15 Dl3 EXTIIEXTZ Selection: Activation selects auto control
16 014 Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive
17 Dl5 ForwardlReverse (Auto): Activation reverses rotation direction
18 StaNStop (Auto): Activation starts the drive
Relay output 1, programmable
Default operation:
Readv =>I9 connected to 21
Relay output 2, programmable
Default operation:
Running =>22 connected to 24
Relay output 3, programmable
Default operation:
Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Input signals Output signals Jumper setting

Two analog references (All, 2)
Startlstop - handlauto (DII, 6)
-- Direction - handlauto (D12, 5)
Control location selection (D13)
- Analog output AOl: Speed
6
. Analog output A02: Current 'AII: O...IOV
Relay output 1: Ready
. Relay output 2: Running or
A12: O(4) ...20 mA

Run enable (D14) Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

All: 0...10V

Application macros
ACS550 User's Manual 77

PID Control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as
pressure control, flow control, etc. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to
6 (PID CONTROL).

Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting, 0 (OFF)

Connection example:

Signal cable shield (screen)

External ref. I(Manual) or Ext ref. 2 (PID): 0...10 V'
Analog input circuit common
Reference voltage 10 V DC I: O... 10V => speed reference
Actual signal (PID): 4...20 mA ... IOV=> O...IOO%PID
Analog input circuit common
Motor output speed: 0...20 mA
Outout current: 0...20 mA
Analog output circuit common Note 3.
The sensor needs to be powered.
Auxiliary voltage output +24 v DC See the manufacturer's instructions.
~ ~ vo\tage~ i output ~ ~ A~
l icommon connection example of a two-wire
Digital input common for all sensor is shown on page 80.
StafflStop (Hand): Activation starts the drive
EXTIIEXTZ selection: Activation selects PID control
Constant speed selection I: (Not used in PID c o n t r o ~ ) ~
Constant speed selection 2: (Not "sea in P D c o n ~ r o l ) ~
Run enable: Deacr vat on a ways stops the arlw
StafflStop (PID): Activation starts the drive

Relay output 1, programmable

Default operation:
Ready =>I9 connected to 21 =open. = connece
Relay output 2, programmable
Default operation:
Running =>22 connected to 24
Relay output 3, programmable
Default operation:
Fault (-1)=>25 connected to 27
(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

-- Input signals
Analog reierence (All)
Actual value (A12) .
Output signals
Analog output AOl: Speed
Analog output A02: Current
Jumper setting

- -
Startlstop hand1PID (DII. 6) .
.
Relay output 1: Ready
",
EXTllEXT2 selection (012)
. . Relay
. output 2: Running -.
Constant speed selection (013, 4) . ~

Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

Run enable (D15)
A12: O(4)... 20 mA
Note: Use the following switch-on order:
1. EXTIlEXT2
2. Run Enable
3. Start.

Application macros
78 ACS550 Use& Manual

PFC macro
This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (PFC) applications.
To enable. set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 (PFC CONTROL).

Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting, 0 (OFF).

Connection example:
XI
I i n rohm,ll ISCR I Signal cable shield (screen)
~'ternal ref. I( ~ a n u a lo;) Ext ref. 2 (PIDIPFC): O... 10 V'
Analog input circuit common
Reference voltage 10 V DC

7 ]A01
8 [A02
Actual signal (PID): 4...20 mA
- .
Analoa i n ~ ucircuit
t common
Output frequency: 0...20 mA
. - ---

Actual 1 (PI controller actual value): O(4) ... 20 mA

9 IAGND Analog output circuit common

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

Auxiliary voltage output common
Digital input common for all
StartlStop (Manual): Activation starts the drive
Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive
EXTIIEXT2 selection: Activation selects PFC control
Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive
interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor
StartlStop (PFC): Activation starts the drive

Relay output 1, programmable

Default operation:
Running =>I9 connected to 21
connection example of a two-wire
Relay output 2, programmable
Default operation:
Fault (-1) =>22 connected to 24 (Fault => 22 connected to 23)
Relay output 3, programmable
Default operation:
Auxiliary motor switched on=>25 connected to 27

Input signals Output signals Jumper setting

Analog ref. and actual (All, 2)
Startlstop - manualIPFC (DII, 6)
- Run enable (012)
- EXTllEXT2 selection (013)
Interlock (D14, 5)
Analog output AOl: Frequency jq
- Analog output A02: Actual 1 ) 'All: 0.. . l o V
- Relay output 1: Running B A l 2 : 0(4).. .20 mA
Relay output 2: Fault (-1) nr
.
Relay output 3: Aux. motor ON

m ~ 1 2O(4).
: ..20 mA
Note: Use the following switch-on order:
1. EXTlIEXT2
2. Run Enable
3. Start.

Application macros
ACS550 User's Manual 79

Torque Control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of
the motor. Control can also be switched to speed control. To enable, set the value of
parameter 9902 to 8 (TORQUE CTRL).
Connection example:
X1
Signal cable shield (screen)
External speed reference 1: 0.. . I 0 V
Analog input circuit common
Reference voltage 10 V DC
External torque reference: 4...20 mA
Analog input circuit common
Motor output speed: 0...20 mA
Output current: 0...20 mA
Reverses rotation direction in
Analog output circuit common
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC
Auxiliary voltage output common
Digital input common for all
Startlstop: Activation starts the drive.
Forwardlreverse: Activation reverses direction'
Speedltorque control: Activation selects torque control
Constant speed I:1202
Ramp pair selection: Activate to select 2nd accldec ramp pair
Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive
Relay output 1, programmable
Default operation:
Ready =>I9 connected to 21
Relay output 2, programmable
Default operation: sensor is shown on page 80.
Running =>22 connected to 24
Relay output 3, programmable
Default operation:
- . . .- - - Fault 1-11 =>25 connected to 27
(~ault'=;25 connected to 26)

Input signals
- Two analog references (All, 2) . AnalogOutput signals
output A01: Speed
Jumper setting

Startlstop and direction (Dll, 2) Analog output A02: Current A l l : 0...10V

- Speedltorque control (D13) Relay output 1: Ready
- Constant speed selection (D14) - Relay output 2: Running or
Ramp pair 112 selection (D15) . Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
Run enable (D16) All: 0...10V
A12: O(4)... 20 mA

Application macros
80 ACS550 User's Manual

Connection example of a two-wire sensor

Many applications use process PI(D) and need a feedback signal from the process.
The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 (A12). The macro wiring
diagrams in this chapter show the connection when a separately powered sensor is
used. The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two-wire sensor.
X I I control board

Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output. Thus the output signal must
be 4...20 mA, not 0...20 m A.

Application macros
ACS550 User's Manual

User parameter sets

In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to save two user
parameter sets into the permanent memory and load them at a later time. A user
parameter set consists of the user parameter settings, including Group 99: START-
UP DATA, and the results of the motor identification. The panel reference is also
saved if the user parameter set is saved and loaded in local control. The remote
control setting is saved into the user parameter set, but the local control setting is
not.
The steps below show how to save and load User Parameter Set 1. The procedure
for User Parameter Set 2 is identical, only the parameter 9902 values are different.
To save User Parameter Set 1:
Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the
application but it is not done yet.
Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the
permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to -1 (USERs1 SAVE).
Press (Assistant Control Panel) or w (Basic Control Panel)
MENU

To load User Parameter Set 1:

Change parameter 9902 to 0 (USERs1 LOAD).
Press 9 (Assistant Control Panel) or w (Basic Control Panel) to load.
MENU

The user parameter set can also be switched through digital inputs (see parameter
1605).
Note: Loading the user parameter set restores the parameter settings including
Group 99: START-UP DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that
the settings correspond to the motor used.
Hint: The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having
to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the
motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor
identification once for each motor and then to save the data as two user parameter
sets. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding user parameter set needs
to be loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.

Application macros
82 ACS550 Useis Manual

Macro default values for parameters

Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameterlist on page 85.
Changing from the default macro (ABB Standard), that is, editing the value of
parameter 9902, changes the parameter default values as defined in the following
tables.

Note: There are two sets of values because the defaults are configured for 50 Hz/
IEC compliance (ACS550-01) and 60 HzlNEMA compliance (ACS550-UI).

Parameter g<
E 2
-
m
m L;
20
L
m
u

?
0
3
-
2
*
c
o
-2
A.

g 23
et;
.$ g3 u
h 0
"
4:3
V)
m
4: 0 L
$0"
p a a

Application macros
ACS550 User's Manual

Parameter
E 2
m
2
E:
L
m
+

s..;o
0
5
7
-
2
*
L3
o
-
-2
c :YzE
qg
3
"7
;Z -
o
m
I Q
a
o
0
2
a
26

(8123 1 PFC ENABLE I

Application macros
 ACS550 User's Manual

Application macros
ACS550 User's Manual

Parameters

Complete parameter list

The following table lists all parameters. Table header abbreviations are:
- S = Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped.
User = Space to enter desired parameter values.
Some values depend on the "construction" as indicated in the table by "01:" or "UI:".
Refer to the type code on the drive, for example ACS550-01..

Parameters
 86 ACS550 Usefs Manual

4106 and 400714107

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 87

-..-. -. -..-.
r n crc i n m a n 7
-
...... -.. -.-......-. .
o u t i o
1
I
0
--
, 7 7 1
--

.... .-.-- I
1104 IREFIMIN 10.0 ...500.0 HZ I0...30000 rpm 10.1 HZ /I rpm 10.0 Hz 10 rpm
1105 IREFIMAX 10.0...500.0 Hz I 0...30000 rpm 10.1 Hz1 1 rpm 101: 50.0 Hz/ 1500 rpml

~
p~~~~~~~~

1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1-14 ... 19 11 J

1202 ICONSTSPEED 1 10...30000 rpm 10.0...500.0 Hz 1 rpm 10.1 Hz 101: 300 rpm 15.0 Hz I
U1: 360 rpm 16.0 Hz
1203 CONSTSPEED2 0...30000 rpm 10.0...500.0 HZ 1 rpm 10.1 HZ 01: 600 rpm 110.0 HZ
U1: 720 rom 112.0 Hz
I I I I f I
1204 CONSTSPEED3 0...30000 rpm 10.0...500.0 HZ 1 rpm 10.1 HZ 01: 900 rpm 115.0 HZ
U1: 1080 rpm 118.0 Hz
I I I I
1205 CONSTSPEED4 0...30000 rpm 10.0...500.0 HZ 1 rpm 10.1 HZ 01: 1200 rpm 120.0 HZ
U1: 1440 rpm 124.0 Hz

Parameters
88 ACS550 User's Manual

r; pge
...
....
;Name - ..--... .. ...- ....
;CONSr S P C t u 5
--- .

0 30000 rptn I 0 0 500 0 1-2

1301 MINIMUM All 0.0 ... 100.0% 0.1% 0.0%

1302 MAXIMUM A l l 0.0 ... 100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
1303 FlLTERAll 0.0 ... 10.0 S 0.1 S 0.1 S
1304 MINIMUM A12 0.0 ... 100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
1305 MAXIMUM A12 0.0 ... 100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
1306 FILTER A12 0.0 ... 10.0 S 0.1 S 0.1 S
-.
OUTPUTS '
-.-.. -.. ... -.
RELAY 0UTP.T 1 10 4 7 . 52 11

1505 MAXIMUM A01 0.0 ...20.0 rnA 0.1 rnA 20.0 rnA
1506 FILTER A01 0.0 ...10.0 S 0.1 S 0.1 S
1507 A02 CONTENT SEL 99... 159 1 104 (parameter 0104
CURRENT)
1508 A02 CONTENT MIN - Defined by par. 0104
1509 A02 CONTENTMAX - Defined bv ~ a r0104
.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 89

.:, : .>.,.. : .. ::. :

.;L .:
,.,. :
-- :.-.‘
'.' . ..*:., !;.; * ,:
. ., ' ,
-- ,,+ . ;. ,
,
. .*: .
.-
, -:
..
,,,*:. . ;,.;:.
.
.,:
.
START FLlNCTlON ~ V ~ C I~O0~n l r 0m
l oms 1 2 8 11 RAM RAM PI

I , I I
2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY 10.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1 ...60.0 S 10.1 s 10.0 s (NOTSEL)
2113 START DELAY 10.00...60.00 s 10.01 S /O.OO S

Parameters
 90 ACS550 Usefs Manual

Rangc
... .
Group 22:ACCEUDECEP
-
I--- -I:: ' '
,
._ ;
_... . .
2201 IACCIDEC 112 SEL 1-6 7

RAMP INPUT

U IOTJhE RUh 1

- I . - . I -
.... ....
Group 25: CRITICALSPEEDS . .'. . .
.-..-- --
2501 ICR - -- - SEI
. T SPEED .-. 10. :OFF
. ~ . ,1 : O h
~

I
1
'
- l\-.n. ,
I0 ~ ~ T-?-
I I
. 2502 ~CRITSPEED 1 LO 10 ...30000 r ~ /m0.0 ...500.0 HZ rom I0.1 Hz
/I 10 rDm 10.0 Hz
,I 2503 CRlT SPEED 1 HI 0...30000 rpm 10.0...500.0 HZ 1 rpm 10.1 HZ 0 rpm / 0.0 HZ
2504 CRlT SPEED 2 LO 0...30000 rpm / 0.0 ...500.0 HZ 1 rpm 10.1 HZ 0 rpm / 0.0 Hz
2505 CRlT SPEED 2 HI m ...500.0 HZ
0...30000 r ~ 10.0 1 r ~ 10.1
m HZ 0 r ~ 10.0
m Hz

2601 /FLUX OPT ENABLE 10 =OFF, 1 = O N 10 (OFF)

2602 IFLUX
BRAKING 10 =OFF 1 =ON 11 I I

I
2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0.0 ...6553.5 kh 0.1 kh 0.0 kh
2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0...65535 Mrev, 0 disables 1 Mrev 0 Mrev
2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0...65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 Mrev
2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0.0 ...6553.5 k h , 0.0 disables 0.1 kh 0 0 kh

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual 91

" ":- *,~. ;::~., ,~%.. .,,,..-, :~q~,w:"

~::: <*:;, 5;;: ;<:.,,,,
<,: e.;:i .,,.., " '".."'? 'i":* .,;
:,#?;?;$;i::l~~e$;l~%
I - "

g:ode>? Naxe3<,:;$i;$::,:<%
::;,.5:. g.a$,ge%*;:z ;,*, &$:;,:>.;$ !:,,;::.,;;:$,;:;i?;;;~,~~~~~~~i!~~:2,,:~,,~~~~~~~~;>:~
2907 USER MWh TRIG 0.0 ...6553.5 MWh, 0.0 disables 0.1 MWh 10.0 MWh
2908 USER MWh ACT 0.0...6553.5 MWh 10.1 MWh 10.0 MWh 1 I

I I I \ - ---, I I
3002 [PANEL COMM ERR (I ...3 11 11 (FAULT)
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 -6...6 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 -6...6 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3005 MOT THERM PROT 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM 1 1 (FAULT)
3006 MOT THERM TIME 256...9999 s 1 500 s
3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50... 150% 1 100%
3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 ...150% 1 70%

3019 COMM FAULTTIME 0...60.0 S 0.1 S 3.0 s

3021 A l l FAULT LIMIT 0...100% 0.1% 0%
3022 A12 FAULT LIMIT o... 100% 0.1% 0%

j
3101 INUMBER OF TRIALS 10. . 5
3102 ITRIALTIME 11.0...600.0 s 10.1 s 30 s
3103 DELAY TIME 10.0 ... 120.0 s 10.1 s 10 s 1 I

--
I I I I ~ I I
3106 IAR UNDERVOLTAGE 10 = DISABLE. 1 = ENABLE lo (DISABLE)

3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 0

3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 0
3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 100 = NOT SELECTED. 101... 159 1 104 ioarameter 0104
ICURRENT)
3205 ~SUPERV2 LIM LO 1- 1- 10 I 1
3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI 0
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 100 = NOT SELECTED, 101... 159 1 105 (parameter 0105
TORQUE)
3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO 0
3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI 0

Parameters
 92 ACS550 User's Manual

-.-.-..-.
. . . . -. .--.
~ ~ ~ ' F FhexF F
-. -.. ....

3303 TESTDATE YY.w 1 0

3304 DRIVE RATING
3305 PARAMETER TABLE 0 0 0 0 ... F F F F h e x 1 Par. table version

I I I I
3413 OUTPUlZ MIN 1
3414 OUTPUT^ MAX
~~ ~ 1-I 11I '
1-I II II
3415 ISIGNAL~PARAM 1100 = NOT SELECTED. 101... 1 5 9 11 1105 (oarameter 0 1 0 5 1
3416 ISIGNAL~MIN 1- 1 1-, I 1
3417 SIGNAL3 MAX 1
3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 0...9 1 9 (DIRECT)
3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT 0...127 1
3420 OUTPUT3 MIN 1
3421 OUTPUT3 MAX 1

I I I I I
3503 LIMIT
~ W R M IPar. 3 5 0 1 = 1...3: -10...200 " C I1 ~ 1 1 0 " ~ / 1 5 0 0 o h m / I0
r 3 5 0 1 = 4: 0...5000 ohm

3603 STOP TIME 1 0 0 ~ 0 0 ~ ...

0 023:59:58 2s oo:oo~oo
3604 START DAY 1 1...7 .1 I(MONDAY)
3605 STOP DAY 1 1...7 1 1 (MONDAY)
i 3606 STARTTIME 2 oo:oo:oo ...23:59:58 2 S 00:OO:OO

Parameters
ACS550 Usefs Manual 93

3615 STOP TIME 4 00:OO:OO...23:59:58 2S 0O:OO:OO

3616 START DAY 4 1...7 1 1 (MONDAY)
3617 STOP DAY 4 1...7 1 I (MONDAY)
3622 BOOSTER SEL -6...6 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3623 BOOSTER TIME 0 0 ~ 0 0 ~...
0 023:59:58 2S 00:OO:OO
3626 TIMED FUNC 1...4 SRC 0...31 1 0 (NOT SEL)
.. .
3629
L-- I
Group 37: USER LOAD CURVE
- --
3701 TLSER LOAD C I.1ODE 10 . 3 li- O l h O T ST I
- >. - . ---,

3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1 =FAULT, 2 =ALARM 1 1 (FAULT)

3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10...400 s IS 20 S
3704 LOADFREO 1 0...500 HZ 1 HZ 5 HZ
3705 LOAD TOR0 LOW 1 0...600% 1% 10%
3706 LOAD TOR0 HIGH 1 0...600% 1% 300%
3707 LOAD FREO 2 0...500 HZ 1 Hz 25 HZ

Parameters
 94 ACS550 User's Manual

-. -. .-. -
..-. . ..
Un t and sca e uefned by par 4006 arla - 1000%

4023 PI0 SLEEP LEVEL 10 ...30000 rpm 10.0...500.0 HZ 1 rpm 10.1 HZ 10 rpm / 0.0 HZ I

4024 ~PIDSLEEP DELAY 10.0...3600.0 s 10.1 S 160.0 I I

4025 WAKE-UPDEV Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and - 0.0%
4007
4026 WAKE-UP DELAY 0.00 ...60.00 s 0.01 S 0.50 s
1

4102 [INTEGRATION TIME 10.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1 ...3600.0 s 10.1 S 160.0 s
I
4103 DERIVATION TIME 10.0... 10.0 s 10.1 s 10.0 s I
4104 PID DERIV FILTER 0.0 ... 10.0 S 0.1 S 1.0 s
4105 ERROR VALUE INV 0 = NO, 1 =YES 1 0 (NO)
4106 UNITS 0...127 1

Unit and scale defined by par. 4106 and

4113 SETPOINT MAX -500.0...500.0% 01% 100.0%

4114 FBK SEL 1...13 1 I ACT^)
4115 FBK MULTIPLIER 0.000 = NOT SEL. -32.768...32.767 0.001 0.000 (NOT SEL)
4116 ACT1 INPUT 1...7 1 2 (A12)
. . J
4117 ACT2 INPUT 1...7 1 2 (A12) J

4118 ACT1 MINIMUM -1ooo... 1000% 1% 0%

4119 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1ooo... 1000% 1% 100%
4120 ACT2 MINIMUM -1ooo... 1000% 1% 0%
j 4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1ooo... 1000% 1% 100%
 ACS550 User's Manual 95

nit and scale defined b

'\
I
~.,'

Parameters
 96 ACS550 User's Manual

5202 BAUD RATE 9.6, 19.2.38.4, 57.6, 115.2 kbitsls 9.6 kbitsls
5203 PARlN 0 = 8 NONE 1. 1 = 8 NONE 2, 1 0 (8 NONE 1)
2=8EVEN1,3=8ODDI
5204 OK MESSAGES 0...65535 1

, I I I
5302 ~EFBSTATION ID 0...65535 11 1 J

5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2. 38.4, 57.6, 76.8 - 9.6 kbitsls
.. . - -
khitsls

j 5304 EFB PARIN 0 = 8 NONE 1, 1 = 8 NONE 2, 0 (8 NONE 1)

2=8EVENI, 3=8ODD1
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 = ABB DRV LIM, 1 = DCU PROFILE, 1 0 (ABB DRV LIM)
2 = ABB DRV FULL
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0...65535 1 0

I I I I I I
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 10.0 ... 100.0% /0.1% 10.0%
8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 10.0 ... 100.0% 10.1% 10.0%

Parameters
 ACS550 Useis Manual 97

, I I I I
8119 IAUTOCHNGLEVEL 10.0.. 100.0% 10.1% 150%
8120 INTERLOCKS 0...5 1 4 (D14) J

8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 = NO, 1 = Y E S 1 0 (NO)

8122 PFC START DELAY 0.00... 10.00 s 0.01 S 0.50 s
8123 PFC ENABLE 0 = NOT SEL. 1 =ACTIVE 1 0 (NOT SEL) J

8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0.0=NOTSEL,O.1 ...1800.0s 0.1 S 0.0 s (NOT SEL)
,.. 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1 ... 1800.0 S 0.1 s 0.0 s (NOT SEL)
8126 TMEDAUTOCHNG 0...4 1 o (NOT SEL)
8127 MOTORS 1...7 1 2 J

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual

Complete parameter descriptions

This section d e s c r i b e s the actual signals and parameters for ACS550

Group 99: START-UP DATA

This group defines special start-up data required to:
s e t up the drive

- e n t e r motor information.
-..
-..
.
Code Description
,9901 LANGUAGE
- - .. -.-.-.....-
-4
-- -- . . .-.- .- -.-

I I Se ecls tne d splay language Tnere are rwo a~lfereorAbslstant Conrro Panels eacn supporr iiy a a ffarent language
set (Parel ACS-CP-_ sLpponlng languages 0 2 11 15 -11 be integrateu lnro ACS-CP-A )
Assistant Control Panel ACS-CP-A:
o = ENGLISH 1 = ENGLISH (AM) 2 = DEUTSCH 3 = ITALIANO 4 = ESPA~OL
5 = PORTUGUES 6 = NEDERLANDS 7 = FRANCAIS 8 = DANSK 9 = SUOMI
10 = SVENSKA 11 = RUSSKI 12 = POLSKI 13 = TORKCE 14 = CZECH
15 = MAGYAR
Assistant Control Panel ACS-CP-D (Asia):
0 = ENGLISH 1 = CHINESE 2 = KOREAN 3 =JAPANESE
9902 IAPPLICMACRO
I I Selects an application macro. Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS550 for a
particular application. I
1 = ABB STANDARD 2 = 3-WIRE 3 = ALTERNATE 4 = MOTOR POT 5 = HANDIAUTO
6 = PID CONTROL 7 = PFC CONTROL
,:I 0 = USER S1 LOAD -1 =USER S1 SAVE
8 = TORQUE CTRL
-2 = USER $2 LOAD
31 = LOAD FD SET
-3 =USER $2 SAVE
31 = LOAD FD SET- FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file. Parameter view is selected by
parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW.
FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives. FlashDrop allows easy
customization of the parameter list, e.g. selected parameters can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01
FlashDrop User's Manual [3AFE68591074 (English)].
-1 = USER s1 SAVE, -3 = USER s2 SAVE -With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the
drive permanent memory for later use. Each set contains parameter settings, including Group 99: START-UP
DATA, and the results of the motor identification run.
0 = USER s1 LOAD,-2 = USER s2 LOAD - With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use.
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE

I I Selects the motor control mode.

1 = VECTOR:SPEED - sensorless vector control mode.
Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm.
~~-

Reference 2 is speed reference in % (100% is absolute maximum speed, equal to the value of parameter 2002
MAXIMUM SPEED,or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum
speed).
2 = VECT0R:TORQ.
Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm.
Reference 2 is torque reference in % (100% is nominal torque.)
3 = SCALAR:FREQ -scalar control mode.
Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz.
Reference 2 is frequency reference in % (100% is absolute maximum frequency, equal to the value of parameter
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the
maximum speed).
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
Defines the nominal motor voltage.
Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
The ACS550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input power (mains) voltage.
i
 ACS550 User's Manual 99

Defines the nominal motor current.

Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
Range allowed: 0.2 ...2.0 - IZhd (where is drive current).
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ
Defines the nominal motor frequency.
Range: 10...500 Hz (typically 50 or 60 Hz)
-
Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT.
Field weakening point = Nom Freq - Supply Volt / Mot Nom Volt
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED
Defines the nominal motor speed.
-
Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER
Defines the nominal motor power.
-
Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
9910 ID RUN

I I
I
T r i ~ sparameter contro s a se f callbrat on process called the Motor ID Run D-rlng I n s process trw drwe operates
me motor (motor rota1 ng, and makes nleasLrements in oraer lo den1 ty motor cnaractilr st~csand create a model
lused for internal calculations. An ID Run is esoeciallv effective when: I
-- vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED)
operation point is near zero speed, and/or
or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ)], and/or

operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed range, and without any
measured speed feedback (i.e. without a pulse encoder).
0 = OFFilDMAGN -The Motor ID Run process is not run. ldentification magnetization is performed, depending on
parameter 9904 and 2101 settinqs. In identification maqnetization. the motor model is calculated at first start bv
magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed (mGor not rotating). The model is recalculated always at s&rt
3 after motor parameter changes.
1
'< Parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ):ldentification magnetization is performed.
1 Parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ)
magnetization is performed.
and parameter 2101 = 3 (SCALAR FLYST)or 5 (FLY+ BOOST):ldentification

Parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 has other value than 3 (SCALAR FLYST) or 5 (FLY +
BOOST):ldentification magnetization is not performed.
1 =ON - Enables the Motor ID Run, during which the motor is rotating, at the next start command. Afler run
completion, this value automatically changes to 0.
Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment.
Note: If motor parameters are changed after ID Run, repeat the ID Run.
WARNING! The motorwill run at up to approximately 50 ...80% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. The
A motor will rotate in the forward direction.
Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run1
See also section How to perform the ID Run on page 39.

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 01: OPERATING DATA

This group contains drive operating data, including actual signals. The drive sets the
values for actual siqnals,
- based on measurements or calculations. You cannot set
these values.

The calculated signed speed of the motor (rpm). The absolute value of 0101 SPEED 8 DIR is the same as the value 01
0102 SPEED.
The value of 0101 SPEED 8 DIR is positive if the motor runs in the folward direction.
The value of 0101 SPEED 8 DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction.
0102 SPEED
The calculated speed of the motor (rpm). (Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output
mode.)
0103 OUTPUT FREQ
The frequency (Hz) applied to the motor. (Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output
mode.)
0104 CURRENT
The motor current, as measured by the ACS550. (Shown by default in the control panel Output mode.)
0105 TORQUE
Output torque. Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in % of motor nominal torque. (Shown by default in the
control panel Output mode.)
0106 POWER
The measured motor power in kW.
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE
!
The DC bus voltage in V DC, as measured by the ACS550.
) 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE
The voltage applied to the motor.
0110 DRIVE TEMP
The temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius.
0111 EXTERNAL REF 1
External reference, REFI, in rpm or Hz - units determined by parameter 9904.
0112 EXTERNAL REF 2
External reference, REF^, in %.
0113 CTRL LOCATION
Active control location. Alternatives are:
0 = LOCAL
1 = EXTl
2 = EXT2
0114 RUN TIME (R)
The drive's accumulated running time in hours (h).
Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode.
0115 KWH COUNTER (R)
The drive's accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours.
-
Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode.
0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT
Application block output signal. Value is from either:
PFC control, if PFC Control is active, or
Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2.

Parameters
 ACS550 Usefs Manual 101

I
i 'cOas
#**>.<<a
osrddiigm;;;"i<
a..: ,>,. .**.*~:,*>
,,$s, ,: ~,:..,,,,.~,;,*~",
>,. 'dZt3
,", &@;z
","w
, ?"Tp:*"-.,'
>$*s.4d..~>: :
%r i;;>
.-*.'
-" bTxt%
I,;:~,.'
'--
.Z.\'.; : ? : g @ ; ~
-; 3 y...
:r.,.+, 2 .:..; $ . ~ ; ~%wa:,>s .,s. .:
. ~ ; 2 : ~ ; : ' : ;:,: < :.:;:~
.,.e,s. a
,
. ,:,.~.,~
,-.,*~ ~ , : ,,.,,
y ; ;/.*: ;.,..,*
: : :':.~:
; ~.,< ;,,.~ ; ; : ~ $ ~ 5 " ~ y ~
0118 Dl 1-3 STATUS
Status of the three digital inputs.

.Status is displayed as a binary number.

1 indicates that the input is activated.
0 indicates that the input is deactivated.
0119 Dl 4-6 STATUS Dl 1 012 013
Status of the three digital inputs.
See parameter 0118 oi 1-3 STATUS.
0120 Al I
/ lThe relative value of analoa inout 1 in %. I
1°121; ; ; 1 relative value of analog input 2 in %.
0122 R 0 1-3 STATUS
I
Status of the three relay outputs.
1 indicates that the relay is energized.
.
0 indicates that the relay is de-energized.
0123 RO 4-6 STATUS RELAY 1 STATUS
Status of the three relay outputs. RELAY 2 STATUS
See parameter 0122. RELAY 3 STATUS
0124 A 0 1
I lThe analos output 1 value in milliamperes. I
The analog output 2 value in milliamperes.
I
The PID controller 1 output value in %.
1 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT
The PID controller 2 output value in %.
0128 PID 1 SETPNT
The PID 1 controller setpoint signal.
Units and scale defined by PID parameters.
0129 PID 2 SETPNT

-
The PID 2 controller setpoint signal.
Units and scale defined by PI0 parameters.
0130 PI0 1 FBK
The pi0 1 controller feedback signal.
Units and scale defined by PID parameters.
0131 PID2 FBK
The PID 2 controller feedback signal.
Units and scale defined by PID parameters.
0132 PID 1 DEVIATION
The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value.
Units and scale defined by PID parameters.
0133 PID 2 DEVIATION
The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value.
Units and scale defined by PID parameters.
0134 COMM RO WORD
Free data location that can be written from serial link.
-
Used for relay output control.
See parameter 1401.
0135 COMM VALUE 1
Free data location that can be written from serial link.
j

Parameters
102 ACS550 Useis Manual

G %rde
**A*
ps$>E8iFp5"
>*<me<,
;ty$<+*:~:
*,v*ea,
~ *,%
,,
e?y*c5?>,. .".,,.,.>,ir"".
*..-:
* ',*.L.,:<,:~..~::"**~>,~.:.;~&;::>.,~J~!
$,;$:>:
,:
-. ,....:: *:,3::,!*
<z:*:.s.> "W.. , ,....v~.2*,.
!.;<.*, *,r >?#><.,,.ass,: ...- ,,:,<:,y..<,z.,.,,;,,..;":'##.*#.!".:..
<,~*><>
~?.#"73.z."": >J,O~
%
' *.
., a,.:- . ,.-,,,,. .-v,*ii-,.:-<.-.*- .*,*:.,.e~.$<,.:*,.,.A*,<
#2,> ?
. , ~ ,,
#"%
.~ <
.$
' .'&,'. <a*.
~ ..,, .,p2..! ..#.;>:y<;2;yt$7~i,~<~:Bp,* :,;
-,<
., ,...~'::>6>* ' ..,
, ,',
%>:;:*.,>:>..:;::.,,,
< ~, ., . ,. ".*'
<..s..
,:, ~ .>5?7:
'

0136 COMM VALUE 2

Free data location that can be written from serial link.
0137 PROCESS VAR 1
Process variable 1
Defined by parameters in Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY.
0138 PROCESS VAR 2
Process variable 2
Defined by parameters in Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY.
0139 PROCESS VAR 3
Process variable 3
-
Defined by parameters in Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY.
0140 RUN TlME
The drive's accumulated running time in thousands of hours (kh).
Cannot be reset.
0141 MWH COUNTER
The drive's accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours.
Cannot be reset.
0142 REVOLUTION CNTR
The motor's accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions.
Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode.
0143 DRIVE ON TlME HI
The drive's accumulated power-on time in days.
Cannot be reset.
0144 DRIVE ON TlME LO
The drive's accumulated power-on time in 2 second ticks (30 ticks = 60 seconds).
.
Shown in format hh.mm.ss.
Cannot be reset.
0145 MOTOR TEMP
Motor temperature in degrees Celsius 1 PTC resistance in ohms.
Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up.
See parameter 3501
0146 MECH ANGLE
Defines the motor shaft's angular position to about 0.01" (32,768 divisions for 360"). The position is defined as 0 at
power up.
During operation the zero position can be set by:

-
a 2-pulse input, if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE = 1 (ENABLE)
parameter 5011 POSITION RESET, if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE = 2 (DISABLE)
any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE.
0147 MECH REVS
A signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft. The value:
increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0
decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 0 to 32767.
0148 Z PLS DETECTED
Encoder zero pulse detector. When a 2-pulse defines the zero position, the shaft must pass through the zero position
to trigger a Z-pulse. Until then, the shaft position is unknown (the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero).
This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid. The parameter starts at 0 = NOT DETECTED on
power-up and changes to 1 = DETECTED only it
parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE = 1 (ENABLE) and
an encoder 2-pulse has been detected.
0150 CBTEMP
Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius.
Note: Some drives have a control board (OMIO) that does not support this feature. These drives always show the
constant value of 25.0 "C.

Parameters
ACS550 Useis Manual 103

Calculated actual intake energy in kwh.

0152 INPUT MWH
Calculated actual intake energy in MWh.
0158 PID COMM VALUE 1
Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PIDI and PID2).
0159 PID COMM VALUE 2
Data received from fieldbus for PiD control (PIDI and PID2).

Parameters
104 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

This group monitors fieldbus communications
--- - . -.-.... .- .. . - -. -..- .-. - .
riGpGripti?n
0301 FB C M D WORD 1
.
.-.--.-. ...- ..- ..-.-
.. .
1
means for controlling the drive from a
fieldbus controller. The command
consists of two Command Words. Bit-
coded instructions in the Command
Words switch the drive between

consists of two Status Words.

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual 105

- -
Code I~escriptlon--
--. ..- -T w
- - IFAIII
n?n5 .
..-n. .-
~ <n
. r -- -
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 1
When a fault is active, the
corresponding bit for the active fault is
set in the Fault Words.
Each fault has a dedicated bit
allocated within Fault Words.
See section Fault listing on page 244
for a description of the faults.
-
The control panel displays the word in
hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in
Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a
1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.
0306 FAULT WORD 2
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 2.
See parameter 0305.
0307 FAULT WORD 3
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 3.
.
See parameter 0305.

I
14 ~ E X TFAULT 2 MOTOR PHASE [System error
15 ]EARTH FAULT IOUTPWIRING I ~ a r a msetting
. fault

0308
-.ALARM WORD - ~-1
-.
-
~ ~~ ~~~~ ~ ~

When an alarm is active, the

~ ~

corresponding bit for the active alarm

is set in the Alarm Words.
\
i Each alarm has a dedicated bit
allocated within Alarm Words.
Bits remain set until the whole alarm
word is reset. (Reset by writing zero tc Reserved

-
the word.)
The control panel displays the word in
hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in
Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a
7 PANELLOSS ENCODER ERROR
8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START
See parameter 0308.
9 MOTORTEMP Reserved
I I I/ 10 I~eserved
I
USER LOAD CURVE I
11
12
13
MOTOR STALL
AUTOR RESET
PFC AUTOCHANGE
[START DELAY
l~eserved
Reserved
1
14 PFC ILOCK Reserved
15 Reserved Reserved

Parameters
 106 ACS550 U s e i s Manual

Group 04: FAULT HISTORY

This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive

0 - Clear the fault history (on panel = NO RECORD).

n -Fault code of the last recorded fault. The fault code is displayed as a name. See section Fautlisting on page 24.
for the fault codes and names. The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding
name in the fault listing, which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display.
0402 FAULT TlME I
The day on which the last fault occurred. Either as:
A date - if real time clock is operating.
The number of days after power on - if real time clock is not used, or was not set.
0403 FAULT TlME 2
The time at which the last fault occurred. Either as:
Real time, in format hh:mm:ss - if real time clock is operating.
The time since power on (minus the whole days reported in 0402). in format hh:mm:ss - if real time clock is not
used, or was not set.
Format on the Basic Control Panel: The time since power on in 2-second ticks (minus the whole days reported in
0402). 30 ticks = 60 seconds. E.g. Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds (= 514130).
0404 SPEED AT FLT
The motor speed (rpm) at the time the last fault occurred.
f
The frequency (Hz)at the time the last fault occurred.
0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT
The DC bus voltage (V) at the time the last fault occurred.
' -. 0407 CURRENT AT FLT
The motor current (A) at the time the last fault occurred.
0408 TORQUE AT FLT
The motor torque (%) at the time the last fault occurred.
0409 STATUS AT FLT
The drive status (hex code word) at the time the last fault occurred.
0410 Dl 1-3 AT FLT
The status of digital inputs 1L.3 at the time the last fault occurred.
0411 IDI 4-6 AT FLT
The status of digital inputs 4...6 at the time the last fault occurred.
0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1
Fault code of the second last fault. Read-only.
0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2
I Fault code of the third last fault. Read-only.

Paranieters
ACS550 User's Manual

Group 10: STARTlSTOPlDlR

This group:
defines external s o u r c e s (EXTI
and EXT2) for commands that enable start, stop
and direction changes
locks direction or e n a b l e s direction control
To select between the two external locations use the next group (parameter 1102).

Ilefines exlerna control locat,on 1 ( c x r t j - tlic coniyural on of start, stop and o rsct or) conlmanos
I1 = NO1 SEL - NOexternal Slan stop and d rec: on comm3no source
1 = 011 - Two-wire StarVStop.

- StaNStop is through digital input Dl1 (011 activated = Start; 011de-activated = Stop).
Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FORWARD)
2 = ~11.2-Two-wire StarVStop, Direction.
I -. StarVSt0~is throuah diaital inout Dl1 (Dl1 activated = Start: Dl1 de-activated = Stool.
~irectioncontrol [GquiFes pa~ameter'1003= 3 (REQUEST)]'
(Dl2 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).
is through digital 1nput'd~2

SlarVStop commands are through momentary push-o .hons (!he P stands for pulse',
Start 1s through a norma i y open psn-outton connecred to 01q.talmpLt 011 In order lo stan tnc ar ve the d qltal
i n ~ u012
t must be activated orior to the Dulse in DII
Connect m-It ple Stan P ~ ~ h : o L ! tint ~bar21
n~ e
Stop 1s through a norma. y c oseo p~sh-outton connected to o glta nput o 2
- Connect multioie Stoo oush-buttons in series.
Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = I(FORWARD).
1= o l l ~ , 2 ~-, 3
Three-wire StarVStop, Direction.
StaNStop commands are through momentary push-buttons, as described for D I ~ P , ~ P .
Direction control [requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)]is through digital input 013
(013 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).
5 = DllP,2P,3P - Start Forward. Start Reverse and Stop.
Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push-buttons (the P stands
for "pulse").
Start Forward command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DII. In order to start the
drive, the digital input 013 must be activated prior to the pulse in o l l
Start Reverse command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input 012. In order to start
the drive, the digital input 013 must be activated during the pulse in 012.
Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input D13.
Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
Reauires oarameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
'
6 = Dl6 1~wd-wireStartlStop.
StaNStop is through digital input Dl6 (016 activated = Start; 016 de-activated = Stop).
Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FORWARD).
7 = 016,5 - Two-wire StaNStopIDirection.
StaNStop is throuah diaital input 016 (016 activated =Start: Dl6 de-activated = Stop).
control [requires parameter1003 = 3 REQUEST)^ is through digital input'd15.
= Reverse; de-activated = Forward).
I 18 = KEYPAD - Control Panel
SlarlJStop and D~recuoncommanos are rnrough me control pane when EXTI is actwe
Olrecl on con:rol reqL res parameter 1003 = 3 (REOJFST,
9 :D l l F 2R - StarllStoplO recllon commands tnrougl>U 1 an0 D 2 comulnat.ons
- Start forward = D 1 ac~~vated and o 2 ae-activated
Start reverse = o Ide-act~vateuand u12 act vatea
I --
I Stoo = both DII and Dl2 activated, or both de-activated
~equiresparameter 1003 = 3 (RMUEST).
10 = COMM -Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the stafflstop and direction commands.
Bits 0,1, 2 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the startfstop and direction commands.
See Fieldbus user's manual for detailed instructions.

Parameters
108 ACS550 User's Manual

, . .......-...<<. r,.*+sn
,>q
,, i.-isiz. wm*;<w."..- ' &,?, ;.,- ""
,,' ,,,,-,< ,:*.- ,'.<.,*.:.-<*-;,>
I-'2!'B:,...)~*>:L,.- '-"".~&,~,s'~,-.-., ::-
g ,' ,*, ~&<* *d$>a&4b;2;:>'.<>.,
\,.*,.,,.~.. ,-:,.,':J.c,.2.,.;.:l,,,z
$
..,' %
+, '
;.,>.#.-
3.:.:";:zkc;
' nJxfp" i<g$j:$p;"2;~,,;$~,;::~~;,,>::;;*g$~g&$~;~l;~;~<~e~*,,"
11 =TIMEDFUNC I. - Assigns StaNStop control to Timed Function 1 (Xmed Function activated = START; Timed
Function de-activated = STOP). See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
-
12... 14 = TlMED FUNC 2...4 - Assians StaNStoo control to Timed Function 2...4. See TlMED FUNC 1 above^ ~ ~~ ~~~~

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS

Defines external control location 2 (EXT2) - the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.
See parameter 1001 EXTI COMMANDS above.
1003 DIRECTION
Defines the control of motor rotation direction.
1 = FORWARD- Rotation is fixed in the forward direction.
2 = REVERSE - Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction.
3 = REQUEST- Rotation direction can be changed on command.
1004 JOGGING SEL

I I
/
Defines the s ynal tnal act bares me,ogg ng Idncrlon Joyylny Jses Consranr Speed 7 (parameter 1206) for speed
reference and ramp patr 2 (paranicrers 2205 ano 2206) for acce eratlng ana decelerarlnq When the .oqqlnq
lactivation sianal is lost. the drive uses ram0 s t o to
.. .
~ decelerate to zero soeed. even if coast stoo is used in normal
I
i
1
I I operation (parameter 2102). The jogging status can be parameterized to'relay outputs (paiameier 1401). The jogging
status -1s also seen .in DCU Profile status bit 21.
0 = NOT SEL - Disables the jogging function.
1 = 011-Activates/de-activates jogging based on the state of DII (011 activated = jogging active; DII de-activated =
jogging inactive).
2L.6 = 012...016 - Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input. See ~ labove.
l
-1 = DII(INV) -Activates jogging based on the state of 011 (oil activated = jogging inactive; DII de-activated =jogging
nrtivel
1 1 - 2 ~ - 6 ~ 1 2 (...1016(1Nv)
~ ~ ) -Activates iowinq based on the state of the selected diaital inout. See DII(INVIabove. 1

Parameters
ACS550 Use& Manual

Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT

This group defines:
how the drive selects b e t w e e n c o m m a n d s o u r c e s
and REF^.
characteristics and sources for REFI

Selects the reference controlled in local control mode.

1= ~~~I(Hz1r- pmReference
) type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.
..Speed reference (rpm) if 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED)
Frequency reference (Hz) if 9904 = 3 (SCAMR:FREO).
or 2 (VECTOR:TORO).

- = ..-. - .- ,
7 a~67
\ 1 ~ / ~ \

1102 EXTIIEXT2 SEL

Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXTI or ExT2. Thus, defines the source fol
StartlStopIDirection commands and reference signals.
0 = EXTI-Selects external control location 1 (EXTI).
-.
See oarameter 1001 EXTI COMMANDS for EXTI'S StartlStoolDir definitions.

I I. see barameter 1103 REFI SELECT for EXTI~S reference definitions.

1 = DII -Assigns control to EXTI or E X T based
2...6 = 012 ...016 - Assians control to EXTI
~ on the state of Dl1 (Dl1 activated = ExT2; Dl1 de-activated = EXTI).
or €KT2 based on the state of the selected diaital inout. See Dl1 above.

I I-
I
7 = EXIZ - Selecls extirna control location 2 ( E X T ~ ,
See psratneter 1002 ~ x i cor,iMANDS
2 for EXT2's StarVS~op/Dtroef~nito~is
I See Darameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2.s reference definitions
I I ..
I
8 = C O ~ I A-~Assigns control of the dr ye v a external conlrol local on E X T ~or Fxi2 oaseo on the fta db-s contro woro
61t 5 of !he Command Woru 1 (parameter 0301) defnes me act ve external contro oca1,on (FxTl or ixT2)
I See Fieldbus user's manual for detailed instructions. I

I I 9 = TIMED FUNC 1 -Assigns control to EXTI Or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function (Timed Function
activated = EXT2; Timed Function de-activated = EXTI).See Group 36: TlMED FUNCTIONS.

FUNC 1 above.
-1 = DI~(INV) - Assigns control to EXTI
-
10... 12 =TIMED FUNC 2...4 - Assians control to EXTI or EXT2 based on the State of the Timed Function. See TIMED

or EXT2 based on the state of DII (DII activated = EXTI;011de-activated =

EXT2).
-2...-6 = D12(1NV)...DIG(1NV) - Assigns control to EXTI or EX= based on the state of the selected digital input. See
DI~(INV)above.
1203 REF1 SELECT
Selects the signal source for external reference REF?
0 = KEYPAD - Defines the control panel as the reference
source.
1 = AII -Defines analog input 1 (AII) as the reference
source.
2 = A12 - Defines analog input 2 (A12) as the reference
source.
3 = A I ~ / J O YDefines
~- analog input 1 ( ~ l l )configured
, for
joystick operation, as the reference source. - EXT REF 1 MAX
T h e minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum
reference in the reverse direction. Define the minimum 2Vl4mA
using parameter 1104.
-
The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum
reference in the forward direction. Define the maximum
using parameter 1105.
Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST). Hysteresis 4% of full scale

A WARNING! Because the low end of the reference

range commands full reverse operation, do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range. Doing so
means that if the control signal is lost (which is a 0 V input) the result is full reverse operation. Instead, use
the following set-up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault, stopping the drive:
Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AII (1304 MINIMUM A12) at 20% (2 V or 4 mA).
Set parameter3021 AII FAULT LIMIT to a value 5% or higher.
.
Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to 1 (FAULT).
4 = A12/JOYST- Defines analog input 2 (AIZ), configured for joystick operation, as the reference source.
.
See above (AII/JOYST) description.

Parameters
110 ACS550 User's Manual

. Ii , , . .
,.; ,,,. . .-
' , ; > * ,
" '<.? ,
, . , L .;
,
;;
, ,
; .., :.:, , I,
15 = 013U,4O(R) - Defines diaital inputs as the soeed reference source (motor ~otentiometercontrol).
I .
I Diaital inout 013 increases the'soeed (the u stands for"uoS')
~~ ~~

014 decreases the hpeed'(the o stands for "down").

A Stop command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for "reset").
parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal's rate of change.
6 = 013u,40 - Same as above (013U,4~(~)), except:
.
I A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The reference is stored
Wnen tne orwe restarts. :ne motor ramps up (at tnc selected accelerat~orirate) to lne slorea reference
7 = 015L.60 - Same as above (0.3<.fi,o) except that u 5 an0 D 6 are the d g ta inp-Is lsed
8 = COMM - Defines the fieldbus as the reference source.
9 = COMM+AII -Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (~11)combination as the reference source. See Analog input
reference correction below.
10 = COMM*AII -Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (~11)combination as the reference source. See Analog input
reference correction below.

I I- 11 :u.3J 4D(lzhC) - Same as 013L,4D(R) aoole except thnt

Changlng tne control source ,EXTI
112 = D I ~ .U ~.~ D. (-NSame
to ~ x r 2 FXTZ
,
C ) as ~13u.40above. exceDt that:
to F x r l LOC to IREkl) OOPS not COPY the reference

Changing the control source (EXTI to E k , E X T to ~ EXTI. LOC to REM) does not copy the reference
13 = DISU,~D(NC) - Same as o15u,6D above, except that:
-Changing the control source (EXTI to EXT2, EXT2 to EXTI,LOC to REM)does not copy the reference.
14 = All+Al2 - Defines an analog input 1 (All) and analog input 2 (A12) combination as the reference source. See
Analog input reference correction below.
15 = AIi*AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (All) and analog input 2 (A12) combination as the reference source. See
Analog input reference correction below.
16 = Ali-Al2 - Defines an analog Input 1 (~11)and analog input 2 (A12) combination as the reference source. See
Analoa inout reference correction below.
17 = ~ 1 1 ~ ~ 1Defines
2'- an analog input 1 (All) and analog input 2 (A12) combination as the reference source. See
Analog input reference correction below.
20 = KEYPAD(RNC) - Defines the control oanel as the reference source.
I .A St00 command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for reset.)
I I . ~ ~

chan&ng me conlrol source (ExTl to ExT2 EX;^ lo LXII) 0085 no1 COP) me reference
) Defines the contro panel as tne reference soLrce
21 = K E Y P A D ( ~ C -
A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The reference is stored.
-Changing the control source (EXTIto E X T ~EXT2 , to EXTI) does not copy the reference.
l ~ n a l o uinout reference correction
I I~aramete;values 9. 10 and 14...17 use the formula in the following table

C IB I(C value. 50% of reference value) IB value

Where:
C = Main reference value 120
( = COMM for values 9, 10 and 17 (1)
= AII for values 14...17).
B =Correcting reference
( = AII for values 9, 10 and 80. - - --------------.
2 values 14...17).
= ~ 1 for 60 -- -- -------- c 9 . 1 4 (+)
Example:
The figure shows the reference source curves for value 40 ----- ---- - ---
settings 9, 10 and 14... 17, where:
. C = 25%.
P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0.
20. - - - - - - -----.
-16 (-
P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0.
B varies alona the horizontal axis.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 111

;ets the maximum for external reference 1.

The maximum analog input signal (as a percent of full
the signal in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF? MAX
in Hzlrpm.
Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AII or 1305 MAXIMUM~ 1 sets
2

P 1301 P 1302 input sign

or 1304 or 1305
I
:EF2 SELECT
elects the signal source for external reference REF^.
...17 -Same as for parameter 1103 REFI SELECT.
9 = P I D l o u T - T h e reference is taken from the P l o l output. See Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41:
PROCESS PID SET 2.
0...21 -Same as for parameter 1103 REFI SELECT.
............
If PFC is used :
19=PID1 4 REF2 LIMIT
SELECT M(11071108)
?...I7
20 ...21 4 MIN (1107, 1 1 0 8 )
I - I 1 ............
:EF2 MIN
ets the minimum for external reference 2.
The minimum analog input signal (in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF^ MIN in %.
Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AII or 1304 MINIMUM A12 sets the minimum analog input signal.
This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference.
The value is a percentage of the:
-maximum frequency or speed
-maximum process reference
-nominal torque.
EF2 MAX
ets the maximum for external reference 2.
The maximum analog input signal (in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF^ MAX in %.
Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM A l l or 1305 MAXIMUM A12 sets the maximum analog input signal
This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference.
The value is a percentage of the:
-maximum frequency or speed
-maximum process reference
-nominal torque.
 ACS550 U s e f s Manual

Group 12: CONSTANT SPEEDS

This group defines a set of constant speeds. In general:
- You can program up to 7 constant speeds, ranging from 0...500 Hz 01
0...30000 rprn.

---
Values must be positive (No negative speed values for constant speeds).
- Constant speed selections are ignored if:
-the torque control is active, or
- the process PID reference is followed, or
- the drive is in local control mode, or
- PFC (Pump-Fan Control) is active.

Note: Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so-called fault speed which
may be activated if the control signal is lost. For example, see parameters 3001
AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.

-
Code Description
-- -.-.... .- .- - . ... -.
1201 CONST
~- SPEED SEL
~ ~ ---
~~

Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds. See general comments in introduction
0 = NOT SEL- Disables the constant speed function.
1 = DII -Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DII
Digital input activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.
2...6 = 012...016 - Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input 012...Dl6 See above.
7 = 011,2 - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1... 3) using DII and 012.
Uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = Dl de-activated. 1 = 01activated):

1 I 0 Iconstant speed 1 (1202)

0 I 1 Iconstant speed 2 (1203)
1 I 1 Iconstant speed 3 (1204)
Can be set c pas a so-called fa.. t spced wh ch 1s act vared ~f tne control signal IS osl Refer to paramarer 3001
A WIN f-nct.on ano parameter 3002 PANE. COMA! FFW
8 = D 2 3 - Se ects one of three Constanr Speeds ( 1 31 "s na - 012 and 013
See above (011,2) for code.
9 = D13,4 - Selects one of three Constant Speeds ( I ... 3) using 013 and 014.
.
See above (~11.2)for code.
10 = 014.5 -selects one of three Constant Speeds (1 ...3) using Dl4 and 015.
See above (~11,2)for code.
11 = 015.6 -Selects one of three Constant S ~ e e d s(1 ...3). usina 015 and 016.
See above (011,2)for code.
-
12 = 011.2.3-Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1 ...7) using oil, 012 and 013.
Uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = Dl de-activated, 1 = 01activated):
;Dl$,'
. , r5D12;, ;;.D13\.
.A<- . .i . $~::";~"ncti.o";::,:;I..~~'
:~;:;r"' ,, . , . '.. .:,.

0 Constant speed 1 (1202)

1 1 0 Constant speed 3 (1204)

0 0 1 Constant speed4 (1205)
1 0 1 Constant speed 5 (1206)
0 1 1 Constant speed 6 (1207)
1 1 1 Constantspeed 7 (1208)

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 113

,' i,a> Ja
%' ,:.\-:..;
.
...,3,v,6e
,
?+zh::*:<
,.
u>,,.* .,,, , ".?~.<,.,":,'
113 = 013.4.5 -Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1...7) usino
, .
, .,*:*>:,~.., :: Z.,.'..

. 014 and D15.

. : .
..,
''i
,, - &;-..r
:,;:;:,,,:: 3sj,cL<
i ;>*
. . .;.,,
.,l*$r3?~,.:,7;-r.'>.'-::-,''sC-';-
.- - ,';...* '.
- ., "' a<.
,~,..*a,
~r$ss2s%5*p~~$,:.&~2:;2:.:~&:~.?2~;::~$~M4~~,;~~~~%;i

-
See above (011,2,3) for code.
- 013.

,
14 = 014.5.6 -Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1...7) using 014, Dl5 and D16.
See above (011,2,3) for code.
15... 16 =TIMEDFUNC 1...4 - Selects Constant Speed 1 when Timed Function is active. See Group 36: TIMED
FI INCTIONS
. . - . .- .
19 =TIMEDFUN1&2 - Selects a constant speed depending on the state of Timed Functions 1 & 2. See parameter

-1 = DI~(INV) - Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input 011.

Inverse operation: Digital input de-activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.
6 = D12(1NV)...DI6(INV\ - Selects Constant Soeed 1 with diaital inout. See above
-7 = o l l , 2 ( 1 ~ -i )~ e l e c i sone of three Constant Sbeeds (1...3) ;sing dl1 and 012.
Inverse operation uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = 01de-activated, 1 = 01activated):
FGction
1 ho constant speeo
1 Constanispeed 1 ( 1 2 0 2 r '

0 L%iEtant speed 3jiiiIT

-8 = D12,3(INV) - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1...3) using 012 and 013.
- See above (DI~,~(INV)) for code.
-9 = 013,4(INV) - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1...3) using Dl3 and 014.
See above ( ~ I ~ , ~ ( I Nfor
v )code.
)
-10 = D14,5(INV)- Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1... 3) using 014 and 015.
S e e above (DI~.~(INV)) for code.
-11 = 015,6(INV) - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1...3 ) using 015 and 016.
See above (011,2(1~v))for code.
-12 = 011,2,3(INV) - Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1...7) using 011, 012 and D13.
lnverse operation uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = 01de-activated, 1 = 01activated):

-13 = 013,4,5(INV) - Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1... 7) using 013, 014 and 015.
See above (oI1,2,3(INv)) for code.
-14 = D14,5,6(INV)- Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1...7) using 014, 015 and 016.
See above (011,2,3(1~v)) for code.
1202 CONST SPEED I
Sets value for Constant Soeed 1
The range and m t s debend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTR. MODE
Range 0 30000 rpm wnen 9904 = 1 (VECTOR s i ' c ~ v )or 2 (VECTOR
191<o,
I -
Ranae 0 500 h z wnen 9904 = 3 ISCALAR FREO) \ -

1203 ICONST SPEED 2...CONST SPEED 7

1..
1 Each sets a va Le for a Constant Speea See cohsr srEEn 1 aoove
1208 Constant Speeo 7 s ~ s e a d so as logging Speed See parameter 1004 .OGG hs SE-
- ....... -.. . .. - -. . .. .-

Parameters
114 ACS550 User's Manual

-
I~efinestimed function activated, constant speed mode. Timed function can be used to chanae between external
~ ~~ ~~~

reierence and a maximum of three constanispeeds, or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable speeds, i.e.
~
I
constant speeds 1, 2, 3 and 4.
1 = ExTlcs1/2/3 - Selects an external speed when no timed function is active, selects Constant speed 1 when only
Timed function 1 is active, Selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 2 is active and selects Constant
speed 3 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active.

External reference

Constant speed 3 (1204)

2 = CS1,2 314 - Se ects Consrant speed 1 rvnen no llmer s acllve selects Constant speea 2 i%lrcrionl, T ~ ~ n e o
f-nct~on1 is actlve selecls Conslant speed 3 wnen on y nrned functlon 2 IS act ve, selecls Constant speed 4 .vlien
I both Timed functions are active. I

Constant speed 2 (1203)

Constant speed 3 (1204)
Constant speed 4 (1205)

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual

Group 13: ANALOG INPUTS

This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs

Defines the minimum value of the analog input.

Define value as a percent of the full analoa sianal ranae. See example below.
The In olmuui analog ,np4i stgnal corresponds to 1104 RFr1 M h or i i o 7 REF> '8 I,

..
M N '8 JM A cannot be greater Inan ~AXlrnL'IA
These paramelers trefere~icean0 analoq
reference.
- mln ano rnax sell nos)
" . ,orob de scale and offset ao ustrncni for the

See the figure at parameter 1104.

Example. To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA:
Configure the analog input for 0...20 mA current signal.
- Calculate the minimum (4 mA) as a percent of full range (20 mA) = 4 mA I 2 0 mA - 100% = 20%
1302 MAXIMUM A l l
Defines the maximum value of the analoo inout.
Define value as a percent of the fulla&loq signal range.
The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REFI MAX or 1108 REF^ MAX
1. See the fioure at oarimeter 1704.

I /
1303 FILTER A l l
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 (~11) /
Unfiltered signal

I I The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time
specified.
J

Time constant
1304 MINIMUM A12
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
See MINIMUM A l l above.
1305 MAXIMUM A12
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
See MAXIMUM A I ~above.
1306 FILTER A12
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 (~12).
See FILTER All above.

Parameters
 116 ACS550 U s e i s Manual

Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS

This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs
csds 1~6scrirition;;:1$1".",.::
,,v(,.*v, rs,:*~<., z;d,7"
. . , . :v,;' ";>&,,.,.. ,:..; ., ,. .:. ;,: ,:,, ., ..:,.,,,,\,,,.
.,.,<<2,4,&.*>d:.:, ,. ,:,, :i,$;<.>?:;
A
:;., :,
, , , ..,,.
,;a,, :.,, , :,-:.>,!....",;
,%,.

<;:.: y > : ',?.i!.d

.. ,. ,,.,,,.:I,,-..,x
;:;:28,,.>+?>>::;''.;;>,,. ;'.:
l::,<,.-

ssa
, ' *A. , : :
.. ..:,x,.;'2.:*,.$;,.: ,--.
#,,.,., ,%,# ,.., ",

1401 IRELAY OUTPUT 1

/ hefines the event or condition that activates relav 1 -what relav outout 1 means.

I I- 0 = NJT SEL - Rela) IS not used and is de energ zed

1 = RFAUI - Energtre reiay when dr~veis ready to f~ncuoriK e q res
Run enable signal present.
~

No faults exist.
-.
Supply voltage is within range.
Emergency Stop command is not on.
2 =RUN - Energize relay when the drive is running.
3 = FAULT(-I)- Energize relay when power is applied. De-energizes when a fault occurs
4 = FAULT- Energize relay when a fault is active.
5 = A U R M - Eneroize relav when an alarm is active.

I I
d

6 = IIEVERSED - Erierglze rela) whcrl molor rolates n reversed rect on

7 = STARI t D - Eneia ze relav wnen drcve rece ves a star1 commano (even t Run Enable s~gnan not present) US-
energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.
8= suPRvl OVER - Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) exceeds the limit (3203).

9 = SUPRVI
-
See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 144.
-
UNDER Eneroize relav when first suoervised oarameter 13201). droos . below the limit (3202).
-
I I. See Group 3 2 S U P E ~ V I S I O N ' S ~ ~ ~ ~on

S e e Grouo 32: SUPERVISION startina

~ ~page
~ 144. '
10 = SUPRV2 OVER - Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) exceeds the limit (3206).
" on .oaae- 144.

I I. 11 = s~Pt3v2LNDER - Eiiergze relay ~ h e second

See Gro1.p 32 SUPERVSION stanlng on page 14.1
n s-perv,seo pararneler (3204. drops be ow !he lhrnit (3205,

12 = suPRv3 o\rER - Enero ze reav rvnen tn rd suoervised oara~neter13207, exceeos the lim113209).
See Group 32: ~ ~ ~ ~ < ~ l ~ l on ~ page
~ ~ 144.
s t a r t i n ~
13 = S U P R V ~UNDER - Energize relay when third supervised parameter (3207) drops below the limit (3208).
I
.
See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 144.
14 = A TSET POINT- Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency.
15 = FAULT(RST) - Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto-
delay.
See parameter 3103 DEN TIME.
16 = FLT~ALARM- Energize reiay when fault or alarm occurs.
17 = EXT CTRL- Energize reiay when external control is selected.
-
18 = REF 2 SEL - Eneroize relav when EXT2 is selected.
19 = CONST FREQ - Energ~zerelay when a constant speed 1s selected
20 = REF LOSS - Enerqize relav when reference or actlve control oiace 1s lost
121 = OVERCURRENT -Eneroize < relav when an overcurrent aiarm or fault occurs.
22 = O / F I ( ~ O ~ T A G E- Energze relay *hen all odergotage alarm or fa^ t occLrs
23 = oRlVE TEMP - Enerq~zere av wrlen a or ve or coltrol board overterncerature a arrn or fault occurs
124 = UNDERVOLTAGE - Geraize u Felav
~
, when an undervoitaoe
~
u alarm or fault occurs.
25 = n l l Loss - Energize relay when nll signal is lost.
~~

26 = n12 Loss - Enerqize relav when n12 siqnal is lost.

27 = MOTOR TEMP - Gergize wnen a-motor overtemperalure alarm or f a ~ loccursl
28 = S ~ A L . - Enorg~zerelay wnen a stall a arm or f a ~ iexists
t
30 = PID SLEEP - Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active.
31 = PFC - Use relay to stattlstop motor in PFC control (See Group 81: PFC CONTROL).
U s e this option only when PFC control is used.
Selection activated 1 deactivated when drive is not running.
32 = AUTOCHANGE - Energize reiay when PFC autochange operation is performed.
-
Use this option only when PFC control is used.
33 = FLUX READY - Eneraize relav when the motor is maonetized and able to suoolv
reacnea nom.nal magnet z ng)'
-
. . . nominal toraue (motor has
34 = USER rdncno 2 - Energ.ze reia) vtheri Lser Parameter Set 2 is acllve

Parameters
ACS550 Useis Manual 117

--
- ..---.. -- ...- - .
ze relay oased on 1np.J f l u , I l'r; diius comm-ntcal on
Fie dous writes binary code n p~rameter0134 that can energ ze relay 1 re ay 6 accorolng lo tne 1ollov.ng

0 = De-energize relay. 1 = Energize relay.

I I 56 = COMt4,-1) - Enerytze rea, baseu on npJr from f sdh-s cornnlLrlicatlon

F~elaouswrlres b nary code n parameter 0134 tnat can energlze relay 1 relay 6 accoratng to tne 101 ow ng
I

0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.

37 =TIMED FUNC 1 -Energize relay when Timed Function 1 is active. See Groilo 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
-
138...40 =TIMED FUNC 2...4 Eneraize relav when Timed Function 2..4 is activk- See TIMED FUNC
~~~~ -
~~~- 1 above
- . -.
141 = hlhT TK G I:l<PI - Encrg ze re a; wnen cool ng fan coJnler .s tr ggerea See G,&p 29 MAIrVTn\ANCE TR.G
(42 = 1.1hI rt? G REV - Energize relay wnen revo..ttuns coJnrer IS tr ggzred See Gr311p29 M+l/MTENANCE i i ( ~ G
143 = MhT TRIG HJEI - Eneratze re av nnen run tme coLntcr 1s lraaered See G,od.~29 I/.4,NTENAACE IRIG
44 = M h l ,RIG inn,, - EneG ze relay *hen MWn counter s trlgg&u. See Grol.pi9 M A ~ A ~ E N A N CTR.GE
4G I- START DELAY- Energ ze re a v when a slan oe ay 1s acllve
47 = USER LOAD c - ~nergizerelay when a user l o a d - c u ~ fault
e or alarm occurs.
52 = JOG ACTIVE - Energize relay when the jogging function is active.
402 IRELAYOUTPUT 2
Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 -what relay output 2 means.
See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
403 RELAY OUTPUT 3
Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 -what relay output 3 means.
See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1
404 RO 1 ON DELAY
Defines the switch-on delay lor relay 1
On I off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC.
Control event -..
405 RO 1 OFF DELAY
I I
Relay status 1
/.
Defines the switch-off delav for relav 1
On I off delays are ignored when h a y output 1401 is set to PFC. H
1404 ON DELAY
n
1405 OFF DELAY
I
406 RO 2 ON DELAY
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 2.
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
407 RO 2 OFF DELAY
Defines the switch-off delav for relav 2.
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
408 IRO 3 ON DELAY

I.
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 3.
See RO 1 ON DELAY.

Parameters
 118 ACS550 User's Manual

-
. . ... .
~ ~ i
-.
1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY
~~
p t
.--- -.
...
i o n
--. -I1
-
Switch-of delay for relay 3.
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4...6
-.. Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4...6 - what relay output 4...6 means.
1412 See 1401 REtAY OUTPUT 1.
1413 RO 4 ON DELAY

.
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 4.
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 4.
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1425 RO 5 ON DELAY
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 5.
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 5.
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1417 RO 6 ON DELAY
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 6.
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 6.
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 119

Group 15: ANALOG OUTPUTS

This group defines the drive's analog (current signal) outputs. The drive's analog
outputs can be:
any parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA
- limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current
scaled (andlor inverted) by defining the minimum and maximum values of the
source parameter (or content). Defining an maximum value (parameter 1503 or
1509) that is less than the content minimum value (parameter 1502 or 1508)
results in an inverted output.
filtered.
.
,
~..,"
: . ,:_;
..., -".,,
. , " , :;;,;z,>t:';y
~....&
,?&dG. ,J-~scrlptlon ,'!'.:'
.
:,:':q,: .~:
,
- ,.
.:., .,.. : , . ., . ,; :, , . . .y,..,,>5:>v:L*3:
, ',>.
;,, ..-, .,
<
.,#,
6".,,.,<. .,'.,~
..,. ,.,.
'>'
~ . $ .,:3; , . :,,,,:.+
,.
.:,L
'.
,.
,>\...'.l*
;<~,:~';;,;.:,spi>?~:
.-,,, *,,,,$ r.;,,;.'.:s~i,r;.~,
,Lr'.: .;,
1501 1~01 CONTENT SEL
Defines the content for analog output A01
99 = EXCITE PTC - Provides a current source for sensor type PTC. Output = 1.6 mA. See Group 35: MOTOR TEMP
MEAS.
100 = EXCITE ~ ~ 1 -Provides
0 0 a current source for sensor type PT100. Output = 9.1 mA. See Group 35: MOTOR
TFMP MFAS ~

101... 159 -Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA.

k-
Parameter defined by value (value 102 = parameter 0102)
1502 A 0 1 CONTENT MIN 4AO (mA)
Sets the minimum content value. p $505I - - - - - -- -- --
.-
Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501
Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be
P 1511
converted to an analog output.
.
These parameters (content and current min. and max. settings)
,
provide scale and offset adjustment for the output. See the
figure. P 1504 I
1503 A01 CONTENT MAX P 1510 1 A 0 CONTENT

Sets the maximum content value P 1502 11508

-.
Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501.
Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will A 0 (mA)
P 15031 1509

be converted to an analog output. P 15051

P 1511
1504 MINIMUM A 0 1
Sets the minimum output current.
1505 /MAXIMUM A 0 1
Sets the maximum output current.
1 ! \
1506 FILTER A 0 1 m A - d n

Defines the filter time constant for AOI

. The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time
specified.
I i AO CONTENT

P 1502 I1508
P 1503 1 1509
See the figure in parameter 1303.
1507 A 0 2 CONTENT SEL
Defines the content for analog output ~ 0 2 See
. AOI
CONTENT SEL above.
1508 1 ~ 0 CONTENT
2 MIN
Sets the minimum content value. See AOI
CONTENT MIN above.
1509 1 ~ 0 2CONTENT MAX
CONTENT MAX above.
Sets the maximum content value. See AOI
1510 MINIMUM A 0 2
Sets the minimum output current. See MINIMUM A01 above.

Parameters
 120 ACS550 Usefs Manual

-
"-*"".-r
'""" >.,.r )! i;,i
.d>.,#$*; *.%_
-,-.... . . .";.,. ;. .
,.....*.~,,; .-,:....,:.z,
..**? , .. ,,.
.
g e n, , , , , . ,, ,; ;..,:, ::>!::>..,*:<:~ .
,,; ;p34
,,,..,,. ,,,,.,$....*,,. ;;,.8i: ,f*, .,..?. ?:,,,;
~%>,,,
,. . ,?:,:
:.:;;'/;?'!:;ly,,,:. ~ ,z.#".
~>.,, J,.(:!:;~ ~ ~ : , ~ , v ~ , ~ ~ ~ ~ * z ~ ~ :
?;<3:,?.;:%
1511 MAXIMUM A 0 2
Sets the maximum output current. See MAXIMUM AOI above.
1512 FILTER A 0 2
Defines the filter time constant for ~ 0 2 See
. FILTER AOI
above.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual

Group 16: SYSTEM CONTROLS

This group defines a variety of s y s t e m level locks, resets and enables.

Selects the source of the run enable signal.

0 = NOT SEL -Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal.
1 = 011-Defines digital input 011 as the run enable signal.
This digital input must be activated for run enable.
If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable
signal resumes.
2...6 = Dl2...016 - Defines digital input Dl2...Dl6 as the run enable signal.
- See 011above.
7 = COMM - Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal.
Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the run disable signal.
See fieldbus user's manual for detailed instructions.
-1 = DI~(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DII as the run enable signal.
T h i s digital input must be de-activated for run enable.
If this digital input activates, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes.
2 . - 6 = 012(1NV)...DIG(1NV) - Defines an inverted digital input Dl2...016 as the run enable signal.
See DI~(INV) above.
1602 PARAMETER LOCK
Determines if the control panel can change parameter values.
This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros.
This lock does not limit parameter chanoes written bv fieldbus inwuts.
Tn s parameter va Le tin oe changed only f tne cor;ecl pass cobe is enlered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE
I I
1
0 = .OCKED - YOL cannot Lse tne conlrol pane to change parameter va ues
1 .The lock can be opened bv enterina the valid wass code to oarameter 1603. 1
I= OPEN - YOU can use the control panel to change parameter'va~ues.
2 = NOT SAVED - YOUcan use the control panel to change parameter values, but they are not stored in permanent
memory
.Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 (SAVE)to store changed parameter values to memory
1603 PASS CODE
Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock.
See parameter 1602 above.
The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once.
This entry reverts back to 0 automatically.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no
longer exists.
0 = KEYPAD - Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source.
-Fault reset is always possible with control panel.
1 = 011-Defines digital input 011as a fault reset source.
Activating the digital input resets the drive.
2...6 = Dl2...016 - Defines digital input Dl2...016 as a fault reset source.
See 011above.
7 = START/STOP - Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source.
Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start, stop and direction commands.
8 = COMM - Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source.
The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
T h e bit 4 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) resets the drive.
-1 = OIl(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input Dl1 as a fault reset source.
- De-activatingthe digital input resets the drive.
-2...-6 = DI~(INV) ...DI~(INV)- Defines an inverted digital input Dl2...016 as a fault reset source.
S e e D I ~ ~ I Nabove.
V)

Parameters
122 ACS550 Useis Manual

Dof8nesconlrol for cnang fig !he user parameter set

See Faramcter '3902 APP. c MACRO
The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets.
During a change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings, or performing a motor
identification.
Whenever the power is cycled, or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed, the drive loads the last settings
saved. Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost.
Note: The value of this parameter (1605) is not included in the User Parameter Sets, and it does not change if User
Parameter Sets change.
Note: You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2.
See parameter 1401.
0 = NOT SEL- Defines the control panel (using parameter 9902) as the only control for changing User Parameter
set-

I
1 = u l i - Dcfiries d gl:a input D I ~as a conlrol for cnanglng U5er Parameter Sels
The drlve loaos User Parameler Set 1 on the fa ng edge of tne d glla Input
- The
- - orlve oaas User Paramcler Set 2 on the ris ng edge of the olgita npLt
T h e User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
2...6 = 012...016 - Defines digital input 012...016 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
See 011above.
-1 = oll(1NV) - Defines an inverted digital input o l l as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
T h e drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input.
T h e drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input.
The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
2 . - 6 = DIZ(1NV)...DI~(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input Dl2...Dl6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets
See 011(INV) above.
1606 LOCAL LOCK
Defines control for the use of the LOG mode. The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel.
W h e n LOCAL LOCK is active, the control panel cannot change to LOG mode.
0 = NOT SEL- Disables the lock. The control panel can select LOC and control the drive.
1 = 011 -Defines digital i n ~ uDII
t as the control for settina- the local lock.
Ac18va1ng the dcgital inp-t lords 0-1 loca conrro
De-ac1,valng the o gital input enable ine -0C he ecllon
2 6 = 0 2 olb - Defines ala la1 nD,l ~ 1 2 D 6 as !he contro for settlna lne oc3 ock
1 See 011above.
I I 7 = Oh - Sets lne locn h e conlro panel cannot select ILOC and cannot contro the d r ~ / e
8 = coMh4 - Defnes bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as In? control lor settinq
The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
- the ocal low
T h e Command Word is 0301.
-1 = DIl(1NV) - Defines an inverted digital input Dl1 as the control for setting the local lock.
De-activating the digital input locks out local control.
Activating the digital input enable the LOG selection.
-2...-6 = D12(1NV)...DI~(INV)- Defines an inverted digital input Dl2...Dl6 as the control for setting the local lock.
S e e DI~(INV)above.
1607 PARAM SAVE
Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory.
Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save, you must use
this parameter.
If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 2 (NOTSAVED),parameters altered from the control panel are not saved. To save, you
must use this parameter.
If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 1 (OPEN), parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to
permanent memory
0 = DONE - Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved.
1 =SAVE... -Saves altered oarameters to Dermanent memorv.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 123

Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal.

Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality,
0 = NOT SEL - Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.
1 = 011-Defines digital input Dl1 as the start enable 1 signal.
T h i s digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal.
If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the
panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes.
2...6 = Dl2...Dl6 - Defines digital input Dl2 ...Dl6 as the start enable 1 signal.
See Dl1 above.
7 = COMM -Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal.
Bit 2 of the Command word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 1 signal.
See fieldbus user's manual for detailed instructions.
-1 = DII(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input Dl1 as the start enable 1 signal.
2 . - 6 = 012(INV)...DI~(INV)- Defines an inverted digital input Dl2... Dl6 as the start enable 1 signal.
S e e o l l (INv) above.
Drive started
STARTISTOP
COMMAND
I (Group 10)
I
I START ENABLE
I SIGNAL
I (Parameters
t 1608 & 1609)
I
I I
I Relay energized I
Relay
de-energized STARTED
RELAY STATUS
(Group 14)
, Damper open
I
'
Damper
, closed
I-,
1 Damper
time I
'i closing
time

RUN ENABLE SIGNAL

I from the damper end
I
I
I, switch when the
damper is fully opened.
4
I , (Parameter 1601)

time to stop
(Par 2202)

Parameters
124 ACS550 User's Manual

----. --.
. -. .- .-- -
Code ~ e s c r i p l i o n
E k N A B L E2
Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal.
---...-......--.-.-. . -
--.
I
..-

Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.
0 = NOT SEL -Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.
1 = Dl1 -Defines digital input Dl1 as the start enable 2 signal.
This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal.
If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on panel
display. The drive will not start until stalt enable 2 signal resumes.
2...6 = 012...016 - Defines digital input Dl2 ... Di6 as the start enable 2 signal.
See Dl1 above.
7 = COMM - Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal. Bit 3 of the Command
word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 2 signal.
-
See fieldbus user's manual for detailed instructions.
-1 = o l l ( l ~ v-) Defines an inverted digital input Dl1 as the start enable 2 signal.
-2...-6 = 012(1NV)... DI~(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input Dl2...Dl6 as the start enable 2 signal.
See 011 (INV) above.
1610 DISPLAY ALARMS
Controls the visibility of the following alarms:
.
2001, Overcurrent alarm
2002. Overvoitage alarm
2003, Undervoltage alarm
2009. Device overtemperature alarm.
For more information, see section Alarm 11stingon page 250.
0 =NO - The above alarms are suppressed.
1 =YES -All of the above alarms are enabled.
1611 PARAMETER VIEW
Selects the parameter view, i.e. which parameters are shown.
Note: This parameter is visible Only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device. FlashDrop is designed fo
fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives. It allows easy customization of the parameter list, e.g. selected
parameters can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-Of FlashDrop User's Manual [3AFE68591074
(English)].
FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 to 31 (LOADFD SET).
0 = DEFAULT- Complete long and short parameter lists are shown.
1 = FLASHDROP - FlashDrop parameter list is shown. Does not include short parameter list. Parameters that are
hidden by the FlashDroP device are not visible.

Parameters
ACS550 Useis Manual 125

Group 20: LIMITS

This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor -
speed, frequency, current, torque, etc.

2002 IMINIMUM
SPEED I S.,OD~I ,
2001 value is < 0
I l~efinestheminimum speed (rpm) allowed.
A oosltlve for zero) mlnlmum meed value defines two ranaes.

I .1
and a'ne negative.'
speed value defines one speed range.
" '1 Time
See the figure
I
P 2001

2002 MAXIMUM SPEED

Defines the maximum speed (rpm) allowed.
1 Speed/ 2001 value is 2 o

Defines the maximum output current (A) supplied by the drive to the motor.
2005 OVERV VOLT CTRL
1 /Sets the DC overvoltaae controller on or off.

I I Fast orakmg of a h j h Inen a load cadses tne DC o-s vo tage lo rise to me overvoltage control I rn I lo pre,ent tne
DC vo taae from exceed~rigthe tr p m,t the ouervo lago controller automat.ca1 y oecreases the oranlng~.torque by.
increasing output frequency.
0 = DISABLE - Disables controller.
1 = ENABLE - Enables controller
Note: If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive, this parameter value must be set to
0 (DISABLE)to ensure proper operation of the chopper.
UNDERVOLT CTRL
Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off. When on:
If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power, the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in
order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit.
When the motor weed decreases, the inertia of the load causes reaeneration back into the drive. keeDina - the DC
I I o-s cnargea and prevent ng an unde~voltage1r.p
The DC -ndarvoltage control cr incrsases povrer loss r ae-tnro-gh on systems w lh a h~gniccrtla sucn as a
centrifuge or a fan.
I
0 = DISABLE - Disables controller.
1 = ENAaLE(TIME) - Enables controller with 500 rns time limit for operation.
2 = ENABLE - Enables controller without maximum time limit for ooeration.

Parameters
 126 ACS550 User's Manual

.**. .- .....~.~
""'.. .....* .
, Cddz *.&$
s*-'*m,..'-
&*.." .,,,.,.,.;<,'::~'2:"":":'"'i".:'i-
-,, DeScrlptlpn*-,*%;<;7Gs?>*a<;*~&
>>.,
,:<#&>?;.!>:$<&,~t:~&.;>:, *:$
;~
;' ;s,." ,%,,, .,,,-.:. " - '":., ,>%d*>?...A'v,:$. :.:?:,{'-*r:": -:."'-c.,<*
. ,, .>: .,::<~:4' $: ,,,:. :s<".7"J,~
;Z4:,
~s.$",,~::!
:'.:I-- ;::.,
:; :,.,<:.,: ;, : ; , ,.., ..<,<..
.,.A,,,
'
-
. ,,

2007 MINIMUM FREQ Freq 0 0 7 value is < 0

Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. P 2006
A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
.
A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range.
0 Time
See the figure.
Note: Keep MINIMUM FREO (MAXIMUM FREQ.
P 2007
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency.

P 2008
2007 value is 2 0 I
P 2007
n Time
-(P 2007) ---
Frequency range allowed
-(P 2008, .. - .-

1013 MIN TORQUE SEL

Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits (2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2 0 1 6 MIN TORQUE 2).
0 = MIN TORQUE 1 -Selects 2 0 1 5 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used.
1 = 011- Defines digital input DII as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.
De-activating the digital input selects MIN TOROUE 1 value.
2...6 = Dl2...Dl6 - Defines digital input 012 ...Dl6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
S e e 011 above.
7 = COMM - Defines bit 1 5 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
The Command Word is parameter 0 3 0 1
-1 = DII(1NV) - Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
.Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.
De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.
-2...-6 = D12(1NV) ...DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input 012 ...016 as the control for selecting the minimum limit
used.
See DI~(INV) above.
l o 1 4 [MAX TORQUE SEL
l~efinescontrol of the selection between two maximum toraue limits (2017 MAX TOROUE Iand 2 0 1 6 MAX TORQUE 21.
o = MAX TORQUE I-Selects 2 0 1 7 MAX TOROUE Ias the maximum limit used.
1 = 011 -Defines digital input Dl1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used
Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value. -
-
De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.
2...6 = Dl2...Dl6 - Defines digital input Dl2 ... 016 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
S e e o l l above.

I I 7 = CQMM - Defines bit 1 5 of the Command Word Ias the control for selecting the maximum limit used
T h e Command Word is supolied throuah fieldbus communication.
The Command Word is parameter 0301.
-1 = DII(1NV) - Defines an inverted digital input dil as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
.Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.
De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.
-2...-6 = D12(1NV) ... DI~(INV)- Defines an inverted digital input Dl2...Dl6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit
used.
See DI~(INV) above.
2015 MIN TORQUE 1
Sets the first minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
2 0 1 6 MIN TORQUE 2
Sets the second minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 127

Sets the first maximum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
2018 MAX TORQUE 2
Sets the second maximum limit for torque (%). Value is a Dercent of the motor nominal toroue.

Parameters
 128 ACS.550 Use& Manual

Group 21: STARTISTOP

I
This group defines h o w the motor starts and stops. T h e ACS550 supports s e v e r a l
start and stop m o d e s .

1Selects the motor start method. The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.
1 =AUTO- Selects the automatic start mode.
Vector control modes: Optimal start in most cases. The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to
I start a rotatina motor.
SChlAH rRLO mooe l~nrneolatestan from zero freqdency
2 = Dc ~ ~ A G-NSe ects the DC Magnet zlng stan mode
Note Tne DC Maonet ztnu slan mode cannot start a rotat na motor
Note: The drive siarts when the set pre-magnetizing time (parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME)has passed, even if motoi
magnetization is not complete.
Vector control modes: Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME
using DC current. The normal control is released exactly alter the magnetizing time. This selection guarantees
the highest possible break-away torque.
SCALAR:FREa mode: Maqnetizes the motor within the time determined bV the Darameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME usinc
DC current. The norma~controlis released exactly alter the magnetizing time.
13 =SCALAR FLYST - Selects the Rying start mode.
I .Vector control modes: Not aoolicable. I
.
1 1 SCAAR FrlFQ mooe The dr&e a-tomatica y se ecls the correct OJI[,LI

4 = TORO ROOST - Se ects the a .tomatlc torque boost mooe ( s r AR

M a y be necessary in drives with high starting torque.
freq~encyto starr a rotattng motor - u s e f ~
~fthe motor 1s a read! rotat ng ano f the or,vc ui I stan smooth at the current frequency
~ I IZLO mcoe on .I I.)

Torque boost is only applied at start, ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is
equal to reference.
In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC
current.
-See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR.
5 =FLY + BOOST - Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode (SCALAR:FREQ mode only).
Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized. If the speed is found to be zero, the torque
boost is done.
8 = RAMP -Immediate start from zero frequency.
!I02 STOP FUNCTION
Selects the motor stop method.
1 = COAST - Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method. The motor coasts to stop.
2 = RAMP - Selects using a deceleration ramp.
Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TlME 1 Or 2206 DECELER TlME 2 (whichever is active).
!I03 DC MAGN TlME
Defines the pre-magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode.
Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode.
After the start command, the drive pre-magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor.
Set the pre-magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor
excessively.
!I04 DC HOLD CTL Motor
DC hold
Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold.
0 = NOT 5EL- Disables the DC current operation.
1 = DC HOLD - Enables the DC Hold function. See the diagram.
Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) speed b I 7
Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when
both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter
I
7105
Ref+ I 1 .
When Ule reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive
resumes normal operation. T
2 = DC BRAKING - Enables the DC Injection Braking alter modulation has speed
stopped.
-
If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 (COAST),braking is applied after start is removed.
If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 (RAMP),braking is applied alter ramp.
ACS550 User's Manual 129

-..--.

n --
..
. ..
Code Description
.-.-..... .-
. - ..-. - ..- - .-- .--
. -.
2105 DC HOLD SPEED
Sets the speed for DC Hold. Requires that parameter 2104 oc HOLD CTL = 1 (DCHOLD).
2106 IDCCURR REF
Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.
2107 IDCBRAKE TIME
I~efinesthe DC brake time after modulation has stopped, if parameter 2104 is 2 (oc BRAKING).
2108 [START INHIBIT
Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the
following situations (a new start command is required):
A fault is reset.
Run Enable (parameter 1601) activates while start command is active.
Mode changes from local to remote.
Control switches from EXTI to E X T ~ .
Control switches from EXT2 to EXTI.
0 =OFF- Disables the Start inhibit function.
1 = ON - Enables the Start inhibit function.
2109 EMERG STOP SEL
Defines control of the Emergency stop command. When activated:
Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp (parameter 2208 EMERG OEC TIME).
Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart.
0 = NOT SEL - Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs.
1 = DII -Defines digital input DII as the control for Emergency stop command.
Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
De-activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
2...6 = Dl2...016- Defines digital input 012...016 as the control for Emergency stop command.
See 011 above.
-1 = DI~(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for Emergency stop command.
De-activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
2 . - 6 = D12(1NV)... 016(INv) - Defines an inverted digital input 012 ... 016 as the control for Emergency stop command.
See DI~(INV) above.
2110 TORQ BOOST CURR

-
Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost.
See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.

Parameters
 130 ACS550 User's Manual

.--- - - --..-.- -. -.- -- --

F?
Code Description
.- -....
2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY
....-... . -.-. .. -- . . -. .-. ...-. . -. .- ---
Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function. If parameter value is set to zero, the Zero Speed Delay functior
is disabled.
The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay the drive
knows accurately the rotor position.
No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay
Speed Speed
Speed controller switched off: Speed controller remains live.
Motor coasts to stop. Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed.

Zero Speed

Delay
Zero speed delay can be used e.g. with jogging function or mechanical brake.
No Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an
internal limit (called Zero Speed), the speed controller is switched off. The drive modulation is stopped and the mot01
coasts to standstill.
With Zero S ~ e e d Delav
I l ~ h drive
e receives a st& command and decelerates alona a ramo. When the motor actual soeed falls below an I
II I nlernal i mil (called Zero Speeo) Ihe zero speed de ay funct on acthates Dur ng tna oela, tAe f-ncl on$ keeps lne
speed conlro ler ve The dr ve niod I ate5 moror ,s magnel zed arla dr ve is reaov for a qu c< restart
I ~ o t e Parameter
: 2102STOP FUNCTION must be 2 = RAMP for zero speed delay to bperate: I
10.0 = NOT SEL- Disables the Zero Speed Delay function.
2113 [START DELAY
,) Deiines the Start delay. After the conditions for start have been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed
and then starts the motor. Start delay can be used with all start modes.
If START DELAY =zero, the delay is disabled.
Durina the Start deiav. alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown.

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual 131

Group 22: ACCELIDECEL

This group defines r a m p s that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration. You
define these ramps as a pair, one for acceleration and one for deceleration. You can
define two pairs of ramps and u s e a digital input t o select one or the o t h e r pair.

l~efinescontrol for selection of accelerationldeceleration r a m s

/..Ramps are defned in palls one each for acce era1 on and aece erallon
See be on, for ihe ran p dafinlton parameters
0 = NOT SEL - Disables selection, the first ramp pair is used.
1 = o l l -Defines digital input o l l as the control for ramp pair selection.
Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2.
De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1
2...6 = Dl2...016 - Defines digital input 012 ...016 as the control for ramp pair selection.
S e e oll above.
7 = COMM - Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
T h e Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
The Command Word is parameter 0301.
-1 = DII(INv) - Defines an inverted digital input 011as the control for ramp pair selection.
-
De-activating the diaital inwut selects ramo oair 2
Activating t& digitiinput'selects ramp pei; 1.
2...-6 = 012(1NV)...DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted diqital
. input 012 ... Dl6 as the control for ramp
. .pair selection
See ~ 1 1 ( l ~ v ) a b o v e .
!202 ACCELER TIME 1
Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1. See A in :goi ~ i n e a r

y;
the fiaure. - 7"-
~ c c u aacceleration
l time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.
See 2008 MAXIMUM FRED.

i
2203 DECELER TIME 1
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1
++ B
+
(=O)
,('
.Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1
7
See 2008 MAXIMUM FREO.
2204 RAMP SHAPE 1
Selects the shape of the accelerationldeceleration ramp for ramp pair 1. See B in
FREQ 1 S-curve!
- -r
1

I I
ihe fg-re
Shape 1s defned as a ramp, n.. ess aad t ona Ime s spec f.ed here ro reacn tne
max mum frequency A longer Ime prov des a soRer lranslllon at each ena of the
slope. The shape becomes an s-curve.
Rule of thumb: 115 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the 1
acceleration ramp time.
0.0 = LINEAR - Specifies linear accelerationldecelerationramps for ramp pair 1.
0.1 ... 1000.0 = s-CURVE- Specifies s-curve accelerationldeceleration ramps for
A = 2202 ACCELER
B = 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1
,
ramp pair 1.
2205 ACCELER TIME 2

I 1 Sets the acceleration time for zero to maxlmum frequency for ramp pair 2
See 2202 ACCELER TIME I
-- - acceleration time. See 1004 JOGGING SEL.
Used also as .ioqain~
2206 DECELER TlME 2
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2.
See 2203 DECELER TlME 1
Used also as jogging deceleration time. See 1004 JOGGING SEL.
2207 IRAMP SHAPE 2
Selects the shape of the accelerationldeceleration ramp for ramp pair 2.
See 2204 RAMP SHAPE I.

Parameters
 132 ACS550 User's Manual
.

I I1. Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency
See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL.
~ a m is
b linear.
2209 RAMP INPUT 0
Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0.
0 = NOT SEL - Not selected.
1 = 011- Defines digital input 011as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0.
Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0. Ramp output will ramp to 0 according to the currently used ramp
time, after which it will stay at 0.
- De-activating the digital input: ramp resumes normal operation.
2...6 2 012...Dl6 - Defines digital input Dl2...Dl6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0.
See DII above.

I I .- 7 = comm - Defnes o ~ 13 t of ine Coninlarid Woro 1 as rne conlro for iorc ng tne ramb nput lo 0
Ttle Command Wora IS s-ppl ea lnroLqh fle abLs communlcar on
I Tne Command Word is oarameter 0301
1 = ~ I ~ ( I N-VDefnes
) an Avertea dlgltal ~ulpurn l as me control for furclng the ramp I ~ P lo J ~0
. D2-aclvatlng the o q tal 1np.t forces ramp Input to O
Activating the digitaiinput: ramp resumes normal operation.
-2...-6 = 012(1NV)...DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input 012 ...016 as the control for forcing the ramp function
generator input to 0.
S e e D I ~ ~ I N Vabove.
)

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual

Group 23: SPEED CONTROL

.
This group defines variables used for speed control operation.
. ".'.'",;" :;.. I.<>..:'<,';:,., : ,, :: - ,.,. . ,,,, .., .,'
co"dS.
, : ,,.,.,' "".:;'":~".',,
, .,.' ~.,.
, , .
. ,...
, ,, .
,.
,~,,,i,

. .,. - .- ... .--;,,

, , . , .. ,
; ,.
- .,,.;
..:. .*;- .
- . ,,
: . . ,.. ., ~ : ,.i.:+;r :
# ,

'., : < .<,#, :;<.;

2301 PROP GAIN
Gain = Kp =I
Sets the relative gain for the speed controller. 6= Integration time = 0
Larger values may cause speed oscillation. TD= Derivation time = 0
The figure shows the speed controller output %
after an error step (error remains constant).
Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE
RUN to automatically set the proportional gain.

output = e = Error value

Kp - e

2302 INTEGRATION TIME Controller output

Sets the integration time for the speed
controller.
The integration time defines the rate at which
the controller output changes for a constant
error value.
Shorter integration times correct continuous
errors faster.
Control becomes unstable if the integration
time is too short. Kp . e
The figure shows the speed controller output
after an error step (error remains constant).
Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE i-------y----i
RUN to automatically set the integration time.
Ti
2303 DERIVATION TlME
Sets the derivation time for the speed controller.
.-
Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes.
The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change.
If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, othelwise as a PID controller.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.

Controller output
KP . TD . -

Error value
- - - A-4-
Gain = Kp =,I
T, = lntegratlon time > 0 K,-e' e = Error value
To= Derivation time > 0 t
T,= Sample time period = 2 ms
Ae = Error value change between two samples
. -- -,
Ti

Parameters
134 ACS550 Use& Manual

-.
Code Description
l i x A T l O N
-. -.-- .- .. ...-. ..-- - ...-. ..... .- -.. . - ....
I
1 I Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation.
Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during
acceleration.
2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action.
Rule of thumb: Set this parameter between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motoi
and the driven machine.
The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
I I ' No acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation

Actual speed

*Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation.
2305 AUTOT TUNE RUN
Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller.
0 =OFF - Disables the Autotune creation process. (Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings.)
1 = ON - Activates speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to OFF.
Procedure:
I ~ o t e The
: motor load must be connected
..
Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed
Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON.

I ..The drive:
Accelerates the motor.
.
II I - Calcu atcs va es for propo,tlonal ga n lnlegrai on 1 me and sccc erarlon compensai!on
Chanqes parameters 2301 2302 ariu 2304 to these va "es
I ~ e s e i s2305 to OFF

Parameters
ACS550 User3 Manual

Group 24: TORQUE CONTROL

This group defines variables used for torque control operation.
..- .- .--. --. -- -.---.. - -..
-

R
Code Description
2101 Td.<6 .. ..-. . .. . .. ..... ... ....- ..

Defines the torque reference ramp up tlme -The mlnlmum tlme for the reierence to Increase from zero to the
nominal motor torque
2402 ITORQ RAMP DOWN
Defines the torque reference ramp down tlme -The minimum time for the reference to decrease from the nominal
motor torque to zero.

Parameters
136 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 25: CRITICAL SPEEDS

This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be
avoided due, for example, to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds.
-
Code l~escription
-..--- .. --....- .. -.
2501 ~CRITSPEED SEL f- .
Sets the critical speeds function on or off. The critical speed A
function avoids specific speed ranges.
0 =OFF- Disables the critical speeds function. 52 . _ _ _ _ _ _ --
1 = O N - Enables the critical speeds function.
Example: To avoid speeds at which a fen system vibrates badly:
Determine problem speed ranges. Assume they are found to 23 ___
be: 18. . 2 3 Hz and 46 ...52 Hz.
Set 2501 CRlT SPEED SEL = 1 18
I
I I I
Set 2502 CRIT SPEED I LO = 18 HZ. I

I I
Set 2503 CRIT SPEED I HI = 23 HZ.
Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO = 46 Hz
Set 2505 CRT l SPEED 2 HI = 52 Hz.

2502 CRlT SPEED 1 LO

Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1
-
The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRT l SPEED 1 HI.
Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREO), then units are Hz.
2503 CRlT SPEED IHI
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1
The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO.
Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ), then units are Hz.
2504 CRlT SPEED 2 LO
Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2.
See parameter 2502.
2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2.
See parameter 2503.
2506 CRlT SPEED 3 LO
Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3.
See parameter 2502.
2507 CRlT SPEED 3 HI
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3.
See parameter 2503.

Parameters
ACS550 U s e i s Manual

Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL

This group d e f i n e s variables u s e d f o r motor control.

Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load. Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy
consumption and noise, and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load.
0 = OFF - Disables the feature.
1 = ON - Enables the feature.
2602 FLUX BRAKING
Braking
Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of torque (%) Rated motor power
magnetization in the motor when needed, instead of
limiting the deceleration ramp. By increasing the flux in
the motor, the energy of the mechanical system is
changed to thermal energy in the motor.
Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE =
1 (VECTOR:SPEED) OR 2 (VECTOR:TORO).
0 =OFF- Disables the feature.
1 = O N- Enables the feature.

5 10 20 30 40 50

1 l2O%+- - \ M t h flux braking

f (Hz)

2603 IR COMP VOLT

Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz.
Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE =
3 (SCALAR:FREQ).
Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent
overheating.
Typical IR compensation values are:
when enabled, IR compensation provides an extra
voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. Use IR
compensation, for example, in applications that require i
high breakaway torque.
t Motor
voltage

A = IR compensated
B = No compensation
P 2603
IR COMP FREQ
Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V (in
% of motor frequency).
I
2605 UIF RATIO
Selects the form for the Ulf (voltage to frequency) ratio below field weakening point.
1 = LINEAR - Preferred for constant torque applications.
2 = SQUARED - Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications. (Square is more silent for most operating
frequencies.)

Parameters
 138 ACS5.50 User's Manual

..-. ..-
;=I --....-
, E,-....
R ----.-. .-..-. . .
4
-- .... ..-.

Sets the switching irequency for the drive. Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREO CTRL and section Switching
frequency derating on page 262.
Higher switching frequencies mean less noise.
- The 1. 4 and 8 kHz switching frequencies are available i0r all types, except for ACS550-01-246.4-4 only 1 and
4 kHz are available.
The 12 kHz switching irequency is available only if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREO).
The 12 kHz switching frequency is available for 200 V and 400 V irame sizes R1...R4 (except for the R4 types
ACS550-01-O87A-4 and ACS550-U1-097A-4) and for 600 V frame sizes R2 ...R4.
SWITCH FREQ CTRL
The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS550 R1...R4 drives, see par 2606
limit
internal temperature rises above a limit. See the figure.
This function allows the highest possible switching 12 kHz R5...R6 drives, see par 2606
frequency to be used based on operating conditions.
8kHz Drive
Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic
temperature
noise.
0 = OFF - The function is disabled. 4 kHz ...'... ...7' . - - - - -

I I 1 =ON -The switching frequency is limited according to

the figure.

2608 SLIP COMP RATIO

60QC 90.C 1 0 0 ' ~ *T

Sets gain for slip compensation (in %).

A squirrel-cage motor slips under load. Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for
the sliu.

I I
~equiresparameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).
0 - No slip compensation.
1...200 - Increasing - slip
. comuensation. 100% means full sliw comoensation
2609 NOISE SMOOTHING
+I This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency. Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic
,,.
motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity.
The random component has an average of 0 Hz. It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606
SWITCHING FREQ. This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 = 12 kHz.
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE.
2619 DC STABILIZER
Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer. The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible
voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load orweak supply network. In case of voltage variation the
drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation.
0 =DISABLE- Disables DC stabilizer.
1 = ENABLE - Enables DC stabilizer.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 139

Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRlG

This group contains usage levels and trigger points. When usage reaches the set
trigger point, a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due.

Sets the trigger point for the drive's cooling fan counter.
.0.0
Value is compared to parameter 2902 value.
- Disables the trigger.
2902 COOLING FAN ACT
Defines tho actual value of the drive's cooling fan counter.
When parameter 2901 has been set to a non-zero value, the counter starts.
When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901, a maintenance notice is
displayed on the panel.
0.0 - Resets the parameter.
2903 REVOLUTION TRlG

I I. Sets me trlgger po nl lor the motor's a c c ~ m ~ l a t erev0

Val-e 15 compared to parameter 2904 value
0 -Disables the trigger.
o utlons coJnler

2904 REVOLUTION ACT

Defines the actual value of the motor's accumulated revolutions counter.
When parameter 2903 has been set to a non-zero value, the counter starts.
.When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903, a maintenance notice is
displayed on the panel.
0 - Resets the parameter.
2905 RUN TlME TRlG
Sets the trigger point for the drive's run time counter.
Value is compared to parameter 2906 value.
0.0 -Disables the trigger.
2906 RUN TlME ACT
Defines the actual value of the drive's run time counter.
When Darameter 2905 has been set to a non-zero value. the counter starts.

I I When the actual value of the counter exceeds the valuedefined by parameter 2905, a maintenance notice is
displayed on the panel.
0.0 - Resets the parameter.
2907 USER MWh TRlG
Sets the trigger point for the drive's accumulated power consumption (in megawatt hours) counter.
-Value is compared to parameter 2908 value.
0.0 - Disables the trigger.
2908 USER MWh ACT
Defines the actual value of the drive's accumulated Dower consumotion (in meaawatt hours) counter.

I I-- Wnen parameter 2907 has oeen set to a non-zero value the counter starts -
When the actua value of the coJnter exceeds tne bal-e defined oy parameter 2907 a ma nlenance not ce 1s
displayed on the panel.
0.0 -Resets the parameter.

Parameters
140 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS

This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and
defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected.

I I Defines the drive response if the analog input (AI) signal drops below the fault limits and AI is used in reference chain.
3021 All FAULT LIMIT and 3022 A12 FAULT LIMIT Set
0 = NOT SEL - NOresponse.
~ ~
the fault limits
~~~~-~~~ ~-

1 = FAULT - Displays a fault (7, AII LOSS or 8, ~ 1 LOSS)

2 and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP 7 -Displays an alarm (2006,AII LOSS or 2007, ~ 1 Loss)
2 and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED - Displays an alarm (2006, rill Loss or 2007, A12 Loss) and sets speed using the last operating level.
This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds.

/i\ WARNING! If you select CoNsT SP 7 Or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the
analog input signal is lost.
3002 PANEL COMM ERR
Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error.
1 = FAULT - Disolavs a fault (10. PANEL LOSS) and the drive coasts to stoo. .~
2 = CONST SP 7 - disp ays a" alarm ,2008, PANE. I.OSS, and sets speed .*my 1208 cohsr SPrlio 7
II I
~

3 = LAST SPFEI) - D splays an a arm ,2008 PAhm - 0 s ) ano sets spoea s n o- rhe last ooerarina
" lebel Tn s ,a ue 1
s
1 the average
- meed
. over the last 10 seconds. I
WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the
control panel communication is lost.
3003 IEXTERNAL FAULT I
Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.
0 = NOT SEL - External fault signal is not used.
1 = 011-Defines digital input 011as the external fault input.
Activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, ExT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to
stoo.
1 12...6 ='Dl2...016- Defines digital input Dl2...Dl6 as the external fault input. I
I I
S e e 011above.
-1 = DII(INv)- Defines an inverted digital input Dl1 as the external fault input.
De-activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXT FAULT I) and the drive coasts to
stop.
-2...-6 = D12(1NV) ...DI~(INV)- Defines an inverted digital input 012...016 as the external fault input.
See DI~(INV) above.
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2
Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.
See parameter 3003 above.
3005 MOT THERM PROT
Defines the drive response to motor overheating.
0 =NOT SEL - NOresponse andlor motor thermal protection not set up.
1 =FAULT- When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 "C, displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR TEMP). When
the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 "C, displays a fault (9. MOT OVERTEMP)
and the drive coasts to st01
2 = ALARM - When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 "C, displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR TEMP).
MOT THERM TlME

n
3006
Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature
. . ..- - ..
rnnrini load/
This is the time required for the motor to reach 63% of the final
temperature with steady load. I
For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA
class motors, use the rule Of thumb: MOTOR THERM TIME equals
35 times t6, where t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor
manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely. operate
. at six

I I-
times its rated current.
The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class
20 trip cutve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 141

Cb' . , i'. .
. : '":,'.':
. d,cU~~E'iip;tioE'n"""""(tk~35~~12c~~,ii:I~;>*:~""""~~
,,
,
,; , ,,
; , , ,
%,
<,
<,:-':. ,,.-.
.
" ,,;:--
, :, : >,~,
. :. ' . .
%.,.

, ,
,,.,
:
..:<.:,~
, ,.,:,;: <->.
. , ,
:',8...:;.:;,,..,
- -- ,,.
:*,:.
3007 MOT LOAD CURVE
Output current (%) relative
Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor. to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
When set to loo%, the maximum allowable load is equal to the value
of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.
-
Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from
nominal.
3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD
Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed.
Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR. P 3008 50
3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Frequency
Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve.
P 3009
Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME, 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008
ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values.

3.0

2.5 lo = Output current

IN = Nominal motor current
2.0 fo = Output frequency
f5.q~= Break point frequency
300 s A =Trip time
600 s

I
0.5

0
' folfg~~
F
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
3010 STALL FUNCTION
This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function. This
protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region (see the
figure) for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME. The "User LimiY' is
defined in Group 20: LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1.2018 MAX TORQUE
2, or the limit on the COMM input. Torque1
0 = NOT SEL - Stall protection is not used. Current
1 = FAULT- When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set
by 3012 STALL TIME: Stall region
The drive coasts to stop.
A fault indication is displayed. 95%
2 =ALARM-When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set
by 3012 STALL TIME: limit
A n alarm indication is dis~laved.
T h e alarm disappears when'the drive is out of the stall region for
half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME.
3011 ISTALL FREQUENCY P 3011
This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function. Refer to Stall frequency
the figure.
3012 ISTALLTIME
h his parameter sets the time value for the Stall function.
3017 IEARTH
FAULT

I I1 Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables. The drive monitors for
ground faults while the drive is running, and while the drive is not running. Also see parameter 3023 WRING FAULT.
0 = DISABLE - NOdrive response to around faults.
= ENABLE - Ground faults display Lult 16 (EARTHFAULT),and (if running) the drive coasts to stop.

Parameters
142 ACS550 User's Manual

.- -- ...-- --.

H
Code Description
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC
-. - . -. . -.- -..

Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost.

0 = NOT SEL - NOresponse.
-.
7 ..

1 = FAULT - Displays a fault (28, SERIAL 1 ERR) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP 7 -Displays an alarm (2005. VO COMM) and sets speed using 1208 C o N s T SPEED 7. This "alarm speed'
remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value.
3 = LAST SPEED - Displays an alarm (2005. I10 COMM) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is t h ~
average speed over the last 10 seconds. This "alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new
reference value.

A WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7. or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when
fieldbus communication is lost.
3019 COMM FAULT TIME
Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME
value.
3021 A l l FAULT LIMIT
Sets a fault level for analog input 1
See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3022 A12 FAULT LIMIT
Sets a fault level for analog input 2.
See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3023 WIRING FAULT
Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running. When
the drive is not running it monitors for:
Improper connections of input power to the drive output (the drive can display fault 35, OUTPUT WRING if improper
connections are detected).
Ground faults (the drive can display fault 16, EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected). Also, see parameter 3017
EARTH FAULT.
0 = DISABLE - No drive response to either of the above monitoring results.
1 = ENABLE- The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems.
3024 CB TEMP FAULT
Defines the drive response to control board overheating. Not for drives with an OM10 control board.
0 = DISABLE - NOresponse.
1 =ENABLE- Displays fault 37 (CB OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to stop.

Parameters
ACS550 Useis Manual 143

Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET

This group defines conditions for automatic resets. An automatic reset occurs after a
particular fault is detected. The drive holds for a set delay time, then automatically
restarts. You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and set up
automatic resets for a variety of faults.
-
~~i/sEcriptim
3101 NUMBER OF T R ~ A L S
.. ... . ..... -
I ~ x a h p l e Tnree :
....-. .
fa-Its have occ.~rred n -4
Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined the trial time. The last is reset only if the
.

by 3102 TRIAL TIME. value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 3 or

If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit (within the trial more.
time), the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains
stopped. Trial time
Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control
i Time
-
panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL.
3102 TRIAL TlME
x = Automatic reset
See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS.
-
Sets the time period used for countino and limitina the number of resets.
~ ~ ~~

3103 DELAY TlME

Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart.
If DELAY TIME = zero, the drive resets immediately.
3104 AR OVERCURRENT
Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off.
0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.

I 1 1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset

Automatically resets the fault (OVERCURRENT)
normal ooeratlon
1105 AR OVERVOLTAGE
after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes

Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off.

0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset.
Automatically resets the fault (oc OVERVOLT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
1106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE
Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off
0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset.
Automatically resets the fault (oc UNDERVOLT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME,and the drive resumes
normal operation.
:I07 AR AI<MIN
Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off.
0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset.
Automatically resets the fault (AI<MIN) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME,and the drive resumes normal
operation.

A WARNING! When the analog input signal is restored, the drive may restart, even after a long stop. Make
sure that automatic, long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and/or damage equipment.
108 AR EXTERNAL FLT
Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off.

I IO = D SABLF - D sables aJtorna1c reset

!I = LhAU-E - Enaoles automat c reset
. Automatically resets the fault (EXT FAULT 1 Or EXT FAULT 2) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive
resumes normal operation.

--~

Parameters
 ACS5.50 User's Manual

Group 32: SUPERVISION

This group defines s u p e ~ i s i o nfor up to three signals from Group 01: OPERATING
DATA. Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay o u t p u t if
t h e parameter p a s s e s a defined limit. U s e Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS to d e f i n e the
relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high.
.-
Dfscription 7
ic0-d2 ..- .- ..- .- .- - . . ..... . .-
. . .. ...
.......... . ..... ...- ... I
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM I !
Selects the first supervised parameter.
Must be a parameter number from Group 01: OPERATING
DATA.
100 = NOT SELECTED - NOparameter selected. LOSHI
101...159 -Selects parameter 0101 ...0159. Note: Case LO HI represents a normal hysteresis.
If the supervised parameter passes a limit, a relay output i: Value of supervised parameter
energized.
The supervision limits are defined in this group.
The relav out~utsare defined in Grouo 14: RELAY
OUTPU~S(dkfinition also specifies &ich supervision limil
is monitored). I I l l / I t
LO < HI
O~eratinodata su~ervisionusina relav out~uts,when LOsHI
Casc i= Paranicter 1101 RE& O ~ T P U TI(or 1402 REAY
Case A

1-tl ti
Energized ( I )

~GhlL
OJTPJT 2 ClC ) Vallle IS SLPRd1 O\ ER 01 S JPRV2 OVER USE 0
I for monitorina whenlif the su~ervisedsional exceeds a
gwen Ifm t r i e relay rema ns act1.e "nil tne s-pen~seo Case B
va ue drops be ow tne ow Ihm t Energized ( I )
Case R = Parameter 1401 RE.AY O J ~ P L1~for 1402 REnv
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRVI UNDER or S U P R V ~UNDER. 0
Use for monitoring whenlif the supervised signal falls
below a given limit. The relay remains active until the LO > HI
supervised value rises above the high limit. Note: Case LO>HI represents a special hysteresis witt
LO >HI two separate supervision limits.
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LO>HI Active limit
Value of supervised parameter

@J
Tne louest llni I(1113203) 1s act ve fnlt a ly and renafns a c t ~ ~ e
A \4
.nt I tne sLperv sea parameter goes a o o ~ etne h ghest I mlt LO (3202)-- - - - -
( - 0 3202) ,nanlna that l ~ m t the 3ct ve Ifm I That llm 1 renialtis
active u&l the slpervised parameter goes below the lowest +
HI ( 3 2 0 3 ) - ~ 1 , - 4-C
t

u
limit (HI 3203). making that limit active. I I / / I I L
Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is ~UPRVI OVER or S U P R V ~OVER. Case A
Initially the relay is de-energized. It is energized whenever Energized (1)
the supervised parameter goes above the active limit.
Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 REIAY 0
OUTPUT 2, etC.) Value is SUPRVl UNDER Or SUPRV2 UNDER. Case B
Initially the relay is energized. It is de-energized whenever
the supervised parameter goes below the active limit. Energized (1)
3202 ISUPERV ILIM LO 0
Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter. See
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3203 ~SUPERV1 LIM HI
Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter. See
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3204 ~SUPERV2 PARAM
Selects the second supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3205 ~SUPERV2 LIM LO
Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.
3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI
Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.

Parameters
 ACS550 User's M a n u a l 145

-- ..---

&
Code Description
3r
-- - --.. .
PARAM
---. .-.... .

Selects the third supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
-- ...... . - - .---. .-.
1
-..
...

3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO

Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above.
3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI
Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above.

~~~~
p~~

Parameters
146 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 33: INFORMATION

This group provides access to information about the drive's current programs:
versions and test date.

Contains the version of the drive's firmware.

3302 LOADING PACKAGE
Contains the version of the loading package.
3303 TEST DATE
Contains the test date (yy.ww).
3304 DRIVE RATING
Indicates the drive's current and voltage rating. The format is XXXY,where:
XXX = The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes. If present, an " A indicates a decimal point in the rating
for the current. For example XXX = 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8.8A.
Y = The voltage rating of the drive, where Y = :
2 indicates a 208...240 V rating.
4 indicates a 380...480 V rating.
6 indicates a 500...600 V rating.
3305 PARAMETER TABLE
Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive.

Parameters
ACS550 U s e i s Manual 147

Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY

This group defines the content for control panel display (middle area), when the
control panel is in the Output mode.
., .
Q
> '
~

3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM

~ ~
. ' ,. ,
"
:
, ,
_ , ,
.,,...,&.;&
: .
::7*:.;.:,2
- . ?
.:;\:::
" i:;,s?
' ,,,..:
.:I,, ::*., .;,:G*:,,,";.
;:.>::<i:::::.,~,,.--'&>:2;>,"g +.,,*,.' :.<*<

P 3404 P 3405
,. .,.....:. ,:; ,.~,
,??.*",.?><$;>>?:,' ,zc>:<z,<.:,.:...,,.
,:3:5..;~:\>>:;$;>,;.::;
j:<;,,'
' ,
:>
.5 ;<:;~

Selects the first parameter (by number) displayed on the control

panel.
Definitions in this group define display content when the control p 3401 (137
panel is in the control mode.
Any parameter number in Group 01: OPERATING DATA can bs
selected. P 3415 (139 10.7 %
Using the following parameters, the display value can be scaled,
converted to convenient units and/or displayed as a bar graph.
The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group.
100 = NOT SELECTED - First parameter not displayed.
101... 159 - Displays parameter 0101 . .0159. If parameter does not P 3404
exist, the display shows "n.a."

3402 SIGNALI MIN

Display
Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter. value
Use parameters 3402,3403,3406 and 3407, for example to convert
a Group 01: OPERATING DATA parameter, such as 0102 SPEED (in
rpm) to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor (in Wmin). For
such a conversion, the source values in the fiaure are the min. and

I I max motor spseu, ana the dlsp ay values areihe corresponding m 11

anu max conveyor spcea Jse parameter '3405 to select ine proper
units for the display.
, I
Note: Selecting units does not convert values. Parameter is not
effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT^ DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT). P3402 P 3403
Source value
3403 SIGNALI MAX
Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OuTPuTl DSP
FORM = 9 (DIRECT).
I
3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter.
0...7 - Defines the decimal point location.
Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal
point.
See the table for an example using pi (3,14159).
8 = BAR METER - Specifies a bar meter display.
9 = DIRECT- Decimal point location and units of measure are
identical to the source signal. See Group 01: OPERATING DATA
parameter listing in section Complete parameter list on page 85
for resolution (which indicates the decimal point location) and the
units of measure.

units as for the source

signal.

Parameters
148 ACS550 User's Manual

Selects the units used with the first display parameter.

Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPLIT1 DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).
0 = NO UNlT I 8 = MWh 27 = ft 36 = 11s 45 = Pa 54=lbIm 63=Mrev
1= A 19 = m/s 28 = MGD 37 = llmin 46 = GPS 55 = Iblh 64 = d
2.v 20 = m3/h 29 = inHg 38 = llh 47 = galls 56 = FPS 65 = inWC
3=Hz 21 = dm3/s 30 = FPM 39 = m3/s 48 = gallm 57 = Ws 66 = mlmin
4=% 22 = bar 31 = kbls 40 = m31m 49 = gallh 58 = inH20 67 = Nm
5=s 23 = kPa 32 = kHz 41 = kgls 50 = ft3/s 59 = in wg
6=h 24 = GPM 33 =ohm 42 = kglm 51 = ft3/m 60=ftwg
7 = rpm 25 = PSI 34 = ppm 43 = kglh 52 = ft3/h 61 = lbsi
8 = kh 26 = CFM 35 = pps 44 = mbar 53 = Ibis 62 = ms

The following units are useful for the bar display.

117 =%ref 119 = %dev 121 = % SP 123 = lout 125 = Fout 127 = Vdc
118 =%act 120 = % LD 122 = %FBK 124 = Vout 126 =Tout
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN
Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter.
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT^ DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).
.
3407 OUTPUT1 MAX
Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter.
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUTI DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).
3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM
Selects the second parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.
3409 ISIGNALZ
MIN
l~efinesthe minimum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3402.
3410 ISIGNAL~
MAX
Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3403.
3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM
Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter. See parameter 3404.
3412 OUTPUT2 UNlT
Selects the units used with the second display parameter. See parameter 3405.
3413 OUTPUT2 MIN
Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3406.
3414 OUTPUT2 MAX
Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3407.
3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM
Selects the third parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401
3416 ISIGNAL~ MIN
Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter.3402.
3417 SIGNAL3 MAX
Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403.
3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM
Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter. See parameter 3404.
3419 IOUTPUT~
UNIT
Selects the units used with the third display parameter. See parameter 3405.
3420 OUTPUT3 MIN
Sets the minimum value displayed for the third dis~lavDarameter. See oarameter 3406.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 149

,. ..,..
" .
.i.*.liv.
,
.
.$.
,.
6*;_-
" , " :.,, .
,, ., , ,
;:-, ;,
,,, .. ,.
:,,,.,",::,, i ,;-,: ;,. l:,:s.,,.,>:',".
,..>.. :,' .:,<' #*+*:#<::!;< ,~>;';?!3t2-,;?,>*tR
<A
e
: ,,
.
6
,;, %G.-,
..,,, ..*.:.,*.*'...,,.,*, 2
,v:.;,:
. <,< ...
,.s . . ,: ~:.<;:
. :,: ?,> ,.,; ..:;:,..! ,;
.,,.'~
~,.
...<:x:;
,.*;
.
3421 OUTPUT^ MAX
1 /Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407. I

Parameters
 ACS550 User3 Manual

Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS

This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault - motor
overheating, as detected by a temperature sensor. Typical connections are defined
below
One sensor
Three sensors

Motor

, , , ,
, , ,
, , ,

A01
I ,
, .
,
AGND
10 n~

WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts
and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-
conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.

To fulfil this requirement, connect a thermistor (and other similar components) to the
drive's control terminals using any of these alternatives:
Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced
insulation.
Protect all circuits connected to the drive's digital and analog inputs. Protect
against contact, and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation
(rated for the same voltage level as the drive's main circuit).
Use an external thermistor relay. The relay insulation must be rated for the same
voltage level as the drive's main circuit.
The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections. At the motor end the cable
shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, leave the
shield unconnected.
Thermistor relay: THERM(O) or THERM(~) THERM(O)

relay Control board

Control board

+24 V DC

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 151

For other faults, or for anticipating m o t o r overheating using a model, see Group 30:
F A U L T FUNCTIONS.
-. ....- ..-

F:F--
Code Description
3501 SENSOR
-~~~ - - TYPE
~ - ~
~~~
.. - ... - -.. . . ..- - ..-

Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used, PT100 ("C), PTC (ohm) or thermistor.
- .- . -
.

See parameters 1501 A01 CONTENT SEL and 1507 A02 CONTENTSEL.
0 = NONE
1 = 1 x PTIOO - Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor.
Analog output AOI or ~ 0 feeds
2 constant current through the sensor.
The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor.
T h e temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input A l i or A12 and converts it to
degrees Celsius.
2 = 2 x PT100 - Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors.
Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
3 = 3 x PTIOO - Sensor configuration uses three PTlOO sensors. ohm
Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
A = PTC - Sensor configuration uses PTC.
T h e analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor.
T h e resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor
temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature (T,) as does
the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement function 550 . -1.. . :. . .I. . . .
reads the voltage through analog input A IIconverts it into ohms.
and
~

The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of , , , ,

the motor operating temperature. :
100 . . . . . , .,., .
, , . .,., . . . .

5 = THERM(O) - Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.

Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed
thermistor relay to a digital input. The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table.
-When the digital input is 'O'the motor is overheated.
See the figures in the introduction to this group.
6 = THERM(1) - Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital
input. The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the table above.
a When the digital input is '1' the motor is overheated.

See the figures in the introduction to this group.

3502 INPUT SELECTION
Defines the input used for the temperature sensor.
1 = A l l - PT100 and PTC.
2 = A12 - PT100 and PTC.
3X.8 = Dl1...Dl6 - Thermistor
3503 ALARM LIMIT

I I Defines lne alarm I rnlt for rnolor lemperarure measJremen!

A1 motor IemperarJes aoorre thls I mlt lhe arlde dlsplays all a arm (7010, ~AOTORTEMP)
For thermistors:
0 - de-activated
1 -activated
FAULT LIMIT
Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement.
At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays a fault (9, MOT OVERTEMP)
and stops the drive.
For thermistors:
0 - de-activated
1 -activated

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 36: TlMED FUNCTIONS

This group defines the timed functions. The timed functions include:
four daily start and stop times
four weekly start, stop and boost times
four timers for collecting selected periods together.
A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in
multiple timers.

3602 START TIME 1

3603 STOP TlME 1
3604 START DAY 1

Time Period 2
3606 START TlME 2 I
3607 crno r, 8, , kv a- Lc c 7 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC
3606 START DAY 2
3609s~vru~r~ ?,

A 3627 TlMED FUNC 2 SRC I

l i m e Period 3
13610 STARTTIME 3
3628 TlMED FUNC 3 SRC
UAY 3
.
13613 STOP DAY 3 Tmer 4
3629 TlMED FUNC 4 SRC

3614 START TlME 4

3615 STOP TlME 4
3616 START DAY 4

3622 BOOSTER SEL

3623 BOOSTER TIME

A parameter can be connected to only one time1

I Timar, I 1001 EXTl COMMANDS
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
3626 TlMED FUNC 1 SRC 1102 EXTI/EXT;! SEL
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
Timer 2 , 1401 RELAY OUTPUT I... 1403 RELAY OUTPUT3
3627 TlMED FUNC 2 SRC 1410 RElAY OUTPUT 4... 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6
\A027 PID 1 PARAM SET
8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual 153

Se ecls the so-ice for lne timer enao e $grid

0 = NOT SC- - Tuned func:lons are dlsao ea
1 = 011- Defines ala la InoLr 011 as the r mea fbncr on enable slana
The d gfral !nput"must be acuvaled tu enaole tne umeo functorl
2 6 = u 2 0 6 - Defines u g la1 npLr 012 016 as 1i:e :med funcl~onenaule slqna -
= ACTIVE - Timed iunctionsare enabled.
1 = DI~(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DIIas the timed function enable signal.
T h i s digital input must be de-activated to enable the timed function.
.
-2...-6 = DIZ(1NVI,...OI6(INV)
, - -
. - Defines an inverted diaital inout 012...016 as the timed function enable sianal.
;TART TlME 1
lefines the daily start time. 20:30:00
T h e time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds.
If parameter value is 07:00:00, the timer is activated 17:00:00
at 7 a.m. Time period 4
T h e figure shows multiple timers on different 15:OO:OO
weekdays. 13:OO:OO

12:oo:oo
Time period 3 a

j 3603 STOP TlME 1

10:30:00

09:OO:OO

00:00:00 I-' Time period 1

'Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

Defines the daily stop time.

1 The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds.
If the parameter value is 09:00:00. the timer is deactivated at 9 a.m.
3604 START DAY 1
Defines the weekly start day.
1 =MONDAY...7 =SUNDAY
If parameter value is 1, timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight (00:OO:OO).
3605 STOP DAY 1
~.~
Defines weeklv, stoo dav.
1 =MONDAY...7 =SUNDAY
,

If parameter value is 5, timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58).

3606 START TlME 2
Defines timer2 daily start time.
See parameter 3602.
3607 STOP TlME 2
Defines timer 2 daily stop time.
See parameter 3603.
3608 START DAY 2
Defines timer 2 weekly start day.
-
See parameter 3604.
3609 STOP DAY 2
Defines timer 2 weekly stop day.
-
See parameter 3605.
3610 START TlME 3
Defines timer 3 daily start time.
See parameter 3602.
3611 STOP TlME 3
Defines timer 3 daily stop time.
See parameter 3603.

Parameters
 154 ACS550 User's Manual

-C&-*g-b-~*;--~ ~-.*-~I ~ ~ ,.*.*

...' g *'***,
~ " =;*.&"p~:-,,,$;~.,--,~ ~\.<.,.,.-;<&" ~ ~ ~ s~
"C
,,*<*~
-28
,.*Y
~?u*a~~'**,~~,~.~~'>,<~
~~~,~@ ~ ~ ~ ; , ~ ;- , ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
> ?%:
'
>>,:*.,,.,,., ~,:4:;.;4 ;,;>a;:.;::
3612 START DAY 3
Defines timer 3 weekly start day.
See Darameter 3604.

Defines timer 3 weekly stop day.

See parameter 3605.
3614 [START TlME 4

I I Defines tlmer 4 dal y stall rdne

~
See parameter 3602
~~~

Defines timer 4 daily stop time.

-See parameter 3603.
3616 START DAY 4
Defines timer 4 weekly start day.
See parameter 3604.
3617 STOP DAY 4
Defines timer 4 weekly stop day.
See parameter 3605.
3622 BOOSTER SEL
Selects the source for the booster signal.
0 = NOT SEL - Booster signal is disabled.
1 = DII -Defines DII as the booster signal.
2...6 = Dl2... 016 - Defines Dl2... Dl6 as the booster signal.
-1 = DIl(1NV) - Defines an inverted digital input DII as the booster signal.
-2...-6 = D12(1NV)...DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input 012...Dl6 as the booster signal.
BOOSTER TlME

-
I
Defines the booster ON time. Time is started when booster sel
signal is released. If parameter value is 01:30:00, booster is I
B~~~~~~active
active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation Dl is released. I I

I I

I I Activation Dl
I
I

I Booster time I

3626 TIMED FUNC ISRC

Defines the time periods used by the timer.
0 = NOT SEL - NO time periods have been selected.
1 = T I - l i m e Period 1 selected in the timer.
2 = T2 - Time Period 2 selected in the timer.
3 = Tl+T2 - Tme Perioas 1 an0 2 selecreo in me Imer

I I 4 = T3 - Tme Per od 3 selecleo in me tlmor

5 = TlyT3 - Tme Perloas 1 an0 3 se ecieo in tne t mer
6 = ~ 2 + -~Tlme 3 Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
7 = T 1 + ~ 2 + ~-3l i m e Periods 1, 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
8 = T4 - l i m e Period 4 selected in the timer.
9 = ~ 1 + -~l i m4 e Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer.
10 = ~ 2 + -~l i4m e Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer.
11 = T I +T2+T4 - l i m e Periods 1 . 2 and 4 selected in the timer.
12 = T3rT4 - T~meP a 00s 3 and 4 se ectcd r l ltle rlmer
13 = I 1.~37~4- lime Per~ods1 3 and 4 se ecreo in lhe t mer
14 = T 2 - ~ 3 + - ~4 llme Periods 2 3 and I se ecreo ,n the i mer
15 = Ti+T2+T3+T4 - Time periods 1, 2. 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

I I 16 = BOOSTER- Booster selected in the timer.

17 = Tl+B - Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer.
18 = T2+B - Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer.
19 = TI+TZ+B - Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer.
20 = T3+B - Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer.
I

Parameters
ACS550 U s e f s Manual 155

r1---- -
--. .-

1
Code Description
21 = ~l + T ~ +-BBooster sna- -
Time Per ods 1 ano 3 selecteu in tne Imer
122 = T2+T3+B - Booster and Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
1 I
23 = TI+TZ+T~+B - Booster and Time Periods 1, 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
24 = T4+B - Booster and Time Period 4 selected in the timer.
25 = TI+T4+B- Booster and Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer,
26 = T ~ + T ~ + B Booster
- and Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer.
27 = TI+R+T4+B - Booster and Time Periods 1, 2 and 4 selected in the timer.
28 = T ~ + T ~ -+ Booster
B and Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer.
29 = T I + T ~ + T ~ -
+BBooster and Time Periods 1, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.
30 = T2+T3+T4+B - Booster and Time Periods 2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.
31 = ~1+2+3+4+B- Booster and Time Periods I,2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.
3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC
See parameter 3626.
3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC
See parameter 3626.
3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC
-See Darameter 3626.

Parameters
 156 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 37: USER LOAD CURVE

This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves (motor torque as a
function of frequency). The curve is defined by five points.
"" "..
g
"
,
. , ,, , ,, , , . .; ,,. < ' ~.,:..,.<..
. ;?2: A:., ";, .,, ,, .,,, .~ --,<.,.,.,-*:
..,.;,,.< .
7,%.,.,. #'. , .<,.
>3..,&.-.m ".
z.,. "~ ~
, ; ' . , , . : , , , , . , , , .:, , ' $ .,<,<. " , ~ : , < , : , ~ : . : ; f ~ ~ : j ~ ~ ; ; ~ ; ; ; ; > : ~ ; ~ ~ ; ~ $ $ ~ ~ ~ : 2 ~ ~ ~ ~ : ~ : ; < ;
0 %*.>, ,&
,.

3701 USER LOAD C MODE Motor torque (%)

Supervision mode for the user adjustable load
curves.
This functionality replaces the former underload
supervision in Group 30: FAULTFUNCTIONS. To
emulate it, see section Correspondence with the
obsolete underload supervision on page 157.
0 = NOT SEL - Supervision is not active.
1 = UNDERLOAD - Supervision for the torque Allowed operating area
dropping below the underload curve.
2 = OVERLOAD - Supervision for the torque
exceeding the overload curve.
3 = BOTH - Supervision for the torque dropping
below the underload curve or exceeding the
overload curve.
P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P3716
Output frequency (Hz)
3702 USER LOAD C FUNC
Action wanted during load supervision.
1 = FAULT - A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD c MODE has been valid longer than
the time Set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
2 =ALARM - An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD c MODE has been valid longer than
half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
'.. 3703 'USER LOAD C TIME
.I Defines the time limit for generating a fault.
-
Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm.
3704 LOAD FREQ 1

-
Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point.
Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FRED 2.
3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1
Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point.
Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TOR0 HlGH I.
3706 LOAD TORQ HlGH I
Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point.
3707 LOAD FREQ 2
Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point.
Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREa 3.
3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2

-
Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point.
Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HlGH 2.
3709 LOAD TORQ HlGH 2
Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point.
3710 LOAD FREQ 3
Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point.
Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREa 4.
3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3
Defines the toroue value of the third underload curve definition Doint.
1.
Must be smalier than 3712 LOAD TOR0 HIGH 3.
3712 LOAD TORQ HlGH 3
I Def~nesthe torque value of the thlrd overload curve defin~t~on
polnt

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 157

R- .- .-
Code Description
3713 LOAD FREQ 4
- ...--
. -...
-
....--
.
--.-
--..
.
-. --
.-. .

Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point.
Must be Smaller than 3716 LOAD FREO 5
3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4

I I. Defnes tne torque va "0 of me f o ~ n hJnoer oaa cJnc de1.n Iton potnr
M.sI be srna ler tnan 3i15
3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4
rof.0 d.Gh 4

Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point.
3716 LOAD FREQ 5
Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point.
3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5

I I- Dcf~nesthe rorqJe value of tnc f frh Lnder oao curie aef n ltori po nr
Must oe srna. er Inan 3718 .o~oTORQ htGi 5

Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point.

Correspondence with the obsolete underload supenfision

The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable

1
curves shown in the figure. The parameter characteristics were as described below.
If the load drops below the T..
,"I
set curve for longer than
(%) Underload curve types
the time set by parameter 80
3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 70%
(obsolete), the underload
protection is activated.
Curves 1... 3 reach
60
Bq
maximum at the motor
rated frequency set by
parameter 9907 MOTOR 20
.
_
. ..
NOM FREQ.
-
TM= nominal torque of the
motor
,1 I
I 8 f
f~ 24 IN
f N = nominal frequency of
the motor.
If you want to emulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in
the shaded columns, set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two
tables below:

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual

New parameters
-
3705
LOAD
TORQ
LOW 1
(%)
EU US EU US
32 38 41 50
31 37 30 42 50 40

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 159

Group 40:PROCESS PID SET 1

This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID (PIDI) controller.
Typically only parameters in this group are needed.
PID controller- Basic set-up
In PID control mode, the drive compares a reference signal (setpoint) to an actual
signal (feedback) and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two
signals. The difference between the two signals is the error value.
Typically PID control mode is used, when the speed of a motor needs to be
controlled based on pressure, flow or temperature. In most cases - when there is
only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS550 - only parameter group 40 is needed.
The following is a schematic of setpoinufeedback signal flow using parameter group
40.

PANEL
Torque - LOCIREM
Power-- selection
- LOC
REM
Power-

Panel REF 1 -m
Dl -
Al -
Comm REF 1 --L___

Const

Comm REF 2

P4013
Comm
Internal
plDl out
Current
Torque
Power P4014 P4015
c u r r $ \ m PID Act Value

Power
Torque Li-
Note: In order to activate and use the PID controller, parameter 1106 must be set to
value 19.

Parameters
 ACS550 Useis Manual

PID controller - Advanced

The ACS550 has two separate PID controllers:
Process PID (PIDI) and
External PID (PID2)
Process PID (PIDI) has 2 separate sets of parameters:
Process PID (PIDI) SETI, defined in Group 40: PROCESS PID SET I and
- Process PID (PIDI) SET2, defined in Group 41: PROCESS PID S E T 2
You can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027.
Typically two different PID controller sets are used when the load of the motor
changes considerably from one situation to another.
You can use External PID (PID2), defined in Group 42: E X T / T R l M PID, in two
different ways:
Instead of using additional PID controller hardware, you can set outputs of the
ACS550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve. In this case, set
parameter 4230 to value 0. (0 is the default value.)
You can use External PID (PID2) to trim or fine-tune the speed of the ACS550

! 1 l~efinesthe PID controller's aain. I

The setting range is 0.1 ...-100.
- At 0.1, the PID controller output changes one-tenth as much as the error value.
At 100, the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value.
Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system.
A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation, but provides sluggish
response.
If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short, the system can become unstable.
Procedure:

-
Initially, set:
4001 GAIN = 0.1.
.4002 INTEGRATION TlME = 20 seconds.
Stan the system and see 11I reacnes tne setpolnl q.1 ck y wn le mainta n.ng stable opera! on If not, ncrease GA N
(4001) "nt I tne actLal slgnal (or orwe speed) osc llales constantl, It may be necessarv to stan and s t o ~
ine dr~veto
induce this oscillation.
Reduce GAlN (4001) Until the oscillation stops.
Set GAIN (4001) to 0.4 to 0.6 times the above value.
- Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the feedback signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be
necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation.
- Increase INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the oscillation stops.
Set INTEGRATION TlME (4002) to 1.15 to 1.5 times the above Value.
If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise, increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER AII or 1306
FILTER ~ 1 until
2 the noise is filtered from the sianal.

Parameters
 Bv
ACS550 Useis Manual 161

I -
l~efinesthe PID controller's intearation time. I
lntegration time is, by definition, the time required to increase the

.-
output by the error value:
Error value is constant and 100%.
Gain= I.
D(P4001 = I 0
C(P4001=1)
lntegration time of 1 second denotes that a 100% change is
achieved in 1 second.
0.0 = NOT SEL - Disables integration (I-part of controller).
0.1 ...3600.0 - lntegration time (seconds). ,
P 4002 -,
See 4001 for adjustment procedure. A = Error
B = Error value step

4003 DERIVATION TIME

C =Controller output with Gain = 1
D =Controller output with Gain = 10
--
I
I
F~~~~ Process error value
-
Defines the PID controller's derivation time.
You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller
output. The derivative is the error value's rate of change. For
example, if the process error value changes linearly, the
derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output.
The error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. The time
constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV
FILTER.
0.0 ... 10.0 - Derivation time (seconds).

PID output
D-part of controller 01

P 4001

4004 PID DERlV FILTER

Defines the filter time constant for the error-derivative part of the PID controller output.
Before being added to the PID controller output, the error-derivative is filtered with a l-pole filter.
-Increasing the filter time smooths the error-derivative, reducing noise.
0.0...10.0 - Filter time constant (seconds).
4005 ERROR VALUE INV
Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed.
0 = NO - Normal, a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed. Error = Ref - Fbk
1 =YES - Inverted, a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed. Error = Fbk - Ref
4006 UNITS
Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values. (PIDI parameters 0128, 0130 and 0132).
-See parameter 3405 for list of available units.
4007 UNIT SCALE
""fw:
-
Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values.
Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry
See the table for example using pi (3.14159).
'$;$007;,q=l"@q
, .: .,,.,.,* A - ., ~,* ~~
,,$!& * ~ ,A
i ~,.l,,j ! = v : ,

0314 3.14
3142 3.142

Parameters
162 ACS550 Use& Manual

*"-,
$&$z
-'-.-..".#."-,'
.'* * ,-.,.,,..,,. .:--.,,.
*,;,'.."..
~~~3~#~&~s~x:;;>2,;$J.,;,:t
*-,\,;:,,,, <,--^,.p,. . ::
, ' -,.-..l:j, r;".a,
<.?* "~
;*.?>:&$~>;r.;;$~?:,.. ,>..~.,
~;:$<
r r;. .,,
:<:., ,<
,,-.< ,-.'
,,> .:
t:-,,? A.<:, :'.:,
,. ,,,.'.,,
, , : ,%:. :,,
,
.'., . ' ',
,,..
$. ,.
,. ,,,., *..,:.-
,?& ' ."':~':
..,,
-, ..>,5!$:.-?:.;.:+(.-l
?::,a :,.'?
~ <
,?
.i;,..ri,
;',:;, . .
. :s?:;F;:
- ,' -.:..---.>; -r.i.

4008 0% VALUE Units (P4006)

Defines (together with the next parameter) the scaling applied to
the PID controlle?~actual values (PIDI parameters 0128. 0130
and 0132).
Scale (P 007)
4 +1000.0%

P 4009

Defines (together with the previous parameter) the scaling applied

-
to the PID controller's actual values.
Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
P 4008

8 -
0%
-1000.0%
Internal scale (%)
I I
$010 SET POINT SEL
Defines the reference siqnal source for the PID controller.
.
Parameter has no s f i n f~canceNhen tho PID reg-lator s by-passe0 (see 8121 REG BYPASS CIR.,
/O = t(wPAD - Contra panel prov~desreference
1 = AII -Atlalog input 1 provides reference.
2 = ~ 1 -Analog
2 input 2 provides reference.
8 = COMM - Fieldbus provides reference.
9 = COMM+AI~ -Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (All) combination as the reference source. See Analog input
reference correction below.
10 = COMM+AII -Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (All) combination as the reference source. See Analog input
reference correction below.
11 = D13U,4D(RNC) - Digital inputs, acting as a motor potentiometer control, provide reference.
--
013 increases the speed (the U stands for ''up")
014 decreases the reference (the D stands for "down").

--
Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal's rate of change.
R = Stop command resets the reference to zero.
NC = Reference value is not copied.
12 = 013U,40(NC)- Same as D13,40(RNC) above, except:
Stop command does not reset reference to zero. At restart the motor ramps up, at the selected acceleration rate
to the stored reference.
I 3 = DI5U,6D(NC) - Same as D I ~ U , ~ D ( N
above,
C ) except:
.
Uses digital inputs Dl5 and 016.
14 = All+A12 - Defines an analog input 1 (~11)and analog input 2 (A12) combination as the reference source. See
Analog input reference correction below.
15 = ~11.~12 -Defines an analog input 1 (AII) and analog input 2 (~12)combination as the reference source. See
Analog input reference correction below.
16 = All-A12 - Defines an analog input 1 (~11)and analog input 2 (A12) combination as the reference source. See
Analog input reference correction below.
17 = ~ 1 1 1 ~-Defines
12 an analog input 1 (AII) and analog input 2 (~12)combination as the reference source. See
Analoa input reference correction below.
19 = INT~RNAL- A constant value set using parameter4011 provides reference.
20 = PID20UT - Defines PID controller 2 output (parameter 0127 PlD 2 OUTPUT) as the reference source.

Parameters
ACS550 Usefs Manual 163

\-;.....- .-- "pepG-.,*I; ;:<; ,t.t2rv ??

;:.
ZO~,;
--..-
-."#s".-"-.,..-..~~#isw; Y~,~~i~~c:FF~Frr.:%;.:~ivC ?, , . i-,,. -,>
::rr

~ ~ s ~ ; ; ~ ~ , ~ o ~ # & ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ $ $ . ~,>; ; ' ~ ~ !~2,..<,~~;i:~&s~~&~;w~~~~~,;~i;::z~t.:~-;~~::$

$~$:$;;~~~;~>~:.;,~
',. , , ,,,:.
ec,;,e.*xw3ase ,r>e;2'+*,

Analog input reference correction

Parameter values 9, 10 and 14... 17 use the formula in the following table.

(C value + 50% of reference value) - B value

Where:
C = Main reference value 120A
( = COMM for values 9. 10 and
= AII forvalues 14...17)
- B = Correcting reference
( = AII for values 9. 10 and
2 values 14...17).
= ~ 1 for
Example:
The figure shows the reference source curves for
value settings 9. 10 and 14... 17. where:
. C = 25%.
P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0.
P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0.
8 varies along the horizontal axis.

0 100% 6
4011 INTERNAL SETPNT
Sets a constant value used for the process reference.
Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
4012 SETPOINT MIN
Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source.
See parameter 4010.
4013 SETPOINT MAX
Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source.
See parameter 4010.
4014 FBK SEL
Defines the PID controller feedback (actual signal).
You can define a combination of two actual values (ACTIand ACTZ) as the feedback signal.
Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT^).
Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 (ACTZ).
1 = ACTl -Actual value 1 (Acrl) provides the feedback signal.
2 = ACTI-ACT;! -ACT? minus ACT^ provides the feedback signal.
3 = ACTI+ACT;! - A C T l plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
4 = ACTI'ACTZ-ACT% times ACT;!provides the feedback signal.
5 = ACTIIACTZ ACT^ divided by ACT;!provides the feedback signal.
6 = MIN(ACT1,2) -The smaller of ACT$ or ACT^ provides the feedback signal.
7 = MAX(ACT~ ,2) -The greater of ACTI or ACT;!provides the feedback signal.
8 = sqrt(~c~1-2) - Square root of the value for ACTI minus ACT^ provides the feedback signal.
9=sq~l+sq~ - 2Square root of ACTIplus the square root of ACT^ provides the feedback signal.
10 = s q r t ( ~ c ~-
1 )Square root of ACTI provides the feedback signal.
11 COMM FBK 1 -Signal 0158 PlD COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal.
12 = COMM FBK 2 - Signal 0159 PI0 COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal.
13 = AVE(ACT1,Z) -The average of ACTl and ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
4015 FBK MULTIPLIER
Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014.
Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference.
0.000 = NOT SEL - The parameter has no effect (1.000 used as the multiplier).
-32.768...32.767 - Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL.

Example: FBK = Multiplierx

Parameters
164 ACS550 User's Manual

.- . .
'~odel~escri~tion
-- - .. . -.....--
14016 IACTI INPUT
Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT?).See also parameter 4018 ACTI
MINIMUM.
1 = AII - Uses analog input 1 for ACTI
2 = A12 - Uses analog input 2 for ACTI.
3 =CURRENT-Uses current for ACTI
4 =TORQUE - Uses torque for ACT?
5 = POWER - Uses power for ACTI
6 = COMM ACT 1 - Uses Value Of signal 0158 PlD COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1
7 = COMM ACT 2 - Uses value of signal 0159 PIU COMM VALUE 2 forAcT1.
1017 ACT2 INPUT
Defines the source for actual value 2 (AcR). See also parameter 4020 ACR
MINIMUM.
1 = AII-Uses analog input 1 for ACT^.
2 =~ 1-2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT^.
3 =CURRENT-Uses current for ACT^.
4 = TORQUE - Uses torque for ACT^.
5 = POWER - Uses power for ACQ.
6 = COMM ACT 1 - Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT^.
7 = COMM ACT 2 - USeS Value of Signal 0159 PlD COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2.
4018 ACT1 MINIMUM
ACT1 (%)

t
Sets the minimum value for ACT? A
Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 (defined p 4019 -- -- -----
I
bv ~arameter4016 ACTI INPUT). For ~arameter4016 values
I
~'(COMM ACT I) and 7 (COMM ACT2) ;caling is not done. I I /
7
I I
Par401,6 ,2::$Source$2.,i
1
2
3
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Current
5:SQurcemin.::.
1301 MINIMUM AII

0
.,. ' . Source max!
1302 MAXIMUM AII
1304 MINIMUM ~ 1 2 1305 MAXIMUM~ 1 2
2 . nominal current
P 4018
'-t i *
Source min. Source max.
- Source signal
4 7 - 2 nominal torque 2 . nominal torque
5 Power -2. nominal power 2 - nominal power
ACT1 (%I A R
See the figure: A= Normal: B = Inversion (ACT?MINIMUM > ACTI P 4018
MAXIMUM)
4019 ~ACTI MAXIMUM
Sets the maximum value for ACTI
See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
4020 ACT2 MINIMUM
Sets the minimum value for ACT^.
See 4018 ACTl MINIMUM.
Source signal
4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM
Sets the maximum value for ACT^.
See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
4022 SLEEP SELECTION
Defines the control for the PID sleep function.
0 =NOT SEL- Disables the PID sleep control function.
1 = 011- Defines digital input DII as the control for the PID sleep function.
Activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
-
De-activating the digital input restores PID control.
2...6 = 012... 016 - Defines digital input 012 ...016 as the control for the PID sleep function.
See DII above.
7 = INTERNAL - Defines the output rpmlfrequency, process reference and process actual value as the control for the
PID sleep function. Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE-UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
-1 = DII(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input Dl1 as the control for the PID sleep function.
De-activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
Activating the digital input restores PID control.
-2...-6 = D12(lNV)...DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input 012 ...Dl6 as the control for the PID sleep function.
-
-
See DI~(INV)above.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 165

--

pels lne motor speed ireq~encythat enaoles the PID s eep

, f ~ n c l o n- a motor speeu I frequency oelow this ,eve., for at least
I /the time oeriod 4024 PlD SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleeo

I I I
function istopping the drive).
Requires 4022 = 7 (INTERNAL).

4024 PID SLEEP DELAY

-
See the fiaure: A = PID outout level: B = PID orocess feedback.

Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function - a motor speed I
freauencv below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time oeriod

I IIWAKE-UP
.'
enables the PID sleep function (stopping the drive).
See 4023 PlD SLEEP LEVEL above.
4025 DEV
Defines lne wane.up der~aton -- a dev~aton from thc sctpo nt
stop :
I I greater lnan rhls va.uc. for at leas1 the t me per~od4026 WAKE-JP
DELAY, re-starts the PID controller.
Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale.
- Parameter 4005 = 0,
Wake-up level = Setpoint - Wake-up deviation. Setpoint
. Parameter 4005 = 1. P 4025
-----
4005 = 0

II I Wake-up level = ~ e i p o i n+t Wake-up deviation

Wake-UP level can be above or below setooint.
lsee the fiaures:
.
I I C = ~ a i ; c - u pede wnen parameler 4005 = 1
D = Wake-up eve Nnen parameter 4005 = 0
-
E = Feedback 1s above vlane--D leve an0 lasts lonaer lhan 402€

I I vvAnE.Jp D ~ A Y- P.D f-nc~fonLakes ~p

F = Feedbacn IS o e l o ~ wake-up leve and asts longer lnati 402€
WAKE-UP DELAY - PID function wakes Up.
4026 WAKE-UP DELAY
Defines the wake-up delay - a deviation from the setpoint greater
than 4025 WAKE-UP DEV,for at least this time period, re-starts the
PID controller.

Parameters
166 ACS550 User's Manual

Process PID (PIDI) has two separate sets of parameters, PID set 1 and PID set 2
PID set 1 uses parameters 4001 ...4026.
PID set 2 uses parameters 4101 ...4126.
PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected.
0 = SET 1 - PID Set 1 (parameters 4001 ...4026) is active.
1 = Dl1 -Defines digital input DII as the control'for PID Set selection.
Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.
De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.
2...6 = Dl2...Dl6 - Defines digital input Dl2...Dl6 as the control for PID Set selection
- See DII above.
7 =SET 2 - PID Set 2 (parameters 4101 ...4126) is active.
8... 11 =TIMEDFUNC 1.:'.4 - Defines the Timed Gnction as the control for the PID Set selection (Timed function de-
activated = PID Set 1: Timed function activated = PID Set 2)
See Grow 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
12 = 2-ZONEMIN - The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and
feedback 2. The drive will control the zone (and select the set) that has a larger difference.
A positive difference (a setpoint higher than the feedback) is always larger than a negative difference. This keep:
feedback values at or above the setpoint.
Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone's feedback is closer to its
setpoint.
13 = 2-ZONE MAX - The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and
feedback 2. The drive will control the zone (and select the set) that has a smaller difference.
A negative difference (a setpoint lower than the feedback) is always smaller than a positive difference. This keep:
feedback values at or below the setpoint.
Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone's feedback is closer to its
setpoint.
14 =?.-ZONE AVE - The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and
feedback 2. In addition, it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1. Therefore one
feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint.
-1 = DI~(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DII as the control for PID Set selection.
Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1
De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.
-2...-6 = DIZ(1NV)...DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input Dl2... Dl6 as the control for PID Set selection.
See DI~(INV)above.

Parameters
ACS550 Usets Manual

Group 41: P R O C E S S PID SET 2

Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2. The operation of
parameters 4101 ...4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001 ...4026.
PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET.
V<T$ o;gETii,;
*,.
t;6;;*.,".T,iw3...,
,,*>r,L*,>,,,.,,,;
:jf.,3,.,.,.,.,:,,;
?j
"qF:i,qi>$!;<,!;r/.c:+;
,iil,.,.
i$
.,~",li~
t .'.:,<:,.-.
' >,i
;,
-.li.~~
,
I ..,
l
;
:
?
..,i,.~.~-.,-
.:-....-. ,,.-,,.,.
.,"r , 3r.>9
.
7-'rii;,::";,,?$Pix .... :, ,- :.,.---
.:.j,;,.4:,,<~2.~?:>,',:2:,*:>:..?2::l~
~,
,.,
x., ,~ sri
) nli .. :
>.:<,.>/;:' - .. ;?; :.::::,:?:,::
1. . . ., . '-r'i-li;.%
,:,t.:;.i-..w:$:,;j~<;,y;~,;..
,.-,.
4101 See 4001 ...4026
...

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 42: EXT ITRlM PID

This group defines the parameters used for t h e second PID controller (PID2), w h i c h
is used for the External ITrimming PID.
The operation of p a r a m e t e r s 4201 ...4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1
( P I D I ) parameters 4001 ... 4021.

4228 ACTIVATE
Defines the source for enabling the external PID function.
Requires 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 (NOT SEL).
0 = NOT SEL - Disables external PID control.
1 = Dl1 -Defines digital input DII as the control for enabling external PID control.
Activating the digital input enables external PID control.
De-activating the digital input disables external PID control.
2...6 = Dl2...Dl6 - Defines digital input 012... 016 as the control for enabling external PID control.
See 011above.
7 = DRIVE RUN- Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control.
Activating the start command (drive is running) enables external PID control.
8 = ON - Definesthe power-on as the control for enabling external PID control.
Activating power to the drive enables external PID control.
9...12 =TIMED FUNC 1...4 - Defines the Timed function as the Control for enabling external PID control (Timed
function active enables external PID control).
See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
-1 = DI~(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DII as the control for enabling external PID control.
i Activating the digital input disables external PID control.
De-activating the digital input enables external PID control.
-2...-6 = D12(1NV)...DI~(INV)- Defines an inverted digital input Dl2...Dl6 as the control for enabling external PID control.
S e e DI~(INV)above.
4229 OFFSET
Defines the offset for the PID output.
When PID is activated, output starts from this value.
When PID is deactivated, output resets to this value.
Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 (trim mode is not active).
4230 TRlM MODE

I I Selects the type of trim, if any. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference.
0 =NOTSEL- Disables the trim function.
1 = PROPORTIONAL -Adds a trim factor that is ~ r o ~ o r t i o nto
a lthe romlHz reference.
12 = DIRECT-Addsa trim factor based on the doniro~loop's maximum limit.
I
4231 ITRIM SCALE
I l~efinesthe multiplier (as a percent. plus or minus) used in the trim mode. I

Parameters
ACS550 Useis Manual 169

Defines the trimming reference for the correction source.

1 = PID2REF - Uses appropriate REF MA% (SWITCHA OR B):
1105 REF1 MAX when REF1 is active (A).
1108 REF2 MAX when REF2 is active (6).
2 = PID20JTPJT - Uses me absol-te lnaxlmum speeo or frequency (Sntrch C )
2002 t A l w :.1J?A SPEFD if 99C4 t.lOTOR CTR. MODE ' 1 (VECTOR SPEEDJ 01 2 (JECTOR TORO,
2C08 f.lAA ?rU!A FRLO if 9904 MOTOI( CT 1. IAODE ' 3 (SCAL4R FREOi

I Ramped ref .W
I Switch I Select - - Trimmed ref

-
(par. 4230) Trim scale Mul. + C
+-
Ext ref Imax (A) ,
off
t
,- X X "
Ext ref 2 max (6) proportional
Abs max speed1 direct Select
freq (C) (par 4232)

Trimming PID2 ref

PID2 ref Trimming PID2 out

Parameters
 ACS550 User's Manual

Group 50: ENCODER

This group defines t h e s e t u p f o r encoder use:
Sets the number of encoder pulses per shaft revolution.
E n a b l e s the e n c o d e r operation.
- Defines how mechanical angle and revolution data is reset.
User's Manual for Pulse Encoder lnterface Module OTAC-01
S e e also
[3AUA0000001938 (English)].

Sets the number of pulses provided by an optional encoder for each full motor shaft revolution (ppr).
102 IENCODER
ENABLE
l~nablesidisablesan optional encoder
0 = DISABLE- Drive uses speed feedback derived from the internal motor model (applies for any setting of paramete
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE).
1 = ENABLE- Drive uses feedback from an oDtional encoder. This function reauires the Pulse Encoder
~ ~~~- Interface
~- ~ - -
Moable ro~~c.01, an0 an encoder operaton depends on the sell ng of parame~er5904 rnoron C T I ~MODE.
.9901 = 1 (VECTORSPEED) Tne encooer provldes mprovfd speeo feeabacn and Improved low speed torque
accuracy.
- 9904 = 2 (VECT0R:TORO): The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque
accuracy.
9904 = 3 (SCALAR:SPEED): The encoder provides speed feedback. (This is not closed loop speed regulation.
However, using parameter 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO and an encoder improves steady state speed accuracy.)
103 ENCODER FAULT
Defines the drive operation if a failure is detected in communication between the encoder and the encoder interface
module, or between the module and the drive.
1 = FAULT - The drive generates fault ENCODER ERR, and the motor coasts to a stop.
2 =ALARM- The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERR and operates as if parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE =
0 (DISABLE), that is, speed feedback is derived from the internal motor model.
I10 Z PLS ENABLE
Enablesldisables the use of an encoder's Z-pulse to define the motor shaft's zero position. When enabled, a Z-pulse
input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero to define the shaft's zero position. This function requires an encode
that provides Z-pulse signals.
0 = DISABLE - Z-pulse input is not present or ignored if present.
1 = ENABLE - A Z-pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero.
I11 POSITION RESET
Resets the encoder's position feedback. This parameter is self-clearing.
0 = DISABLE - Inactive.
1 = ENABLE - Resets the encoder position feedback. Parameters reset depends on the state of parameter 5010 z PL!
.....
5010 = 0 (D SARLE, - Reset appl~esto parameters 0147 M E C I REVS anu 0146 rnrcn A ~ G - E
= 1 (ENABLE) - Reset apples on y to parameter 0147 h:f!cd ntbs
. -...... --. .. --

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 171

Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE

This g r o u p defines set-up variables for a fieldbus adapter (FBA) communication
module. For more information on t h e s e parameters, refer to the user's manual
supplied with the FBA module.
g 68 .*?*~,s>,jr..,
' .
".,... '~... .,, , ..,-
, : ! : . , : . , , -,. , .,, ' <,, .~~:#:,,.,.,:.,.,,.,..,.ii--..-'.~ , .>., . .
:;y3>*:<~?>,*i~*:;~>~;+i.;,,:.* ;:,: ,..' . , ,: .~
"
," , "
.;'..:',::,'.' .,.
,., ..' . ,
.
i

3 ~,7:9,",,.&<? ,,.A" :.,z*# :&*.;-&=>. .,,.5: .>; ::;. :,:>>;

,: .,'~ . ,. ,, .1.. :i
5101 IFBATYPE

II II Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.

0 = NOT DEFINED - Module not found, or not properly connected, or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 (EXTFBA).
1 = PROFIBUS-DP
16 = INTERBUS
21 = LONWORKS

I I- 32 = CANopen
37 = DEVICENET

I
5102 FB PAR 2...FB PAR 26
... Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters.
5126
~ -~

5127 FBA PAR REFRESH

Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings.
0 = DONE - Refreshing done.
I = REFRESH - Refreshing.
-
After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE.
5128 FlLE CPI FW REV
the CPI firmware revision of the drive's fieldbus adapter configuration file. Format is xyz where:
x = major revision number

..
y = minor revision number
z = correction number
Example: 107 =revision 1.07
5129 FlLE CONFIG ID
Displays the revision of the drive's fieldbus adapter module's configuration file identification.
File configuration information is drive application program-dependent.
5130 FlLE CONFIG REV
Contains the revision of the drive's fieldbus adapter module configuration file.
Example: I = revision 1
5131 FBA STATUS
Contains the status of the adapter module.
0 = IDLE - Adapter not configured.
1 = EXECUT INIT- Adapter is initializing.
2 = TIME OUT - A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive.
3 = CONFIG ERROR - Adapter configuration error.
T h e revision code of the adapter's CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in
the drive's configuration file (parameter 5132 c 5128).
4 = OFF-LINE - Ada~teris off-line.
5 = ON-LINE- ~ d a p t e ris on-line.
6 = RESET- Adapter is performing a hardware reset.
5132 ]FBA CPI FW REV
Contains the revision of the module's CPI program. Format is xyz where:
x = major revision number
.
y = minor revision number
z = correction number
I~xarnple:107 = revision 1.07
5133 ~FBAAPPL FW REV
I hontains the revision of the module's aoalication orooram. Format is xvz (see oarametrer 5132)

Parameters
 ACS550 Usefs Manual

Group 52: PANEL COMM

This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
Normally, when using the supplied control panel, there is no need to change settings
in this group
In this group, parameter modifications take effect on the next power-up

.Defines the address of the drive.

Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line.
Range: 1...247
5202 BAUD RATE
Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second (kbls).
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
38.4 kbls
57.6 kbls
115.2 kb/s
5203 PARITY
Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication.
0 = 8 NONE 1 -No parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8 NONE 2 -NO parity, lW0 Stop bits.
2 = 8 EVEN 1 -Even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8 ODD 1 -Odd parity. one stop bit.
5204 OK MESSAGES
Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive.
During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.
5205 PARITY ERRORS
of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus. For high counts, check:
of devices connected on the bus - they must not differ.
1.
~ m b i e nelectro-magnetic
t noise levels - high noise levels generate errors.
5206 FRAME ERRORS
Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives. For high counts, check:
Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus - they must not differ.
Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels - high noise levels generate errors.
5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS

I I- Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer.
Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes.
Received messaqes exceedinq 128 bvtes overtlow the buffer. The excess characters are counted

I I1.- Contams a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives. For high counts, check:
- noise levels qenerate
Ambient electro-maqnetic noise levels - hiqh
CRC calculations f& possible errors.
- errors.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual

Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL

This group defines set-up variables used f o r an embedded fieldbus (EFB)
c o m m u n i c a t i o n protocol. The standard EFB p r o t o c o l in the ACS550 is Modbus. S e e
c h a p t e r Embedded fieldbus p a g e 189.

Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol.

-Format: XXYY, where xx r protocol ID, and YY = program revision.
1302 EFB STATION ID
Defines the node address of the RS485 link.
The node address on each unit must be unique.
i303 EFB BAUD RATE
Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second (kbls).
1.2 kbls
2.4 kbls
4.8 kbls
9.6 kbls
19.2 kbls
38.4 kbls
57.6 kbls
76.8 kbls
i304 EFB PARITY
Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication.
The same settings must be used in all on-line stations.
0 = 8 NONE 1 - 8 data bits, no parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8 NONE 2 - 8 data bits, no parity. two stop bits.
2 = 8 EVEN 1 - 8 data bits. even .~aritv.
,. one st00 bit.
13 = 8 ODD 1 - 8 data bits,'odd parity, one stop bit.
i305 (EFB CTRL PROFILE
l~electsthe communication orofile used bv the EFB orotocol

1
1 '0 = 4oQ DRV .LI - operalo" of Corllrol ~let..sVJoroi conforms lo ABB Drlves Proh e as used In ACS4OO

I I 1 = DCL PROF 1.F - Operalion of ControllSla1us Words conforms lo 32-0 1 DC J Proflle

2 = ABQ DRV F JL.. - O ~ e r a l ~ o
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES
ofnControl,Slatus Words conforms lo ABB Drves Proflle as ~ s e d
111 ACS600t800

Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive.

During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.
5307 EFB CRC ERRORS
Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive. For high counts, check:
. - noise levels qenerate
Ambient electro-maunetic noise levels - hiuh
.1
CRC calculations 10; possible errors.
- errors.

308 IEFB UART ERRORS

contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive.
5309 EFB STATUS
Contains the status of the EFB protocol.
0 = IDLE - EFB orotocol is confiuured. but not receivina -
- anv. rnessaaes.

1 1 1 = EXECUT INIT'- EFB protocol~sinithizing.

2 =TIME OUT - A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol.
3 = CONFIG ERROR - EFB orotocol has a confiuuration error.
4 = 01 F-L h~ - EFB protoiol is rece v ng mes<aSes tnar are NOT adoressed to lnls or ve
5 = ON- INE - EFB proloco 1s recav nq messaqes that are aooressed lo i n s dr \e
I 16 = RESET- EFB orotoco~is oerformini a hardware reset. I
17 = LISTEN ONLY -'EFB protocol is in lisien-only mode
5310 ~EFBPAR 10
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005.

Parameters
 174 ACS550 Useis Manual

j
QTd'E ~-e~ijjr~8g&~~~~~saw<~~~~~~~z:.~:L~
~w-.I~~&.*.dy-.dy-.dy-
# ,, *&~&>~w~4,&5~~&>a*~;$2{$~~&&5i *#A-j
.A.
..-'''....,,,.,.. ,.;<[i8g;;;
;;e<j2:*;;~;~~~~;~~~~~~~~~;$:~2;p.;.-.~~*:i#~ '$7:
rd3*-i;b$r%?:$*%2a>x:s:$:(3<z+::;5.;i.::~;$< $gj;$
,...
:=r;.?*,.-
:
: %.- :.-<' ' .-7- ",,"

5311 ~EFBPAR 11
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006.
5312 ~EFBPAR 12
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007.
5313 EFB PAR 13
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008.
5314 EFB PAR 14
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009.
5315 ~EFBPAR 15
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010.
5316 ~EFBPAR 16
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011
5317 EFB PAR 17
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012.
5318 EFB PAR 18
For Modbus: Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master
request.
5319 EFB PAR 19
ABB Drives profile (Ass DRv LIM or AEE ORV FULL) Control Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word.
5320 EFB PAR 20
ABB Drives profile IABB ORV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) Status Word. Read onlv copy of the Fieldbus Status Word.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual

Group 81: PFC CONTROL

This group defines a Pump-Fan Control (PFC) mode of operation. The majot
features of PFC control are:
The ACS550 controls the motor of pump no. 1, varying the motor speed to control
the pump capacity. This motor is the speed regulated motor.
Direct line connections power the motor of pump no. 2 and pump no.3, etc. The
ACS550 switches pump no. 2 (and then pump no. 3, etc.) on and off as needed.
These motors are auxiliary motors.
The ACS550 PID control uses two signals: a process reference and an actual
value feedback. The PID controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first
pump such that the actual value follows the process reference.
When demand (defined by the process reference) exceeds the first motor's
capacity (user defined as a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically starts
an auxiliary pump. The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account
for the auxiliary pump's addition to total output. Then, as before, the PID controller
adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump such that the actual value follows
the process reference. If demand continues to increase, PFC adds additional
auxiliary pumps, using the same process.
When demand drops, such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit
(user defined by a frequency limit), the PFC control autornatically stops an
auxiliary pump. The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for
the auxiliary pump's missing output.
An Interlock function (when enabled) identifies off-line (out of service) motors, and
the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence.
An Autochange function (when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear)
equalizes duty time between the pump motors. Autochange periodically
increments the position of each motor in the rotation -the speed regulated motor
becomes the last auxiliary motor, the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed
regulated motor, etc.

Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.

Applies only when at least one auxiliary (constant speed) motor is running.
Default value is 0%.
Example: An ACS550 operates three parallel p-mps that mainta n \valer pressure in a p pe
4011 INTERNAL S E T P ~ Tsels a constant pressure reference tnat controls the presxre n the p pe
.The speed regulated pLmp operates alone at low water consLmptlon leve s
As water consumpion increases, first one constant speed p-mp operates tnen me secona
AS flow increases, the pressure at the o ~ t p uend
t of the pipe orops relatlve to me PressLre measure0 at the input
end. As auxiliary motats step in to increase the flow, thea'djustments below corred the reference to more closely
match the output pressure.
.When the first auxiliaw. .pump. operates.
. increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1
When two auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP I+ parameter

- 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2.

When three auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 +parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 + parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3.

Parameters
176 ACS550 User's Manual

Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.

Applies only when at least two auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.
See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
8105 REFERENCE STEP 3
Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.
Applies only when at least three auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.
See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
8109 START FREQ 1

.
Sets the frequency limit used to star? the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor starts if
No auxiliary motors are running.
f (Hz)
ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit:
8109 + 1 Hz.
Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit
4
fMAX - - - -
P8ll5 --1: :-
(8109 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.
.( P 8109
810!3)+~#
After
Output
the first
frequency
auxiliary
decreases
motor starts:
by the value =

. (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).

In effect. the output of the speed regulated motor drops to
P8112 __ 1 BA
compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor. ~MIN
1
See the figure, where: I i +
A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
. B = Output frequency increase during the start delay. 1
. C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor's run status as frequency
increases (I= On)
C
1- - - - - - -1
t
0 P
Note: 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between:
8112 LOWFREQ 1
(2008 MAXIMUM FREQ) -1
8110 START FREQ 2
Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor.
-See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor starts if:

-One auxiliary motor is running.

ACS550 outout freauencv exceeds the limit: 8110 + 1.
output frequency slays a'oove the relaxfa m1.t (8110 - 1 HZ) for at least ine Inie 8115 ALX MOT START D
-. -- - . - -- -- -- -
Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor.
See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The third auxiliary motor starts it
Two auxiliary motors are running.
ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8111 + 1 Hz.
- Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8111 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 nux MOT START D.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 177

Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor stops if:
Only one (the first) auxiliary motor is running. f (HZ)
ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit:
8112 - 1.
Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit P 8109
(8112 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 nux MOT STOP 0.
After the first auxiliary motor stops:
Output frequency increases by the value =
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOWFREQ 1). P 8112
. In effect. the output of the speed regulated motor increases to
compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor.
('

See the figure, where: Ir--

A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1) P 8116-
B = Output frequency decrease during the stop delay. I
C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor's run status as frequency I
decreases (1 =On).
.Grey paln = Shoe(?. hysteres~s- tf t~me1s rebersed tne path 1
0 . -.
backwards 1s nor tne same For aota Is on the pal11fur bran ng
see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1.
Note: 8112 LOWFREQ 1 value must be between:
(2007 MINIMUM FREQ) + I
8109STARTFREQ 1
3113 [LOW FREQ 2

I
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor
See 8112 LOW FREO 1 for a complete description of the operation
The second auxiliary motor stops if:
-
Two auxiliary motors are running.
ACS550 outout freauencv droas below the limit: 8113 - 1
1-
Output freqiency siays delow'the relaxed limit (8113 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8114 LOW FREQ 3
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor.
See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The third auxiliary motor stops if:
--
Three auxiliary motors are running.
ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit: 8114 - 1
Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8114 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8115 AUX MOT START D
Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors.
The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit (parameter 8109, 8110, or 8111) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor starts.
-
See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
8116 AUX MOT STOP D
Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors.
-
The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit (parameter 8112, 8113, or 8114) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor stops.
See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.

Parameters
178 ACS550 Usefs Manual

Sets the number of auxiliary motors.

.. Each auxiliary motor requires s relay output, which the drive uses to send startlstop signals.
-
The Autochanoe function. if used. rewires an additional relay output for the Speed reaulated motor.
The following iescribes the set-up ofthe required relay outputs.
Relay outputs
As noted above, each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send startlstop signals. The
following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays.
The ACS550 provides relay outputs R 0 1... R03.

-.An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs R 0 4 . . R06.
Parameters 1401... 1403 and 1410... 1412 define, respectively, how relays R 0 1... R 0 6 are used - the parameter
value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC.
The ACS550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order. If the Autochange function is disabled, the firs
auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, and so on. If the
Autochange function is used, the assignments rotate. Initially, the speed regulated motor is the one connected to
the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFc, the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay
with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, and so on.

I I
Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode
The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step, low frequency and start frequency values as the third
auxiliarv motor.

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 179

when the other is rotating.

The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output
parameters (1401...1403 and 1410...1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFC),or =X (anything but 31), and
where the Autochange function is enabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = value > 0).

31131IXIXIXIXIO"I PFC I PFC I X I X I X / X

" = No auxiliary motors, but the autochange function is in use. Working as a
standard PID-control.

8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV

Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the
interval between changes.
The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when
the speed regulated motor is running.
See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the
Autochange function.
The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is
~erformed.
kutochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS =
value > 0.
0.1 =TESTMODE- Forces the interval to value 36 ...48 s.
).O = NOT SEL - Disables the Autochange function.

---
1.1... 336-The operating time interval (the time when the start
signal is on) between automatic motdr changes. I+
11 - 11
A WARNING! h h e n enabled, tne A~lochangefunct~on
requtres the inter ocks (8120 II.TERIOCKS = value > 0
enabled. During autochange the power output is
1 'I
interrupted and the drive coasts to stop, preventing
damage to the contacts. PFC with Autochanae mode

Parameters
180 ACS550 User's Manual

Sets an upper limit, as a percent of output capacity, for the autochange logic. When the output from the PIDIPFC
control block exceeds this limit, autochange is prevented. For example, use this parameter to deny autochange when
the Pump-Fan system is operating near maximum capacity.
Autochange - overview
The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system. At each
autochange operation:
A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS550 output - the speed regulated motor.
The starting order of the other motors rotates.
The Autochanae function rewires:
Externa snlicngear for chang ng tne dr (e s OL~PLIpower connections
Parameter 8120 INTFRI OCKS = value > 0
l~utochan~ iseperformed when:
I. The running time since the previous autochanae reaches the time set bv 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV,
The PFC np-t is oeo*, t h c l e ~ eset by th s pa-rameler. 8119 ALTOCIING'LEIIE.
Notc: The ACS55O alnays coasts to stcp when aLtocnange s performeo
In an autochange, the Autochange function does all of the PID output
following (see the figure):
Initiates a change when the running time, since the last
autochange, reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV, and PFC
input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
- Stops the speed regulated motor.
Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor,
Increments the starting order counter, to change the
starting order for the motors.
ldentifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated
motor.
Switches off the above motor's contactor, if the motor was I 1"P8122
running. Any other running motors are not interrupted. I
Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated rc P 8118- I-- P8118-
motor. The autochanae switchaear connects this motor to B
the ACS550 power oltp-I - A =Area aoove 8119 A - T O C ~ ~L ~E G
~EL -
Delays molor stan for trle tlme 8122 PI c STAR r DELAY a-tochange rlol a loueo
Starts the speed regulated motor. B = Autochange occurs.
ldentifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation. IPFC, etc. = PID output associated with each motor.
Switches the above motor on, but only if the new speed
regulated motor had been runnina (as a constant s ~ e e d
molor) - Th s step deeps an e q i numoer of motors running oefore and aher aLtochange
Con1 nues w th norma PFC operat on
Starting order counter Output
The operation of the starting-order counter:
The relay output parameter definitions (1401...1403 and
1410... 1412) establish the initial motor sequence. (The lowest MAX
parameter number with a value 31 (PFC) identifies the relay
connected to IPFC, the first motor, and so on.)
Initially, IPFC = speed regulated motor, 2PFC = 1st auxiliary
motor, etc.
The first autochange shifts the sequence to: 2PFC =speed
regulated motor, 3PFC = 1st auxiliary motor, ..., IPFC =last
auxiliary motor.
The next autochange shifts the sequence again, and so on.
If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all
inactive motors are interlocked, the drive displays an alarm
(2015, PFC I LOCK). P 8119 100%
When ACS550 power supply is switched off, the counter
preselves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored, the
Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory.
- If the PFC relay configuration is changed (or if the PFC enable value is changed), the rotation is reset. (See the firs
bullet above.)

Parameters
ACS550 User's Manual 181

Defines operation of the lnterlock function. When the lnterlock function is enabled:
--An interlock is active when its command signal is absent.
An interlock is inactive when its command sianal is wresent.
. .-
The ACS550 vr tI not start f a start c o m m a n ~ o c c ~when
control pane. olsplays an alarm (2015, PFC LOCO
r i tne speea reg.. ate0 inoror's fnterlock is act.,e - the

.
Wire each lnterlock circuit as follows:
Wire a contact of the motor's OnIOff switch to the lnterlock circuit - the drive's PFC loaic can then recoanize that
the niolor is s.v~tcnedoff aria stan the next avai ab.e motor
-W,re a contact of tne motor thermal re ay (or otner protect ve uevlce in tne motor clrcL 1) to tne lnterloc~np-t - tne
drive's PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor.
0 = NOT SEL - Disables the lnterlock function. All digital inputs are available for other purposes.
.
Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0 (The Autochange function must be disabled if lnterlock function is disabled.)
1 = 011-Enables the lnterlock function and assians a diaital input (startino with 011) to the interlock sianal for each
"
PFC relay Tnese assignments are oerned in ihe follow rlq table and debend on
the n-mber of PFC relays [number of parameters 1401 1403 anu 1410 1412 w m va Le = 31 (PI c)]
-
the A.llocliange f-nction stat~s(d sab ed if 8118 AUTOCt~riGI h T E R V = 0 an0 olncW se enab ed)

1013...016: Free
2 011: Speed Reg Motor
012: First PFC Relav
I 1013: Second PFC delay
1014...016: Free
3 011: Speed Reg Motor
012: First PFC Relay
012...016: Free
Dt1: First PFC Relay
012: Second PFC Relav
1013...~ 1 6Free
I
: I
011: First PFC Relay
012: Second PFC Relay

I I013: Second PFC delay

014: Third PFC Relay
015...016:Free
012: First PFC Relay
013: Second PFC Relay
014: Third PFC Relay
DI5: Fourth PFC Relav
1016: Free
5 loll: Soeed Rea Motor
I
013: Third PFC Relay
Dl4...016: Free 1
012: Second PFC Relay
013: Third PFC Relay
014: Fourth PFC Relay
015 ...016: Free
1011:First PFC Relav

I I012: ~ / r sPFC
t ?Way
013: Second PFC Relay
014: Third PFC Relav
015: Fourth PFC ~ e i a y
016: Fifth PFC Relay
012: Second PFC ~ e l a y
013: Third PFC Relay
D14: Fourth PFC Relav
015: Fifth PFC Relay
016: Free
1
6 Not allowed 011: First PFC Relay
~ 1 2Second
: PFC Relav
013: Third PFC Relay
014: Fourth PFC Relay
D15: Fifth PFC Relay
016: Sixth PFC Relay

Parameters
182 ACS550 User's Manual

.....--
-. -.

I 1012: S ~ e e dReo Motor I

Autochange
(P8118)
iNot allou-.d
I
--...- -..

enaolea) 1
2 = ~2 - Enao es the lllterlocn fdnctlon and sssigns a dlglta. np-t (stari~nghllh u 2) to trle Interlock signal for each
PFC relay Toese ass gnrnents are defined in lhc fol owing laole ana aepend on
tne n-mbor 01 PFC re a)s [number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410.. 1412 .v th valLe = 31 (PFC)]
lne A-tochange f-ncl on sta1.s (dsablea f 8118 AJTOClihti hTChV = 0, arid o t h e ~ l s e

013...616: ~ r e e -
1 011: Free oll: Free
012: Speed Reg Motor 012: First PFC Relay
013: First PFC Relay Dl3...016: Free
1014...016: Free
2 1011: Free 1~11:Free

I I 012: Speed Reg Motor

013: First PFC Relay
014: Second PFC Relav
1015...016: Free
Dl2: First PFC Relay
D13: Second PFC Relay
Dl4... 016: Free 1
3 1011:Free loll: Free
012: Speed Reg Motor b12: ~ i i sPFC
t Relay
013: First PFC Relay D13: Second PFC Relay
014: Second PFC Relav 014: Third PFC Relay

t D15: Third PFC Relay

016: Free
DII: Free
012: Speed Reg Motor
013: First PFC Relav
014: Second PFC Relay
015: Third PFC Relay
Dl5...D16: Free

012: First PFC Relay

D13: Second PFC Relay
014: Third PFC Relay
D15: Fourth PFC Relay

Free
DII:

016: Fifth PFC Relay

6 ]Not allowed lNot allowed

Parameters
ACS550 Usei-s Manual 183

. -..
... L -- -..-- .
.-
3 = 013 - Enaoles tne Inter ocks funcl'on and asslgns a oglla input (slart ng w i n D 3) to the
I I PFC relav- ~ -These
, - - assianments are defined in the followina table and d e ~ e n don: I
. <

I I I
~ ~~ ~~

th; nunber of PFC reays [numoer of parameters 1401 1403 and 14i0 . 1412 wiln value = 31 (PFc)]
.
F:,,[
Ine A~lochangef ~ n c r o nstatus (d sab ed 118118 ALTOC~NC:
No. Br.c-
.----. - .
n11 0 % Free
I~IER

Autochange e n a b l T -
(P 8118) -. --
lhoi a ov~eo 1
= 0V and otnerv~lseenao ed)

4 = 014 - Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input (starting with 014) to the interlock signal for each
PI-C relay .I ncsc asslgnrnei,ts are deinea n the fo low;ng la0 e and aepenu on
-
t h e numoer of PFC relays [nulnoer of parameters 1401. 1403 and 1410 1412 wtn bal-e 31 ( v F c . ]
. the Aulochangc f~ncllonsratus ,d sab ed if 0118 AJroct~hGhTiRd = 0 ano olnerv,lSe e13aOle0,

014: Speed Reg Motor

015 ...016: Free
1 011...D13: Free 011...013: Free
~14:Speed Reg Motor 014: First PFC Relay
015: First PFC Relay 015...016: Free
016: Free
2 011... D13: Free 011... 013: Free
014: Speed Reg Motor 014: First PFC Relay
015: First PFC Relav 015: Second PFC Relay
016: Second PFC ~ k l a ~ 016: Free
3 Not allowed DII ...013: Free
~ 1 4First
: PFC Relay
015:Second PFC Relay
016: Third PFC Relav

Parameters
184 ACS550 User's Manual

$.5f,3 t i ~'$*a.ev<.,h"
3 ~ ~ ~ ~'*i,7F.,~
at.>ey*,
~.4;*d6* ~ " .* ~ ~ ~ i ;ect
,**
~M
~r>&..
$q&
tpp*"&
"' ~ ~.:*,~ : ~ ~ ~ ~ *~
>
<>i.-i.i.i.i.i.i.i.-i.i.i.i.
k$i;&a
i ~ ; ~ ~ ~ B ~ ~ ~ y.; ..7,x~ g*,.,,.: *.,<a
.,: + ~ ~.?'>~
i. v.5M
..,f,,,

:,;:~*:@~+~~~;j,~[~;<;g$;,~~,2,$~~::::::;~;;
-",Ua- #
.' ,pa.. ~ !<?+":z'

5 = Dl5 - Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input (starting with 015) to the interlock signal for each
PFC relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:

I
t h e number of PFC relavs [number of ~arameters1401... 1403 and 1410... 1412 with value = 31 ~PFCII . ~,.
I -the Autochange function siatus (disabied if 8118AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0, and othelwise enabled).
I

D15: First PFC Relay

6 = 016- Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input Dl6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated
motor.
Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.
NP,;;,"range disabled Autochange e n a b l e d -

011 . r~5. Free lhot allonea

~~ ~ -~
~
- .-
016: Speed ~ e Motor
g
1 Not allowed ~ ...
l 015:
l Free
016: First PFC Relay
2...6 Not allowed Not allowed

Parameters
ACS550 Usefs Manual 185

,elects Regulator by-pass control. When enabled. Regulator by-pass control provides a simple control mechanism
rithout a PID reauiator.
Use ~egulatoFby-passcontrol only in special
applications. four
= NO - Disables Regulator by-pass control. The drive
uses the normal PFC reference: 1106 REF:! SELECT.
= YES - Enables Regulator by-pass control.
T h e Process PiD reauiator is bv~assed.
~ c t i avalue
l of P I D ~ Sused asihe PFC reierence
(input). Normally D(T REF2 is used as the PFC
reference.
T h e drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014
FBK SEL (or 4114) ior the PFC frequency reierence.
T h e figure shows the relation between the control P 8113
signal 4014 FBK SEL (OR4114) and the speed
regulated motor's frequency in a three-motor
system. I
:xample: in the diagram below, the pumping station's
utiet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow (A). P-A-WB-C- (Yo)
A = No auxiliary motors running
B = One auxiliary motor running
Contactors C = Two auxiliary motors running

Outlet pipe1
+A Sewage
I tank
I P2 \ Outlet pipe2
Inlet pipe

Outlet pipe3

'FC START DELAY

els tile slart aelay for speeo reg-laleo rnolors n tne system Us ng tne oe ay. Ine dr~varvorKs as fol ows
Swttches on the conlactor of the speed regulate0 motor - connect ng the motor to the ACS550 powcr o..tp~r
Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY.
starts the speed regulated motor.
Starts auxiliary motors. See parameter 8115 for delay.
/i\ WARNING! Motors equipped with star-delta starters require a PFC Start Delay.

Aiter the ACS550 relay output switches a motor on, the star-delta starter must switch to the star-connection and
then back to the delta-connection before the drive applies power.
So, the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star-delta starter.
-- -. . . - -
F C ENABLE
elects PFC control. When enabled, PFC control:
Switches in, or out, auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases. Parameters 8109
START FREO 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency.
Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down, as auxiliary motors are added, and adjusts the speed regulated
motor output up, as auxiliary motors are taken off line.
Provides Interlock functions. if enabled.
Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL'MOOE = 3 (SCALAKFREQ).
= NOT SEL - Disables PFC control.
=ACTIVE - Enables PFC control

Parameters
186 ACS550 User's Manual

- -
Code/~escription
....
8124 ~ A C CIN AUX STOP I.
I I.1 Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero-to-maximum
frequency ramp. This PFC acceleration ramo:

I Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary

motor 1s swttched off.

I I- Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22:

ACCEUDECELI.
Applies only until the output of the regulated motor
I
increases by an amount equal to the output of the
switched off auxiliary motor. Then the acceleration ramp
defined in Group 22: ACCEUDECEL applies.

I I1 0 = NOT SEL.
0.1 ... 1800 -Activates this function usina
~ ~

" the- value- 1 ~ ~

1. entereo as tne accderat 011 t me

8125 DEC IN AUX START - o
-- . - - - .... .....

I I-
I
Sets rhe PFC deceleration t me for a maxlm~m-to-zero
freqJency ramp Tn s PFC dece erallon ramp
A = speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22:
ACCEUDECEL parameters (2202 or 2205).
Appl~esto tne speed requlatea motor. v.han an auxl ary 8 = speed regulated motor decelerating using Group
1 motor is switched on. -
. - 1 22: ACCEUDECEL parameters (2203 or 2206\.

I I Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22:

ACCEUDECEL.
Aoolies onlv until the outout of the reaulated motor
-
At aux. motor start, speed regulated motor decelerates
using 8125 DEC IN AUX START.
At aux. motor stoo. sweed reaulated motor accelerates

I I decreases by an amouni equal to theoutput of the

auxiliary motor. Then the deceleration ramp defined in
Grouo 22: ACCEUDECEL amlies.
0 = NO? SEL.
.,

0.1... 1800 -Activates this function using the value

using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.?

entered as the deceleration time.

8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG
Sets the autochange using a Timed function. See parameter ~ I ~ ~ A UTOCHNG
LEVEL.
0 = NOT SEL.
1 =TIMEDFUNC 1 -Enables autochange when Timed function 1 is active.
2...4 =TIMED FUNC 2...4 - Enables autochange when Timed function 2...4 is active.
8127 MOTORS
Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors (maximum 7 motors, 1 speed regulated. 3 connected direct-on-line

-
and 3 spare motors).
This value includes also the speed regulated motor.
This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used.
If Autochange function is not used, the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to
PFC but it needs to be included in this value.
-
128 AUX START ORDER
Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors.
1 =EVENRUNTIME - Time sharing is active. The start order depends on the run times.
2 =RELAY ORDER - The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays.
ACS550 Useis Manual 187

Group 98: OPTIONS

This group configures for options, in particular, enabling serial communication with
the drive.

Selects the communication protocol.

0 = NOT SEL - NOcommunication protocol selected.
1 = STD MODBUS - The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel (Xl-communications, terminal).
See also Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL.
4 = EXT FBA- The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive.
See also Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE.

Parameters
 ACS550 Usets Manual

Parameters
ACS550 Useis Manual

Embedded field bus

Overview
The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACS550 can
either:
receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel.

Fieldbus

Connect using either:

. standard embedded fieldbus (
terminals X I :28...32
. fieldbus adapter (FBA) module mounted
in slot 2 (option Rxxx).

Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

embedded fieldbus (EFB) - Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1:28 ... 32 on
the control board, a control system can communicate with the drive using the
ModbusB protocol. (For protocol and profile descriptions, see sections Modbus
protocol technical data and ABB control profiles technical data later in this
chapter.)
fieldbus adapter (FBA) -See chapter Fieldbus adapteron page 221

Control interface
In general, the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of:
Output words
- Control Word
- Reference1
- Reference2
Input words
- Status Word
- Actual value 1
- Actual value 2

Embedded fieldbus
 AGS5.50 User's Manual

- Actual value 3
- Actual value 4
- Actual value 5
- Actual value 6
Actual value 7
-
- Actual value 8
The content of these words is defined by profiles. For details on the profiles used,
sees section ABB controlprofi/es technical data on page 209.

Note: The words "output" and "input" are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.

Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
- What control information must be sent down to the drives?
What feedback ~nformat~on
must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?
1
Mechanical and electrical installation - EFB
WARNING! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from
the power source.

Drive terminals 28 ...32 are for RS485 communications.

Use Belden 9842 or equivalent. Belden 9842 is a dual twisted, shielded pair cable
with a wave impedance of 120 ohm.
Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link. Use this pair to
connect all A (-) terminals together and all B (+) terminals together.
Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground (terminal 31), leaving
one wire unused.
Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point. Ground all devices on the
network using their corresponding earthing terminals.
As always, the grounding wires should not form any closed loops, and all the
devices should be earthed to a common ground.
Connect the RS485 link in a daisy-chained bus, without dropout lines.

Embedded fieldbus
AGS550 User's Manual 191

To reduce noise on the network, terminate the RS485 network using 120 !2
resistors at both ends of the network. Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect
the termination resistors. See following diagram and table.
Terminated Terminated
station Station Station station
m m
\ A A - 2

OFF position ON position

Bus termination

Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive. On one end, connect the
shield to terminal 28, and on the other end connect to terminal 32. Do not connect
the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals, as that would
make the shielding continuous.
For configuration information see the following sections:
- Communication set-up - EFB on page 191
- Activate drive control functions - EFS on page 193
- The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data. For example, Modbus
protocol technical data on page 201.

Communication set-up - EFB

Serial communication selection
To activate the serial communication, set parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL =
1 (STD MODBUS).

Note: If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel, your drive does not have
that protocol software in the application memory.

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

Serial communication configuration

Setting 9802 automati'cally sets the appropriate default values in parameters that
define the communication process. These parameters and descriptions are defined
below. In particular, note that the station Id may require adjustment.
Protocol reference
Code Description
Modbus
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit. Any non-zero value entered
Contains the identification and program revision of for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL.
the protocol. Sets this parameter automatically. The
format is: XXYY, where XX = protocol ID,
and YY =program revision.
5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a
Defines the node address of the RS485 link. unique value for this parameter.
When this protocol is selected, the
default value for this parameter is: 1
Note: For a new address to take affect, the drive power must be cycled o r 5302 must first be
set to 0 before selecting a new address. Leaving 5302 = 0 places the RS485 channel in reset,
disabling communication.
5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected, the
Defines the communication speed of the RS485 default
value for this Parameter 9 6
link in kbits per second (kbitsls).
1.2 kbls 19.2 kbls
2.4 kbls 38.4 kbls
4.8 kbls 57.6 kbls
9.6 kbls 76.8 kbls
5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected, the
Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be default value for this Parameter is: 1
used with the RS485 communication.
The same settings must be used in all on-line
stations.
0 = 8 NONE 1 - 8 data bits, no parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8 NONE 2 - 8 data bits, no parity, two stop bits.
2 = 8 EVEN 1 - 8 data bits. even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8 ODD 1 - 8 data bits, odd parity, one stop bit.
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected, the
Selects the communication profile used by the for this parameter is: O
EFB protocol.
0 = nss DRV LIM - Operation of ControllStatus
Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used
in ACS400.
1 = ocu PROFILE - Operation of ControllStatus
Words conforms to 32-bit DCU Profile.
2 = As6 DRv FULL - Operation of ControllStatus
Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used
in ACS6001800.

Note: Afler any changes to the communication settings, the protocol must be
reactivated by either cycling the drive power, or by clearing and then restoring the
station Id (5302).

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual

Activate drive control functions - EFB

Controlling the drive
Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function
define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control
define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. For the protocol-specific details, see the document supplied
with the FBA module.

StatVStop Direction control

Using the fieldbus for startlstopldirection control of the drive requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location
is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
~ o d b u s protocol
' reference
Drive parameter Description
ABB DRV I, DCU PROFILE

1001 EXTl COMMANDS 10 (COMM) StartlStop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0...3 40031 bits 0, 1
with Extl selected.
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 (COMM) StartlStop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0...3 40031 bits 0, 1
with Ex12 selected.
I I I I I

I
1003 1I DIRECTION 11 3 ,(REQUEST) II Direction bv fieldbus. 1I 400214003~ 1I 40031 bit 3 I
' tables
For Modbus, the protocol reference can depend on the profile used, hence two columns in these
One column refers to the ABB Drives profile, selected when parameter 5305 = 0 (ABB DRV
LIM)or 5305 = 2 (ABB DRV FULL). The other coiumn refers to the DCU orofile selected when
parameter 5305 1 (Ocu PRO~ILE). See section ABB controlprohles iechnical data on page 209
The reference provides direction control - a negative reference provides reverse rotation.

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

lnput reference select

Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Modbus protocol
Drive parameter Value Description reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

1102 EXTIIEXTZ SEL 8 (COMM) Reference set selection by fieldbus. 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5
1103 REF1 SELECT 8 (COMM) Input reference 1 by fieldbus. 40002
1106 REF2 SELECT 8 (COMM) Input reference 2 by fieldbus. 40003

Reference Scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following, as appropriate:
Modbus Register 40002 in section Modbus protocol technical data on page 201
Reference scaling in section ABB control profiles technical data on page 209.

Miscellaneous drive control

Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location
is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

I
Modbus protocol
Drive parameter Value Description reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

1
1601 RUN ENABLE Run enable bv fieldbus. 40001 bit 3 140031 bit 6

1
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 1 8 (COMM) I Fault reset by fieldbus.
I (inverted)
140001 bit 7 140031 bit 4
I I I I
1
1606 LOCAL LOCK 1 8 (COMM) I Source for local lock selection is I Does not 140031 bit 14
the fieldbus. / apply
1
1607 PARAM SAVE I I(SAVE) I saves altered parameters to I 41607
I I8 II I memorv. (then
I . value returns to 0). Ii 1
1608 START ENABLE 1 7 (COMM) Source for Start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2
fieldbus Command word. apply.
1609 START ENABLE 2 7 (COMM) Source for start enable 2 is the
fieldbus Command word.
2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 7 (coMM) Source for minimum torque
selection is the fieldbus.

i
2014
lI
lnAx TORQJE SE.
L
2201 ACC/DEC 112 SEL
i I
7 (COMA) Source for max:m~mtorque
e c1 t on 1s h e fie1d.u
7 (COMM) Source for ramp pair selection is
the fieldbus. H 40031 bit 10

Embeddedfieldbus
ACS550 Usefs Manual

Relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay comrnand(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)
Modbus protocol reference
Drive parameter Value Description
ABB ORV DCU PROFlLE
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 (COMM) Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit 0 or 00033
by fieldbus.
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 (COMM) Relay Output 2 controlled 40134 bit 1 or 00034
by fieldbus.
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 35 (COMM) Relay Output 3 controlled 40134 bit 2 or 00035
by fieldbus.
I I I - I
1410' RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 (COMM) Relay Output 4 controlled 40134 bit 3 or 00036
by fieldbus.
1411' REIAY OUTPUT 5 35 (COMM) Relay Output 5 controlled 40134 bit 4 or 00037
by fieldbus.
1412' RELAY OUTPUT6 35 (COMM) Relay Output 6 controlled 40134 bit 5 or 00038
by fieldbus.
' More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.
Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Modbus protocol
Drive parameter Description reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

0122 1 RO 1-3 STATUS I

Relay 1...3 status.
I
40122
0123 RO 4-6 STATUS Relay 4...6 status. 40123

Analog output control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
I ~ o d b u sprotocol I
Drive parameter Value Description reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

1501 A01 CONTENT SEL 135 (COMM VALUE 1) Analog Output I -

- controlled by writing to
0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135. 401 35

1507 A 0 2 CONTENT SEL 136 (COMM VALUE 2) Analog Output 2 -

- controlled by writing to
0136 COMM VALUE 2 40136
parameter 0136.

Embeddedfieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

PID control setpoint source

Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID
loops:
Modbus protocol
Drive parameter Description reference

1) Setpoint is input reference 2 40003

9 (COMM+AII) (+/-/*All)

(Set 2)

(ExVTrim)

Communication fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the drive's action if serial communication is lost.
I Drive warameter II Value 1I Descri~tion I
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 (NOT sEL)
I(FAULT)
Set for appropriate drive response.
1
I3 [LAST SPEED)

3019 1 COMM FAULT TIME I Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual

Feedback from the drive - EFB

Pre-defined feedback
Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see input wordlpointlobject
listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 201.
Modbus protocol reference
Drive parameter
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
0102 SPEED 40102
0103 1 OUTPUT FREO 40103
0104 CURRENT 40104
0105 I TORQUE 40105

I I
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 40107
0109 1 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40 109
0301 1I FB CMD WORD1 -bit 0 (STOP) II 40301 bit 0
0301 FB CMD WORol 1 - bit 2 (REV) 40301 bit 2
0118 I Dl 1-3 STATUS- bit 0 (D13) 40118

Note: W~thModbus, any parameter can be accessed using the format "4" followed
by the parameter number

Actual value scaling

The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent. In general, for Actual
Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter's resolution. (See section
Complete parameterlist on page 85 for parameter resolutions.) For example:
Feedback Parameter
(Feedback integer). (Parameter resolution) =Scaled value
integer resolution
1 10.1 mA I I- 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA

Where parameters are in percent, the Complete parameter descriptions section

specifies what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from
percent to engineering unlts, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines
100% and divide by 100%.

Embeddedfieldbus
 ACS550 Useis Manual

For example:
Value o f the
Feedback Parameter
parameter that
(Feedback integer). (Parameter resolution) -
integer resolution (Value of 100% ref.) 1100% =Scaled value
, defines 100%
,
10
I
0.1% 1 1500 rpm' 1 0 - 0.1%. 1500RPM / 100%=15rpm
100 0.1% / 500 HZ' 100. 0.1% - 500 Hz 1 100% = 50 Hz
' Assuming, for the sake ofthis example, that the Actual Value uses parameter9908
as the 100% reference and that 9908 = 1500 rwm.
MOT NOM SPEED

' Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter9907
as the 100% reference and that 9907 = 500 Hz.
MOT NOM FREO

Diagnostics - EFB

Fault queue for drive diagnostics

For general ACS550 diagnostics information, see chapter Diagnostics on page 243.
The three most recent ACS550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below.
Modbus protocol reference
Drive parameter
ABB ORV DCU PROFILE

0401 LAST FAULT 40401

0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 40412
0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 40413

Serial communication diagnostics

Network problems can be caused by multiple sources. Some of these sources are:
loose connections
incorrect wiring (including swapped wires)
bad grounding
duplicate station numbers
incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network.
The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53:
EFB PROTOCOL parameters 5306 ...5309. Section Complete parameter
descriptions on page 98 describes these parameters in detail.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual

Diagnostic situations
The sub-sections below describe various diagnostic situations -the problem
symptoms and corrective actions.
Normal operation
During normal network operation, 5306 ...5309 parameter values act as follows at
each drive:
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances (advances for each message properly received
and addressed to this drive).
5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when an invalid
message CRC is received).
5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when character format
errors are detected, such as parity or framing errors).
- 5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic
Loss of communication
The ACS550 behavior, if communication is lost, was configured earlier in section
Communication fault on page 196. The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and
3019 COMM FAULT TIME. Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 98
describes these parameters in detail.
No master station on line
If no master station is on line: Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors (5307 EFB
CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS) increase on any of the stations.
To correct:
Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the
network.
Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited.
Duplicate stations
If two or more stations have duplicate numbers:
Two or more drives cannot be addressed.
Every time there is a read or write to one particular station, the value for 5307 EFB
CRCERRORSO~~~~~EFBUARTERRORS~~V~~~C~S.

To correct: Verify the station numbers of all stations. Change conflicting station
numbers.
Swapped wires
If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one drive is connected to
terminal B on another):
The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance.
The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing.
To correct: Check that the RS-485 lines are not swapped

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

Fault 28 - Serial 1 Err

If the drive's control panel shows fault code 28, SERIAL 1 ERR, check for either of the
following:
The master system is down. To correct, resolve problem with master system.
- The communication connection is bad. To correct, check communication
connection at the drive.
The time-out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation. The
master is not polling the drive within the specified time-out delay. To correct,
increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME.
Faults 3 1...33 - E F B I...EFB3
The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in chapter Diagnostics on page 243
(fault codes 31 ... 33) are not used.
lntermittent off-line occurrences
The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with
ACS550 serial communication. Intermittent problems might also be caused by:
marginally loose connections
wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations
insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the
communication cables.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 U s e i s Manual

Modbus protocol technical data

Overview
The ModbusB protocol was introduced by Modicon, Inc. for use in control
environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers. Due to its ease of use
and implementation, this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de-facto
standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices.
Modbus is a serial, asynchronous protocol. Transactions are half-duplex, featuring a
single Master controlling one or more Slaves. While RS232 can be used for point-to-
point communication between a single Master and a single Slave, a more common
implementation features a multi-drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling
multiple Slaves. The ACS550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface.
RTU
The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes: ASCII and RTU.
The ACS550 supports RTU only.
Feature summary
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS550
Function I Code (Hex) I Description
Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status. For the ACS550, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1... 16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g ROI=Coil 33).
Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status. For the ACS550, the individual bits
Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1...16 or 1...32.
depending on the active profile. Terminal inputs are mapped
sequentially beginning with lnput 33 (e.g. DIl=lnput 33).
Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers. For the ACS550, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers. For the ACS550, the 2 analog input
Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 & 2.
Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output. For the ACS550, the individual bits
of the control word are maoDed to Coils 1...16. Relav outouts are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. ~ 0 1 = d o i33).
l
Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register. For the ACS550, the entire
Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics. Subcodes for Query (0x00).
Restart (0x01) & Listen Only (0x04) are supported.
Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs. For the ACS550, the individual
bits of the control word are mapped to Coils I...
16. Relay outputs
are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. ROI=Coil
33).
Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers. For the ACS550, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
ReadlWrite Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single
Holding Registers command.

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

Mapping summaty
The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS550 (parameters and
110) and Modbus reference space. For details, see Modbus addressing below.
ACS550 Modbus reference Supported function codes
- Control Bits
Relay Outputs
Coils(0xxxx)
-
01 - Read Coil Status
05 - Force Single Coil
15 Force Multiple Coils
-
. Status Bits . 02 -Read Input Status
- Discrete Inputs
Discrete Inputs(1xxxx)

Analog Inputs Input Registers(3xxxxx) - 04 -Read Input Registers

. Parameters Holding Registers(4xxxx) . 03 Read 4X Registers
-
- ControlIStatus Words - 06 Preset Single 4X Register
-
. References 16 - Preset Multiple 4X Registers
23 - Readwrite 4X Registers

Communication profiles
When communicating by Modbus, the ACS550 supports multiple profiles for control
and status information. Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used.
A08 DRV LIM - The primary (and default) profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile. This
implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with
ACS400 drives. The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface. It is
discussed in detail in the following sections.
D c u PROFILE - The D c u PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to
32 bits. It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the
embedded fieldbus environment.
ABB DRV FULL - ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that
standardizes the control interface with ACSGOO and ACS800 drives. This
implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM
implementation.

Modbus addressing
With Modbus, each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set.
Thus, the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message.

Note: The ACS550 supports the zero-based addressing of the Modbus

specification. Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message
Similarly, coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message.

Refer again to the Mapping summary above. The following sections describe, in
detail, the mapping to each Modbus reference set.
Oxxxx Mapping - Modbus coils. The drive maps the following information to the
Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils:
bit-wise map of the CONTROL WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE). The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 Users Manual

relay output states, numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033.

The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set:

00009 1I CONTROL WORD - Bit 8 /I NIA /I STPMODE-EM 1 N/A

I
00010 CONTROL WORD - Bit 9 NIA STPMODE-C NIA
00011 I CONTROL WORD-Blt 10 NIA1 I RAMP-2 I REMOTE-CMD'
00012 CONTROL WORD - Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP-OUT-0 EXT2
00013 CONTROL WORD - Bit 12 NIA RAMP-HOLD NIA
00014 CONTROL WORD - Bit 13 NIA RAMP-IN-0 NIA
00015 CONTROL WORD - Bit 14 NIA REQ-LOCALLOCK NIA
00016 CONTROL WORD- Bit 15 NIA TORQLIM2 NIA
00017 CONTROL WORD - Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL-CTL Does not apply
00018 CONTROL WORD - Bit 17 FBLOCAL-REF
00019 CONTROL WORD- Bit 18 START-DISABLE1
00020 CONTROL WORD - Bit 19 START-DISABLE2
00021 ... Resewed Resewed Resewed Reserved
00032
I I I I
00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1
u
00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 . . . .
00035 REIAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3
00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4
00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay. Output
. 5 Relay. Output
. 5
I I I
00038 RElAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6
' = Active low
For the Oxxxx registers:
Status is always readable.
Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control
Additional relay outputs are added sequentially.

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils:
I Function code I Description I
01 Read coil status
05 I Force single coil
15 (OXOF Hex) I Force rnulti~lecoils
I x x x x Mapping - Modbus discrete inputs. The drive maps the following
information to the l x x x x Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs:
bit-wise map of the STATUS WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE). The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose.

discrete hardware inputs, numbered sequentially beginning with input 33.

The following table summarizes the l x x x x reference set:

10023 STATUS WORD - Bit 22 Reserved Resewed

10024 STATUS WORD - Bit 23 Reserved Resewed
10025 STATUS WORD - Bit 24 Reserved Reserved
10026 STATUS WORD - Bit 25 Reserved Reserved
10027 STATUS WORD - Bit 26 Reserved REQ-CTL

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual 205

Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

ref. (all profiles) (5305 = 0 OR 2) (5305 = 1)
10028 STATUS WORD - Bit 27 Reserved REQ-REF1
10029 1I STATUS WORD - Bit 28 1 Reserved
I
II REQ-REF2
10030 STATUS WORD - Bit 29 Resewed REQ-REFZEXT
10031 1 STATUS WORD - Bit 30 1 Resewed I ACK-STARTINH
10032 STATUS WORD- Bit 31 Rese~ed ACK-OFF-ILCK
10033 DII Dil Dl1
10034 Dl2 Dl2 Dl2
10035 Dl3 Dl3 Dl3
10036 Dl4 Dl4 Dl4
10037 015 Dl5 Dl5
10038 016 Dl6 Dl6
' =Active low
For the lxxxx registers:
Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially
The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs:
Function code Description
02 I Read input status
-
3xxxx Mapping Modbus inputs. The drive maps the following information to the
3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers:
any user defined analog inputs.
The following table summarizes the input registers:
Modbus ACS550
reference all profiles Remarks
I I
30001 AII This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 (0 ...100%).
30002 I~12 I This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 (0... 100%).
The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers:
Functioncode Description
04 I Read 3xxxx input status
4xxxx Register mapping. The drive maps its parameters and other data to the
4xxxx holding registers as follows:
40001 ...40099 map to drive control and actual values. These registers are
described in the table below.
40101 ...49999 map to drive parameters 0101 ... 9999. Register addresses that do
not correspond to drive parameters are invalid. If there is an attempt to read or
write outside the parameter addresses, the Modbus interface returns an
exception code to the controller.

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 Usefs Manual

The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 ...40099 (for
4xxxx registers above 40099, see the drive parameter list, e.g. 40102 is parameter
0102):
Modbus register Access Remarks
40001 CONTROL WORD RM, Maps directly to the profile's CONTROL WORD.Supported only
if 5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter 5319 holds
a copy in hex format.
40002 Reference 1 RM, Range = 0...+20000 (scaled to 0...1105 REFIMAX),or
-20000...0 (scaled to 1105 REFI MAX...^).
40003 Reference 2 RIW Range = 0...+10000 (scaled to O...1108 REF^ MAX).or

40004 i
..................................
slnTLi nonn
iI I
-'f0000...0 (scaled to 1108 REF2 MA,...O).
-
Maps o rect y to tne prof .e s STATUS .vonrj Supported on y 11
5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Dr.bes pr0l.e) Parameter 5320 nods a
1 I CODY in hex format. I
~ ...
By O e f a t~ Stores a Copy O f 0103 OLTPJT FREO. Use
(select uslng 5310) parameter 5310 to se ect a d~fferenlact-a \ a LE for th s
I I l register. I
40006 Actual 2
(select "s ng 5311,
40007 Actual 3
lR I R
By defa~lt,stores a c?p{ of 0104 CJI~RENT Use parameter
5311 to select a alfierent act.~alva uc for this rcglster
By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5312 to select an
(select using 5312) actual value for this register.
40008 Actual 4 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5313 to select an
(select using 5313) actual value for this register.
40009 Actual 5 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5314 to select an
(select using 5314) actual value for this register.
40010 Actual 6 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5325 lo select an
(select using 5315) actual value for this register.
40011 Actual 7 R By default. stores nothing. Use parameter 5316 to select an
(select using 5316) actual value for this register.
40012 Actual 8 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5317 to select an
(select using 5317) actual value for this register.
40031 ACS550 CONTROL RM, Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile's CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1
See parameter 0301
40032 ACS550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile's CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0302.
40033 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile's STATUS WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1
See parameter 0303.
40034 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile's STATUS WORD. Supported Only if5305 = I.
See parameter 0304.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual 207

For the Modbus protocol, drive parameters in Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL report the
parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers.
Code Description
5310 EFB PAR 10
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005.
5311 EFB PAR 11
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006.
5312 EFB PAR 12
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007.
5313 EFB PAR 13
Soecifies the Darameter maDDed to Modbus reaister 40008.
5314 EFB PAR 14
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009.
5315 EFB PAR 15
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010.
5316 1 EFB PAR 16
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011
5317 EFB PAR 17
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012.
5318 EFB PAR 18
Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins
transmitting response to the master request.
5319 EFB PAR 19
Holds a copy (in hex) of the CONTROL WORD, Modbus register 40001.
5320 EFB PAR 20
Holds a copy (in hex) o i the STATUS WoRo. Modbus register 40004.

Except where restricted by the drive, all parameters are available for both reading
and writing. The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid
register addresses.

Note: Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i.e. modified
values are not automatically stored to permanent memory. Use parameter 1607
PARAM SAVE to save all altered values.

The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers:
Function code Description
03 Read holding 4mxx registers
06 Preset sinale
" 4xxxx reaister
I
16 (0x10 Hex) ) Preset multiple 4xmx registers
123 (0x17 Hex) I Readlwrite 4xxxx registers

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

Actual values
The contents of the register addresses 40005 ... 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are:
- specified using parameters 5310 ... 5317
Read-only values containing information on the operation of the drive
16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer
when negative values, written as the two's complement of the corresponding
positive value
scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 197.
Exception codes
Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The ACS550
supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below.
Exception
Name Meaning
code
I I
01 I ILLEGAL FUNCTION I Unsuooorted
,. Command
ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS Thedata address received in the quely is not allowable. It is not
a defined parameterlproup.
A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable
value for the ACS550, because it is one of the following:
. Outside min. or max, limits.
. Parameter is read-only.
Message is too long.
. Parameter write not allowed when start is active.
- Parameter write not allowed when factow macro is selected.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual

ABB control profiles technical data

Overview
ABB Drives profile
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple
protocols, including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module. Two
implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available:
ABB DRV FULL - This
implementation standardizes the control interface with
ACSGOO and ACS800 drives.
ABB DRV LIM - Thisimplementation standardizes the control interface with
ACS400 drives. This implementation does not support two control word bits
SU~~O~~~~~~ABBDRVFULL.
Except as noted, the following "ABB Drives Profile" descriptions apply to both
implementations.
DCU profile
The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits. It is the internal
interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus
environment.

Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:

The drive is in remote (REM)control

The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling
commands (set using parameters such as 1001 EXTI COMMANDS, 1002 E X T ~
COMMANDS and 1102 EXTI/EXT~ SEL).
The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control
profile. For example, to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both
parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 1 (STDMODBUS) and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE = 2 (A06 DRV FULL).

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

A BB D r i v e s profile
The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section d e s c r i b e the
CONTROL WORD c o n t e n t for the ABB Drives profile.

I ABB Drives ~ r o f i l e
CONTROL WORD (See . .
parameter 53191
Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
state

-Enter
READY TO OPERATE READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL - - . .-
EMERGENCY OFF Dr~veramps to stop accord rig to c.rrently
acllve decelerat~onramp ~.(2203 or 22051
Normal command sequence:
Enter OFFI ACTIVE
Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON, unless
other interlocks (OFF2, OFF^) are active.
OPERATING Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
CONTROL
EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop.
Normal command sequence:
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE
Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED
1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)
0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within time specified by parameter
2208.
Normal command sequence:

- Enter OFF3 ACTIVE

Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED

A -- WARNING! Be sure motor and driven

equipment can be stopped using this
mode
--.-
1 OPERAT
ENAR.ED
oh
-7 .

enable slana
-. ... .-.
Enrer OPEPA~IOII 'NAULED (Note the Rur~
- - - must oe a c t ~ ~See
e 1601 if
1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives the
Run Enable signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED
INHIBITED

4 Unused (ABBDRV LIM)

RAMP-OUT- 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED
(ABBDRV FULL) -
0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage
limits in force).
5 RAMP-HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED

0 RFGOUTHOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

outout held)
I I I I '
6 1 RAMP-IN- 11 I RFG INPUT ENABLED I Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
1 ]ZERO
0 I RFG INPUT ZERO I Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 Usei-s Manual 211

Comments

DCU Profile
The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile.

Simultaneous STOP and START commands

control and the drive moves to fieldbus local

I I I I
4 1 RESET 1- I ) Reset 1 Edge sensitive.
I I / other I (no op) II
5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2
0 Switch to EX11
6 RUN-DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable
0 Run enable on
7 STPMODE-R 1 Normal ramp stop
mode
0 (no on\

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

DCU profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 0301)

Bit Name Value CommandlReq. Comments
8 STPMODE-EM 1 Emergency ramp
stop mode
o (no OP)
9 STPMODE-C 1 Coast stop mode
o (no OP)
10 RAMP-2 1 Ramp pair 2
1 1
I I
0 1I Ramp. pair
. 1 1I 1
11 RAMP-OUT-0 Ramp output to 0
I (no OP)
12 RAMP-HOLD 1 Ramp freeze
o (no OP)
13 RAMP-IN-0 1 Ramp input to 0
0 (no OP)
14 RREQ-LOCALL 1 Local mode lock In lock, drive will not switch to local mode.
OC
o (no OP)
15 TORQLIM2 1 Torque limit pair 2
0 Toraue limit air 1

I DCU profile CONTROL WORD (See ~arameter0302) I

Bit Name Value Function Comments
16 26 1 Reserved
27 I REF-CONST
- II II Constant speed ref. I These bits are onlv for su~ervision 1
0 1 (no OP) purposes.

28 I REF-AVE /1 / Average speed ref.

. .. I
I I
29 LINK-ON 1 Master is detected
in link
I I
I I
0 II Link is down II
30 REQ-STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request
is pending
I I

I 31
I
I
OFF-INTERLOCK
I
0

1
I
Start inhibit request
is OFF
Panel OFF button
I
For the control panel (or PC tool) this is
oressed the OFF button interlock.

Status Word
The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information, sent by t h e drive to the
master station.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 Useis Manual

A BB Drives profile
The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the
STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.

Embeddedfieldbus
 ACS550 User's Manual

DCU profile
The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile.

I
0 Drive has not reached zero speed.
5 1 ACCELERATE /1 I Drive is accelerating.
0 Drive is not accelerating.
6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating.
0 Drive is not decelerating.
7 AT-SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint.

0 Control is in EXTI mode.

-p

15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state.

0 Drive is not in a fault state.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual 215

DCU profile STATUS WORD (See parameter 0304) I

Bit Name Value Status
16 (ALARM I1 I An alarm is on.

17 I REQ-MAINT
- / 1 II A maintenance reauest is pendina.
-
1 1
I I
0 I1 No maintenance reauest is uendino. d

18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked out.)

I , 0 II Direction lock is OFF.

19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked out.)
0 / Local mode lock is OFF.
20 CTL-MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode.

I I
0 II Drive is in scalar control mode.
21 ...25 1 Reserved

o (no OP)
1 Reference 1 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel.
1 Reference 2 requested in this channel.
0
1

0
I Reference 2 s not req-es~ean t h s channel
Externa, PID reference 2 requested n tnts cnanrte
External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted.
0 A staii inhibit from this channel is not granted.
31 I ACK-OFF-ILCK
~- - 1I II Start inhibit due to OFF button
I I 0 I Normal oueration

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 Useis Manual

State diagram
ABB Drives profile
To illustrate the operation of the state diagram, the following example (ABBDRV LIM
implementation of the ABB Drives profile) uses the control word to start the drive:
First, the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met. See above.
When the power is first connected, the state of the drive is not ready to switch on.
See dotted lined path (-) in the state diagram below.
Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the
OPERATING state is reached, meaning that the drive is running and follows the
given reference. See the table below.

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual 217

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CVV)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits for the ABB Drives profile.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Off
OFF2 (CW Bitl=O)
(SW Bit3=1)
(SW Bit4=0)
ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)'*

Ih I L=
From any state

9',7 P / NOT Y D Y
TO SWITCH ON
b(w Bito=o)

(CW Bit3=0) P+ a
+
,. (CW xxxx xlxx xxxx x110)

OPERATION
(SW BitZ=O)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON

OPERATION INHIBITED ( c w = XXXX X ~XX

XXXX Xlll)

C D 1 ENABLED
OpERAT'ON b ( S W Bit2=1)

(CW Bit5=O) (CW=xxxx xlxx xxxl' 1111

i.e. Bit 4 4 ) '
KEY
0 State

-
I
.. State change
Path described in example
CW = CONTROL WORD
(CW Bit6=0)
xlxx xx11' 1111

SW = STATUS WORD RFG: ACCELERATOR

RFG = Ramp Function Generator
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
n = Speed i.e. Bit 6=1)
Indicates the features not in ABB DRv LlM
"This state transition also occurs if the fault is
reset from any other source (e.g. digital input). D

Embedded fieldbus
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Reference scaling
ABB Drives and DCU profiles
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU
profiles.
ABB Drives and DCU profiles

Reference Range Reference

Scaling Remarks
type
REF1 -32767 Speed or -20000 =-(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
frequency 0=0 110411105. Actual motor
+32767 +20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by 200112002
(20000 corresponds to 100%) (Speed) or 200712008
(frequency).
REF2 -32767 Speed or -10000 =-(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
frequency 0=0 110711108. Actual motor
+32767 +I0000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by 200112002
(10000 corresponds to 100%) (Speed) or 200712008
(frequency).
Torque -10000 =-(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
0=0 201512017 (torquel) or 20161
+I0000 = (par. 1108) 2018 (torque2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
Reference 0=0 401214013 (PID sell) or
+I0000 = (par. 1108) 411214113 (PID set2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)

Note: The setting of parameter 1104 REFI

MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on
the scaling of references.

When parameter 1103 REFI SELECT or 1106 REF^ SELECT is set to COMM+AI~or
COMM*AI~,the reference is scaled as follows:

ABB Drives and DCU profiles 1

Reference Value
setting A1 reference scaling

REF1 COMM+AII COMM (%) +(At (%) - 0.5. REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient
(100 + 0.5 . (par. 1Io5)%

- - - - - - - - - -.

(100 - 0.5. (par. 1105))%0%

I
I : ,
A l l input signal
50% lob%

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual 219

ABB Drives and DCU profiles

Reference Value
setting Al reference scaling

REF1 COMM*All COMM (%) . (A1 (%) / 0.5. REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient

I
I
I I A l l input signal
(100- 0.5. (par. 1105))%
0% 50% lob%
REF2 COMM+All COMM (%) + (A1 (%) - 0.5 - REF2 MAX (%))

I/
Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient
(100 + 0.5 - (Par. 1108)% - - - - - ,- - - - -

----- - -.
'-

AI; input signal

(100 - 0.5 - (par 1108)%
0% 50% lobo/,
REF2 COMM*AII COMM (%) - (Al (%) / 0.5. REF2 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient

- - - - - - - - - -.
I
I
I
I
I
O%osb 50%
I
10'0% ,
Allinput signal

Embedded fieldbus
 __
220 ACS550 Usets Manual

Reference handling
Use Group 10: START/STOP/DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation
direction for each control location (EXTI
and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate
how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce
REFERENCE values (REFI and REF^). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is
they can be positive or negative.
ABB Drives profile
Parameter Value setting Al reference scaling
1003 DIRECTION 1 (FORWARD)

Max. ref ---

Fieldbus I I I I
reference -163% -loo%
100% 163%

-(Max. ref.) .- - - - - - - - - .
1003 DIRECTION 2 (REVERSE)
ax, ref .- - - - - - - - - -
Resultant ret

Fieldbus -163% -100%

reference I 2(

-(Max. ref.) --
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST)
Resultant ref.

Fieldbus -163% -100%

reference I I

Embedded fieldbus
ACS550 User's Manual

Fieldbus adapter

Overview
The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACS550 can
either:
receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, 01

be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available

control locations, such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel.

Fieldbus

Connect using either:

. standard embedded fieldbus (
terminals X I :28...32
. fieldbus adapter (FBA) module mounted
in slot 2 (option Rxxx)

Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

embedded fieldbus (EFB) -See chapter Embedded fieldbus on page 189
fieldbus adapter (FBA) -With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive's
expansion slot 2, the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the
following protocols:

The ACS550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the

plug-in fieldbus adapter. The default settings for each protocol assume that the
profile used is the protocol's industry-standard drive profile (e.g. PROFldrive for
PROFIBUS, AClDC Drive for DeviceNet). All of the FBA protocols can also be
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used.These details are
provided in a user's manual supplied with the FBA module.
Details for the ABB Drives profile (which apply for all protocols) are provided in
section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 232.

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 User3 Manual

Control interface
In general, the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive
consists of.
Output Words:
- CONTROL WORD
- REFERENCE (speed Or frequency)
- Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words. Protocols limits
may further restrict the total.
Input Words:
- STATUS WORD
- Actual Value (speed or frequency)
- Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words. Protocols limits may
further restrict the total.

Note: The words "output" and "input" are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.

The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS550.
However, the profile used may set particular meanings.
Fieldbus controller

I Fieldbus

Process I10
(cyclic)
L
Control Word (CW)
References

Status Word (SW)

Actual Values - b

Parameter RNV Requests/Responses

Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:

The drive is in remote (REM) control

The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling
commands from EXTI (set using parameters 1001 EXTI COMMANDS and 1102
EXTlIEXT2 SEL).
The external plug-in fieidbus adapter is activated:

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 Useis Manual

- Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 4 (EXTFBA).

- The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile
mode or drive profile objects.
The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocollprofile used. See the
user's manual provided with the FBA module andlor section ABB Drives profile
technical data on page 232.
Status Word
The STATUS WORD is a 16-bit word containing status information, sent by the drive to
the fieldbus controller. The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol1
profile used. See the user's manual provided with the FBA module andlor section
ABB Drives profile technical data on page 232.
Reference
The contents of each REFERENCE word:
can be used, as speed or frequency reference
is a 16-bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15-bit integer
Negative references (indicating reversed rotation direction) are indicated by the
two's complement of the corresponding positive reference value.
The use of a second reference (REF2) is supported only when a protocol is
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific. See the user's manual provided with the
FBA module andlor the following sections as appropriate:
Reference scaling on page 236 (ABB Drives profile technical data)
Reference scaling on page 240 (Generic profile technical data)

Actual Values
Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the
drive. Drive Actual Values (for example, Group 10: SJARJ/STOP/DIR parameters)
can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE parameters
(protocol-dependent, but typically parameters 5104 ... 5126).

Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
What control information must be sent down to the drives?
What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?

Fieldbus adapter
224 ACS550 Useis Manual

Mechanical and electrical installation - FBA

WARNING! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from
the power source.

Overview
The FBA (fieldbus adapter) is a plug-in module that fits in the drive's expansion slot
2. The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws. The
screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND
signals to the drive control board.
On installation of the module, electrical connection to the drive is automatically
established through the 34-pin connector.
Mounting procedure
1
Note: Install the input power and motor cables first.
2
1. Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2
until the retaining clips lock the module into position.
2. Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.

Note: Correct installation of the screws is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of
the module.
7
3. Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and
install the cable clamp for the network cable.
4. Route the network cable through the cable clamp.
5. Connect the network cable to the module's network
connector.
6. Tighten the cable clamp
7. Install the conduit box cover (I screw).
8. For configuration information see the following:
section Communication set-up - FBA on page 225
section Activate drive control functions - FBA on page 225
The protocol specific documentation provided with the module

~~

Fieldbus adaptel
ACS550 User's Manual

Communication set-up - FBA

Serial communication selection
To activate the serial communication, use parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL. Set 9802
= 4 (EXTFBA).

Serial communication configuration

Setting 9802, together with mounting a particular FBA module, automatically sets the
appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process.
These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user's manual supplied with
the FBA module.
Parameter 5101 is automatically configured.
Parameters 5102 ... 5126 are protocol-dependent and define, for example, the
profile used and additional 110 words. These parameters are referred to as the
fieldbus configuration parameters. See the user's manual provided with the FBA
module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters.
Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 ... 5126. If
parameter 5127 is not used, changes to parameters 5102 ... 5126 take affect only
after the drive power is cycled.
- Parameters 5128 ...5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed
(e.g. component versions and status).
See Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE for parameter descriptions.

Activate drive control functions - FBA

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function
define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control
define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. The last column in each table below is deliberately blank. See
the user's manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry.

StartlStop Direction control

Using the fieldbus for staNstopldirection control of the drive requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location
is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol
Drive parameter Value Description reference
1001 EXTI 10 (COMM) Start/Stop controlled by fieldbus with
COMMANDS Extl selected.

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Drive parameter Value Protocol

Description
reference
1002 EXT~ 10 (COMM) StaNStop by controlled fieldbus with
COMMANDS Ext2 selected.
I I I I
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Direction controlled by fieldbus.

lnput reference select

Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires:
drive parameter value set as defined below
fieldbus controller supplied reference word@) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Drive parameter Value Description Protocol

reference
1102 EXT?/EXT2 SEL 8 (COMM) Ref. selected by fieldbus.
(Required only if 2 references used.)
1103 REF1 SELECT 8 (COMM) Input reference Isupplied by fieldbus.
9 (COMM+AI~)
10 (COMMIAII)
I106 REF2 SELECT 8 (COMM) Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus.
9 (COMM+AI) (Required only if 2 references used.)
10 (COMM*AI)

Note: Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile.

Scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following sections, as
appropriate:
Reference scaling on page 236 (ABB Drives profile technical data)
Reference scaling on page 240 (Generic profile technical data).

System control
Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
fieldbus controller command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location is
defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Drive parameter Value Description

/ Protocol
reference I
1601 1 RUN ENABLE 1 7 (COMM) I Run enable by fieldbus.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 (COMM) Fault reset by fieldbus.
1607 PARAM SAVE 1 (SAVE) Saves altered parameters to memory (then
value returns to 0).

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 User's Manual

Relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)

/ I I
1:z 1
Drive parameter value Description
I I
RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 (COMM) I Relay output Icontrolled by fieldbus I
RELAY OUTPUT 2 I
36 (CoMM(-l)) Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus. It
1403 / RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus.
Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus. /
Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus.
Relay O u t ~ u6t controlled bv fieldbus, 1
' More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.
Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Drive parameter II Value II Protocol reference I

0122 I RO 1-3 STATUS
I
II Relav 1...3 status. I
0123 I RO 4-6 STATUS I Relay 4...6 status.
Analog output control
Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:
drive parameter values set as defined below
- fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

I Drive parameter I
I
value
I
I
Description I
I
Protocol
reference I
1501 A01 CONTENT SEL 135 (COMM VALUE 1) Analog Output 1 controlled by -
writing to parameter 0135.
0135 1 COMM VALUE 1 I
-
I I
1502 AOI
CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling -
... ... values.
1505 MAXIMUM A 0 1

1506 FILTER AOI Filter time constant for ~ o l . -

1507 A 0 2 CONTENT SEL 136 (COMM VALUE 2) Analog Output 2 controlled by -

- writing to parameter 0136.
0136 COMM VALUE 2
I I I I
1508 A 0 2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling -
values.
1511 M
,M
I UM A O ~
t I
1512 FILTER ~ 0 2 Filter time constant for ~ 0 2 . -

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 Usefs Manual

PID Control setpoint source

Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PiD
loops:

Drive parameter Value Setting Protocol

reference
4010 SET POINT SEL (Set I) 8 (COMM VALUE 1) Setpoint is input reference 2
(COMM+A'l) (+/-I. A l l )
4110 SET POINT SEL (Set 2)
10 (COMM.AII)
4210 SET POINT SEL (ExVTrim)

Communication fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the drive's action if serial communication is lost.
Drive parameter Value Description
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 (NOT SEL) Set for appropriate drive
1 (FAULT) response.
2 (CONST SP7)
3 (LAST SPEED)
3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.

Feedback from the drive - FBA

Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
)
, a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see all parameters listed in
section Complete parameter descriptions on page 98.

Scaling
To scale the drive parameter values see the following sections, as appropriate:
Actual Value scaling on page 239 (ABB Drives profile technical data)
Actual Value scaling on page 241 (Generic profile technical data).

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 User's Manual

Diagnostics - FBA
Fault handling
The ACS550 provides fault information as follows:
The control panel display shows a fault code and text. See chapter Diagnostics
on page 243 for a complete description.
Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0412 PREV~OUSFAULTI
and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT:!
store the most recent faults.
For fieldbus access, the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value, assigned
and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification. See the table below. Not all
profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification. For profiles that
support this specification, the profile documentation defines the proper fault
request process.
Fieldbus fault code
Drive fault code (DRIVECOM
specification)
1 / OVERCURRENT I2310h
2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h
3 DEVOVERTEMP 4210h
4 SHORT ClRC 2340h
5 Reserved FF6Bh
6 I DC UNDERVOLT 13220h
7 A l l LOSS 8110h
-
8 A12 LOSS 8110h
9 MOT OVERTEMP 4310h
I I
10 PANEL LOSS 5300h
I1 I ID RUN FAIL
I
I FF84h
I
12 1I MOTOR STALL 17121h
I
14 EXT FAULT 1 9000h
15 1 EXT FAULT 2 1 9001h
16 EARTH FAULT 2330h
17 Obsolete FF6Ah
18 THERM FAIL 5210h
I I
19 1I OPEX LINK /t 7500h
20 OPEX PWR 5414h
21 1 CURRMEAS 12211h
22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h
23 1 ENCODER ERR
I
1 7301h
24 1I OVERSPEED (7310h
I
25 Reserved FF80h
26 1 DRIVE 10 / 5400h

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Fieidbus fault code

Drive fault code (DRIVECOM
specification)
27 1I CONFIG FILE I
630Fh
28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h
29 1 EFB CON FILE 16306h

I I
103 SERF MACRO FF55h
104 / Reserved / FF55h
105 Reserved FF55h
201 DSP T I OVERLOAD 6100h
202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h
203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h
204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h
205 Reserved (obsolete) 5000h
206 CB ID ERROR 5000h
207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h
1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h
-
1001 PAR PFC REF NEG 6320h
I I
1002 Reserved (obsolete) 6320h
1003 1 PAR A1 SCALE 16320h
,
1004 1I PAR A 0 SCALE 16320h
I
1005 1I PAR PCU 2
~~ - l6370h
1006 1 PAR EXT RO 16320h
I
1007 /I PAR FIELDBUS MISSING 16320h
I
1008 PAR PFC MODE 6320h
1009 1 PAR PCU 1 16320h
1012 PARPFCIOI 6320h
1013 PAR PFC 10 2 6320h
1014 PAR PFC 10 3 6320h
I I
1016 PARUSERLOADC 6320h
ACS550 Usefs Manual 23 1

Serial communication diagnostics

Besides the drive fault codes, the FBA module has diagnostic tools. Refer to the
user's manual supplied with the FBA module.

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS5.50 User's Manual

ABB Drives profile technical data

Overview

The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that c a n b e used on multiple
protocols, including protocols available on t h e FBA module. This section describes
t h e A B B Drives profile implemented for FBA modules.

Control Word
As described earlier in section Control interface on p a g e 222, t h e CONTROL WORD is
t h e principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system.

T h e following table a n d the state d i a g r a m later in this sub-section describe the

CONTROLWORD content for t h e ABB Drives profile.

ABB Drives profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments
0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter REAOY TO OPERATE
CONTROL
EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently
active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)
Normal command sequence:
Enter OFF1 ACTIVE
- Proceed to READY TO SWTCH ON,
unless other interlocks (OFF2, 0 ~ ~are
3 )
active.
1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
CONTROL
EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop.
Normal command sequence:
: Enter OFF^ ACTIVE
Proceed tO SWTCHON INHIBITED
2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)
CONTROL
EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by
parameter 2208.
Normal command sequence:
Enter OFF3 ACTIVE
Proceed to SWTCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and
A driven equipment can be stopped
using this mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run
OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active. See 1601. If
1601 is set to COMM,this bit also actives
the Run Enable signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION
INHIBITED INHIBITED

4 RAMP-OUT- 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:

ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED

0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to

Zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC
voltage limits in force).

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 User's Manual 233

ault reset I an active ault exists Enter

Fieldbus control enabled

CW # 0 or Ref # 0: Retain last CW and
Ref.
. CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
Ref and decelerationlacceleration ramp
are locked.
EXTCTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXTZ).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
0 EXTI
SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXTI).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
Unused

Status Word
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222, the contents of the
STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the master station. The
following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the status
word content.
I . . STATUS WORD
ABB Drives Drofile IFBA) I
Bit Name / 1 Description
ValUe (Correspond to stateslboxes in the state diagram)
READY TO SWITCH ON

NOT READY TO SWlTCH ON

READY TO OPERATE

0 OFF1 ACTIVE
I I I
2 I RDY-REF II OPERATION ENABLED

I ITRIPPED
OL.1
o
FAULT

I NO fault

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 User's Manual

ABB Drives profile (FBA) STATUS WORD

1
/ Bit I Name
I I Description
Value(Correspond to stateslhoxes in the state diagram) /
4 OFF-2-STA 1 OFF^ inactive
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF-3-STA 1 OFF^ inactive
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC-ON-INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 ALARM 1 Alarm (See section Alarm listing on page 250 for details
on alarms.)
1 1I 1I 0 1 No alarm.
-

8 I AT-SETPOINT 11 I OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits)

the reference value.
Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to
reference value).
Drive control location: REMOTE (EXTIor EXT2)
Drive control location: LOCAL
Supervised parameter's value 2 supelvision high limit.
Bit remains "I"until supervised parameter's value <
supervision low limit.
See Group 32: SUPERVISION.
Supervised parameter's value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains"0" until supervised parameter's value >
supervision high limit.
See Group 32: SUPERVISION.
External control location 2 ( E X T ~selected
)
0 External control location I(EXTI) selected
12 I EXT RUN ENABLE /1 I External Run Enable signal received
1 1
I
0 I No External Run Enable sianal received
13... 15 Unused

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 User's Manual 235

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CVV)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Stop
OFF2 (CW Bitl=O)

OFF1 (CW BitO=O)

(SW Bitl=O)

(CW BitO=O)

A B C D
TO SWITCH ON

(CW xxxx x l x x xxxx X110)

(swB~~~=o)----/
OPERATION
I I SWITCH ON b ( S W BitO=l)

OPERATION INHIBITED ( c w = XXXX X l X X XXXX Xlll)

B C D
OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0) it3=1 and
it12=1)

(CW BitS=O) (Cw=xxxxxlxx X X X l 1111)

(CW Bit6=O)
KEY (CW=xxxx x l x x x x l l 1111)
0 State
I. State change RFG: ACCELERATOR
C W = CONTROL WORD
SW = STATUS WORD
RFG = Ramp Function Generator (CW=XXxxxlxx x l l l 1111)
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
n = Soeed

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 User's Manual

Reference
As described earlier in section Confrolinterface on page 222, the REFERENCE word is
a speed or frequency reference.
Reference scaling
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA)
Reference
Reference Range Scaling Remarks
type
REF1 -32767... Speed or -20000 =-(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
+32767 frequency 0=0 110411105. Actual motor
+20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by 200112002
(20000 corresponds to 100%) (Speed) or 200712008
(frequency).
REF2 -32767.. Speed or -10000 =-(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
+32767 frequency 0 =0 110711108. Actual motor
+I0000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by 200112002
(10000 corresponds to 100%) (Weed) Or 2007/2008
(frequency).
Torque -10000 =-(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
0=0 2015/2017 (torquel) or
+I0000 = (par. 1108) 2016/2018 (torque2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
PI0 -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
Reference 0 =0 4012/4013 (PID setl) or
110000 = (par. 1108) 411214113 (PID set2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)

Note: The setting of parameter 1104 REFI

MIN and 1107 REF^ MIN has no effect on
the scaling of references.

When parameter 1103 REFI SELECT or 1106 REF^ SELECT is set to COMM+AI? or
COMM*AI~,the reference is scaled as follows:

ABB Drives profile (FBA)

Reference Value setting Al reference scaling
REF1 COMM+AII COMM (%) + (Al (%) - 0.5 R E F I MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient
(I00 + 0.5 , (Par. 1105)0h ,----

%.----, -- - J

(100 - 0.5 . (par 1105))%

0%
I

50%
I

100%
,
A l l input signal

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 Useis Manual 23 7

ABB Drives profile (FBA)

Reference Value setting Al reference scaling
REF1 COMM'AII COMM (%) . (A{(%) I0.5. REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient
4----

(100 - 0.5 . (par. 1105))%

0% 50% 100%
REF2 COMM+AII COMM (%) (Al (%) - 0.5. REF2 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient
(I00 + 0.5 . (Par. 1108)0h ,----

100% -- -- ---J
I
/
(100 - 0.5 . (par. 1108)%
0% 50% 100%
,
A l l input signal

REF2 COMMfAll COMM (%) - (Al (%) 10.5 - REF2 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reierence
correction coefficient

0%
I , A l l input signal
0% 50% 100%

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 Usefs Manual

Reference handling
Use Group 10: START/STOP/DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation
direction for each control location (EXTIand EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate
how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce
REFERENCE values (REFIand REF^). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is
they can be positive or negative.
I ABB Drives ~rofile I
Parameter Value setting A l reference scaling
1003 DlRECnoN 1 (FORWARD) Resultant ref.
Max. ref - - -

Fieldbus
100% 163%

-(Max. ref.) .- - - - - - - - - .

1003 DIRECTION 2 (REVERSE)

Resultant ret

reference

-(Max, ref.) - -
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Resultant ref.

Fieldbus -163% -100% I I

reference 100% 163%

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 User's Manual 239

Actual Value
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222, Actual Values are
words containing drive values.
Actual Value scaling
The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the
resolution of the selected drive parameter. Except as noted for ACTI and ACT^ below,
scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section
Complete parameter list on page 85. For example:
Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value
1 10.1 mA I 1 . O . l mA=O.lmA

Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows:

ABB Drives profile
I II Contents II -
Scalina I
ACT^ ACTUAL SPEED -20000 ... +20000 = -(par. 1105) ... +(par. 1105)
ACT2 TORQUE 1-10000 ... +I0000 = -100% ... +loo%

Virtual addresses of the drive control

The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows:
1 Control Word
2
-Reference 1 (REFI)
3
4 Status Word
5 Actual Value 1 (ACTI)
6 Actual Value 2 (ACT2)

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 User's Manual

Generic profile technical data

Overview
The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry-standard drive profile for each protocol
(e.g. PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS, AClDC Drive for DeviceNet).

Control Word
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222, the CONTROL WORD is
the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. For specific
CONTROL WORD content, see the user's manual provided with the FBA module.

Status Word
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222, the contents of the
STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the master station. For
specific STATUS WORD content, see the user's manual provided with the FBA module.

Reference
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222, the REFERENCE word is
a speed or frequency reference.

Note: REF^ is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles.

Reference scaling
REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific. However, at the drive, the meaning of a
100% REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below. For a detailed
description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE, see the user's manual
supplied with the FBA module.

Generic profile
Reference
Reference Range Scaling Remarks
type
REF Fieldbus Speed -100% =-(par. 9908) Final reference limited by
specific O=O 1104/1105.
+ I 0 0 = (par. 9908) Actual motor speed limited by 20011
2002 (soeed).
,. ,
I
Frequency -100% = -(par. 9907) Final reference limited by
o=o 110411105.
+I00 = (par. 9907) Actual motor speed limited by 20071
2008 (frequency).

Actual Values
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222, Actual Values are
words containing drive values.

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 User's Manual

Actual Value scaling

For Actual Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter's resolution. (See
section Complete parameter list on page 85 for parameter resolutions.) For example:

/ Feedback
inte~er
I Parameter resolution / (Feedback integer). (Parameter resolution) =
Scaled Value

Where parameters are in percent, the Complete parameterlist section specifies

what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from percent to
engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100% and
divide by 100%. For example:
Value o f the (Feedback integer) . (Parameter resolution).
Feedback Parameter
parameter that (Value of 100% ref.) 1100% =
integer resolution
defines Scaled Value
10 0 1% 1500 rpml 10 0 1% 1500 RPM 1100% = 15 rpm
100 0 1% 500 Hz2 100 0 1 % 500Hz/100%=50Hz
I
' Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908
I
MOT NOM SPEED
as the 100% reference and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.
* Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREO
as the 100% reference and that 9907 = 500 Hz.

Actual Value mapping

See the user's manual supplied with the FBA module

Fieldbus adapter
 ACS550 User's Manual

Fieldbus adapter
ACS550 Usets Manual

Diagnostics

WARNING! Do not attempt any measurement, parts replacement or other service

procedure not described in this manual. Such action will void the warranty, may
endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense.

WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter
should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel. The safety instructions in
chapter Safety on page 5 must be followed.

Diagnostic displays
The drive detects error situations and reports them using:
the green and red LED on the body of the drive
the status LED on the control panel (if an Assistant Control Panel is attached to
the drive)
the control panel display (if a control panel is attached to the drive)
the Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters 0305 to 0309). See
Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 104 for the bit definitions.
The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. You can specify the
severity for many errors by directing the drive to:
ignore the error situation
- report the situation as an alarm
report the situation as a fault.

Red - Faults
The drive signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by:
enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady on or blinking)
showing the steady red status LED on the control panel (if attached to the drive)
setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter (0305 to 0307)
overriding the control panel display with the display
of a fault code in the Fault mode (figures on the
FAULT 8
right)
A 1 1 LO55
stopping the motor (if it was on).
The fault code on the control panel display is
temporary. Pressing any of the following keys removes
the fault message: MENU, ENTER, UP, or DOWN key.
 ACS550 Useis Manual

The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and
the fault is still active.

Flashing green -Alarms

For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is advisory. For these
situations, the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something "unusual." In
these situations, the drive:
flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms that arise from
control panel operation errors)
flashes the green LED on the control panel (if attached to the drive)
sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or 0309). See Group
03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 104 for the bit definitions
overrides the control panel display with the display ILOC ALARM I
of an alarm code andlor name in the Fault mode
(figures on the right).
Alarm messages disappear from the control panel
ALARM 2008
PANEL LOSS

1 o o : o o 1
I
display afler a few seconds. The message returns
periodically as long as the alarm condition exists.

I Correcting faults
The recommended corrective action for faults is.
Use the table in section Fault listing below to find and address the root cause of
the problem.
Reset the drive. See section Fault resetting on page 249.

Fault listing
The following table lists the faults by code number and describes each. The fault
name is the long form shown in the Fault mode of the Assistant Control Panel when
the fault occurs. The fault names shown (for Assistant Control Panel only) in the
Fault Logger mode (see page 55) and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST
FAULT may be shorter.
Fault Fault name in
Description and recommended corrective action
code panel
1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive. Check for and correct:
. Excessive motor load.
insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and
2205 ACCELER TIME 2).
Faulty motor, motor cables or connections.

Diagnostics
ACS550 User's Manual 245

Fault Fault name i n

Description and recommended corrective action
code panel
DC OVERVOLT lntermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. Check for and correct:

- Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply.

Insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and
2206 DECELER TIME 2).
Undersized brake chopper (11present).
Verify that overvoltage controller is ON (using parameter 2005).
DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated. Temperature is at or above limit.
R1...R4 & R7IR8: 115 "C (239 "F)
R51R6: 125 "C (257 "F)
Check for and correct:
- Fan failure.
- Obstructions in the air flow.
Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink.
Excessive ambient temperature.
Excessive motor load.
SHORT ClRC Fault current. Check for and correct:
A short-circuit in the motor cable@)or motor.
- Supply disturbances.
15 1 RESERVED I Not used. I

I
OC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. Check for and correct:
- Missing phase in the input power supply.
- Blown fuse.
- Undervoltage on mains.
7 AII
LOSS FAULT LIMIT (3021).
Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is less than AII
Check for and correct:
Source and connection for analog input.
Parameter settings for AII FAULT LIMIT (3021) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.

8 ~ 1 LOSS
2 Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is less than A12 FAULT LIMIT (3022).
Check for and correct:
Source and connection for analog input.
Parameter settings for A12 FAULT LIMIT (3022) and 3001 A I ~ M I NFUNCTION.
9 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot, based on either the drive's estimate or on temperature
feedback.
. Check for overloaded motor.
. Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005...3009).
Check the temperature sensors and Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS
parameters.
PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
Drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or
. Drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterizedto accept
start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
- Communication lines and connections.
Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.
. Parameters in Group 10: START/STOP/DIR and Group 11:
REFERENCE SELECT (if drive operation is REM).

Diagnostics
 ACS550 User's Manual

Fault Fault name i n

code panel Description and recommended corrective action

11 ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run was not completed successfully. Check for and correct:
- Motor connections.
Motor parameters 9905 ...9909.
12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall. Motor is operating in the stall region. Check for and
correct:
- Excessive load.
Insufficient motor power.
Parameters 3010 ...3012.
RESERVED Not used.
EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active. See parameter
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1.
M T FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active. See parameter
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2.
- ........ .. -. ..... -..
EARTH FAULT Poss ble g r o ~ r ~
f ad~ loetected
t in the motor or motor cab es Tne ar:\e
mon.tors for gro..nd fa^ ts whlle tne d r ~ r eIS rbnnlrlq ana nhile the arive is
not runnina. Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not runnina and
can produce false positives.
Possible corrections:
Check forlcorrect faults in the input wiring.
Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length.
A delta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high
capacitance may result in erroneous error reports durina non-runnino
tests. To disabliresponse to fault monitoring' when the :rive is not
running, use parameter 3023 WRING FAULT. TO disable response to all
-
ground fault monitorinq, use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT:
1 17 /
/ /' _
OBSOLETE

TI-ERI.I FA .
Not used.
.._ .. .- ..- ....- -.
Internal fau,t The thcrm~storineas-rng the interr~altemperature of the
I

dr ve IS open or shorteo Contact your ocal ABB representat ve

1 l9 I OPEX L'Nd
Interna fa- t A commun~catlon-reated proolem has oeen detected on tne
f ber optic irik oetween the contro and OlNT boards Contact your oca
ABB representative.
Internal fault. Low voltage condition detected on OlNT power supply.
Contact your local ABB representative.
CURR MEAS Internal fault. Current measurement is out of range. Contact your local ABB
representative.
SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. Check for and correct:
Missing mains phase.
Blown fuse.
ENCODERERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal. Check for and correct:
Encoder presence and proper connection (reverse wired, loose
connection or short circuit).
Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range.
A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module,
OTAC-01
Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR. A wrong value will
only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater
than 4 times the rated slip of the motor.
Encoder is not being used, but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE =
1 (ENABLE).

Diagnostics
ACS550 User's Manual 24 7

Fault Fault name i n

panel Description and recommended corrective action
code
24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120% of the larger (in magnitude) of 2001
MINIMUM SPEED Or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED. Check for and Correct:
- Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002.
Adequacy of motor braking torque.
Applicability of torque control.
Brake chopper and resistor
25 1 RESERVED I Not used.
26 DRIVE ID Internal fault. Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid. Contact your local
ABB representative.
27 CONFIG FILE lnternal configuration file has an error. Contact your local ABB

28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for and correct:
Fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME).
Communication settings (Group 51: EXTCOMM MODULEor Group 53:
EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate).
Poor connections and/or noise on line.
29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus.
-
30 FORCE TRIP Fault trio forced bv the fieldbus. See the fieldbus User's Manual.
-
...... ...- .
Fault code reservea for !lie e~noedaedr e d b ~ s(EFB) protoco appl cat~on
Tne meanlng IS protoco. dependent
EFB 2

Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. Check for and
correct:
. Motor fault.
. Motor cable fault.
Thermal relay fault (if used)
lnternal fault.
OUTP WIRING Posslole poher uYlrlfig error delected h n e n the ar ve IS not runn~ngI
monltors for an improper connect on between the dr ve npdt power anu me
drive output. Check for and correct:
Proper input wiring - line voltage is NOT connected to drive output.
The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta
grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large. This fault can be
disabled using parameter 3023 WRING FAULT.
INCOMPATIBLE The drive cannot use the soitware.
SW lnternal fault.
The loaded software is not compatible with the drive.
Call support representative.
CBOVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated. The fault trip limit is 88 "C. Check for and
correct:
. Excessive ambient temperature.
. Fan failure.
Obstructions in the air flow.
Not for drives with an OM10 control board.

138 I JSFR LOAD

CLR~E
Cond ton defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD c MODE has oeen va id
longer than the lime defined oy 3703 USER I OAD c TIME

Diagnostics
 ACS550 User's Manual

Fault Fault name i n Description and recommended corrective action

code oanel
~~~~~~~~~~

SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive. Contact your locai ABB representativeand report
the error number.
201 ... SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system. Contact your local A B B representative and report the
299 error number.

UNKNOWN Wrong type of panel, ie. panel that supports drive X but not the A C S 5 5 0 ,
DRIVE ~ Y P E : has been connected to the A C S 5 5 0 .
ACS550
SUPPORTED
DRIVES' X

Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below.

-
Fault
code
1000
panel
Fault
name in
PAR HZRPM
I Description and recommended corrective action

Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:

2001 MlNlMUM SPEED > 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED.
2007 MlNlMUM FREO > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
2001 MlNlMUM SPEED 19908 MOTOR NOM SPEED outside proper range
(> 50).
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 1 9 9 0 8 MOTOR NOM SPEED outside proper range
(> 50).
2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 9907 MOTOR NOM FREO outside proper range
(> 50).
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 9 9 0 7 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range
(> 50).
1001 PAR PFC REF Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for the following:
NEG - 2007 MINIMUM FREO is negative. when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active.
1002 RESERVED Not used.
1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
1301 MlNlMUMAll > 1302 MAXIMUM A l l .
1304 MINIMUM A12 > 1305 MAXIMUM A12.
Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
1004 PAR AO SCALE
- 1 5 0 4 MINIMUMA01 > 1505 MAXIMUMAOI.
1510 MINIMUM A 0 2 > 1511 MAXIMUM A02.

1
II .Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper mot01
nomlnai kVA or motor nominal power. Check for the following:
1 .I<
- ( 9 9 0 6 MOTOR NOM CURR - 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT. 1.73 / PN)5 3.0
where Ph = 1 0 0 0 9909 M O T U hot4 ~ POWER ( f ~n ts are kVV)
or Ph = 7 4 6 9 9 0 9 E.IOTOR r.o:n P O ~ L R( f untts are hp e g in IJS)
1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for the following:
Extension relay module not connected and
1410...1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4...6 have non-zero values.
1007 PAR FIELDBUS Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for and correct:
MISSING A parameter is set for fieidbus control (e.g 1001 EXTICOMMANDS = 10
(COMM)), but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0.
I I
1008 PAR PFC MODE Parameter values are inconsistent - 9 9 0 4 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be = 3
(SCALAR:FREQ), when 8123 PFC ENABLE is activated.

Diagnostics
ACS550 Useis Manual 249

Fault Fault name i n Description and recommended corrective action

code vanel

1 I0O9 I Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor
nom~nalfrequency or speed. Check for both of the following:
1 5 (60.9907 MOTOR NOM FREO / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 5 16
0.8 5 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /
(120 - 9907 MOTOR NOM FREO / Motor Poles) 50.992
RESERVED Not used.

I I
PAR PFC 101
I/ 10 cnnrguration IS not complea - not eiiouyn relays ate parameterized to
PFC Or, a conflict exists oetwden tiro.,p 1.1 RELAY OUlPUTS paranteter
8117 NR OF AUX MOT and Parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV, I

I I PAR PFC 10 2 10 cnnfg~ration1s not corllp.ele - In.? actc.al nunlter ol PFC motors
(parameter 8127. IAOTOUS) does not malcr. lne PFC nlulors in G r w p :4
H E W Y OU TPdTS arid parameler 0118 A~TOCHEIG 1~1Crw

I I loin
PAR PFC 103

RESERVED
10 configuration is not complete - the drive is unable to allocate a digital
input (interlock) for each PFC motor (parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and
8127 MOTORS).
Not used.
PAR USER LOAD C Parameter values for the user load curve are inconsistent. Check that the
following conditions are met:
- 3704LOADFREO 153707 L O A D F R E O ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ L O A D F R E O ~ ~
3713LOAOFREO453716LOADFREO5.

- 3705LOADTOR4LOW1~37~6LOADTOROHlGH1.
3708 LOAD TOR4 LOW 2 5 3709 LOAD TORO HlGH 2.
3711 LOAD TORO LOW353712 LOAD TORQ HlGH 3.
3714 LOADTORO LOW4 53715 LOAD TOR4 HlGH4.
- 3717 LOAD TORO L O W 5 53718 LOAD TORO HlGH 5.

Fault resetting
The ACS550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults. Refer to
parameter Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET.
~~~~~~ - ~ -

A WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is active, the
ACS550 may start immediately after fault reset.

Flashing red LED

To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED:
Turn the power off for 5 minutes.
Red LED
To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED (on, not flashing), correct the
problem and do one of the following:
Press RESET from the control panel.
Turn the power off for 5 minutes
Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL, the following could also be used to
reset the drive:
 ACS550 User's Manual

- digital input
serial communication.
When the fault has been corrected, the motor can be started

History
For reference, the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401, 0412,
0413. For the most recent fault (identified by parameter 0401), the drive stores
additional data (in parameters 0402 ... 0411) to aid in troubleshooting a problem. For
example, parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault.
The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history.
See section Fault Logger mode on page 55 for more information.
To clear the fault history (all of the Group 04: FAULT HISTORY parameters):
1. Using the control panel in the Parameters mode, select parameter 0401
2. Press EDIT (or ENTER on the Basic Control Panel)
3. Press UP and DOWN at the same time.
4. Press SAVE.

Correcting alarms
The recommended corrective action for alarms is:
- Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action (action is not always
required).
Use the table in section Alarm listing below to find and address the root cause of
the problem.

Alarm listing
The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each
Alarm
Display Description
code
2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active. Check for and correct:
. Excessive motor load.
Insufficientacceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and
2205 ACCELER TlME 2).
- Faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
2002 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage controller is active. Check for and correct:
- Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply.
Insufficientdeceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and
2206 DECELER TlME 2).
2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage controller is active. Check for and correct:
Undervoltage on mains.

Diagnostics
ACS550 User's Manual 25 1

Alarm Description
Display
code
2004 OIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed. Either:
Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation, or
Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change (if
reverse operation is safe).
2005 10 COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for and correct:
Fault Setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME).
Communication settings (Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE or
Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate).
Poor connections and/or noise on line.
2006 A l l LOSS Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting.
Check:
- lnput source and connections.
- Parameter that sets the minimum (3021).
Pardrneler lhal szls ina a armifaUlropnratlon (3001)
2007 A12 LOSS Analog i n p ~2l is osl or value? 1s ICSS1ha11!he inililmum setllllg
Check:
- lnput source and connections.
Parameter that sets the minimum (3022).
Parameter that sets the alarmlfault operation (3001).
2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
Drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or
Drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterizedto
accept startistop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
- Communication lines and connections.
Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.
Parameters in Group 10: START/STOP/DlR and Group i f :
REFERENCE SELECT (if drive operation is REM).
2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot. This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP
fault
OVERTEMP may be near.
R1... R4 & R71RB: 100°C (212 "F)
R5iR6: 110 "C (230 "F)
Che& for and correct:
Fan failure.
Obstructions in the air now.
Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink.
- Excessive ambient temperature.
. Excessive motor load.

01° I MOTOR TEMP

I Motor IS hot, based on elther the dr~ve'sestimate or on temperature
feedback Thls alarm warns that a Mor OVERTEMP fault trlp may be
near. Check:
Check for overloaded motor.
Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005... 3009).
Check the temperature sensors and Group 35: MOTOR TEMP
MEAS.
I
2011 RESERVED Not used.
2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region. This alarm warns that a MOTOR
STALL fault trip may be near.

Diagnostics
 ACS550 User's Manual

Alarm
code
1 Display
I Description

2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault
(Note 1) reset, which may start the motor.
To control automatic reset, use Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET.
2014 AUTOCHANGE - function is active.
This alarm warns that the PFC autochanqe
(Note 1) . To control PFC, use Group 81: PFC CONTROL and the PFC macro
on page 78.
PFC I LOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active. which means that
the drive cannot start the following:
Any motor (when Autochange is used).
- The speed regulated motor (when Autochange is not used).
20161 RESERVED Not used
2017
2018 PI0 SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active, which means
(Note 1) that the motor could accelerate when the PID s l e e ~
function ends.
'To co~~troi
PI[) sleep \.se parameters 4022 . 4026 or 4122 4126
-. - -. . .. . ..- .- . . .-....-- . .. -
ID RUN Perlofroiny ln Run
RESERVED Not used.
START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing.
MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function, use parameter 1608.
To correct, check:
Digital input configuration.
. Communication settings.
START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing.
MISSING To control Start Enable 2 function, use parameter 1609.
To correct, check:
Digital input configuration.
Communication settings.
EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated.
STOP

ENCODERERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal. Check for and
correct
Encoder presence and proper connection (reverse wired, loose
connection.or short circuit).
Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range.
A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module.
OTAC-01
-
Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PU-SE NR A wrong value
w I1 on y oe detecteo 11the error is sucli that the calc~latc?d
slip is
greatefthan 4 times the rated slip of the motor.
Encoder is not being used, but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE =
1 (ENABLE).
FIRST START Slgnals tnat a the dr VP IS perlorniing a F ~ r sSran
l e~aluat011of motor
character st cs This IS nornial the Irst time tlie motor 1s run after motor
parameters are entered or changed. See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a
description of motor models.
RESERVED Not used

Diagnostics
ACS550 User's Manual 253

Alarm Description
Display
code
2027 USER LOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER
CURVE LOAD c MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by
3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
2028 START DELAY Shown durina the Start delav. See parameter 21 13 START DELAY.
Note 1. Even wncn the relay o u t p ~ is care a arm connitions ( e g. paranleter
t configbred to i ~ r d
I401 IUAY ours~r1 = 5 (A-ARL~)or 16 (F.1IA.ARI.I)) rhs alann s not tn3:cared oy a relay
output

Alarm codes (Basic Control Panel)

The Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code, A5xxx. The
following table lists the alarm codes and descriptions.
I Code /I Description I
5001 Drive is not responding.
5002 1 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive.
5010 The panel's parameter backup file is corrupted.
5011 1 Drive is controlled from another source.

Diagnostics
 ACS550 User's Manual

I Code II Description I
5050 1I Parameter unload was aborted.
5051 ( File error was detected.
5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed.
5060 1 Parameter download was aborted. ~p

Paranie~erdownloaa attempt has faileo

-. .. .. . - ..
backup nlelnor, v,rfle error w3s delccte(J
5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected.
5080 Operation is not allowed. because the drive is not in local mode.
5081 1 Operation is not allowed. because a fault is active.
5083 /1 Operation is not allowed, because parameter lock is not open.
5084 1I Ooeration
' -
is not allowed. because drive is busv. t w, aoain.
2 .

5085 1 Download is not allowed, because drive types are incompatible.

5086 Download is not allowed, because drive models are incompatible.
5087 Download is not allowed, because parameter sets do not match.
5088 Operation failed. because a drive memory error was detected.
5089 1 Download failed, because a CRC errorwas detected.
5090 1 Download failed, because a data process in^ error was detected.
Operar~urifa led oecause 3 paranlctcr ertor was dztecteJ
. . .-- -.-. - ....---.-...-- ..--. . .----..
Dowrload fa:led, tlecatlse palalncter sets oo no1 ni:ltch

Diagnostics
ACS550 User's Manual

Maintenance

WARNING! Read chapter Safety on page 5 before performing any maintenance on

the equipment. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.

Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Interval instruction
Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of the See Heatsink on page 255.
and cleaning environment (every 6 . . 12
months)
Main cooling fan replacement Every six years See Main fan replacement on
page 256.
Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years. See lnlernal enclosure fan
replacement replacement on 257.
(IPS4 iUL type 12 drives)
Capacitor reforming Every year when stored See Reforming on page 258.
Capacitor replacement Every nine to ten years See Replacement on page 258.
(frame sizes R5 and R6)
Replace battery in the Assistant Every ten years See Bafleryon page 258.
Control Panel

Heatsink
The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a dusty heatsink is less
efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature faults become more likely. In a
"normal" environment (not dusty, not clean) check the heatsink annually, in a dusty
environment check more often.
Clean the heatsink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove power from drive.
2. Remove the cooling fan (see section Main fan replacement on page 256).
3. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously use a
vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust.

Note: If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning
in another room.

4. Reinstall the cooling fan

5. Restore power.

Maintenance
 ACS550 User's Manual

Main fan replacement

The drive's main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at
maximum rated operating temperature and drive load. The expected life span
doubles for each 10 "C (18 "F) drop in the fan temperature (fan temperature is a
function of ambient temperatures and drive loads).
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the
gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is
operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these
symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not use
other than ABB specified spare parts.

Frame sizes R1... R4

To replace the fan:
1. Remove power from drive.
2. Remove drive cover.
3. For frame size:
R1, R2: Press together the retaining clips on the fan
cover sides, and lift.
R3, R4: Press in on the lever located on the left side
of the fan mount, and rotate the fan up and out.
4. Disconnect the fan cable.
5. lnstall the fan in reverse order
6. Restore power.

Frame sizes R5 and R6

Bottom view (R5)
To replace the fan:
1. Remove power from drive.
2. Remove the screws attaching the fan.
3. Remove the fan:
- R5: Swing the fan out on its hinges. Bottom view (R6) 4
- R6: Pull the fan out.
4. Disconnect the fan cable.
5. Install the fan in reverse order.
6. Restore power.
Arrows in the fan show the directions of the
rotation and air flow.

Maintenance
ACS550 Usefs Manual

Internal enclosure fan replacement

IP54 IUL type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the
enclosure.

Frame sizes R1...R4

To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to
R3 (located at the top of the drive) and R4 (located in front
of the drive):
1. Remove power from drive.
2. Remove the front cover.
3. The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed
retaining clips at each corner. Press all four clips toward
the center to release the barbs.

4. When the clipslbarbs are free, pull the housing up to

remove from the drive.
5. Disconnect the fan cable.
6. Install the fan in reverse order, noting that:
The fan air flow is up (refer to the arrow on fan)
The fan wire harness is toward the front.
The notched housing barb is located in the right-rear
corner.
The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the
top of the drive.

Frame sizes R5 and R6

To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or
1. Remove power from drive.
2. Remove the front cover.
3. Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable.
4. Install the fan in reverse order.
5. Restore power.

Maintenance
 ACS550 User's Manual

Capacitors
Reforming
The drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed (re-aged) if the drive has been
non-operational for more than one year. W~thoutreforming, capacitors may be
damaged when the drive starts to operate. It is therefore recommended to reform the
capacitors once a year. See section Serial number on page 13 for how to check the
date of manufacture from the serial number shown on the drive labels.
For information on reforming the capacitors, refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming
in ACS50/150/350/550 [3AFE68735190 (English)], available on the Internet (go to
www.abb.com and enter the code in the Search field).

Replacement
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. Their life span
is from 35 000 ... 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature.
Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature.
It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is usually followed by
a input power fuse failure or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected.
Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB. Do not use other
than ABB specified spare parts.

Control panel
I

Cleaning
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could
scratch the display window.

Battery
A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function
available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during
power interruptions.
The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use
a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel. Replace the
battery with type CR2032.

Note: The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive function, except the
clock.

Maintenance
ACS550 Usefs Manual 259

Technical data

Ratings
By type code, the table below provides ratings for the ACS550 adjustable speed AC
drive, including:
- IEC ratings
NEMA ratings (shaded columns)
frame size.

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Ratings, 380...480 V drives

Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 261

2. Not available in ACS550-01 series.

3. The ACS550-01-045A-4 (an R3 frame size) replaces the ACS550-01-044A-4 (discontinued in
2007).
4. The ACS550-U1-078A-4 (an R4 frame size) replaces the ACS550-U1-077A-4 (discontinued in
2007).
5. The ACS550-01-087A-4 (an R4 frame size) replaces the ACS550-01-096A-l (discontinued in
2007).
6. The ACS550-01-125A-4 (an R5 frame size) replaces the ACS550-01-124-4 (discontinued in 2007).

Technical data
ACS550 User3 Manual

Ratings, 500 ...600 V drives

Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 261.

Symbols
Typical ratings:
Normal use (10% overload capability)
. N continuous rms current. 10% overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes
I-.~
PN typical motor power in normal use. The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC. Cpole
motors. The horsepower ratinqs apply
. . to most 4-pole NEMA motors.
Heavy-duty use (50% overload capability)
/2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes.
phd typical motor power in heavy duty use. The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC. 4-pole
motors. The horsepower ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA motors.

Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage
range. To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the
drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current. Also note that:
the ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 "C (104 "F)
the maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 . Phd.If the limit is
exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function
protects the input bridge of the drive against overload.

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases for certain situations, as defined
below. In such situations, where full motor power is required, oversize the drive so
that the derated value provides sufficient capacity.
For example, if your application requires 15.4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz
switching frequency, calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows:
The minimum size required = 15.4 A 10.80 = 19.25 A
Where: 0.80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency (see section Switching frequency derating
on page 262).
Referring to JZN in the ratings tables (starting from page 259), the following drives
exceed the IzN requirement of 19.25 A: ACS550-XI-023A-4, or ACS550-XI-024A-2.

Temperature derating
In the temperature range +40 "C ...50 "C (+I04 "F... 122 OF), the rated output current
is decreased 1% for every 1 "C (I .8 "F) above +40 "C (+I04 OF). Calculate the
output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating
factor.
Examale If the ambient temperature is 50 "C (+I22 "F), the derating factor is
100% - I0hI"C x 10 "C = 90% or 0.90.
The output current is then 0.90 x IZN
or 0.90 x lzhd.

Altitude derating
In altitudes 1000... 4000 m (3300... 13,200 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for
every 100 m (330 ft). If the installation site is higher than 2000 m (6600 ft) above sea
level, please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information.

Single phase supply derating

For 208 ... 240 V series drives, a single phase supply can be used. In that case, the
derating is 50%.

Switching frequency derating

When using the 8 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606). either:
Derate PN/Phdand /2N/12hdto 80% or
Set parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL = 1 (ON)which allows the drive to reduce
the switching frequency iflwhen the drive's internal temperature exceeds 90 "C.
See the parameter description for 2607 for details.
When using the 12 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606), either:
Derate PN/Phdand /2N/12hdto 65% (to 50% for 600 V, R4 frame sizes, that is for
ACS550-U1-032A-6 ... ACS550-Ul-062A-61,
and derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 "C (86 O F ) ,
and note that the current is limited to a maximum value of Izhd,or
Set parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL = 1 (ON)which allows the drive to reduce
the switching frequency iflwhen the drive's internal temperature exceeds 80 "C.
See the parameter description for 2607 for details.

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual

lnput power connections

WARNING! Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range.
Overvoltage can result in permanent damage to the drive.

lnput power specifications

lnput power (mains) connection specifications
2081220/230/240 VAC 3-phase (or I-phase) -15%...+10% for
ACS550-XI-xxxx-2.
(Ui' 400/415/440/460/480 VAC 3-phase -15%...+10% for ACS550-xi-xxxx-4.
500152515751600 V AC 3-phase -15%... +lo% for ACS550-U1-xxxx-6.
Prospective short- Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current in the supply is 100 kA
circuit current providing that the input power cable of the drive is protected with
(IEC 629) appropriate fuses. US: 100 000 AIC.
Frequency 48 ...63 Hz
Imbalance Max. t 3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Fundamental power 0.98 (at nominal load)
factor (cos phi,)
Cable temperature 90 "C (194 "F) rating minimum
rating

Disconnecting device for isolation

Install a hand-operated input disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between
the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that
can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.
- Europe: To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard
EN 60204-1. Safety of Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the
following types:
- a switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-235 (EN 60947-3)
- a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening af the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
- a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
Other regions: The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety
regulations.

Fuses
Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national
and local electric codes. The following tables provide fuse recommendations for
short circuit protection on the drive's input power.

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Fuses, 208.. .240 V drives

00467918 XISB

Fuses, 380.. ,480 V drives

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual 265

00467918 XISB

Fuses, 500.. .600 V drives

Emergency stop devices

The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any
other safety equipment that may be needed. Pressing STOP on the drive's control
panel does NOT:
generate an emergency stop of the motor
separate the drive from dangerous potential.

lnput power cableslwiring

lnput wiring can be any of:
- a four conductor cable (three phases and groundlprotective earth). Shielding is
not required.
four insulated conductors routed through conduit.

Technical data
 ACS550 Uset-s Manual

Size wiring according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the
drive's load current. In any case, the conductor must be less than the maximum limit
defined by the terminal size (see section Drive's powerconnection terminals on page
268).
The table below lists copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents.
These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table.

Ground connections
For personnel safety, proper operation and reduction of electromagnetic emissionl
pick-up, the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site.
Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations.
Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet
safety regulations.

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual 267

Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only
when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety
regulations.
- In multiple drive installations, do not connect drive terminals in series.
Corner grounded TN systems

WARNING! Do not attempt to install or remove EMI, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while

power is applied to the drive's input terminals.

Corner grounded TN systems are defined in the following table. In such systems,
disconnect the internal ground connection by removing the screws (do this also if the
grounding configuration of the system is unknown):
ACS550-01, frame sizes R1 ...R4: Remove both the EM1 and EM3 screws (see
section Power connection diagrams on page 20).
ACS550-Ul, frame sizes R1... R4: Remove the EM1 screw -drive is shipped with
EM3 removed (see section Power connection diagrams on page 20).
Frame sizes R5 ... R6: Remove both the F1 and F2 screws (see section Power
connection diagrams, page 21).

The screws (M4x16) make an internal ground connection that

reduces electro-magnetic emission. Where EMC (electro-
magnetic compatibility) is a concern, and the system is
symmetrically grounded, the screws may be installed. For
reference, the diagram on the right illustrates a symmetrically
grounded TN system. LZ
L3

Technical data
 A CS.550 Usets Manual

I T systems

WARNING! Do not attempt to install or remove EMI, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while

power is applied to the drive's input terminals.

For IT systems [an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over

30 ohm) power system]:
Disconnect the ground connection to the internal EMC filters:
- ACS550-01, frame sizes R1...R4: Remove both the EM1 and EM3 screws
(see section Power connection diagrams on page 20).
- ACS550-U1, frame sizes R1 ... R4: Remove the EM1 screw -drive is shipped
with EM3 removed (see section Power connection diagrams on page 20).
- Frame sizes R5 ... R6: Remove both the F1 and F2 screws (see section Power
connection diagrams, page 21).
Where EMC requirements exist, check for excessive emission propagated to
neighboring low voltage networks. In some cases, the natural suppression in
transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, use a supply transformer with
static screening between the primary and secondary windings.
- Do NOT install an external RFllEMC filter. Using an EMC filter grounds the input
power through the filter capacitors, which could be dangerous and could damage
the drive.

Drive's power connection terminals

The following table provides specifications for the drive's power connection
terminals.
U1, v1, W1
Frame U2, VZ, WZ Earthing PE terminal
size BRK+, UDC+ terminals

00467918.xls B
' Aluminium cable cannot be used with frame sizes R1 ... R5 because of its lower capacity.

Technical data
ACS550 Usefs Manual

Power terminal considerations - R6 frame size

WARNING! For R6 power terminals, if screw-on terminal lugs are supplied, they can
only be used for wire sizes that are 95 mm2 (310 AWG) or larger. Smaller wires will
loosen and may damage the drive. They require crimp-on ring lugs as described
below.

Crimp-on ring lugs

On the R6 frame size, if screw-on terminal lugs are
supplied but the cable size used is less than 95
mm2 (310 AWG), or if no screw-on terminal lugs
are supplied at all, use crimp-on ring lugs
according to the following procedure.
1. Select appropriate ring lugs from the following
table.
2. Remove the screw-on terminal lugs, if supplied
3 . Attach the ring lugs to the drive end of the cables.
4. Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating
tape or shrink tubing.
5. Attach the ring lugs to the drive

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Screw-on ermfna ugs

larger.
1. Attach the supplied screw-on lugs to the
drive end of the cables.
2. Attach screw-on lugs to the drive.

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual

Motor connections
- -

A WARNING! Never connect line power to the drive output terminals: U2,V2 or W2.
Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive. If
frequent bypassing is required, use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors.

A WARNING! Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of
the drive's nominal input voltage.

WARNING! Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance (Hi-Pot)
test or insulation resistance (Megger) test on the motor or motor cables. Do not
conduct these tests on the drive.

Motor connection specifications

Motor connection specifications
Voltage (U2) O... U , , 3-phase symmetrical, U,,, at the field weakening point
Frequency 0...500 Hz
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current
See section Ratings on page 259.
--
Field weakenina point 10...500 Hz

I I Selectable. See the availability in the table below. I

Switching frequency

Cable temperature ratina 90 '

C (194 "F) ratinu minimum.
Maximum motor cable
length I See sect ons Molor cable l e f l f ~ l for
h 400 V dnvcs or1 page 277 and
Moror cabk length lor 600 V drrves on pagc 213

Technical data
 ACS550 User3 Manual

Motor cable length for 400 V drives

The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 4 0 0 V drives with
different switching frequencies. Examples for using the table are also given.
I Maximum cable lenath for 400 V drives I
- -

1 I
EMC limits Operational limits
Second environ ent First environmpnt
(category C37') (category C2 ) Basic unit With

' See the new terms in section IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004) Definitions on page 292.
12 kHz switching frequency is not available.
Not tested.
Sine filters further extend the cable lengths.

i WARNING! Using a motor cable longer than spec~fiedin the table above may cause
permanent damage to the drive

Examples for using the table:

( Requirements 1 Checking and conclusions
R1 frame size, Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz -> for a 150 m (490 R)
8 kHz fsw. cable a duldt filter is needed.
Category C2.
Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for Category C2 are met
I5O (490 )' with a 150 m (490 ft) cable.
R3 frame size, I Check operational limits for R3 and 4 kHz -> a 300 m (980 ft) cable
4 kHz fsw. cannot be used even wlth a duldt filler. A sine filter r n ~ sbe
t used and
Categoly C3, the voltage orop of the cable must be laken into account in the
300 m (980 ft) cable I installation

---- -. .. I Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for Category C3 are met
with a 300 m (980 ft) cable.
..
R5 frame size.
8 kHz fsw,
Category C3.
t i t sR5 and 8 kHz -> for a 150 m (490 ft)
~ n e c k i ~ e r a t i o n a i i ~ mfor
cable the basic unit is sufficient.
150 (490 ft) cable Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for Category C3 cannot be
met with a 300 m (980 ft) cable. The installation configuration is not
~ossible.An EMC olan is recommended to overcome the situation.
R6 frame size.
4 kHz fsw.
EMC limits not
EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC
1
applicable.
150 m (490 ft) cable

Technical data
ACS550 U s e f s Manual

Motor cable length for 600 V drives

The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 600 V drives with
different switching frequencies. As the 600 V drives are not CE approved, cable
lengths for EMC limits are not given.
Maximum cable length for 600 V drives
Operational limits
114 kHz 8112 kHz
Frame
size m ft m ft

R6 300 980 1
I

150' 1
I

4902
12 kHz switching frequency is not available.

WARNING! Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause
permanent damage to the drive.

Motor thermal protection

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and
the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a
motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current
when necessary. Depending on a drive parameter value (see Group 35: MOTOR
TEMP MEAS), the function either monitors a calculated temperature value (based
on a motor thermal model) or an actual temperature indication given by motor
temperature sensors. The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in
additional motor and load data.
The most common temperature sensors are:
motor sizes IEC180... 225: thermal switch (e.g. Klixon)
motor sizes IEC200...250 and larger: PTC or PTIOO

Ground fault protection

ACS550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive, motor, or motor cable.
This fault logic:
is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature
can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT
could be tripped by leakage currents (input power to ground) associated with long
high capacitance motor cables.

Technical data
 ACS550 Useis Manual

Grounding and routing

Motor cable shielding

Motor cables require shielding using conduit, armored cable or shielded cable.
Conduit - When using conduit:
- Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of
the joint.
- Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure.
- Use a separate conduit run for motor cables (also separate input power and
control cables)
- Use a separate conduit run for each drive.
Armored cable - When using armored cable:
- Use six-conductor (3 phases and 3 grounds), type MC continuous corrugated
aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds.
- Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables, but not
with control cables.
Shielded cable - For shielded cable details, see section Motor cable
requirements for CE & C-Tick compliance on page 274.

Grounding
See section Ground connections on page 266
For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be
minimized, see section Effective motor cable screens on page 275.

Drive's motor connection terminals

The drive's motor and input power terminals have the same specifications. See
section Dflve's power connection terminals on page 268.

Motor cable requirements for CE & C-Tick compliance

The requirements in this section apply for CE or C-Tick compliance

Minimum requirement (CE & C-Tick)

The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE
conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield, however, a symmetrical
constructed PE conductor is always recommended. The following figure shows the
minimum requirement for the motor cable screen (for example, MCMK, NK Cables).
Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Inner insulation

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Recommendation for conductor layout

The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables.

! I
Recommended (CE & C-Tick)
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase
conductors and a concentric or otherwise
symmetrically constructed PE conductor, and a
Allowed (CE & C-Tick)
A separate PE conductor is required if the
conductivity of the cable shield is < 50% of the
conductivity of the phase conductor.

Shield
I Not allowed for motor cables (CE & C-Tick) II
I A four-conductor system: three ~ h a s e
1 conductors and a protective conductor, without a
shield.
II @
'J
Allowed for motor cables with phase
conductor cross section up to 10 mm2.

Effective motor cable screens

The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is: the better and tighter the cable's
screen, the lower the radiated emission level. The following figure shows an
example of an effective construction (for example Blflex-Servo-FD 780 CP,
Lappkabel or MCCMK, NK Cables).
Insulationjacket Inner insulator L2

,
Braided metallic screen '3L

EN 61800-3 compliant motor cables

The most efficient EMC filtering can be achieved by following these rules:
- Motor cables must have an effective screen as described in section Effective
motor cable screens on page 275.
Motor cable screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle (the bundle
length must be less than five times its width) and connected it to the terminal
marked & (at the bottom right-hand corner of the drive).
At the motor end, the motor cable screen must be earthed 360 degrees with an
EMC cable gland, or the screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle not
longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the motor.
See section Motor cable lengfh for 400 V drives, columns "EMC limits" on page
272 to check the maximum motor cable lengths and the need for filters for 400 V
drives for IEClEN 61800-3 compliance.

Technical data
276 ACS550 User's Manual

WARNING! Do not use RFliEMC filters on IT systems

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual

Brake components
Availability
Braking availability for ACS550 drives, by frame size is:
R1 and R2 - a built-in brake chopper is standard equipment. Add appropriate
resistor, as determined using the following section. Resistors are available from
ABB.
- R3 ... R6 -does not include an internal brake chopper. Connect a chopper and a
resistor, or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive. Contact your ABB
representative for appropriate parts.

Selecting the braking resistors (frame sizes R1 and R2)

Braking resistor must meet three requirements:
Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value RMINdefined for the
drive type in the following tables. Never use resistance below this value.
Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque.
To achieve the maximum braking torque (the larger of 150% of heavy duty or
110% of nominal duty), the resistance must not exceed RMM. If maximum
braking torque is not necessary, resistor values can exceed RMAX.
The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power.
This requirement involves many factors:
- the maximum continuous power rating for the resistor(s)
- the rate at which the resistor changes temperature (resistor thermal time
constant)
- maximum braking time ON - If the regeneration (braking) power is larger than
the resistor rated power, there is a limit to the ON time, or the resistor
overheats before the OFF period begins.
- minimum braking time OFF- If the regeneration (braking) power is larger than
the resistor rated power, the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to
cool between ON periods.

Time
k-
OFF time
4 Li
I ON tim'
I Cvcle time I Duty cycle = -
- the peak braking power requirement
- type of braking (deceleration to zero vs. overhauling load) - During
deceleration to zero, the generated power steadily decreases, averaging half
of the peak power. For an overhauling load, the braking is countering an
external force (gravity for example) and the braking power is constant. The
total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated
from deceleration to zero speed (for the same peak torque and ON time).

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Power*
Avg. braking power -
overhauling load - -
Avg. braking power - -
during deceleration
-
- -
--
-1- Decelerationcurve

- - -
Overhauling load
curve

Time
r
to zero I
I I I
Temperature
4 I I I

The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using
the following tables.
First, determine your maximum braking time ON (ONMAx), minimum braking time
OFF (OFFMIN)and load type (deceleration or overhauling load).
Calculate duty cycle:
ONMAX
Duty cycle = 100%
(ONMAX OFFMINI
+

In the appropriate table, find the column that best matches your data:
- ONMAX5 column specification and
- Duty cycle 5 column specification
Find the row that matches your drive
The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected
row/column.
For overhauling loads, double the rating in the selected rowlcolumn, or use the
"Continuous O N column.
208 ...240 V drives

Continuous ON

-
-012A-2 80 44 125 235 345 570 3000
-017A-2 48 44 210 390 575 950 4000
-024A-2 32 30 315 590 860 1425 5500
-031A-2 23 22 430 800 1175 1940 7500
' Resistor time constant specification must be 2 85 seconds.

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual 279

380...480 V drives
. ... -
- -- .- --.. ...- -... --. .--
. ----.--- .--. ..-
: :1
i..i~-~ I Resista~ice
....
~ e s i s t o r 'minimum continuous power rating
..- .- ..... ... - -.. .
Deceleration-to-zero rating
...... - .. . .. .. . . .. . . .

Type code
Continuous ON
ACS550- >60sON
see below > 25% Duty

Three-phase supply voltage, 380... 480 V

Resistor time constant specification must be 2 85 seconds.

500...600 V drive

I
-09AO-6 149 80 342 643 943 1560 5359
-011A-6 110 60 467 877 1286 2127 7308
-017A-6 75 60 685 1286 1886 3119 10718
Resistor time constant specification must be, 85 seconds.

WARNING! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value
specified for the particular drive. The drive and the internal chopper are not able to
handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.

Symbols
RMIN- Minimum allowed resistance of the braking resistor.
RMAX- Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary.

Technical data
 ACS550 Usefs Manual

P,- Duty-cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking, where "x" is
ONMAxtime.

Installing and wiring resistors

All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can
dissipate heat.

WARNING! The surface temperature of the resistor is very high, and air flowing from
the resistor is very hot. Materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable.
Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor.

To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable, use resistor cables with the
same rating as used for the power input to the drive.
The maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 10 m (33 ft). See section Power
connection diagrams on page 20 for the resistor cable connection points.

Mandatory circuit protection

The following setup is essential for safety - it interrupts the main supply in fault
situations involving chopper shorts:
Equip the drive with a main contactor.
Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens (an
overheated resistor opens the contactor).
Below is a simple wiring diagram example
L1 L2 L 3 1I
Off E - - e - -
2 r

a , Thermal switch (standard in

I : ABB resistors)
:. ....K1
..

Parameter set-up
To enable dynamic braking, switch off the drive's o v e ~ o l t a g econtrol [Set parameter
2005 = 0 (DISABLE)].

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual

Control c o n n e c t i o n s
Control connection specifications
Analog inputs and
~- -, l-tr"- .l -l t- S
I
Digital inputs
Relays
(digital outputs)
Cable soecifications
Control connection specifications
See section Control terminals table on page 22.
Digital input impedance 1.5 kohm. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is
30 V.
Max. contact voltage: 30 V DC. 250 VAC
- Max. contact current Ipower: A. 30 V DC; 1500 VA, 250 V AC
6
- Max. continuous current: 2 A rms (cos q = A rms (cos q = 0.4)
1). 1
- Minimum load: 500 m W 10 mA)
(12 V.
. Contact material: Silver-nickel (AgN)
. Isolation between relay digital outputs, test voltage: 2.5 kV rms. 1 minute
See section Control terminals table on page 22.

Control cables

General recommendations
Use multi-core cables with a braided copper wire screen, temperature rated at 60 " C
(140 "F) or above:

Double shielded Single shielded

Example: JAMAK by Dral(a NK Cables Example: NOMAK by Draka NK Cables

At the drive end, twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its
width and connected to terminal XI-! (for digital and analog 110 cables) or to either
XI-28 or XI-32 (for RS485 cables). Leave the other end of the cable shield
unconnected.
Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable:
- Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables [at least
20 cm (8 in)].
Where control cables must cross power cables, make sure they are at an angle
as near 90" as possible.
Stay at least 20 cm (8 in) from the sides of the drive
Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable:
Do not mix relay-controlled signals using more than 30 V and other control
signals in the same cable.
Run relay-controlled signals as twisted pairs (especially if voltage > 48 V). Relay-
controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital
input signals.

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Note: Never mix 24 V DC and 1151230 V A C signals in the same cable

Analog cables
Recommendations for analog signal runs:
Use double shielded, twisted pair cable
Use one individually shielded pair for each signal.
Do not use a common return for different analog signals.

Digital cables
Recommendation for digital signal runs: A double shielded cable is the best
alternative, but single-shielded, twisted, multi-pair cable is also usable.

Control panel cable

If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable, use only Category 5 Patch
ethernet cable. The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m
(9.8 ft). Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user-
tested to verify that EMC requirements are met. Where long runs are required
[especially for runs longer than about 12 m (40 ft)], use a RS232lRS485 converter at
each end and run RS485 cable.

Drive's control connection terminals

The following table provides specifications for the drive's control terminals
Control
Frame size
Maximum wire size ' I Torque

' Values given for solid wires.

For stranded wires, the maximum size is 1 rnrn2

Efficiency
Approximately 98% at nominal power level

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual 283

Cooling
I Cooling specifications
Method Internal fan. flow direction from bottom to top.
Free space above and below the ACS550 drive: 200 mm (8 in).
Requirement Free space is not required on the drive's sides - ACS550 drives can be mounted
side-bv-side.
~~~

Air flow, 208 ... 240 V drives

The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 ... 240 V drives

Air flow, 380.. .480 V drives

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

I Drive I Heat loss 1 Air flow 1

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual

Air flow, 500 ...600 V drives

T h e following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 500 ... 600 V drives.
Drive Heat loss Air flow I

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Dimensions and weights

The dimensions and mass for the ACS550 depend on the frame size and enclosure
type. If unsure of the frame size, first, find the "Type" code on the drive labels (see
sections Type code on page 13 and Drr've labels on page 12). Then look up that type
code in the rating tables (see chapter Technical data, page 259), to determine the
frame size. A complete set of dimensional drawings for ACS550 drives is located in
ACS550 Technical Reference Manual.

Mounting dimensions
F W 1 1

See detail A

See detail B
Detail A Detail B

IP21 I UL type 1 and IPS4 I UL type 12 -Dimensions for each frame size I

' Center to center dimension.

Technical data
ACS550 Usefs Manual

Outside dimensions
Drives with IP21/ UL type I enclosures

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Drives with I f 5 4 /UL type 12 enclosures

C w 2 - 4

IP54 I UL type 1 2 - Dimensions for each frame size

Ref. I R1

Weight
The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size. Variations
within each frame size (due to components associated with voltagelcurrent ratings
and options) are minor.
Weight
Enclosure R1 I R2 I R3 I R4 I R5 I R6

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual

Degrees of protection
Available enclosures:
IP21 IUL type 1 enclosure. The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive
gases or liquids, and conductive contaminants such as condensation, carbon
dust and metallic particles.
IP54 IUL type 12 enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from airborne
dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions.

Compared to the IP21 1 UL type 1 enclosure, the IP54 IUL type 12 enclosure has:
the same internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure
a different outer plastic cover
- an additional internal fan to improve cooling
larger dimensions
the same rating (does not require a derating).

Ambient conditions
The following table lists the ACS550 environmental requirements.
Ambient environment requirements I
Installation site Storage and transportation in the
protective package
0...1000 m (0 ...3 300 A)
Altitude 1000...2000 m (3 300. . 6 600 ft) if
PNand IZNderated 1% every 100 m
above 1000 m (300 ft above 3 300 ft)
Min. -15 'C (5 "F) - no frost allowed 4 0 ...70 "C ( 4 0... 158 "F)
Max. (fsw = 1 or4) 40 "C (104 'F);
50 "C (122 "F) if

Ambient - PNand 12N derated to 90%

Max. (fsw = 8) 40 "C (104 "F) if
PN and IzNderated to 80%
temperature
- Max. (fsw = 12) 30 "C (86 "F) if
PMand IzNderated to 65% (to 50%
for 600 V,R4 frame sizes. that is for
ACS550-U1-032A-6 ... ACS550-U1-
062A-6)
Relative < 95% (non-condensing)
humiditv
I.
I
No conductive dust allowed. 1 Storaae
-
The ACS550 should be installed in . No conductive dust allowed.
clean air according to enclosure - Chemical gases: Class 1C2
contamination
levels - -
classification.
Cooling air must be clean, free from
- Solid particles: Class I S 2
(IEC 721-3-3) corrosive materials and free from
electrically conductive dust. No conductive dust allowed.
-
Chemical gases: Class 3C2
Solid particles: Class 352 -
Chemical gases: Class 2C2
Solid particles: Class 252 I
Technical data
 ACS550 Useis Manual

The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACS550 passes.
1 Stress tests I
Without shipping package Inside shipping package
Mechanical conditions: In accordance in accordance with ISTA 1A and 1 6
Sinusoidal with IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3M4 specifications.
vibration 2...9 Hz3.0mm (0.12 in)
9...200 Hz 10 m/s2 (33 WS')
I
Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68-2-29:
Shock
max. 100 m/sZ(330 ftIs2). l l m s
Not allowed 76 cm (30 in), frame size R1
61cm (24 in), frame size R2
Free fall
- 46 cm (18 in), frame size R3
31 cm (12 in), frame size R4
25 cm (10 in), frame size R5
15 cm (6 in), frame size R6

Materials
Material specifications
PClABS 2.5 mm, color NCS 1502-Y or NCS 7000-N
Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5...2 mm, thickness of coating 20
micrometers. If the surface is painted, the total thickness of the coating (zinc
Drive enclosure and paint) is 80... 100 micrometers.
Cast aluminium AlSi
Extruded aluminium AlSi

I
Corrugated board, expanded uolystvrene.
. . . plywood. raw wood (heat dried).
Package package wrap consisis of one or more of the following: ~ ~ - ~ ~ b l wrap.
a s t i PP
c
or steel bands.
The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy
and natural resources. The package materials are environmentally compatible
and recyclable. All metal parts can be recycled. The plastic parts can either be
recycled or burned under controlled circumstances, according to local
regulations. Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks.

I Disposal

I
If recychng is in01 leasble, al. parts excl~oingelectrolyuc capacitors and pr~nled
circut buaros can be laridlilled. The DC capac.tors conta:n electrolvte ano. ifthe

must be removed and handled accordina

.
drive is not orovided with the RoHS markino. the orinted circuit

-
- ~
~~~
boards
~ - contain
~
lead, both df which will be classified as ha&rdous waste within the EU. They
- to local reaulations.
~
I
- I

For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling

instructions, please contact your local ABB distributor.

Technical data
ACS550 Useis Manual

Applicable standards
Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard "marks"
on the type code label.
Mark Applicable standards

<: EN 50178 (1997) Electronic equipment for use in power installations

( lEClEN 60204-1 (2005) Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.

Part 1: General requirements. Provisions forcompliance: The
final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing:
. an emergency-stop device
a supply disconnecting device.
IECIEN 60529 (2004) Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
IEC 60664-1 (2002) Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage
systems. Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests
IECIEN 61800-5-1 (2003) Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
. .
Part 5-1: Safetv reouirements. Electrical, thermal and enerav
-...-... .- . ...- .. . --
speed e.ectrlcal Go.vcr driJe systems.
Part 3 EMC raq~ireineritsand spec f c test rnethoos
IECIEN 61800-3 (2004) Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods

UL 508C UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, third

,@US edition
-
LISTED -

a* C22.2 No. 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment (for ACS550-U1
drives only)

CE marking

cc $ A C Emark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the
'European Low Voltage and EMC Directives (Directive 73123lEEC, as amended by
931681EEC, and Directive 8913361EEC, as amended by 931681EEC).
Note: The 600 V ACS550-U1 drives are not CE approved

Compliance with the EMC Directive

The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard [IECIEN
61800-3 (2004)] covers requirements stated for drives.

Compliance with IECIEN 61800-3 (2004)

See page 293.

C-Tick marking
The drive carries C-Tick marking.
C-Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A C-Tick mark is attached
to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-3 (2004) -

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods), mandated by the Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic
Compatibility Scheme.
The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme (EMCS) was introduced
by the Australian Communication Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum
Management Group (RSM) of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development
(NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio
frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical1
electronic products.

Compliance with lEClEN 61800-3 (2004)

See page 293.

ULlCSA m a r k i n g s
An UL mark is attached to ACS550 drives to verify that the drive follows the
of UL 508C.
LlSTEO
A CSA mark is attached to ACS550-U1 type drives to verify that the drive follows the
@* provisions of C22.2 NO. 14.
The ACS550 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100.000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.
Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with local codes.
The ACS550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the
requirements of UL 508C and, for ACS550-Ul, C22.2 No. 14. When this feature is
selected and properly adjusted, additional overload protection is not required unless
more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is
required by applicable safety regulations. See parameters 3005 (MOT THERM PROT)
and 3006 (MOT THERM RATE).
The drives are to be used in a controlled environment. See section Ambient
conditions on page 289 for specific limits.
Note: For open type enclosures, i.e. drives without the conduit box and/or cover for
IP21 1 UL type 1 drives, or without the conduit plate andlor hood for IP54 I
UL type 12 drives, the drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance
with National Electric Code and local electrical codes.
Brake choppers, when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors, will allow the
drive to dissipate regenerative energy (normally associated with quickly decelerating
a motor). Frame sizes R1 and R2 have a built-in brake chopper a s standard
equipment. For frame sizes R3...R6, contact your ABB representative for
appropriate parts. See section Brake components on page 277.

IEClEN 61800-3 (2004) Definitions

EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electricallelectronic
equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment.

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual

Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or
system within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly
supplying domestic premises.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be
installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first
environment.
Note: A professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing
andlor commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects.
Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment
restricted distribufion. EMC standard IECIEN 61800-3 does not any more restrict the
distribution of the drive, but the using, installation and commissioning are defined.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the
second environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second
environment unrestricted distribution.

Compliance with the IEClEN 61800-3(2004)

The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IECI
EN 61800-3, category C2 (see page 292 for IECIEN 61800-3 definitions). The
emission limits of IEClEN 61800-3 are complied with the provisions described below.

First environment (drives of category C2)

1. The internal EMC filter is connected.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual
4. The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in
section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 272 for the frame size and
.switching frequency in use.
WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.

Second environment (drives of category C3)

1. The internal EMC filter is connected.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual
4. The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in
section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 272 for the frame size and
switching frequency in use.

Technical data
 ACS550 Useis Manual

WARNING! A dilve of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public

network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is
expected if the drive is used on such a network.

Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT
(ungrounded) systems. The supply network becomes connected to ground potential
through the EMC filter capacitors, which may cause danger or damage the drive.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a
corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive.

Liability limits
The manufacturer is not responsible for:
Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation, commissioning, repair,
alteration, or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements
specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant
documentation.
Units subjected to misuse, negligence or accident.
Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser.
In no event shall the manufacturer, its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for
special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses or penalties.
This is the sole and exclusive warranty given by the manufacturer with respect to the
equipment and is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, express or implied,
arising by operation of law or othenvise, including, but not limited to, any implied
warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive, please contact the local
distributor or ABB office. The technical data, information and specifications are valid
at the time of printing. The manufacturer reserves the right to make modifications
without prior notice.

Technical data
ACS550 User's Manual

Product protection in the USA

This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents:
4,920,306 5,301,085 5,463,302 5,521,483 5,532,568
5,612,604 5,654,624 5,799,805 5,940,286 5,942,874
6,094,364 6,147.887 6,175,256 6,184,740 6,195,274
6,252,436 6,265,724 6,305,464 6,313,599 6,316,896
6,370,049 6,396,236 6,448,735 6,498,452 6,552,510
6,741,059 6,774,758 6,844,794 6,856,502 6,859,374
6,940,253 6,934,169 6,956,352 6,958,923 6,967,453
6,977,449 6,984,958 6,985,371 6,992,908 6,999.329
7,034,510 7,036,223 7,045,987 7,057,908 7,059,390
7,082,374 7,084,604 7,098,623 7,102,325 0503,931
D510,320 D511,137 D511,150 D512,026 D512.696

Other patents pending

Technical data
 ACS550 User's Manual

Technical data
 ACS550 Usefs Manual
lndex
Numerics
Oxxxx register
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . ...............
EFB mappins
Ixxxx register
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . .
.. -
EFB maooino . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-wire sensor. connection example . .
3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3xxxx register
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . .
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4xxxx register
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . .
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A minimum. parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
ABB
feedback on ABB manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . 309
product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
standard (default) macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
acceleration
i Ideceleration. parameter group . . . . . . .
at aux. stop iPFC)..oarameter. . . . . . . .
compensaiion. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ramp select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . :. . . . . 131
ramp shape. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ramp time (PFC). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
ramp zero select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
activate (external PID). parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 168
actual input (PID). parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
actual max. (PID). parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
actual min. (PID). parameters . :. . . . . . . . . . . . 164
actual values
mapping. FBA. generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . 241
scallng. EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
scaling. FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
scaling. FBA. ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . 239
scaling. FBA. generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
alarm
codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
codes (Basic Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
display enable. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
words. data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
altitude
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
ambient conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
1 Basic Control Panel
lndex
ambient temperature
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
analog cable. requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
analog 110
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
analog . input
.
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
fault limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
filter. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
less than min. auto. reset. parameter . . . . . . 143
less than min.. fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 140
loss . fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
maximum. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
analog output
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
content max.. ~arameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
content min.. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
current max.. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
current min.. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
data content. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
filter. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
angle
mechanical. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
application block output. data parameter . . . . . . 100
application macro. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
application macros
see macros
arrow (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
assistant (Assistant Control Panel)
start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 ..
tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Assistant Control Panel
see control panel (Assistant)
assistants mode (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . 51
autochange
interval. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
level. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
o v e ~ i e w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
startina order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
automatic reset
see reset. automatic
auxilialy motor
see motor. auxiliarv
B
parameters
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
see control panel (Basic)
298
battery (Assistant Control Panel). . . . . . . . . . . .
baud rate (RS.232). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
braking
comoonents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
prot&tion from overheated resistor . . . . . .
resistor heat dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
selecting
.. brake chopperslresistors . . . . . . .
wmng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
break ooint freouencv. fault varameter . . . . . . .
buffer bverruns'(count). parameter . . . . . . . . . .
cable requirements
control . . . . . . .
grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
capacitor
reforming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
category (IECIEN 61800-3 definition)
C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
CB
see control board
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
changed parameters (Assistant Control Panel). . 54
chopper
see braking
clock setting (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . 56
c~mmunic~~~n
see EFB (embedded fieldbus)
see EFB. drive ~arameters
see ~ ~ ~ ' ( f i e l dadapter)
bis
see FBA. drive parameters
conduit kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
config file
CPI firmware revision. parameter . . . . . . . . 171
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
id revision. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
. revision. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
connections
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EFBcqmm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FBA module . . . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
XI ..................................
constant speed
see speed. constant
construction code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contamination levels
environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contrast. control panel (Assistant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
control
connection specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
location. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
terminal specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
through 110 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Index
ACS550 User's Manual
258 control board
172 overtemperature. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
overtemperature. fault parameter . . . . . . . . . 142
277 temperature. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
280 control cable
280 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
277 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
280 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
141
172
cable requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
comm error. fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
display bar.graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147. 148
display decimal point (form). parameters . . . 147
..
displav max parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
.
o:splay min parameters . . . . . . . . . . 148
display process var~ables.parameter groJp 147
266 display selection. parameters . . . . . . . 147
display units. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
274 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
manual compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
~arameterlock . .~afameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
pass code. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
reference control. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .
signal max.. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
signal min.. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
control panel (Assistant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
291 assistants mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
battew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
changed parameters mode . . . . . .
clock set mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
direction of rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disolav contrast . . . . . . . . . .
failt ldgger mode . . . . . . . ; . . .
fault mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
helv
how to do common tasks . . . . . . . .
I10 settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18 main menu
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247 overview
parameter backup mode . . . . . . . .
parameters mode ................
son kevs
starVstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
22 status line (LOCIREM. arrow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
190 control panel (Basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
alarmcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
22 copymode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
direction of rotation.................... 62. 64
fault mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63.243. 244
13 how to do common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
289 outputmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ovewiew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
reference mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
starVstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
control word
ABB drives. FBA. description . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
EFB. description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
FBA generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
ACS550 User's Manual

.
airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
fan maintenance triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 FBAcomm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
heatloss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 digital cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
space requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 digital input
copy mode (Basic Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 at fault. history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
corner grounded TN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
warning about filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
warning about screws at EMI. EM3 . . . . . . . 20 status. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . _ . 101
.
warning about screws at F1 F2 . . . . . . . . . . 21
correction source (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . 169
. output
diaital
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
cover specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 dimensions
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 drive. mounting . . . . . . . . . . .
cover. top. see hood drive. outside . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRC errors (count). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
crimp-on ring lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 direction control. parameter . . . .
critical soeeds iavoidina) -.
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
direction of rotation
Assistant Control Panel . . . .
high. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Basic Control Panel . . . . . . .
low.. .oarameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 display format (PID). parameter .
select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Tick markina .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 download parameter sets
current application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
at fault. history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 full set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 usersets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
max. limit. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 drive
measurement. fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 EFB comm installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ratingcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 FBA module installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
id. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
mountina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
..
brake time . oarameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
bus voltage: data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 rating. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
current ref.. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 temperature. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
rnaanetizina time . oarameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 128 weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
ov&oltag& fault bode . . . . . 245 drive on time. data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
.
dndervoltage fault code . . . . . . . . . . .
voltaae stabilizer.. ~arameter
.
245
E
. ............ 138
deceleraGon earth fault
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
at aux. start (PFC). parameter . . . . . . . . . . 186 parameter . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
emergency time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 earthing
ram~select . oarameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 see ground
ramb shape'. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
ramp time (PFC). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
.
rarno zero select.. barameter . . . . . . . . . . . .
time. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
131
default values
listing for macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
. for. parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
listinn 85
derating
adiustment example
altitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
single phase supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
sw~tchina . freauencv
. ................... 262
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
derivation time (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
derivation time. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
device overtemperature. fault code . . . . . . . . . . 245

Index
 ACS550 Usefs Manual

EFB (embedded fieldbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 embedded fieldbus

actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 see EFB
actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 see EFB. drive parameters
analog output control. activate . . . . . . . . . . 195 EMC
comm fau!t response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
contigurat~on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
configure for loss of communication . . . . . . 199 motor cable reauirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
.

control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 emergency

control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 deceleration time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
drive control of functions. activate. . . . . . . . 193 stop select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
exceptioncodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 enclosure
fault code 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 protection class code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
fault code 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 tvpes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
fault code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 encoder
fault code 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 parameter group
fault tracina parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 . .
enable. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
fault. dupl:6ate stations . . . . . . . . . . . 199 error. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
fault. lotermittent off-hne . . . . . . . 200 fault. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
fault . no master station on line . . . . . . . . . . 199 number of oulses. ~arameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 170
fault; swapped wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 pos~tionreiet enable. parameter li0
feedback from drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 zero pulse detected. data paramrter 102
input reference sel.. activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 energy
.
zero bulse enable.. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 170
misc. drive control, activate. . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 intake in kwh. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 103
modbus actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 intake in MWh. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . 103
PID control setooint source. activate . . . . . 196
planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error value inversion (PID)... . parameter . . . . . . . . 161
profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exception codes. EFB modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
.
reference scaling ABB drives profile . .
relay output control. activate . . . . . . . . .
external comm module. parameter gro ..p
see FBA. dr:ve parameters
set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . external commands selection. parameter . . . . . . 107
start/sto~/directioncontrol. activate . . . external control selection.. parameter
. ......... 109
state diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 external fault
status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 automatic reset. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 faultcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
EFB. drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
protocol. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 external reference. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . 100
baud rate. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
command words. data parameters . . . . . . . 104 F
config file. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
control profile. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 F1 and F2 screws
CRC errors (count). parameter . . . . . . . . . . 173 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 on corner grounded TN system . . . . . . . . . . 267
on IT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
fault function. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
fault time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 .
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 267. 268
fan maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256. 257
ok messages (count). parameter . . . . . . . . 173
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173. 174
parity. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
protocol id. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
protocol select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
relay output word. data parameter . . . . . . . 101
station id. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
status words. data parameters . . . . . . . . . . 104
status. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
UART errors (count). parameter . . . . . . . . . 173
values. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
ELV (Extra Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
EM1 and EM3 screws
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
on corner grounded TN system . . . . . . . . . 267
on IT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.267. 268
ACS550 User's Manual
fault
functions. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
history. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
comm failure (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
current at. history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
digital input status at. history parameter . . . 106
FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
frequency at. history parameter . . . . . . . . . 106
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
last. historv . .parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
logging (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . 55
mode (Assistant Control Panel) . . 43 243 244
mode (Basic Control Panel) . . . . . 63 . 243 . 244
. .
previo;s. history paramete; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' 106
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
reset select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
speed at. history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
status at. history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
time of. history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
torque at. history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
voltage at. history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 106
words. data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
fault display
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fauknames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FB actual signals. parameter group. . . . . . .
FBA
protocol listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FBA (fieldbus adapter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
analog output control. activate . . . . . . .
comm fault response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
confiauration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
control word ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
diaanostics
drive feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fieldbus control. activate . . . . . . . . . . . .
input reference sel.. activate
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID control setpoint source. activate. . .
.
reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
relay output control. activate . . . . . . . . .
set-uu . : flux braking. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
startlitop /direction control. activate . . .
state diaaram
. . . ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . .
status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
status word. ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
30 1
FBA. drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
ext comm module oarameter orouo " . . . .. .. ... .. .. .. .171
.
command words. data . . . . . . . 104
.
config file CPI firmware revision parameter. 171
confia file id revision. oarameter.'. . . . . . . . . 171 ~ ~~
config file revision. p$ameter . . . . . . . . . . . 171
fault function. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
fault time . parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
fie dous appl program revlslon. parameter 17 1
fieldbds CPI firmware revlslon. parameter 17 1
f~eldbusparameter refresh. uarameter 171
fieldbus barameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
fieldbus status. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
fieldbus type. parameter . . . . . . . . . . _ . 171
protocol select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
relay output word. data parameter . . . . . . . . 101
status words. data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 104
values. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
feedback
multiplier (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
on ABB manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
select (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
field weakening point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
..- .,".,
fin~rlhllc
see EFB (embedded fieldbus)
see EFB. drive parameters
see FBA (fieldbus adapter)
see FBA. drive parameters
fieldbus adapter
see FBA
see FBA. drive parameters
fieldbus. embedded
see EFB
see EFB. drive parameters
firmware
panel. version . . . . . . . . . . . . .
version. parameter . . . . . . . . .
first environment
(C2). compliance with IECIEN 61800-3 . . . . 293
(C2)..motor cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
definit~on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
FlashDrop
application macro. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
parameter view. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
floating network
see IT system
flux optimization. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
force trip. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
frame errors (count). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
free fall. stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
frequency
at fault. history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
max. limit. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
min. limit. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
motor. resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
moJor. specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
sw~tching.parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
 302 ACS550 User's Manual

fuses integration time (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

208 ...240 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
380 ...480 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
500 ...600 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
G frequency. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
gain (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
generic profile FBA .
actual value mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
alandkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
18
ground
cablelwire reauirements
fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H K
hand-auto macro . . . . . . . . .
heatloss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
hood (IP54 IUL t v ~ e 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.30
how ;t do comma; task;
with Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
with Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
I L
I10 settings (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . 61
... 110. control through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
) id run
fail. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
performing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
identification magnetization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
IEC ratings
see ratings
impedance grounded network
see IT system
incompatible software, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . 247
information. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . : . : 146
input power
cablelwire requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
disconnecting device (disconnecting means) 263
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
input power connection
IT system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lugs for R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
269
terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
installation
check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
mounting drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
wiring overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
integration time. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
interlocks. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
internal setpoint (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 163
IR com~ensation
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
.
voltaae ~arameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
isolation..b e&een AC power source and drive . 263
IT svstem
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
warning about filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. 276
.
warning about screws at EM1 EM3. . . . . . . . 20
warning about screws at F1. F2 . . . . . . . . . . . 21
J
jogging activation. parameter
keypad
see control panel
keypad reference select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . 109
kwh
counter. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
intake energy. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 103
label
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
typecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
language. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
LED
on Assistant Control Panel. . . . . . . 42 243 244 . .
on drive body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.243. 244
liability limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
limits. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
load curve. see user load curve
load frequency. see user load curve
load torque. see user load curve
loadina Dackacle version.. .warameter . . . . . . . . . . 146
LOC (Local cot;troi)
indication on Assistant Control Panel. . . . . . . 43
indication on Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . 62
local control mode lock .. ~arameter
. . . . . . . . . . . . 122
lock
.
control panel access iP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
drive control at local control panel . . . . . . . . 122
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
low frequency (PFC). parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
lugs
for R6 power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
ring. crimp-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
terminal. screw-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ACS550 User's Manual

M
macros checking insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
id run. parameter . . . . . . .
ABB standard (default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 loao c u v e break point frequency . . .
alternate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
hand-auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 load curve max.. fault parameter . . .
motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 load culve zero speedload . . . . . . . .
PFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 maintenance triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 nominal current. parameter . . . . . . . .
torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 nominal freauencv . ~arameter. . . . . .
user parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 nominal power. perameter . . . .
narameter default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 nominal speed. parameter . . . . .
parameters not changed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 nominal voltage . . .. narameter . . . . .
phase. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
maanetization. identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main menu stall. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ass!stant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 thermal nrotection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baslc Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 motor cable
mains
see input power
checking .insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
length
mainteoance 400Vdrives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 600Vdrives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 max. length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
requjrements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
internal enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
257
.
requirements EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
motor connection
main fan . . . . . . . . . . . . .
triggers. parameter group lugs for R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
manuals termlnal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
list of ACS550 manuals . torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
providing feedback . . . . . motor control
mapping parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
actual value. FBA. generic profile . . . . . . . . 241 control mode. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
EFBmodbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IR compensation. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 137
202
motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
-.
materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
maximum motor temperature '
freqdency. parameter . . . . . . 126 measure. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
torque limit. parameters . . . . . . . . . 127 alarm limit. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
torque select. paranierer . . . . . . . . . . 126 data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
mechanical fault limit. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
angle. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 overtemperature. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
revolutions. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 sensorselection. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
minimum . . . naraineter
sensor tvne . ................ .
.
.

thermal prolectlon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

frequency. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
torque limit. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 thermal protection. fault parameter . . 140
. .-
thermal time . fault narameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 ~
.
torque select parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 motor. auxiliary
modbus aux start order. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
EFB addressing . . convention aux. start delay (PFC). parameter . . . . . . . . 177
EFB coils . . . . . . . . . . . . aux. stop delay (PFC). parameter . . . . . . . . 177
EFB discrete inputs . . . . number of aux.. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
EFB holding registers . .
EFB input registers . . . . mounting
EFB mapping details . . . dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
EFB manoina summarv. template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
EFB supportled features MWh
EFB technical data . . . . counter. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
~ntakeenergy. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 103
power consumption. maintenance trigger . . 139

N
NEMA ratings
see ratings
noise
random sw. freq . parameter

Index
 ACS550 User's Manual

NPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 parity
(RS.232). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
0 errors (count). . .parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
patents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
offset (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
PE earth
ok messages (count). parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 172 earth fault. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
operating data. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
PE earth connection
operation terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . 23
OPEX link. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
PFC
OPEX oower. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 control. parameter group . . . . . 175
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 acceleration !.me. parameler . . . . . . . 186
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 aux start order. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 aux . motor start delay. parameter . . . . . . . . 177
output aux . motor stop delay. parameter . . . . . . . . 177
frequency. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 deceleration time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
voltage. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 enable. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
wirinq. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 low frequency. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
output mode macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 number of aux. motors. ~arameter . . . . . . . . 178
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 number of motors pararneler . . 1 8 6
overcurrent reference step. parameters . . 175
automatic reset. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 start delav . ~aramerer . . . . 185
faultcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 start freqjehcy. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
overload curve
see user load curve
oversoeed. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
overvb~ta~e
control enable. parameter
) P
panel communication. parameter group . . . . . . 172
panel display variables. parameter group . . . . . 147
panel firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41. 45
panel loss. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
parameter
analog input scale. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . 248
analog output scale. fault code . . . . . . . . . . 248
chanaelock
Y
......................... 121
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
external relay output. fault code . . . . . . . . . 248
fieldbus. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
hz rpm.fault code . . . . . . . . . . .
list~nq(ranges. resolutions. defaults)
D "'P U-I(oower
8
, control unit). fault code
PCU 2 bower control unit\; fault code
PFC 10. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFC mode. fault code
PFC ref. k g . , fault code . . . .
savechanges . . . . . . . . . . . .
table version. parameter . . . .
user load curve. fault code . .
view. parameter . . . . . . . . . .
parameter mode
Assistant Control Panel . . . .
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . .
parameter restore
Assistant Control Panel . . . .
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . .

Index
ACS550 User's Manual
PID
process sets. parameter groups . . . . . . . . .
external I trimming. parameter group . . . . .
0% (actual signal). parameter . . . . . . . . . . .
100% (actual signal). parameter . . . . . . . . .
actual input select. parameters . . . . . . . . . .
actual value max.. parameters . . . . . . . . . .
actual value min.. oarameters . . . . . . . . . . .
adjustment procedure
comm v a l ~ e1. data parameter
comm value 2 . data barameter
control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
correction source. parameter . . . . . . . . . . .
decimal point (actual signal). parameter . . .
derivation filter. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
derivation time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
deviation data ~arameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
error feedoack inversion. parameter . . . . .
external soJrce activate. parameter . . .
.
feedback mult.pler ~arameter. . . .
feedback select. paiameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
feedback. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
gain. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
integration time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
internal setpoint. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .
offset. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
o u t ~ u.tdata ~arameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
parameter sel select. parameter . . . .
.
scaing (0. 100%) parameters . . . . . .
setpoint maximum. parameter. . . . . . . . . . .
setpoint minimum. parameter . . . . . . . . . . .
setpoint select. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
setpoint source EFB comm activate. . . . . .
setpoint source. FBA comm. activate . . . . .
' setpoint. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sleep delay. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sleep level. parameter. . . . . . . . . j . . . . . . . .
sleep selection. parameter . . . . . . . . . ;. . .
tnm mode. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trim scale. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
units (actual signal). parameter. . . . . . . . . .
wake-up delay. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . .
wake-up deviation. parameter. : . . . . . . . . . .
PID controller
advanced set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;. . .
basic set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
planning
. EFB comm . :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FBA comm . . . . . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . :
. ...........
power
consumption ( M W ~ maintenance ) trigger . .
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
previous faults. history parameters . . . . . . . . . .
process PID sets. parameter groups . . . . . . . . .
process variables. data parameter . . . . . . . . . .
product
. . .
. . ............................
inqulrles
tralnlng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
profiles. EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
proportional gain. parameter
Index
protection
circuit. required wl chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
disconnecting device (disconnecting means) 263
enclosure standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
motor thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
PT100 temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
PTC temperature sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
radiation limits. conducted
EN 61800-3 . . . . . . . . .......
ramp pair (accelldecel). parameter . . . . _ . . . 131
range listing for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ratinas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
reference
select. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
corrections for parameter values . . . . . . . . . 110
keypad control. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
maxlmum. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
minimum. parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 1 1
mode (Basic Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
select source. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
step (PFC). parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
reference scaling
EFB. ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
FBA. ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
FBA. generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
reference settino "
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
regulator by-pass control. parameter . . . . . . . . . 185
relative humiditv
environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
relay output
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
. activation condition oarameters . . . . . . . . . . 116
off-delay. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
owdelay. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
status. data oarameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
relays. specifications . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . 281
REM. . (remote control)
~ndicationon Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . 43
indication on Basic Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . 62
removecover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
reset. automatic
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
analog input less than min.. parameter . . . . 143
delay time. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
external fault. ~arameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
number of triais. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
overcurrent. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
trial time . ~arameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
undelvokage. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
resolution listing for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
resonance (avoiding)
select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
revolution counter. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 102
revolutions. mechanical. data parameter . . . . . . 102
ring lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
306
baud rate. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
parity. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
station id. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 counts
buffer overruns. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRC errors. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
frame errors. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ok messages.. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
parity errors. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS485comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
run enable source select. parameter. . . . . . . . .
run time
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100. 102
maintenance trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
S digital input selection parameter . . . . . . . 112
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
save changes parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
sca1ar:frequency mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
scaling
.
actual value. FBA ABB drives profile . . . . . 239
actual value. FBA. generic profile . . . . . . . . 241
actual values. EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
. ..
reference EFB ABB drives profile . . . . . . . 218
reference. FBA ABB drives.profile . . . . . . . 236
reference. FBA. generic profile . . . . . . . . . . 240
screw-on terminal lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
s-curve ramp. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
second environment
(C3). compliance with IEClEN 61800-3 . . . . 293
(C3). motor cable lenqth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
sensor type. parameter . :: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
sensorless vector control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
serial 1 error (fault code 28)". . . . . . . . . . . . 200
serial 1 error. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
serial communication
see EFB (embedded fieldbus)
see EFB. drive parameters
see FBA (fieldbus adapter)
see FBA. drive parameters
serialnumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
setpoint maximum (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . 163
setpoint minimum (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . 163
setpoint select (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
shock. stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
short circuit. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
single phase supply
connection . . .
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sleep selection (PID). parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 164
slip compensation ratio. parameter . . . . . . . . . . 138
soft keys (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . 42
specifications
control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Index
ACS550 User's Manual
speed
172 and direction (sianed). data parameter
172 at fault. histor); Grameter . . . . . . . . .
172 data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
max. limit. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172 min. limit.parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172 speed control
172 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
172 acceleration compensation. parameter . . . . 134
172 automatic tuning. parameter . . . . . . . . 133. 134
190
121 integration time. parameter . . . . . . . . .
proportional gain. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 133
_
derivation time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
. . 133
vector:speed mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
speed. constant
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5 stall
frequency. fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 141
function. fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
time. fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I41
standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C22.2 No. 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EN 50178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IEC 60664.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IECIEN 60204.1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
IECIEN 60529 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IEClEN 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . .
IECIEN 61 800-5-1 . . . . . . . . . .
UL 508C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UL marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
start
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . .
aux. motor (PFC), parameters .
aux. motor delay . . . . . . . . . . . .
control. EFB comm. . . . . . . . . .
control; FBA comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC magnetizing time. parameter . . . . . . . . .
delay (PFC). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. 13 delay. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309 frequency (PFC). parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .
function. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inhibit. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
select enable source parameter . . . . . . . . .
torque boost current.parameter . . . . . . . . . . 129
start mode
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
automatic torque boost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
262 DC magnet~zlng. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
flying start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
startlstop
parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
with Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
with Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
263 startlstopldir. parameter qroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
ACS550 User's Manual
startq
assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.51
data. parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
guided. Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . 36
limited. Assistant or Basic Control Panel . . . 31
state diagram
comm (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
comm. ABB drives . . . . . . . . . .
station id (RS-232) parameter . . .
status at fault. history parameter . .
status word
ABB drives. FBA. description .
EFB comm. definition . . . . . . .
FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FBA aeneric ~ r o f i l e. . . . . . . . .
stop
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . .
aux. motor (PFC). parameters
aux. motor delay . . . . . . . . . . .
DC brake time. parameter . . . .
DC current control. parameter.
DC current ref.. parameter . . .
emergency devices . . . . . . . . .
emergency select. parameter .
flux braking. parameter . . . . . .
function. parameter . . . . . . . . .
stress tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
su~ervision
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
parameter low limit. parameters . . . . . . . . . 144
parameter selection. .oarameters . . . . . . . . 144
supply phase. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
control. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
deratinn.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
symmetrically grounded network
see corner grounded TN system
system controls. parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 121
temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
template. mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
terminal lugs. ...........................
terminals
control. descriotion
control; specifkations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
location diagram. R1... R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
location . .
. . diaaram. R5IR6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
termlnat~on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
test date. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
thermal fail. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
timed functions
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
autochange. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
booster. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
enable. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
source. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
speedcontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
start time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
stop time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
timed mode. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
307
tools . . . . . . . . . . . .
top cover. see hood
torque
at fault. history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
boost current. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
.
max..l]mjt select parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
max. Ilmlt. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
min. limit select. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
min. limit. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
ramp down. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ramp up. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
torque control
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 9
ramp down. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ramp up. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
vect0r:torque mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
training . . . . .
trim
mode (PID). parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
scale (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
two-wire sensor..connection example . . . . . . . . . . 80
type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. 13
u
Ulf ratio. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ULlCSA markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
underload curve
see user load curve
undervoltage
automatic reset. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
control enable. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ungrounded network
see IT system
units (PID). parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
unknown drive type. fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
unpacking drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
unsymmetrically grounded networks
see corner grounded TN system
262 user load curve
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
16 fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
270 frequency. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156. 157
fundlon. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
mode. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
282 time. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
20 torque. parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 157 .
21 user parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
191 change control. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
146 download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
246
152 vector:
186 speedmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
154 torquemode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
153
154 version
114 firmware. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60. 146
153 loading package. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
153 panel firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.45
114 parameter table. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
 ACS550 User's Manual

.
vibration . stress testina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
voltage
.
at fault . historv .oarameter . .
ratingcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
voltagelfrequency ratio. parameter . . . . . . . . . . 137

wake-up
delay (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
deviation (PID). parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
warnina
aufomatic start uo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
~ ~~~ ~

dangerous voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
disconnecting device (disconnecting means) . 6
ELV (Extra Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
.
EM?. EM3 F1 and F2 screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
filter on corner grounded TN system. . . . . . . . 6
filter on IT svstem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
high temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
not field repairable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
parallel control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
qualified installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
wiring
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
fault. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
~nstallation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
.
installation steps IP21lcables . . . . . . . . . . . 25
installation steps. IP2llconduit . . . . . . . . . . . 26
installation steps. IP541cables . . . . . . . . . . . 27
installation steos . .. IP54lconduit . . . . . . . . . . . 28
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
requirements. general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

XYZ
zero pulse
detected. data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
enable. parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
zero speed
delay. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
load. fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Index
Contact ABB

Product and service inquiries

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type code and
serial number of the drive in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be
found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and selecting Drives - World wide service contacts on
the right pane.

Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.comldrives and select Drives - Train-
ing courses on the right pane.

Providing feedback o n ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.comldrives, then select successively
Drives - Document Libray - Manuals feedback form (LVAC drives) on the right pane.
 w
0
w 0
g ?N
=W
.
LL
?.-
a&
0. 0
> 3"'
2- 0 5
-
m
- w-
'P
a m
$2
0 100
-9"
0 gg
O & * O
o o w o
<ow<
3Nu3
gm ' DgG Gsj
z'-luw
w o n
$ > W W
mFcncn
ZodK
W W W W
L L U Q Q
<u33
rnwcnv)

AEB Oy ABB Inc. ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd.

AC Drives Automation Technologies No. 1, Block D. A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu
P.0 Box 184 Drives & Motors Chaoyang District
FI-00381 HELSINKI 16250 West Glendale Drive Beijing, P.R. China. 100015
FINLAND New Berlin, WI 53151 Telephone +86 10 5821 7788
Telephone +358 10 22 11 USA Fax +861058217618
Fax +358 102222681 Telephone *I262 785-3200 Internet www.abb.com
Internet w.abb.com + I 800-HELP-365
Fax + I 262 780-5135
Hardware Manual
ACS800-04 Drive Modules (0.55 to 200 kW)
ACS800-U4 Drive Modules (0.75 to 200 HP)
ACS800 Single Drive Manuals

HARDWARE MANUALS (appropriate manual isincluded in the

delivery)

ACS800-011U1 Hardware Manual 0.55 to ZOO kW (0.75 to 200 HP)

3AFE64382101 (English)
ACS800-01lU1104 Maiine Supplemenl0.55 to 200 kW (0.75 to
200 HP) 3AFE64291275 (English)
ACS800-lllUll Hardware Manual 5.510 110 kW(7.5 to 125 HP)
3AFE68367883 (Enolishl
ACSBOO-3lIU31 Hardware Manual 5.5 t o l l 0 kW(7.5 lo 125 HP)
3AFE68599954 (English)
ACS800-021U2 Hardware Manual 90 to 500 kW (125 to 600 HP)
3AFE64567373 (English)
ACS800-041U4 Hardware Manual 0.55 l a 200 kW (0.75 to 200 HP)
3AFE68372984 (English)
ACS800-04104MIU4 Hardware Manual 45 to 560 kW (GO to
600 HPI 3AFE64671006 IEnolishI
ACS800-04104MIU4 Cabinet Installalion 45 to 560 kW (60 lo
600 HP) 3AFE68360323 (English)
ACS800-07lU7 Hardware Manual 45 to 560 kW (50 to 600 HP)
3AFE64702165 (English)
ACS800-071U7 Dimensional Drawings 45 to 560 kW (50 to
600 HP) 3AFE64775421
ACS800-07 Hardware Manual 500 to 2800 kW
3AFE64731165 (Enalishl
ACSBOO-17 Hardware Manual 55 lo 2500 kW (75 lo 2800 HP)
3AFE68397260 (English)
ACSBOO-37 Hardware Manual 55 to 2700 kW (75 lo 3000 HP)
3AFE68557925 (English)

Safety instructions
Eleaiical installalion planning
- Mechanical and electrical installation
Molar conliol and 110 board (RMIO)
Maintenance
Technical dala
Dimensionaldrawings
Resistor braking

FIRMWARE MANUALS. SUPPLEMENTS AND GUIDES

(apprapnale documents are included in fie delivery)

Standard Control Program Firmware Manual

3AFE64527592 (English)
System Conliol Program Firmware Manual
3AFE64670646 (English)
Control Program Templale Firmware Manual
3AFE64616340 (English)
MastedFollower3AFE64590430 (English)
Pump Control Program Firmware Manual
3AFE68478952 (English)
Extruder Conliol Program Supplement 3AFE64648543 (English)
Centrifuge Contml Program Supplement 3AFE64667246 (English)
Traverse Control Program Supplement 3AFE6461.8334 (English)
Crane Control Prog<amFirmware Manual 38SE11179 (English)
Adaptive Programming Applicalian Guide
3AFEG4527274 (English)

OPTION MANUALS (delivered with oplional equipment)

Fieldbus Adapters. 110 Extension Modules etc

 ACS800-04 Drive Modules
0.55 to 200 kW
ACS800-U4 Drive Modules
0.75 to 200 HP

Hardware Manual

3AFE68372984 Rev E EN
EFFECTIVE: 31.03.2008

O 2008 ABB Oy. All Rights Resewed.

Safety instructions

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must follow when installing,
operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or
damage may occur to the drive, the motor or driven equipment. Read the safety
instructions before you work on the unit.

Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual: warnings and
notes. Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or
death and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger.
Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject. The warning symbols are used as follows:

Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause

physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.

General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by

electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the
equipment.
Electrostatic discharge warning warns of electrostatic discharge which
can damage the equipment.
&
Hot surface warning warns of hot surfaces which can cause physical
- injury.

Safety instructions
Installation and maintenance work
These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment:
. Only qualified electricians are allowed t o install and maintain the drive.

. Never work on the drive, the motor cable or the motor when main power is
applied. After switching off the input power, always wait for 5 min to let the
intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive,
the motor or the motor cable.
Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm)
that:
I . voltage between drive input phases U1. V1 and W1 and the frame is close to
0v
2. voltage between terminals UDC+ and UDC- and the frame is close to 0 V.
Do not work on the control cables when power isapplied to the drive or to the
external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may cause
dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is
switched off.
. Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive or drive
modules.
When reconnecting the motor cable, always check that the phase order is
correct.
Note:
. The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when
the input power is on, regardless of whether the motor is running or not.
The brake control terminals (UDC+, UDC-, R+ and R- terminals) carry a
dangerous DC voltage (over 500 V).
Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V, 220 V or 230 V)
may be present on the terminals of relay outputs R 0 1 to R 0 3 or on the optional
AGPS board (Prevention of Unexpected Start).
. The Prevention of Unexpected Start function does not remove the voltage from
the main and auxiliary circuits.
* At installation sites above 2000 m (6562 ft), the terminals of the RMlO board
and optional modules attached to the board do not fulfil the Protective Extra
Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178.

Safety instructions
 Grounding
These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the
drive.

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury, death,
increased electromagnetic interference and equipment malfunction:
A
Ground the drive, motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in
all circumstances, and to reduce electromagnetic emission and interference.
. .
Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as required by
safety regulations.
. In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to protective
earth (PE).
. In first environment (EU EMC Directive): make a 360" high frequency
grounding of the motor cable entry at the cabinet lead-through.
Do not install a drive with EMC filter option +E202 or +€ZOO on an ungrounded
power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system.
Note:
. Power cable shields are suitable for equipment grounding conductors only
when adequately sized to meet safety regulations.
. As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA
DC (stated by EN 50178, 5.2.11.1), a fixed protective earth connection is
required.

Safety inst~clions
 Mechanical installation and maintenance
These instructions are intended for all who install and service the drive.

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death,
or damage to the equipment:
.
a

Handle the unit carefully.

. The drive is heavy. Do not lift it alone. Place the unit only on its back

. Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks of power

semiconductors, remain hot for a while after disconnection of the electrical
supply.
Make sure that dust from borings and grindings does not enter the drive when
installing. Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or
malfunctioning.
. Ensure sufficient cooling

Do not fasten the drive by riveting or welding.

Printed circuit boards

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the printed
1 ,A circuit boards:
The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic
discharge. Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards. Do not
touch the boards unnecessarilv.

Fibre optic cables

uA . WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause equipment malfunction

and damage to the fibre optic cables:
Handle the fibre optic cables with care. When unplugging optic cables, always
grab the connector, not the cable itself. Do not touch the ends of the fibres with
bare hands as the.fibre is extremely sensitive to dirt. The minimum allowed
bend radius is 35 mm (1.4 in.).

Safetv instructions
Operation
These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate
the drive.

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death.
or damage to the equipment:
. Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor
and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range
provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at
speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly
to the power line.
. Do not activate automatic fault reset functions of the Control Program if
dangerous situations can occur. When activated, these functions will reset the
drive and resume operation after a fault.
Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device (means); instead, use
the control panel keys @ and 0, or commands via the 1{0board of the drive.
The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors (i.e.
power-ups by applying power) is five in ten minutes.
Note:
Ifan external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive (with
Standard I Motion Control Program) will start immediately after fault reset
unless the drive is configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop.
When the control location is not set to Local (L not shown in the status row of
the display), the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop
the drive using the control panel, press the LOCIREM key and then the stop
key @.

Safety inst~ctions
Permanent magnet motor
These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet motor drives. Ignoring
the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

Installation and maintenance work

WARNING! Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet motor is rotating.
Also, when the supply power is switched off and the inverter is stopped, a rotating
permanent magnet motor feeds power to the intermediate circuit of the drive and the
supply connections become live.
Before installation and maintenance work on the drive:
Stop the motor.
Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work. Prevent the start-up of any
drives in the same mechanical group by opening the "prevention of unexpected
start" switch and padlocking it. Make sure that no other system, like hydraulic
crawling drives, are able to rotate the motor directly or through any. mechanical
connection like felt, nip, rope, etc.
Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals:
Alternative I ) Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other
means. Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output
terminals (UI. V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, UDC+, UDC-).
Alternative 2) Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output
terminals (UI, V1, W1, U2, V2. W2, UDC+. UDC-). Ground the drive output
terminals temporarily by connecting them together as well as to the PE.
Alternative 3) If possible, both of the above.

Start-up and operation

WARNING! Do not run the motor over the rated speed. Motor overspeed leads to
overvoltage which may damage or explode the capacitors in the intermediate circuit
of the drive.
Controlling a permanent magnet motor is only allowed using the ACSBOO Permanent
Magnet Synchronous Motor Drive Control Program, or other control programs in
scalar control mode.

Safety instructions
Table o f contents
..

ACS800 Slngle Drive Manuals

Safety instructions
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Useofwarningsandnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mechanical installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fibreopticcables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Permanentmagnetmotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installation and maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Table o f contents

About this manual

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Intendedaudience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Categorization according to the frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Categorization according to the + code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . .
Productandse~icelnqulrles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
. .
Producttra~n~ng ................................................................ 20
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
. . .........................................................
Termsandabbrev~at~ons 21

Whatthischaptercontains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Typecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Main circuit and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Printedcircuitboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Motorcontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Planning the cabinet assembly

Table of contents
 Whatthischaptercontains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Cabinetconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Dispositionofthedevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Grounding of mounting structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7
Freespacearoundtheunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cooling and degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Preventing the recirculation of hot air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Outsidethecabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Inside the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cabinet layout example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
Cabinetheaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Mounting the optional control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installing the control panel directly on the cabinet door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Control panel mounting platform kit (RPMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
EMCrequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Mechanical installation
Unpackingtheunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Deliverycheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
lnstallationprocedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Flangemounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

; Planning the electrical installation

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Motor selection and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protecting the motor insulation and bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Requirements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Permanent magnet synchronous motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Supplyconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Disconnecting device (means) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EEAIEurope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Maincontactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Thermal overload and short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Thermal overload protection of the drive and the input and motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Thermal overload protection of the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Protection against short-circuit in the motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Protection against short-circuit inside the drive or in the supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Ground fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Emergencystopdevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Prevention of Unexpected Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Generalrules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Table of contents
 Motorcableshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Armored cable Ishielded power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Power factor compensation capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Equipment connected to the motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Installation of safety switches. contactors. connection boxes. etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Bypassconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Before opening a contactor (DTC control mode selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads . . . . 55
Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Relaycable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Controlpanelcable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet) . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Routingthecables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Controlcableducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Electrical installation
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Checking the insulation of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Inputcable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IT(ungrounded)systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Powercableconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Grounding the motor cable shield at the motor end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Frame sizes R2 to R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
FramesizeR5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Frame size R6: Cable lug installation [ I 6 to 70 mm2 (6 to 210 AWG) cables] . . . . . . . 64
Power cable protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
FramesizeR5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
FramesizeR6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warningsticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Connectingthecontrolcables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
360degreesgrounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
When the outer surface of the shield is covered with non-conductive material . . . . . . 69
Connecting the shield wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Cabling of 110 and fieldbus modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Pulseencodermodulecabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Installation of optional modules and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fibreopticlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
External +24 V power supply for the RMlO board via terminal X34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connecting +24 V external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Prevention of Unexpected Start, AGPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Table of contents
 Motor control and 110 b o a r d (RMIO)
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7
Note on terminal labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7
Note on external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7
External control connections (non-US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
External control connections (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
RMlOboardspecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Analogueinputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Constant
..
voltage output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -80
Auxiliary power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Analogueoutputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Digitalinputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Relayoutputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DDCSfibreopticlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
24 V DC power input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Installation checklist
Checltlist . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Maintenanceintervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
j Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
..' Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fan replacement (R2, R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fanreplacement(R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fanreplacernent(R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fanreplacement(R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Additionalfan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Replacement(R2, R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Replacement(R4, R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Replacement(R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Reforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Technical data
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
IECdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Table of contents
 Altitudederating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cooling characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cooling requirements for flange mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
FramesizesR2toR4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
FramesizesR5andR6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Calculation example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
gGfuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Ultrarapid (aR) fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Quick guide for selecting between gG and aR fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cabletypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Cableentries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Dimensions. weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NEMAdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Cabletypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Cableentries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Dimensions, weights and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . 107
Input power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 .
Motorconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Degreesofprotection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
AGPS-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Ambientconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Applicablestandards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CEmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
..
Defin~t~ons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Compliance with the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Compliance with the EN 61800-3 (2004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
First environment (drive of category C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Second environment (drive of category C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Second environment (drive of category C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
. . .......................................................
MachineryD~rect~ve 112
"C-tickWmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . 113
..
Defin~tlons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Compliance with IEC 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
First environment (drive of category C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Second environment (drive of category C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Second environment (drive of category C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Marinetypeapprovals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
UUCSAmarkings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
UL 115
Equipment warranty and liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Product protection in the US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

. .
...
. . . re&,? of contents
. .
Dimensional drawings
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Frame size R2 (with optional control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Frame size R3 (with optional control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Frame size R4 (with optional control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 0
Frame size R5 (with optional control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Frame size R6 (with optional control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Flangemountingkits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Flange mounting kit for frame size R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Ftange mounting kit for frame size R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 5
Flange mounting kit for frame size R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Flange mounting kit for frame size R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 7
Flange mounting kit for frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
AGPSboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Resistor braking
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Availability of brake choppers and resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to select the correct driveichopperlresistor combination
Optional brake chopper and resistor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistor installation and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection of frame sizes R2 to R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection of frame size R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake circuit commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of contents
About this manual

What this chapter contains

This chapter describes the intended audience and contents of this manual. It
contains a flowchart of steps in checking the delivery installing and commissioning
the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in this manual and other
manuals.

Compatibility
The manual is compatible with ACS800-04lU4 (frame sizes R2... R6).

Intended audience
This manual is intended for people who plan the installation, install, commission, use
and service the drive. Read the manual before working on the drive. The reader is
expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and
electrical schematic symbols.
This manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Special US instructions for installations within the United States that must be
installed per the National Electrical Code and local codes are marked with (US).

Categorization according to the frame size

Some instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only
certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size R2, R3... or R6.
The frame size is not marked on the drive designation label. To identify the frame
size of your drive, see the rating tables in chapter Technical data.

Categorization according to the + c o d e

The instructions, technical data and dimensional drawings which concern only
certain optional selections are marked with + codes, e.g. +E202. The options
included in the drive can be identified from the + codes visible on the type
designation label of the drive. The + code selections are listed in chapter ACSBOO-
04/U4 in section Type code.

About this manual

Contents
The chapters of this manual are briefly described below.
Safety instructions give safety instructions for the installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of the drive.
About this manual lists the steps in checking the delivery and installing and
commissioning the drive and refers to chapterslsections in this manual and other
manuals for particular tasks.
ACS800-04/U4 describes the drive.
Planning the cabinet assembly guides in planning the installation of a drive module
into a user-defined cabinet.
Mechanical installation instructs how to place and mount the drive.
Planning the electrical installation instructs on the motor and cable selection, the
protections and the cable routing.
Nectrical installation shows how to wire the drive.
Motorcontrol and I/O board (RMIO) shows the external control ~ o n n ~ c t i o ntosthe
110 board.
Installation checklist contains a list for checking the mechanical and electrical
installation of the drive.
Maintenance contains preventive maintenance instructions
Technical data contains the technical specifications of the drive, e.g. the ratings.
sizes and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE
and other markings and warranty policy.
Dimensional drawings contains the dimensional drawings of the drive.
Resistor braking describes how to select, protect and wire brake choppers and
resistors. The chapter also contains the technical data.

About this manual

Installation and commissioning flowchart

Task See

Identify the frame size of your drive: R2,R3. R4. R5 Technical data: IEC data or NEMA dala
or R6.

I Plan the installation. I Technical data

Cncck the anlulenl cona~lons, rallngs req.!trea Plbr,n!ng llic elcclrrcal .,~stalot.orl
cooltng a.r nos. ,npLt power coonect~on,conlpatto I ty
opl'o'l options' eqb pmer" Is
of tlle motor, motor collnect$on,and other lecnn,c;l
.ncI.oeu)
data
Select the cables.
I
Mechanical installati~n:Unpacking lhe unit
Check that all necessary optional modules and If the converter has been non-operational for
equipment are present and correct. more than one year, the converter DC link
Only intact unils may be started up. capacilors need to be reformed. Ask ABB for
instructions.

Check the installation site Mechanical installalion: Before installation

Technical data

I If the drive is aboul to be connected to an IT I ACS800-04/U4: T.v. ~ ecode

(ungrounded) system. check that the drive is not
equipped with EMC filtering.
I F~~instructions on how to disconnect the EMC
filtering, contact ABB.

Install the drive in a cabinet. Mechanical installalion

4
Route the cables. Planning the eleclrical installation: Routing the
cables

4
Check the insulalian of the motor and the motor Electricalhstalla!im: Checking the insulalion of
cable. the assembly

About this manual

 Task See

Connect the power cables. Electrical installalion, Motor control and I/O
board (RMIO). Resislor braking (optional) and
the optional module manual delivered with the
module.

Check the installation. Inslalialion checklist

Commission the drive. Appropriate Firmware Manual

1 Commission the optional brake chopper (if present). 1 Resistor braking

Operabng of the dnve start, stop, speed control etc Appropr~aleFfrmware Manual

Product and service inquiries

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting
the type code and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales,
support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.corn/drives and
selecting Drives - Sales, Support and Service network on the right pane.

Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.corn/drives and select
Drives - Training courses on the right pane.

Providing feedback o n ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives, then
select successively Drives - Document Library- Manuals feedback form on the right
pane.

About this manual

Terms and abbreviations
Explanation

Drive control Danel

Distributed Drives Communication System; a protocol used in optical fibre

communicalion inside and between ABB drives.

I EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

Size of the frame into which the drive module is assembled. Several
supply modules with different nominal powers may have the same frame
size. The term refers to modules that have a similar mechanical
construction.
To determine the frame size of a drive module, refer lo the rating tables in
chapter Technical data.

Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor; a voltage-controlled semiconductor type

widely used in inverters due to their easy controllability and hiqh
. switching
frequency.

Input/Output

Gate driver Power Supply board. An optional board used to implement lhe
Prevention of Unexpected Start function.

( RDCO DDCS communication option module

Digital 110 Extension Module

I RFI Radio-frequency interference

Main circuit board

Motor conlrol and 110 board. The external 110 control signals are
connected to RMIO.

I RPMP Control panel mounting platform kit

About this manual

What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the operating principle and construction of the drive in short.

Layout
The ACS800-041U4 (frame sizes R2 to R6) is an IP20 drive module for controlling
AC motors. It is to be installed into a cabinet by the customer with wall fastening.

Control panel CDP312R Frame size RZ

(optional)

Option slots

Power cable
terminal

Heatsink

Location of the components vary depending on the frame size.

Type code
The type code contains information on the specifications and configuration of the
drive. The first digits from left express the basic configuration (e.g. ACS800-04-
0016-3). The optional selections are given thereafter, separated by + signs (e.9.
+E202). The main selections are described below. Not all selections are available for
all types. For more information, refer to ACSBOO Ordering Information
[3AFE64556568 (English)], available on request.

\Selection 1 Alternatives I
Product series ACSBOO product series
Type 04 Drive module. When no options are selected: IP20, no control panel, no
EMC filter, Standard Control Program, brake chopper in frame sizes R2,
R3, and R4 (only 690 V), boards without coating, one set of manuals.

IUe I
Drive module (USA). When no options are selected: UL open lype, no
control panel. no EMC filter. Standard Control Program, brake chopper in
frame sizes R2, R3, and R4 (only 690 V), boards without coating, one set
I lof manuals.
Size /See Technical data: IEC data or NEMA data.
Voltage range 12 ~208/220/2301240V AC
(nominal rating in bold) 3 38014001415 V AC
5 380140014151440146014801500V AC
7 525/575/600/690 V AC
+options
Control panel J400 Control panel CDP312R assembled on the drive module
J414 Control panel holder for frame sizes R2. R3 and R4 (not to be used with
option J400)
Construction C132 Marine drive (coaled boards included)
C135 Flange mounting. Flange mounting plate assembled. IP55 for heal sink
side and IP20 for drive front side.
Filter E200 EMCIRFI filter for second environment TN (grounded) system, drive
category C3
E202 EMCIRFI filter for first environment TN (grounded) system, drive category
C2. (Not available for 690 V units.)
E210 EMCIRFI filter for second environment TNllT (groundedlungrounded)
system, drive category C3 (frame size R6 only)
Resistor braking Dl50 Brake chopper. Included as standard in frame sizes R2, R3 and R4 (only
690 V).
Safety Q950 Prevention of Unexpected Start: AGPS board and 3 m connection wire.
Fieldbus K... Refer to ACS800 Ordering Infomation 13AFE64556568 (English)].
110 L...
Control program N...
Manual language R...
Specialities P901 Coated boards

I P904 Extended warranty

Main circuit and control

Diagram
This diagram shows the control interfaces and the main circuit of the drive. Location
of terminals vary depending on the drive frame size.

1 Drive

Optional module 1: RMBA, RAIO. RDIO,

RDNA, RLON, RIBA, RPBA, RCAN. RCNA.
RMBP. RETA. RRlA or RTAC

Optional module 2: RTAC. RAIO, RRlA or

External control via

analogueldigital DDCS communicatjon option module 3:
inputs and outpuls RDCO-01. RDCO-02 or RDCO-03
The fibre optic channels provided by the
RDCO module can be used for fieldbus
connection (Nxxx fieldbus adapter modules),
Prevention of Unexpected PC connection (Driveware@PC tools) or
Stalt (AGPS board) Advant Fieldbus 100 connection (e.9.
AC 800M. AC80)

Input power 1
.
T

- ,
;-,?y 1 1
J

R- UDC+ UDC-
R+
output power

Brake chopper in frame sizes R2. R3 and

690 V frame R4 (optional in other frame
""".
Operation
This table describes the operation of the main circuit in short.

I Component / Description 1
1 Six-pulse rectifier 1 Converts the three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage. I
I Capacitor bank 1 Energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC voltage. 1
I IGBT
inve*er I Converts the DC voltage to AC voltage and vice versa. The motor
. 1s controlied by switching the IGBTs.
operation

Printed circuit boards

The drive contains the following printed circuit boards as standard:
main circuit board (RINT)
motor control and 110 board (RMIO)
EMC filter board (RRFC) when EMC equipment is selected or varistor board
(RVAR) otherwise.
..
Motor control
The motor control is based on the Direct Torque Control (DTC) method. Two phase
currents and DC link voltage are measured and used for the control. The third phase
current is measured for earth fault protection.
Planning the cabinet assembly

What this chapter contains

This chapter guides in planning the installation of a drive module into a user-defined
cabinet. The issues discussed are essential for safe and trouble-free use of the drive
system.

Note: The installation examples in this manual are provided only to help the installer
in designing the installation. The installation m u s t always be designed and made
according t o applicable local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any
liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws andlor other
regulations.

Cabinet construction
The cabinet frame must be sturdy enough to carry the weight of the drive
components, control circuitry and other equipment installed in it.
The cabinet must protect the drive module against contact and meet the
requirements for dust and humidity (see chapter Technical data).

Disposition of the devices

For easy installation and maintenance, a spacious layout is recommended. Sufficient
cooling air flow, obligatory clearances, cables and cable support structures all
require space.
For layout examples, see section Cabinet layout example.

Grounding of mounting structures

Make sure all cross-members or shelves on which components are mounted are
properly grounded and the connecting surfaces leR unpainted.

Note: Ensure that the modules are properly grounded through their fastening points
to the installation base.

Planning tlre cabinet assembly

Free space around the unit
The modules can be installed side by side. Recommended free space above and
below the drive to enable cooling air flow, service and maintenance is shown below
in millimetres and [inches].
The temperature of the cooling air entering the unit must not exceed the maximum
allowed ambient temperature. See section Ambient conditions in chapter Technical
data.

IP20 (UL open type)

Piannfngthe cabinet assembly

Cooling and degrees o f protection
The cabinet must have enough free space for the components to ensure sufficient
cooling. Observe the minimum clearances given for each component.
The air inlets and outlets must be equipped with gratings that
- guide the air flow
protect against contact
- prevent water splashes from entering the cabinet.
The drawing below shows two typical cabinet cooling solutions. The air inlet is at the
bottom of the cabinet, while the outlet is at the top, either on the upper part of the
door or on the roof.

Arrange the cooling air flow through the modules so that the requirements given in
chapter Technical data are met:
cooling air flow
Note: The values in Technical data apply to continuous nominal load. If the load is cyclic or less
than nominal, less cooling air is required.

- allowed ambient temperature

- the air inlet and outlet sizes required for the module cooling and recommended
filter material (if used).
In addition to the above, the heat dissipated by cables and other additional
equipment must also be ventilated.
The internal cooling fans of the modules are usually sufficient to keep the component
temperatures low enough in IP22 (UL type 1) cabinets.

Planning the cabinet assembly

 In IP54 (UL type 12) cabinets, thick filter mats are used to prevent water splashes
from entering the cabinet. This entails the installation of additional cooling
equipment, such as a hot air exhaust fan.
The installation site must be suficiently ventilated

Preventing the recirculation of hot air

Normal vertical mounting Flange mounting

Cabinet (side view) 1 Cabinet (side view)

Outside thk cabinet

Prevent hot air circulation outside the cabinet by leading the outcoming hot air away
from the area where the inlet air to the cabinet is taken. Possible solutions are listed
below:
gratings that guide air flow at the air inlet and outlet
air inlet and outlet at different sides o f the cabinet
cool air inlet in the lower part of the front door and an extra exhaust fan on the
roof of the cabinet.
 Inside fhe cabinet
Prevent hot air circulation inside the cabinet with leak-proof air baffle plates. No
gaskets are usually required.
When several modules are installed vertically in one cabinet, the hot air from one
module must not be allowed to enter another module. In a cabinet with multiple
modules, a practical way of achieving this is to install a mounting plate to separate
the cool area (at the front part of the cabinet) from the hot area (back part). The
mounting plate can be fastened to two vertical pillars on both left and right. Since the
air outlet at the top of the modules points directly upwards, the air must be guided to
the hot area. See cabinet layout examples below.

Cabinet layout example

Vertical mounting

AC fuse bases

Hot area

Coal area

..Mounting
plates
Modules

Motor cable entries

Front view of three R2 Side view of three R3

modules in cabinet modules in cabinet

Planning the cabinet assembly

Cabinet heaters
Use a cabinet heater if there is a risk of condensation in the cabinet. Although the
primary function of the heater is to keep the air dry, it may also be required for
heating at low temperatures. When placing the heater, follow the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

Mounting the optional control panel

The optional control panel CDP312R is factory assembled on the drive module.The
panel can also be fastened directly to the cabinet door or to a mounting platform.

Installing the control panel directly o n the cabinet door

Fasten the control panel from the back side with two screws of one of the following
types:
- standard screw with nominal diameter of 4 mm (0.16 in.)
tapping screw with nominal diameter of 4.2 mm (0.17 in.) DIN 7981 C, DIN 7982
C . DIN 7983 C or DIN 7976 C
- PT screw for thermoplastics with nominal diameter of 4 mm (0.16 in.)

View from outside the cabinet door

Planning the cabinet assembly

 Control panel mounting platform kit (RPMP)
For installation of the mounting platform, see Control Panel Mounting Platiorm Kit
(RPMP) installation Guide [3AFE64677560 (English)].

EMC requirements
Generally, the fewer and smaller the holes in the cabinet, the better the interference
attenuation. The maximum recommended diameter of a hole in galvanic metal
contact in the covering cabinet structure is 100 mm. Special attention must be paid
to the cooling air inlet and outlet gratings.
The best galvanic connection between the steel panels is achieved by welding them
together as no holes are necessary. If welding is not possible, the seams between
the panels are recommended t o be left unpainted and equipped with special
conductive EMC strips to provide adequate galvanic connection. Usually, reliable
strips are made of flexible silicon mass covered with a metal mesh. The non-
tightened touch-contact of the metal surfaces is not sufficient, so a conductive
gasket between the surfaces is required. The maximum recommended distance
between assembly screws is 100 mm.
Sufticient high-frequency grounding network must be constructed in the cabinet to
avoid voltage differences and forming of high-impedance radiator structures. A good
high-frequency grounding is made with short flat copper braids for low inductance.
One-point high-frequency grounding cannot be used due to the long distances inside
the cabinet.
First environment EMC compliance ') of the drive requires 360" high frequency
grounding of the motor cable shields at their entries. The grounding can be
implemented by a knitted wire mesh screening as shown below.

Bare cable shield

Cable ties

Knitted wire mesh

Lead-through plate

/ +----Cable
Cabinet bottom plate

') First environment EMC compliance is defined in section CE marking in chapter Technical daia.

Planning the cabinet assembly

 360" high frequency grounding of the control cable shields is recommended at their
entries. The shields can be grounded by means of conductive shielding cushions
pressed against the cable shield from both directions:

Planning the cabinet assembly

Mechanical installation

Unpacking the unit

The drive is delivered in a box that also contains:
- plastic bag containing: screws (M3), clamps and cable lugs (2 mm2. M3) for
grounding the control cable screens
- residual voltage warning stickers
. hardware, firmware and other module manuals
delivery documents.
Unpack the unit of frame sizes R2 to R5 as follows.

Mechanical installation
 Delivery check
Check that there are no signs of damage. Before attempting installation and
operation, check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify
that the unit is of the correct type. The label includes IEC rating, C-UL US. CSA,
C-tick and CE markings, a type code and a serial number, which allow individual
recognition of each unit. The first digit of the serial number refers to the
manufacturing plant. The next four digits refer to the unit's manufacturing year and
week, respectively. The remaining digits complete the serial number so that there
are no two units with the same serial number.
The type designation label is attached to the heat sink and the serial number label to
the upper part of the back plate of the unit.

Type designation label

Serial number label

Before installation
Check the installation site according to the requirements below. See Dimensional
drawings for frame details.

Requirements for the installation site

See Technical data for the allowed operation conditions of the drive
Floor
The floorlmaterial below the cabinet should be non-flammable.

Mechanicalinstallation
Installation procedure
1. Mark the locations for the four holes. The mounting points are shown in
Dimensional drawings. With frame sizes R2...R5, use the mounting template cut
from the package.
2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations.
3. Position the drive onto the screws on the cabinet wall. Note: Lifl the drive by its
chassis (R6: by its lifting holes).
4. Tighten the screws in the cabinet wall securely.

Mechanical installation
Flange mounting
The flange mounting plate is factory assembled on the drive. With flange mounting,
the degree of protection is IP55 for the heat sink side and IP20 for the drive front
side. The drive front side must always be housed in a cabinet.

R6 wilh flange rnounlingplaie

Connect a drive with flange mounting plate as follows:

1 . Make the appropriate mounting and screw holes for the drive into the mounting
plate. The sizes and locations of the holes vary according to the frame size. See
chapter Dimensional drawings. Screw holes can be replaced with rivet nuts.
Recommended type is closed M6 rivet nut, L = 23 mm, code 23351060030 1
Rivkle provided by Bollhoff(www.boellhoff.de).
2. Lift the drive by its lifting lugs and place it into the mounting hole
3. Fix the washers and screws (M6) delivered with the drive (MRP code 68390419).
The tightening torque is 2 Nm.
Note:The flange mounting kit does not ground the drive. The drive needs to be
grounded according to instructions given in chapter Electrical installation.
Note: Maximum allowed vibration for the drive has not been tested with flange
mounting. If the drive is exposed-to vibration, it is recommended to fix the drive also
from the normal mounting holes located on the heat sink. See section Installation
~rocedure.

Mechanical
..
iqtallation
. . .
. . . . . .
. . .... .
. ..

. ..
R6 flange mounting

Mechanical insfallation
Planning the electrical installation

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when selecting the motor,
cables, protections, cable routing and way of operation for the drive system.
-- -~
Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws andlor other regulations. Furthermore, if
the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience
problems that the warranty does not cover.

Motor selection and compatibility

1. Select the motor according to the rating tables in chapter Technical data. Use the
Drivesize PC tool if the default load cycles are notapplicable.
2. Checlc that the motor ratings lie within the allowed ranges of the drive control
program:
motor nominal voltage is 112 ... 2 . UNof the drive
motor nominal current is 116 ... 2 - of the drive in DTC control and
0 ... 2 . Izhd
in scalar control. The control mode is selected by a drive parameter.
3. Check that the motor voltage rating meets the application requirements:
If no resistor braking is in use, the motor voltage rating is u,.
UN= rated input voltage of the drive

If frequent or long term brake cycles will be used, the motor voltage rating is
U~~eq.
= UDC/?.35
UACeq
where
UACeqis the equivalent AC power source voltage of the drive in VAC.

UDc is the maximum DC link voltage of the drive in V DC.

For resistor braking: UOc= 1.2 x 1.35 x UN.

See note 6 below the Requirements table.

4. Consult the motor manufacturer before using a motor in a drive system where the
motor nominal voltage differs from the AC power source voltage.

Planning the electrical installation

 5. Ensure that the motor insulation system withstands the maximum peak voltage in
the motor terminals. See the Requirements table below for the required motor
insulation system and drive filtering
Example: When the supply voltage is 440 V and the drive is operating in motor
mode only, the maximam peak voltage in the motor terminals can be
approximated as follows: 440 V - 1.35 . 2 = 1190 V. Check that the motor
insulation system withstands this voltage.

Protecting the motor insulation and bearings

The output of the drive comprises - regardless of output frequency - pulses of
approximately 1.35 times the equivalent mains network voltage with a very short rise
time. This is the case with all drives employing modern IGBT inverter technology.
The voltage of the pulses can be almost double at the motor terminals, depending on
the attenuation and reflection properties of the motor cable and the terminals. This in
turn can cause additional stress on the motor and motor cable insulation.
Modern variable speed drives with their fast rising voltage pulses and high switching
frequencies can generate current pulses that flow through the motor bearings, which
can gradually erode the bearing races and rolling elements.
The stress on motor insulation can be avoided by using optional ABB duldt filters.
duldt filters also reduce bearing currents.
To avoid damage to motor bearings, the cables must be selected and installed
according to the instructions given in the hardware manual. In addition, insulated N-
end (non-driven end) bearings and output filters from ABB must be used according
to the following table. Two types of filters are used individually or in combinations:
optional duldt filter (protects motor insulation system and reduces bearing
currents).
common mode filter (mainly reduces bearing currents).

Planning the electrical installalion

Requirements table
The following table shows how l o select the motor insulation system and when an optional ABB duldt
filter, insulated N-end (non-driven end) motor bearings and ABB common mode filters are required. The
motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation and
additional requirements for euplosion-safe (Ex) motors. Failure of the motor to fulfil the following
requirements or improper insta[lation may shorten motor life or damage the motor beatings and voids
the warranty.

Planning the electrical installation

 -r-
Motor type Nominal mains
voltage (AC line
voltage)
Motor
insulation
system

1
PN< 100 kW
and
Requirement for
ABB duldt filter, insulated N-end bearing and ABB common

frame size c IEC

315
PN< 134 HP
1
I
mode fitter
100kW5PN<
350 kW or
frame size ? IEC
315 1
I
PN> 350 kW
or
fiame size 7 IEC
400
.--
I

134HPzPN< PN>469HP
and frame size < 469 HP or frame size >
NEMA 500 or frame size 2 NEMA 580
NEMA 500
Standard: (jlL= - +NorCMF +N+CMF
wound and 1300V
420 V < UN5 500 V Standard: qL= + duldt + duldt + N + duldt + N + CMF
1300 V or
+ duldt + CMF
or
Reinforced: - + N o r CMF +N+CMF
oLL = 1600 V.
0.2
microsecond
rise time
500 V < UN5600 V Reinforced: OLL t duldt + duldt + N + duldt + N c CMF
= 1600 V or
+ duldt + CMF
-.
nr

Reinforced: - + N o r CMF +N+CMF

o,= 1800V
600 V c UN5 690 V Reinforced: + duldt + duldt + N + duldt + N + CMF
oLL=1800V
Reinforced: - N +CMF N + CMF
cj,, = 2000 v,
0.3
microsecond
i I Irise time '" I
manufactured before 1.1.1998
"
For motors manufactured before 1.1.1998. check for additional instructions with the motor
manufacturer.
"' If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive will be increased from the nominal level by resistor
braking or by the IGBT Supply Control Program (parameter selectable function), check with the
motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation range.

Planning the electrical installation

 Note I:The abbreviations used in the table are defined below.

Abbreviation Definition
UN nominal voltage of the supply network
ljl~ peak line-lo-line voltage at motor terminals which the motor insulalion must withstand
~~~ ~

P~ motor nominal power

duldt duldt filter al the output of the drive +E205
CMF common mode filter +E208
N N-end bearing: insulaled motor non-driven end bearing
n.a. Motors of this power range are not available as standard units. Consult the motor manufacturer

Note 2: Explosion-sale (Ex) molors

The motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation and
additional requirements for explosion-safe (Ex) motors.
Note 3: High-output motors and IP23 molors
For motors with higher rated output lhan what is stated for the particular frame size in EN 50347 (2001)
and for lP23 motors, the requirements of ABB random-wound motor series M3AA. M3AP, M3BP are
given below. For other motor types, see the Requirements table above. Apply the requirements of
range 100 kW < PN < 350 kW lo motors with PN < 100 kW Apply the requirements of range
PN > 350 kW to motors within the range 100 kW < P, < 350 kW. In other cases, consult the motor
manufacturer.

Note 4: HXR and AMA molors

All AMA machines (manufactured in Helsinki) for drive systems have form-wound windings. All HXR
machines manufactured in Helsinki starting 1.1.1998 have form-wound windings.
Note 5 : A 6 0 molors of types olher lhan M2-, M3-, HX- and AM-
Use the selection criteria given for non-ABB motors.
Note 6: Resistor braking of the drive
When the drive is in braking mode for a large part of its operation time, the intermediate circuit DC
vollage of the drive increases, (he effect being similar to increasing the supply voltage by up to 20
percent. The voltage increase should be taken into consideration when determining the motor insulation
requirement.
Example:Motor insulation requirement for a 400 V application musl be selected as if the drive were
supplied with 480 V.

Planning the electrical installation

 Note 7: Calculaling the rise time and (he peak line-to-line voltage
The peak line-to-line voltage at the motor terminals generated by the drive as well as the voltage rise
time depend on the cable length. The requiremenis ior the motor insulation system given in the table
are "worst case' requirements covering installations wi!h 30 metre and longer cables. The rise time can
Read YLand duldt from the diagrams below. Multiply
be calculated as follows: a t = 0.8 . o~~I(du1dt).
the values of the graph by the supply voltage (UN).With resistor braking, the (i,, and duldt values are
approximately 20 % higher.

0.0 a 100 200 300

1.0 u 100 200 300

Cable length (m) Cable length (m)

~ l h o udu/dl
f filler

Note 8: Sine filters protect the motor insulation system. Therefore, duldt filter can be replaced with
a sine filter. The peak phase-to-phase voltage with the sine filter is approximately 1.5 r UN.
Note 9: Common mode filter is available as a separate kit (one box including three rings for one cable)

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Only one permanent magnet motor can be connected to the inverter output
It is recommended to install a safety switch between the permanent magnet
synchronous motor and the drive output. The switch is needed to isolate the motor
during any maintenance work on the drive.

Supply connection

Disconnecting device (means)

Install a hand-operated input disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between
the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must b e of a type that
can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.

Planning the electrical installation

 EEA /Europe
If the drive is used in an application which must meet the European Union Machinery
Directive according to standard EN 60204-1 Safety of Machinery, the disconnecting
device must be one of the following types:
a switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)
a disconnector that has an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
US
The disconnecting means must conform to the applicable safety regulations.

Main contactor
If used, dimension the contactor according to the nominal voltage and current of the
drive. The utilization category (IEC 947-4) is AC-1.

Fuses
See section Thermal overload and short-circuit protection

Thermal overload and short-circuit protection

Thermal overload protection of the drive and the input and motor cables
The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload
when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No

n'
additional thermal protection devices are needed.

WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal overload

switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These
devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.

Planning the electrical inslallalion

 Thermal overload protection of the motor
According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and
the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a
motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current
when necessary. Depending on a drive parameter value, the function either monitors
a calculated temperature value (based on a motor thermal model) or an actual
temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors. The user can tune the
thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data.
The most common temperature sensors are:
- motor sizes IEC180.225: thermal switch (e.g. Klixon)
motor sizes IEC200.250 and larger: PTC or PtlOO
See the firmware manual for more information on the motor thermal protection, and
the connection and use of the temperature sensors.

Protection against short-circuit i n the motor cable

The drive protects the motor cable and motor in a short-circuit situation when the
motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional protection devices are needed.

Protection against short-circuit inside the drive or i n the supply cable

Arrange the protection according to the following guide lines.
Circuit diagram I Shortcircuit 1
protection
Protect the drive and
Distribution Drive or drive input cable with fuses
board I Input cable module or a circuit breaker.
See footnotes I) and

41
8-d

1) Size the fuses according lo instructions given in chapter Technical dala. The fuses will protect the input
cable in short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in
case of a short-circuit inside the drive.

Planning the electrical installation

 2) Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACSBOO can be used. Fuses must be used
with other circuit breakers. Contact your local ABB representative for approved breaker types and
supply network characteristics.
The protective characteristics of circuit breakers depend on the type, construction and setiings of the
breakers. There are also limitations pertaining to the shortcircuit capacity of the supply network

WARNING! Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers
A ~ndeoendentof the manufacturer. hot ionized aases " mav escaoe from the breaker
c n c o s ~ r ei r j cssc of a shon-ctrc~il ro ccnsLre safe ube SIIEC 3 atlenllon rn )st be pa a to
/$\ It!@ ins~a..altonrind placement of lne breakers f ~ o l l lnc o ~ ~nan.laclurer's inslr~cuons

Note: Circuit breakers must not be used without fuses in the USA.

Ground fault protection

The drive is equipped with an internal ground fault protective function to protect the
unit against ground faults in the motor and the motor cable. This is not a personal
safety or a fire protection feature. The ground fault protective function can be
disabled with a parameter, refer to the appropriate ACSBOO Firmware Manual.
The EMC filter of the drive includes capacitors connected between the main circuit
and the frame. These capacitors and long motor cables increase the ground leakage
current and may cause fault current circuit breakers to function.

Emergency s t o p devices
For safety reasons, install the emergency stop devices at each operator control
station and at other operating stations where emergency stop may be needed.
Note: Pressing the stop key (a)
on the control panel of the drive does not generate
an emergency stop of the motor or separate the drive from dangerous potential.

Planning the electrical installation

Prevention of Unexpected Start
The drive can be equipped with an optional Prevention of Unexpected Start function
according to standards IECIEN 60204-1: 1997; ISOlDlS 14118: 2000 and EN 1037:
1996.
The Prevention of Unexpected Start function disables the control voltage of the
power semiconductors, thus preventing the inverter from generating the AC voltage
required to rotate the motor. By using this function, short-time operations (lilte
cieaning) andlor maintenance work on non-electrical parts of the machinery can be
performed without switching off the AC power supply to the drive.
The operator activates the Prevention of Unexpected Start function by opening a
switch on a control desk. An indicating lamp on the control desk will light, signalling
that the prevention is active. The switch can be locked out.
A Gate Driver Power Supply board (AGPS) and a 3 m connection wire are delivered
with the Prevention of Unexpected Start option kit. The Prevention o f Unexpected
Start function complies with EN954-1 categories 1 and 3 when the following
installations are made:
The user must install on a control desk near the machinery:
switchingldisconnecting device for the circuitly. "Means shall be provided to
prevent inadvertent, andlor mistaken closure of the disconnecting device."
EN 60204-1: 1997.
indicating lamp; on = starting the drive is prevented, off = drive is operative.
safety relay (type ED5935 has been approved by ABB)
(Switchingldisconnecting device, indicating lamp and safety relay are not included in
the delivery.)
For connections to the drive, see section Prevention o f Unexpected Sfad. AGPS
board in chapter Electrical installation.

WARNING! The Prevention of Unexpected Start function does not disconnect the
voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work
on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out afler isolating the
drive system from the main supply.

Note: The Prevention of Unexpected Start function is not intended for stopping the
drive. If a running drive is stopped by using the Prevention of Unexpected Start
function, the drive will cut off the motor supply voltage and the motor will coast to
stop.

-- --

Plann~ngthe electrical installat~on

Selecting the power cables

General rules
Dimension the mains (input power) and motor cables according t o local
regulations:
The cable must be able to carly the drive load current. See chapter Technical
data for the rated currents.
The cable must be rated for at least 70 "C maximum permissible temperature of
conductor in continuous use. For US, see section Additional US requiremenls.
The inductance and impedance of the PE conductor/cable (grounding wire) must
be rated according to permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditions
(so that the fault point voltage will not rise excessively when a ground fault
occurs).
600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC. 750 V A C cable is accepted for
up to 600 VAC. For 690 V A C rated equipment, the rated voltage between the
conductors of the cable should be minimum 1 kV.
For drive frame size R5 and larger, or motors larger than 30 kW (40 HP).
symmetrical shielded motor cable must be used (figure below). A four-conductor
system can be used up to frame size R4 with up to 30 kW (40 HP) motors, but
shielded symmetrical motor cable is always recommended. The shield(s) of motor
cable(s) must have 360" bonding at both ends.
Note: When continuous metal conduit is employed, shielded cable is not required
The conduit must have bonding at both ends as with cable shield.
A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but shielded symmetrical cable
is recommended. To operate as a protective conductor, the shield conductivity must
be as follows when the protective conductor is made o f the same metal as the phase
conductors:
Cross-sectional area of the phase Minimum cross-sectional area of the corresponding
conductors protective conductor
s (rnrn2) S, (mm2)
S < 16 S
16<S535 16
35 < S 512

Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of symmetrical shielded cable

reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as the stress on
motor insulation, bearing currents and wear.
The motor cable and its PE pigtail (twisted shield) should be kept as short as
possible in order to reduce high frequency electromagnetic emission, as well as
stray currents outside the cable and capacitive current (relevant in power range
below 20 kW).

Planning the electrical installation

 Alternative power cable types
Power cable types that can be used with the drive are represented below.

Recommended
Symmetrical shielded cable: lhree phase conductors Aseparate PE conductor is required if the conductivity
and a concenlric or otherwise symmetrically of the cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the
constructed PE conductor, and a shield phase conductor.

PE conductor
Shield

0 PE

A four-conductor system: PE @ o/shield

three phase conductors ~ O 0O 00
and a protective 0e
conductor.
Not allowed for motor cables Not allowed for motor cables with phase
conductor cross section larger than 10 mm2
[motors > 30 kW (40 HP)].

Motor cable shield

To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the
shield conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The
requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield. The minimum
requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a
concentric layer of copper wires with an open helix of copper tape or copper wire.
The better and tighter the shield, the lower the emission level and the bearing
currents.

lnsu,ation jacket Copper wire screen Helix of copper tape Inner insulation

\ \ or copper wire
\

,-Cable core

Planning the electricalrnstallalion

 Additional US requirements
Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or
shielded power cable must be used for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not
used. For the North American market, 600 V A C cable is accepted for up to
500 VAC. 1000 V A C cable is required above 500 V A C (below 600 VAC). For
drives rated over 100 amperes, the power cables must be rated for 75 "C (167 OF).
Conduit
Separate parts of a conduit must be coupled together, bridge the joints with a ground
conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to
the drive enclosure and motor frame. Use separate conduits for input power, motor,
brake resistor, and control wiring. When conduit is employed, type MC continuous
corrugated aluminium armor cable or shielded cable is not required. A dedicated
ground cable is always required.

Note: Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit.

Armored cable /shielded power cable

Six conductor (3 phases and 3 ground) type MC continuous corrugated aluminium
armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers (trade
names in parentheses):
- Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath)
- BlCC General Corp (Philsheath)
Rockbestos Go. (Gardex)
Oaknite (CLX)
Shielded power cables are available from Belden. LAPPKABEL (OLFLEX) and
Pirelli.

p~ ~~

planning the electricalinstaflaiion

Power factor compensation capacitors
Power factor compensation is not needed with AC drives. However, if a drive is to be
connected in a system with compensation capacitors installed, note the following
restrictions.

WARNING! Do not connect power factor compensation capacitors or harmonic

filters to the motor cables (between the drive and the motor). They are not meant to
be used with AC drives and can cause permanent damage to the drive or
themselves.
~~~ ~

If there are power factor compensation capacitors in parallel with the three phase
input of the drive:
1. Do not connect a high-power capacitor to the power line while the drive is
connected. The connection will cause voltage transients that may trip or even
damage the drive.
2. If capacitor load is increasedldecreased step by step when the AC-drive is
connected to the power line: Ensure that the connection steps are low enough not
to cause voltage transients that would trip the drive.
3. Check that the power factor compensation unit is suitable for use in systems with
AC drives i.e. harmonic generating loads. In such systems, the compensation unit
should typically b e equipped with a blocking reactor or harmonic filter.

Equipment connected to the motor cable

Installation of safety switches, contactors, connection boxes, etc,

To minimize the emission level when safety switches, contactors, connection boxes
or similar equipment are installed in the motor cable between the drive and the
motor:
- EU: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure with 360 degrees grounding for the
screens of both the incoming and outgoing cable, or connect the screens of the
cables otherwise together.
US: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure in a way that the conduit or motor
cable shielding runs consistently without breaks from the drive to the motor.
Bypass connection

WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2, V2
and W2. If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches
or contactors. Mains (line) voltage applied to thebutput can result in permanent
damage to the unit.

Planning the electrical installation

 Before opening a contactor (DTC control mode selected)
Stop the drive and wait for the motor to stop before opening a contactor between the
output of the drive and the motor when the DTC control mode is selected. See the
appropriate ACS800 Confrol Program Firmware Manual for the required parameter
settings. Othetwise, the contactor will be damaged. In scalar control, the contactor
can be opened with the drive running.

Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case

of inductive loads
Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched
off.
The relay contacts on the RMlO board are protected with varistors (250 V) against
overvoltage peaks. In spite of this, it is highly recommended to equip inductive loads
with noise attenuating circuits [varistors, RC filters (AC) or diodes (DC)] in order to
minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed, the disturbances may
connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form
a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system.
Install the protective component as close to the.inductive load as possible. Do not
install protective components at the RMlO board terminal block.

RMlO
I Relay outputs
Varistor

230 VAC
3 R01
RC filter , x7fi

Planning the electrical installation

Selecting the control cables
All control cables must be shielded.
Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a, e.g. JAMAK by Draka NK
Cables, Finland) for analogue signals. This type of cable is recommended for the
pulse encoder signals also. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do
not use common return for different analogue signals.
A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals but
single-shielded twisted multipair cable (Figure b) is also usable.

a b
A double-shieldedtwisted A single-shielded twisted
pair cable multipair cable

Run analogue and digital signals in separate, shielded cables.

Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in
the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled
signals be run as twisted pairs.
Never mix 24 V DC and 1151230 V A C signals in the same cable.

Relay cable
The cable type with braided metallic screen (e.g. OLFLEX by LAPPKABEL,
Germany) has been tested and approved by ABB.

Control panel cable

In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed
3 metres (10 fl). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel
ootion kits.

Planning the electricalinstallation

Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive 110

WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts
and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-
conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
To fulfil this requirement, the connection of a thermistor (and other similar
components) to the digital inputs of the drive can be implemented in three alternate
ways:
1. There is double or reinforced insulation between the thermistor and live parts of
the motor.
2. Circuits connected to all digital and analogue inputs of the drive are protected
against contact and insulated with basic insulation (the same voltage level as the
drive main circuit) from other low voltage circuits.
3. An external thermistor relay is used. The insulation of the relay must be rated for
the same voltage level as the main circuit of the drive. For connection, see
ACSBOO Firmware Manual.

Installation sites above 2000 metres (6562 feet)

WARNING! Protect against direct contact when installing, operating and servicing
the RMlO board wiring and optional modules attached to the board. The Protective
Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178 are not fulfilled at
altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft).

Routing the cables

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives
can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor
cable, input power cable and control cables be installed on separate trays. Avoid
long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables in order to decrease
electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output
voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are arranged at an
angle as near to 90 degrees as possible. Do not run extra cables through the drive.
The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the
grounding electrodes. Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local
equalizing of potential.

Planning the eleclricai installation

 A d i a g r a m o f t h e cable routing is below.

Motor cable
Drive

Control cables

Control c a b l e d u c t s

Not alloweu Jnless tllc 24 V cab0 IS Lead 21 V and 730 V (120 V j conlrol
InsJlaleU for 230 V (120 VI or illsulaled cables I>seDarate ducts Insme lllc
with an insulation sleevin&for cabinet
230 V (120 V).

Planning the electrical instaNation

Electrical installation

What this chapter contains

This chapter describes the electrical installation procedure of the drive.

WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified
electrician. Follow the Safety instruclions on the first pages o f this manual. Ignoring
the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Make sure that the drive i s disconnected from the mains (input power) during
installation. IF the drive i s already connected t o the mains, wait for 5 min after
disconnecting mains power.

Checking the insulation of the assembly

Drive
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (e.g. hi-pot or
megger) on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has
been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis (2500 V rms
50 Hz for 1 second) at the factory. Also, there are voltage-limiting circuits inside the
drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically.

Input cable
Checlc the insulation of the input cable according to local regulations before
connecting it to the drive.

Motor and motor cable

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is disconnected from the drive output terminals U2,
V2 and W2.
2. Measure the insulation resistances of the motor cable and the motor between
each phase and the Protective Earth by using a measuring voltage of IkV DC.
The insulation resistance must be higher than 1 Mohm.

Electrical installation
IT (ungrounded) systems
Ensure that the drive is not equipped with optional EMC filter, i.e. type code does not
include selections +E200 or +E202.
However if EMC filters exist, disconnect the EMC filter capacitors of selections
+E202 and +E200 before connecting the drive to an ungrounded system. For
detailed instructions on how to do this, please contact your local ABB distributor

WARNING! If a drive with EMC filter selection +E202 or +E200 is installed on an IT

system [an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms)
power system], the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC
filter capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger or damage the unit.

Electrical installation
Power cable connection

Power cable connection

I Drive with brake chopper included I

INPUT

t -1
I
--
&;
External brake
For alternatives, see
Planning!he e l e c t r i c a l 1
instal

Connecting the power cables

. Connect the twisted shield of the cable to the drive grounding terminal. Note:
cable lugs are needed in frame sizes R2 and R3.
- S u ~ p l ycable aroundin% If shielded cable is used, and the conductivity of the
shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the phase conductor, use a separate PE
cable (I) or a cable with a grounding conductor (2). With shielded cable 360"
grounding of the supply cables is recommended.

Motor cable aroundinq: Use a separate grounding cable (3) if the conductivity of
the cable shield is < 50% of the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is
no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable (see Planning the
electrical installation: Selecting the power cables).
360 degrees grounding is required at the cabinet entry in first environment
installations. First environment EMC compliance is defined in chapter Technical
data.
Note: If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor
cable in addition to the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the
grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends.
Note: Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable. Connecting its
fourth conductor at the motor end increases bearing currents and causes extra
wear.

Electrical installation
 Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals
and the phase conductors of the motor cable to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals.

Strip the conductor ends as follows to fit them inside the power cable connection
terminals.

Note: Lead the unstripped cable as close to the terminals as possible. All
unstripped parts must be protected against contact.
Frame size Stripping length
rnm I rn~

- Secure the cables outside the unit mechanically

Ground the other end of the input cable shield or PE conductor at the distribution
board.
Grounding the motor cable shield at the motor end
For minimum radio frequency interference ground the cable shield 360 degrees at
the lead-through of the motor terminal box

360 degrees grounding

donductLe gaskets

or ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows: flattened width > 115 - length.

Electricalinstallation
Frame sizes R2 to R4

.-
U1 v1 W1 UDC+
R- R+ UDC- U2 V2 W2

PE

Input power cable Motor cable

Frame size R5

Input power cable Motor cable

Electrical installation
 Frame size R6: Cable lug installation [I6 to 70 mm2 (6 lo 2/0 AWG) cables]

- . .
UDC+
U1 V1 W1 R- R+ UDC- U2 V2 W2 Remove the screw terminals.
Faslen the cable lugs to the
remaining bolts with M10
nuts.

Isolate the ends of the cable

lugs with insulating lape or
shrink tube

Input power cable Motor cable

Electrical installation
 Frame size R6: Cable terminal installation 195 to 185 mm2 (310 to 2x410 AWG)
cables]
UDC+

b. Connect the terminal to the drive.

WARNING! If the wire size is less than
95 mm2 (310 AWG), a cable lug must
be used. A cable of wire size less than
95 mm2 (310 AWG) connected-to this
terminal will loosen and may damage
the-drive.

Input power cable Motor cable

Power cable protection

Frame size R5
Cover the power cable terminals as follows:
1. Cut holes for the installed cables into the clear plastic shroud.
2. Press the shroud onto the terminals.

Electrical installation
 Removal of the shroud with a screw driver:

Frame size R6
Cover the power cable terminals as follows:
1. Cut holes for the installed cables into the clear plastic shroud in cable lug
installations.
2. Press the shroud onto the terminals.

Removal of the shroud by lifting up with a screw driver from the corner:

Warning sticker
There are warning stickers in different languages inside the packing box of the drive
Attach a warning sticker in the language of your choice onto the plastic skeleton
above the power cable terminals.

Electrical jnsfaRation
Connecting the control cables
Connect the control cables as described b e l o k Connect the conductors to the
appropriate detachable terminals of the RMIO board [see chapter Motor control and
I/O board (RMIO)]. Tighten the screws to secure the connection.

Terminals
Location of terminals vary depending on the drive frame size

Frame sizes R2 to R4
The control cable connection terminals are
exposed when the control panel mounling platiorm
is turned aside by pulling lhis knob. Be careful, do Oelachable connectian terminals (pull up)
not use excess force when pulling.
39 for conlrol panel cable
(control panel is an option)

Terminal for oplional -Optional module 1

Prevention of Unexpected
Slarl
-Optional module 2

control cable shields in the DDCS communication

holes with screws. See option module 3:
section 360 degrees

Place the warning

sticker here

Electrical instaffation
Frame sizes R5 and R6

./- -.
7

1 V~ewof frame sue R6

Control panel X41 lor Prevention of

(optional) Unexpected Start (AGPS
board)

Optional module , I:..;:.A%~>A:Y<~

-Optional module 2

Control cable
- DDCS communication option module 3: RDCO
grounding: see
Section 360 A Place the warning sticker here
degrees
grounding l ~ e l a c h a b l connection
e terminals (pull up)

'~erminal for optional

Prevention of Unexpected

Electrical installation
360 degrees grounding

Double-shieldedcable Single-shielded cable

When the outersurface of the shield is covered with non-conductive material

- Strip the cable carefully (do not cut the grounding wire and the shield)
Turn the shield inside out to expose the conductive surface.
. Wrap the grounding wire around the conductive surface.
. Slide a conductive clamp onto the conductive part.
Fasten the clamp to the grounding plate with a screw as close as possible to the
terminals where the wires are about to be connected.

Connecting the shield wires

Sinqle shielded cables: Twist the grounding wires o f the outer shield and connect
them through the shortest possible route to the nearest grounding hole with a cable
lug and a screw. Double shielded cables: Connect each pair cable shield (twisted
grounding wires) with other pair cable shields of the same cable to the nearest
grounding hole with a cable lug and a screw.
Do not connect shields o f different cables to the same cable lug and grounding
screw.
Leave the other end of the shield unconnected or ground it indirectly via a few
nanofarads high-frequency capacitor (e.g. 3.3 nF / 630 V). The shield can also be
grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant
voltage drop between the end points.
Keep the signal wire pairs twisted as close to the terminals as possible. Twisting the
wire with its return wire reduces disturbances caused by inductive coupling.

Electricalinsfallalion
 C a b l i n g of 110 a n d f i e l d b u s m o d u l e s

As short as possible

Note: The RDlO module does not

include a terminal for cable shield
round the pair cable

Pulse encoder module cabling

Notel: If the encoder is of

unisolaled type, ground the encoder
cable at the drive end only. If the
encoder is galvanically isolated
from the motor shafl and the slator
frame, ground the encoder cable
shield at the drive and the encoder
end.
Note 2: Twist the pair cable wires.

Wrap copper tape around the

stripped part of the cable under the
clamp. Be careful. Do not cut the
grounding wire. Clamp as close to
the terminals as possible.

Electrical installation
Installation of optional modules and PC
The optional module (such as fieldbus adapter, 110 extension module and the pulse
encoder interface) is inserted in the optional module slot of the RMlO board (see
section Connecting the control cables) and fixed with two screws. See the
appropriate optional module manual for cable connections.

Fibre optic link

A DDCS fibre optic link is provided via the RDCO optional module for PC tools,
master/follower link, NDIO. NTAC, NAlO and fieldbus adapter modules of type Nxxx.
See RDCO User's Manual for connections. Observe colouring codes when installing
fibre optic cables. Blue connectors go to blue terminals, and grey connectors to grey
terminals.
When installing multiple modules on the same channel connect them in a ring

External +24 V power supply for the RMlO board via terminal X34
This section describes how to connect an external +24 V power supply for the RMlO
board via terminal X34. For the current consumption of the RMlO board, see chapter
Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).
Note: External power is easier to supply to the RMlO board via terminal X23, see
chapter Motor control and I/O board (RMIO).

Parameter settings
In Standard Control program, set parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to
EXTERNAL 24V if the RMlO board is powered from an external supply.

Connecting +24 V external power supply

1. Break off the tab covering the +24 V DC power input connector with pliers
2. Lift the connector upwards
3. Disconnect the wires from the connector (keep the connector for later use)
4. Isolate the ends of the wires individually with insulating tape.
5. Cover the isolated ends of the wires with insulating tape.
6. Push the wires inside the skeleton.
7. Connect the wires of the +24 V external power supply to the disconnected
connector:
if a two-way connector. +wire to terminal 1 and -wire to terminal 2
if a three-way connector, + wire to terminal 2 and -wire to terminal 3.
8. Plug the connector in.

Electricalinstallation
 Frame sizes R2 lo R4 Frame sizes R5 and R6

Electrical installabon
'-RMlOboard. 7 r 'Rm-board - 1
1 2 3 ,
L i + - A

Conneclion o f a two-way Conneclioil of a three-way

conneclor conneclor

Electrical installation
Prevention of Unexpected Start, AGPS board
- -
WARNING! Dangerous voltages can be present on the AGPS board even when the
115...230 V supply is switched off. Follow the Safety instructions on the first pages of
this manual and the instruction in this section when working on the AGPS board.

Make sure that the drive i s disconnected from the mains (input power) and the
115...230 V source for the AGPS board i s switched off during installation and
maintenance. If the drive i s already connected t o the mains, wait for 5 m i n after
disconnecting mains power.

Connect the optional AGPS board as follows: . .

Remove the enclosure cover by undoing the fixing screws (1).
Ground the unit via the bottom plate of the enclosure or via terminal X1:l of the
AGPS board.
Connect the cable delivered with the kit between terminal block X2. of the AGPS
board (2) and drive terminal block X41.
Connect a cable between connector X I of the AGPS board (3) and the
115...230 V source.
Fasten the enclosure cover back with screws.

Electricalinstallation : . . . ..
.i :.
Note: Location of the X41 terminal block varies according to the drive frame size.
see page 67.

Note: Maximum cable length between AGPS terminal block X2 and drive terminal
block is restricted to 10 m.
For technical data see section AGPS-11C in chapter Technical data.

Electrical installation
Electrical installation
Motor control and 110 board (RMIO)

What this chapter contains

This chapter shows
. external control connections to the RMlO board for theACS800 Standard Control
Program (Factory Macro)
specifications of the inputs and outputs of the board
This chapter applies to ACS800 units which employ RMIO-01 board from revision J
onwards and RMIO-02 board from revision H onwards.

Note on terminal labelling

Optional modules (Rxxx) may have identical terminal designations with the RMlO
board.

Note on external power supply

External +24 V power supply for the RMIO board is recommended il
the application requires a fast start after connecting the input power supply
. fieldbus communication is required when the input power supply is disconnected.
The RMlO board can be supplied from an external power source via terminal X23 or
X34 or via both X23,and X34. The internal power supply to terminal X34 can be left
connected when usiilg terminal X23.

WARNING! If the RMIO board is supplied from an external power source via
terminal X34, the loose end of the cable removed from the RMlO board terminal
must be secured mechanically to a location where it cannot come into contact with
electrical parts. If the screw terminal plug of the cable is removed, the wire ends
must be individually insulated.

Parameter settings
In Standard Control Program, set parameter 16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY to
EXTERNAL 24V if the RMlO board is powered from an external supply.

Motorconfrol and 110 board (RMIOJ

 External control connections (non-US)
External control cable connections to the RMIO board for the ACS800 Standard
Control Program (Factory Macro) are shown below. For external control connections
of other control macros and programs, see the appropriate Firmware Manual.
2- X20
Terminal block size: 1 I VREF- Reference voltage -10 v DC. 1 kohm 2 R~
cables 0.3 to 3.3 mm2 (22 to 12 AWG) 2 1 AGNO 2 10 kohm
Tightening torque: X21
0.2 to 0.4 Nm (0.2 to 0.3 lbf ft)

')Only effective ifpar 10.03 is set to

REQUEST by the user.

') 0 = open, 1 = closed

3'See par. group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS.

Set speed through All

Constant speed 3

4, See parameter 21.09 START INTRL

FUNC.
51 Total maximum current shared
between this output and optional
modules installed on the board.

Mofor control and I/O board (RMIO)